Category: tips and tricks

Category for advanced manuals with tips, tricks and a full menu run-through for mirrorless cameras from Sony, Fuji, Canon, Nikon, Samsung, Panasonic, Olympus, Ricoh/Pentax, Sigma.

Fujifilm X-H1 manual with settings, tips and trips

Fujifilm Fujifilm X-H1 manual with settings, tips and trips

Introduction

The Fujifilm X-H1 mirrorless camera has characteristics of both the X-T2 and the medium format GFX 50s. For the first time, sensor stabilization is present in an Fujifilm X series body. Furthermore, the Fujifilm X-H1 has extensive video capabilities and Fujifilm focuses with this camera on the serious videographer.

The Fujifilm X-H1 is the first in a new line within their X range. According to Fujifilm, the H in the name could stand for the word Hybrid. It’s also a camera that offers plenty of opportunities in both photo and film.

IBIS

Fujifilm sees this X-H1 really as a professional body. This is expressed in the fact that the body has been given extra strength at various points and is also sealed in 94 locations for good weather resistance.

The most important innovation in the Fujifilm X-H1 is the presence of built-in image stabilization. Where this was not previously found possible by Fujifilm, a completely new system has apparently been developed that can receive the approval of both photo and video technicians. This in body stabilization in combination with a selection of lenses ensures a stabilization of 5.5 stops.

A specially developed dual processor controls three axial accelerometers and three axial gyro sensors. In total, up to 10,000 calculations per second can be performed. Necessary for an extremely precise control of the mechanisms that ensure the stabilization.

Sensor and processor

The Fujifilm X-H1 uses the same 24.3 megapixel APS-C X-Trans CMOS III sensor and X-Processor Pro image processor as already used in the Fujifilm X-Pro2 and X-T2. The large electronic viewfinder has a magnification factor of 0.75x which consists of a high resolution EFF of 3.69 million dots. Unprecedentedly large for a system camera. The viewfinder looks very smooth with its 100Hz refresh and its delay is only 0.005 seconds.

Video

The image quality of the video recordings has increased further because recordings can now be made in a bitrate of 200Mbps. The Fujifilm X-H1 has more than 20 areas for improvement in this area, including 1080 / 120P high-speed video mode. Making slow-motion recordings can be made with a delay of 1/2, 1/4 and 1/5 of the speed.

It is also possible to write F-log recordings directly to the SD card of the Fujifilm X-H1, which will bring an improved workflow for many people. Other improvements include DCI 4K recording capability (4096 * 2160), a 400% dynamic range setting (approximately 12 stops), 200 Mbps high bitrate recording, an improved internal microphone (24 bit / 48 Khz) and verbal time codes.

We’ll go over the Menu system and see what has changed, and I’ll give some tips on settings along the way.

Image Quality

Image Quality Setting page 1 of 3 (I.Q. icon)

Image Size

You can choose the size and aspect ratio here. Either 3:2, 16:9 or 1:1 aspect ratios are available, and you can select Large, Medium and Small sizes for these aspect ratios.Images with an aspect ratio of 3:2 have the same proportions as a frame of 35 mm film, while an aspect ratio of 16:9 is suited to display on HD devices. Pictures with an aspect ratio of 1:1 are square (ideal for instagram or other blogging mediums). Remember that image size is not reset when the Fujifilm X-H1 is turned off or another shooting mode is selected.

3 : 2 aspect ratio

Large: 6000 × 4000 pixels.

Medium: 4240 × 2832 pixels.

Small: 3008 × 2000 pixels.

16 : 9 aspect ratio

Large: 6000 × 3376 pixels.

Medium: 4240 × 2384 pixels.

Small: 3008 × 1688 pixels.

1 : 1 aspect ratio

Large: 4000 × 4000 pixels.

Medium: 2832 × 2832 pixels.

Small: 2000 × 2000 pixels.

Image Quality

Choose a file format and compression ratio. Select FINE or NORMAL to record JPEG images, RAW to record RAW images, or FINE+RAW or NORMAL+RAW to record both JPEG and RAW images. FINE and FINE+RAW use lower JPEG compression ratios for higher-quality JPEG images, while NORMAL and NORMAL+RAW use higher JPEG compression ratios to increase the number of images that can be stored.

To toggle RAW image quality on or off for a single shot, you can assign RAW to a function button.

If a JPEG option is currently selected for image quality, pressing the button temporarily selects the equivalent JPEG+RAW option.
If a JPEG+RAW option is currently selected, pressing the button temporarily selects the equivalent JPEG option, while if RAW is selected, pressing the button temporarily selects FINE.
Taking a picture or pressing the button again restores the previous setting.
RAW Recording

RAW recording

Choose whether to compress RAW images.

Uncompressed: RAW images are not compressed.
Lossless Compressed: RAW images are compressed using a reversible algorithm that reduces file size with no loss of image data.

Film Simulation

Simulate the effects of different kinds of film, including black-and-white (with or without color filters). Choose a palette according to your subject and creative intent. Film simulation options can be combined with tone and sharpness settings.

PROVIA/STANDARD	Standard color reproduction. Suited to a wide range of subjects, from portraits to landscapes.
Velvia/VIVID	A high-contrast palette of saturated colors, suited to nature photos.
ASTIA/SOFT	Enhances the range of hues available for skin tones in portraits while preserving the bright blues of daylight skies. Recommended for outdoor portrait photography.
CLASSIC CHROME	Soft color and enhanced shadow contrast for a calm look.
PRO Neg. Hi	Offers slightly more contrast than PRO Neg. Std. Recommended for outdoor portrait photography.
PRO Neg. Std	A soft-toned palette. The range of hues available for skin tones is enhanced, making this a good choice for studio portrait photography.
ACROS	Take black-and-white photos with rich gradation and outstanding sharpness.
MONOCHROME	Take pictures in standard black and white.
SEPIA	Take pictures in sepia.

Grain Effect

Add a film grain effect. Select an amount (STRONG or WEAK) or choose OFF to turn film grain off.

Dynamic Range

Control contrast. Choose lower values to increase contrast when shooting indoors or under overcast skies, higher values to reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows when photographing high-contrast scenes. Higher values are recommended for scenes that include both sunlight and deep shade, for such high-contrast subjects as sunlight on water, brightly-lit autumn leaves, and portraits taken against a blue sky, and for white objects or people wearing white; note, however, that mottling may appear in pictures taken at higher values.

D Range Priority

When dynamic range is likely the priority, this mode quickly shifts the Fujifilm X-H1 into full dynamic range priority. The resulting frames have great depth when post processing.

White Balance

For natural colors, choose a white balance option that matches the light source.

AUTO	White balance is adjusted automatically.
	Measure a value for white balance.
	Choose a color temperature.
	For subjects in direct sunlight.
	For subjects in the shade.
	Use under “daylight” fluorescent lights.
	Use under “warm white” fluorescent lights.
	Use under “cool white” fluorescent lights.
	Use under incandescent lighting.
	Reduces the blue cast typically associated with underwater lighting.

Fine-Tuning White Balance

Pressing MENU/OK after selecting a white balance option displays the dialog shown at right; use the selector to fine-tune white balance or press DISP/BACK to exit without fine-tuning.

Custom White Balance

Adjust white balance for unusual lighting conditions. White balance measurement options will be displayed; frame a white object so that it fills the display and press the shutter button all the way down to measure white balance (to select the most recent custom value and exit without measuring white balance, press DISP/BACK, or press MENU/OK to select the most recent value and display the fine-tuning dialog).

If “COMPLETED!” is displayed, press MENU/OK to set white balance to the measured value.
If “UNDER” is displayed, raise exposure compensation and try again.
If “OVER” is displayed, lower exposure compensation and try again.

Color Temperature

Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, expressed in Kelvin (K). Light sources with a color temperature close to that of direct sunlight appear white; light sources with a lower color temperature have a yellow or red cast, while those with a higher color temperature are tinged with blue. You can match color temperature to the light source, or choose options that differ sharply from the color of the light source to make pictures “warmer” or “colder.”

Selecting in the white balance menu displays a list of color temperatures; highlight a color temperature and press MENU/OK to select the highlighted option and display.

Setting page 2 of 3 (I.Q. icon)

Highlight Tone

Adjust the appearance of highlights. Choose from seven options between +4 and −2.

Shadow Tone

Adjust the appearance of shadows. Choose from seven options between +4 and −2.

Color

Adjust color density. Choose from nine options between +4 and −4.

Sharpness

Sharpen or soften outlines. Choose from nine options between +4 and −4.

Noise Reduction

Reduce noise in pictures taken at high sensitivities. Choose from nine options between +4 and −4.

Long Exposure NR

Select ON to reduce mottling in long time-exposures.

Lens Modulation Optimize

Select ON to improve definition by adjusting for diffraction and the slight loss of focus at the periphery of the lens.

Color Space

Choose the gamut of colors available for color reproduction.

sRGB: use sRGB unless you are shooting images for print with calibration software.

Adobe RGB: For advanced commercial printing. You might think this is the best option, but you’ll always need to convert to sRGB for any online media if you don’t want to get ugly color shifts. Image Quality Setting page 1 of 3 (I.Q. icon)

Pixel Mapping

Use this option if you notice bright spots in your pictures. These are dead pixels and can be remapped to pixels nearby using this setting.

Press MENU/OK in the shooting display and select the IMAGE QUALITY SETTING tab.
Highlight PIXEL MAPPING and press MENU/OK to perform pixel mapping. Processing may take a few seconds.

Select Custom Setting

Recall settings saved with EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING. Settings can be recalled from any of the seven custom settings banks.

Edit/Save Custom Setting

Save up to 7 sets of custom camera settings for commonly-encountered situations. Saved settings can be recalled using IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > SELECT CUSTOM SETTING.

To store current Fujifilm X-H1 settings in the selected bank, highlight SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS in Step 3 and press MENU/OK. Banks can be renamed using EDIT CUSTOM NAME.

To restore default settings for the current bank, select RESET.

Press MENU/OK in shooting mode to display the shooting menu. Select the IMAGE QUALITY SETTING tab, then highlight EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING and press MENU/OK.
Highlight a custom settings bank and press MENU/OK to select.
Adjust the following as desired: DYNAMIC RANGE, FILM SIMULATION, GRAIN EFFECT, WHITE BALANCE, HIGHLIGHT TONE, SHADOW TONE, COLOR, SHARPNESS, NOISE REDUCTION/
Press DISP/BACK. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK and press MENU/OK.

Autofocus and Manual Focus Settings

AF/MF Setting page 1 of 3

Focus Area

Choose the focus area for autofocus, manual focus, and focus zoom.

AF Mode

Choose the AF mode for focus modes S and C.

Option	Description
SINGLE POINT	The Fujifilm X-H1 focuses on the subject in the selected focus point. The number of focus points available can be selected using AF/MF SETTING > NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS. Use for pin-point focus on a selected subject.
ZONE	The Fujifilm X-H1 focuses on the subject in the selected focus zone. Focus zones include multiple focus points, making it easier to focus on subjects that are in motion.
WIDE/TRACKING	In focus mode C, the Fujifilm X-H1 tracks focus on the subject in the selected focus point while the shutter button is pressed halfway. In focus mode S, the camera automatically focuses on high-contrast subjects; the areas in focus are shown in the display. The Fujifilm X-H1 may be unable to focus on small objects or subjects that are moving rapidly.
ALL	Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection display to cycle through AF modes in the following order: SINGLE POINT, ZONE, and WIDE/TRACKING.

AF-C Custom Settings

Select focus-tracking options for focus mode C. Choose from Sets 1–5 according to your subject or select Set 6 for custom focus-tracking options.

SET 1 MULTI PURPOSE	A standard tracking option that works well with the typical range of moving subjects.
SET 2 IGNORE OBSTACLES & CONTINUE TO TRACK SUBJECT	The focus system attempts to track the chosen subject. Choose with subjects that are hard to keep in the focus area or if other objects are likely to enter the focus area with the subject.
SET 3 FOR ACCELERATING/DECELERATING SUBJECT	The focus system attempts to compensate for subject acceleration or deceleration. Choose for subjects prone to rapid changes in velocity.
SET 4 FOR SUDDENLY APPEARING SUBJECT	The focus system attempts to focus quickly on subjects entering the focus area. Choose for subjects that appear abruptly or when rapidly switching subjects.
SET 5 FOR ERRATICALLY MOVING & ACCEL./DECEL. SUBJECT	Choose for hard-to-track subjects prone not only to sudden changes in velocity but also to large movements front to back and left to right.
SET 6 CUSTOM	Adjust TRACKING SENSITIVITY, SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY, and ZONE AREA SWITCHING to suit your preferences based on the values for Sets 1–5.

Focus Tracking Options

TRACKING SENSITIVITY: This parameter determines how long the Fujifilm X-H1 waits to switch focus when an object enters the focus area behind or in front of the current subject. The higher the value, the longer the camera will wait. The higher the value, the longer it takes the Fujifilm X-H1 to refocus when you attempt to switch subjects. The lower the value, the more likely the camera is to switch focus from your subject to other objects in the focus area.

SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY: This parameter determines how sensitive the tracking system is to changes in subject velocity. The higher the value, the greater the precision with which the system attempts to respond to sudden movement.

ZONE AREA SWITCHING: This parameter determines the focus area given priority in zone AF.

Option	Description
CENTER	Zone AF assigns priority to subjects in the center of the zone.
AUTO	The Fujifilm X-H1 locks focus on the subject at the center of the zone and then switches focus areas as necessary to track it.
FRONT	Zone AF assigns priority to the subjects closest to the Fujifilm X-H1.

This option takes effect only when ZONE is selected for AF mode.

Set Values

Parameter values for the different sets are listed below.

	TRACKING SENSITIVITY	SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY	ZONE AREA SWITCHING
SET 1	2	0	AUTO
SET 2	3	0	CENTER
SET 3	2	2	AUTO
SET 4	0	1	FRONT
SET 5	3	2	AUTO

Custom Focus Tracking Options:

Select AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS > SET 6 CUSTOM.
Press the selector up or down to highlight items and rotate the front command dial to change. To reset settings to their original values, press.
Press DISP/BACK when settings are complete.

Store AF Mode by Orientation

Choose whether the focus mode and focus area used when the Fujifilm X-H1 is in portrait orientation are stored separately from those used when the camera is in landscape orientation.

Option	Description
OFF	The same settings are used in both orientations.
FOCUS AREA ONLY	The focus area for each orientation can be selected separately.
ON	The focus mode and focus area can be selected separately.

AF Point Display

Choose whether individual focus frames are displayed when ZONE or WIDE/TRACKING is selected for AF/MF SETTING > AF MODE.

Number of AF Points

Choose the number of focus points available for focus-point selection in manual focus mode or when SINGLE POINT is selected for AF MODE.

Option	Description
91 POINTS (7 × 13)	Choose from 91 focus points arranged in a 7- by 13-point grid.
325 POINTS (13 × 25)	Choose from 325 focus points arranged in a 13- by 25-point grid.

Pre-AF

If ON is selected, the Fujifilm X-H1 will continue to adjust focus even when the shutter button is not pressed halfway. Note that this increases the drain on the battery.

AF Illuminator

If ON is selected, the AF-assist illuminator will light to assist autofocus.

The Fujifilm X-H1 may be unable to focus using the AF-assist illuminator in some cases. If thecamera is unable to focus, try increasing the distance to the subject. Avoid shining the AF-assist illuminator directly into your subject’s eyes.

AF/MF Setting page 2 of 3

Face/Eye Detection Setting

Intelligent Face Detection sets focus and exposure for human faces anywhere in the frame, preventing the Fujifilm X-H1 from focusing on the background in group portraits. Choose for shots that emphasise portrait subjects. Faces can be detected with the camera in vertical or horizontal orientation; if a face is detected, it will be indicated by a green border. If there is more than one face in the frame, the Fujifilm X-H1 will select the face closest to the center; other faces are indicated by white borders. You can also choose whether the camera detects and focuses on eyes when Intelligent Face Detection is on. Choose from the following options:

Option	Description
FACE ON/EYE OFF	Intelligent Face Detection only.
FACE ON/EYE AUTO	The Fujifilm X-H1 automatically chooses which eye to focus on when a face is detected.
FACE ON/RIGHT EYE PRIORITY	The Fujifilm X-H1 focuses on the right eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face Detection.
FACE ON/LEFT EYE PRIORITY	The Fujifilm X-H1 focuses on the left eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face Detection.
FACE OFF/EYE OFF	Intelligent Face Detection and eye priority off.

n some modes, the Fujifilm X-H1 may set exposure for the frame as a whole rather than the portrait subject.

If the subject moves as the shutter button is pressed, the face may not be in the area indicated by the green border when the picture is taken.

If the Fujifilm X-H1 is unable to detect the subject’s eyes because they are hidden by hair, glasses, or other objects, the camera will instead focus on faces.

AF+MF

If ON is selected in focus mode S, focus can be adjusted manually by rotating the focus ring while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Both standard and focus peaking MF assist options are supported.

Lenses with a focus distance indicator must be set to manual focus mode (MF) before this option can be used. Selecting MF disables the focus distance indicator. Set the focus ring to the center of the focus distance indicator, as the Fujifilm X-H1 may fail to focus if the ring is set to infinity or the minimum focus distance.

AF+MF Focus Zoom

When ON is selected for AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS CHECK and SINGLE POINT selected for AF MODE, focus zoom can be used to zoom in on the selected focus area. The zoom ratio (2.5× or 6×) can be selected using the rear command dial.

MF Assist

Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode.

Option	Description
STANDARD	Focus is displayed normally (focus peaking and digital split image are not available).
DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE	Displays a black-and-white (MONOCHROME) or color (COLOR) split image in the center of the frame. Frame the subject in the split-image area and rotate the focus ring until the three parts of the split image are correctly aligned.
FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT	The Fujifilm X-H1 heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a color and peaking level.

Focus Check

If ON is selected, the display will automatically zoom in on the selected focus area when the focus ring is rotated in manual focus mode.

Interlock Spot AE &c Focus Area

Select ON to meter the current focus frame when SINGLE POINT is selected for AF MODE and SPOT is selected for PHOTOMETRY.

Instant AF Setting

Choose whether the Fujifilm X-H1 focuses using single AF (AF‑S) or continuous AF (AF‑C) when the AF‑L button is pressed in manual focus mode.

Depth-Of-Field Scale

Choose FILM FORMAT BASIS to help you make practical assessments of depth of field for pictures that will be viewed as prints and the like, PIXEL BASIS to help you assess depth of field for pictures that will be viewed at high resolutions on computers or other electronic displays.

Release/Focus Priority

Choose how the Fujifilm X-H1 focuses in focus mode AF-S or AF-C.

Option	Description
RELEASE	Shutter response is prioritized over focus. Pictures can be taken when the Fujifilm X-H1 is not in focus.
FOCUS	Focus is prioritised over shutter response. Pictures can be only taken when the Fujifilm X-H1 is in focus.

AF/MF Setting page 3 of 3

Touch Screen Mode

Use touch controls for shooting or playback.

Shooting Touch Controls

Touch controls can be used for such operations as choosing the focus area and taking photographs. The operation performed can be selected by tapping the touch screen mode indicator in the display to cycle through the following options:

Mode	Description
TOUCH SHOOTING	Tap your subject in the display to focus and release the shutter.
AF	Tap to select a focus point. In focus mode S (AF-S), focus will lock, while in focus mode C(AF-C), the Fujifilm X-H1 will continually adjust focus in response to changes in the distance to the subject.
AREA	Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will move to the selected point.
OFF	Touch controls off . The display does not respond when tapped.

Touch control settings can be adjusted using AF/MF SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN MODE. To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indicator, select OFF for BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING.

Playback Touch Controls

When ON is selected for BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING, touch controls can be used for the following playback operations:

Swipe: Swipe a finger across the display to view other images.
Pinch-out: Place two fingers on the display and spread them apart to zoom in.
Pinch-in: Place two fingers on the display and slide them together to zoom out.
Double-tap:Tap the display twice to zoom in on the selected area.
Drag: View other areas of the image during playback zoom.

Shooting Settings

Adjust shooting options in these menus.

Shooting Setting Page 1 of 2

Drive Setting

Adjust settings for the various drive modes.

Option	Description
BKT SETTING	Choose the settings used when the drive dial is rotated to BKT.
CH HIGH SPEED BURST	Select the frame rate used when the drive dial is rotated to CH (continuous high speed): 14, 11, or 8 fps. Note that 14 fps is available only with the electronic shutter and 11 fps only with the electronic shutter or a power booster grip (available separately).
CL LOW SPEED BURST	Select the frame rate used when the drive dial is rotated to CL (continuous low speed): 5, 4, or 3 fps.
ADV. FILTER SETTING	Choose the filter used when the drive dial is rotated to ADV.

BKT SETTING

Use BKT SELECT to choose a bracketing type and the AE BKT, ISO BKT, FILM SIMULATION BKT, and WHITE BALANCE BKT options to choose the bracketing amount for each type.

Self-Timer

Choose a shutter release delay.

Option	Description
2 SEC	The shutter is released two seconds after the shutter button is pressed. Use to reduce blur caused by the Fujifilm X-H1 moving when the shutter button is pressed. The self-timer lamp blinks as the timer counts down.
10 SEC	The shutter is released ten seconds after the shutter button is pressed. Use for photographs in which you wish to appear yourself. The self-timer lamp blinks immediately before the picture is taken.
OFF	Self-timer off.

If an option other than OFF is selected, the timer will start when the shutter button is pressed all the way down. The display in the monitor shows the number of seconds remaining until the shutter is released. To stop the timer before the picture is taken, press DISP/BACK.

Interval Timer Shooting

Configure the Fujifilm X-H1 to take photos automatically at a preset interval.

Highlight INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING in the (SHOOTING SETTING) tab and press MENU/OK.
Use the selector to choose the interval and number of shots. Press MENU/OK to proceed.
Use the selector to choose the starting time and then press MENU/OK. Shooting will start automatically.

Interval timer photography can not be used at a shutter speed of B (bulb) or with multiple exposure photography. In burst mode, only one picture will be taken each time the shutter is released.

Shutter Type

Choose the shutter type. Choose the electronic shutter to mute the shutter sound.

Mechanical Shutter: uses the mechanical shutter exclusively

Electronic Shutter: uses the electronic shutter exclusively

Mechanical + Electronic: switches between electronic and mechanical shutter automatically according to shutter speed

Electronic First Curtain Shutter: uses the electronic shutter as first curtain (open) and mechanical shutter to close the exposure.

Flicker Reduction

Detects flickering/blinking from artificial light sources such as fluorescent lighting and times the shooting of images to moments when flickering will have less of an impact.

This function reduces differences in the exposure and color tone caused by flickering between the upper area and the lower area of an image shot with fast shutter speed and during continuous shooting.

ISO Auto Setting

Choose the base sensitivity, maximum sensitivity, and minimum shutter speed for the A position on the sensitivity dial. Settings for AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3 can be stored separately.

Item	Options	Default
Item	Options	AUTO1	AUTO2	AUTO3
DEFAULT SENSITIVITY	12800–200	200
MAX. SENSITIVITY	12800–400	800	1600	3200
MIN. SHUTTER SPEED	1⁄500–1/4 SEC, AUTO	1/60 SEC

IS Mode

Reduce blur thanks to the new sensor stabilisation system (which allows for up to 5.5 stops of compensation) and optical stabilisation with supported lenses.

ption	Description
CONTINUOUS	Image stabilization on.
SHOOTING ONLY	Image stabilization enabled only when the shutter button is pressed halfway (focus mode C) or the shutter is released.
OFF	Image stabilization off;  appears in the display. Recommended when the Fujifilm X-H1 is on a tripod.

Remember to set the focal length of your adapted lenses in MOUNT ADAPTER SETTING when using a Mount Adapter.

Mount Adapter Setting

Adjust settings for M-mount lenses connected using an optional adapter.

Choosing a Focal Length

If the lens has a focal length of 21, 24, 28, or 35 mm, choose a matching option in the MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING menu. For other lenses, select option 5 or 6 and use the selector to enter the focal length.

Distortion Correction

Choose from STRONG, MEDIUM, or WEAK options to correct BARREL or PINCUSHION distortion.

Color Shading Correction

Color (shading) variations between the center and edges of the frame can be adjusted separately for each corner.

To use color shading correction, follow these steps:

Rotate the rear command dial to choose a corner. The selected corner is indicated by a triangle.
Use the selector to adjust shading until there is no visible difference in color between the selected corner and the center of the image. Press the selector left or right to adjust colors on the cyan–red axis. Press the selector up or down to adjust colors on the blue–yellow axis.

Shooting Setting Page 2 of 2

Multi Exposure

Automatically vary settings over a series of pictures.

First, rotate the drive dial to.

Take the first shot, Press MENU/OK. The first shot will be shown superimposed on the view through the lens and you will be prompted to take the second shot. Take the second shot, using the first frame as a guide. Press MENU/OK to create the multiple exposure, or press the selector left to return to Step 4 and retake the second shot.

There are 5 different Bracket Styles that you can select here:

AE BKT: Select a bracketing amount (options range from ±1/3 to ±2 EV in increments of 1/3 EV). Each time the shutter button is pressed, the Fujifilm X-H1 will take three shots: one using the metered value for exposure, the second overexposed by the selected amount, and the third underexposed by the same amount.
ISO BKT: Select a bracketing amount (±1, ±2/3, or ±1/3). Each time the shutter is released, the Fujifilm X-H1 will take a picture at the current sensitivity and process it to create two additional copies, one with sensitivity raised and the other with sensitivity lowered by the selected amount.
FILM SIMULATION BKT: Each time the shutter is released, the Fujifilm X-H1 takes one shot and processes it to create copies with different film simulation settings, chosen using SHOOTING SETTING > BKT SETTING > FILM SIMULATION BKT.
WHITE BALANCE BKT: Select a bracketing amount (±1, ±2, or ±3). Each time the shutter is released, the Fujifilm X-H1 takes one shot and processes it to create three copies: one at the current white balanced setting, one with fine-tuning increased by the selected amount, and another with fine-tuning decreased by the selected amount.
DYNAMIC RANGE BKT: Each time the shutter button is pressed, the Fujifilm X-H1 takes three shots with different dynamic ranges: 100% for the first, 200% for the second, and 400% for the third. While dynamic range bracketing is in effect, sensitivity will be restricted to a minimum of ISO 800 (or to a minimum of ISO 200 to 800 when an auto option is selected for sensitivity); the sensitivity previously in effect is restored when bracketing ends.

Wireless Communication

Connect to smartphones running the “FUJIFILM Fcamera Remote” app. The smartphone can be used to browse the images on the Fujifilm X-H1, download selected images, control the camera remotely, or upload location data to the Fujifilm X-H1.

Flash Settings

Adjust flash-related settings in these menus.

Flash Setting Page 1 of 1

Flash Function Setting

Choose a flash control mode, flash mode, or sync mode or adjust the flash level. The options available vary with the flash.

SYNC TERMINAL

Available with units connected via the sync terminal and with third-party and other units that use only the X-contact on the hot shoe. Also displayed if no flash unit is connected.

The following options are available when a flash unit is connected via the sync terminal:

Flash control mode:

Choose from the following options:

M: A trigger signal is transmitted from the sync terminal and hot shoe when a picture is taken. Choose a shutter speed slower than the sync speed; even slower speeds may be required if the unit uses long flashes or has a slow response time.
(OFF): The sync terminal and hot shoe do not transmit a trigger signal.

Sync:

Choose whether the flash is timed to fire immediately after the shutter opens (/1ST CURTAIN) or immediately before it closes (/2ND CURTAIN). 1ST CURTAIN is recommended in most circumstances.

SUPPLIED FLASH

The following options are available with the supplied EF‑X8 shoe-mounted flash unit.

Flash control mode:

Choose from the following options:
TTL: TTL mode. Adjust flash compensation () and choose a flash mode ().
M: The flash fires at the selected output () regardless of subject brightness or Fujifilm X-H1 settings. Output is expressed in fractions of full power, from 1/1 to 1/64. The desired results may not be achieved at low values if they exceed the limits of the flash control system; take a test shot and check the results.
(COMMANDER): Choose if the flash is being used to control remote synced flash units, for example as part of a studio flash system.
(OFF): The flash does not fire. Flash units connected via the sync terminal will still fire when the shutter is released, but can be disabled by lowering the EF‑X8 and turning the units off in the flash settings menu.

Flash compensation/output:

Adjust flash level. The options available vary with the flash control mode.

Flash mode (TTL):

Choose a flash mode for TTL flash control. The options available vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected.

(FLASH AUTO): The flash fires only as required; flash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. A icon displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indicates that the flash will fire when the photo is taken.
(STANDARD): The flash fires with every shot if possible; flash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The flash will not fire if not fully charged when the shutter is released.
(SLOW SYNC.): Combine the flash with slow shutter speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a backdrop of night scenery. The flash will not fire if not fully charged when the shutter is released.

Sync:

Choose whether the flash is timed to fire immediately after the shutter opens (/1ST CURTAIN) or immediately before it closes (/2ND CURTAIN). 1ST CURTAIN is recommended in most circumstances.

SHOE MOUNT FLASH

The following options are available when an optional shoe-mounted flash unit is attached and turned on:

Flash control mode:

The flash control mode selected with the flash unit. This can in some cases be adjusted from the Fujifilm X-H1; the options available vary with the flash.

TTL: TTL mode. Adjust flash compensation ().
M: The flash fires at the selected output regardless of subject brightness or camera1 settings. Output in some cases can be adjusted from the Fujifilm X-H1 .
MULTI: Repeating flash. Compatible shoe-mounted flash units will fire multiple times with each shot.
(OFF): The flash does not fire. Some flash units can be turned off from the Fujifilm X-H1.

Flash compensation/output:

The options available vary with flash control mode.

TTL: Adjust flash compensation (the full value may not be applied if the limits of the flash control system are exceeded). In the cases of the EF‑X20, EF‑20, and EF‑42, the selected value is added to the value selected with the flash unit.
M/MULTI: Adjust flash output (compatible units only). Choose from values expressed as fractions of full power, from 1/1 (mode M) or 1/4 (MULTI) down to 1/512 in increments equivalent to 1/3 EV. The desired results may not be achieved at low values if they exceed the limits of the flash control system; take a test shot and check the results.

Flash mode (TTL):

Choose a flash mode for TTL flash control. The options available vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected.

(FLASH AUTO): The flash fires only as required; flash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. An icon displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indicates that the flash will fire when the photo is taken.
(STANDARD): The flash fires with every shot if possible; flash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The flash will not fire if not fully charged when the shutter is released.
(SLOW SYNC.): Combine the flash with slow shutter speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a backdrop of night scenery. The flash will not fire if not fully charged when the shutter is released.

Sync:

Control flash timing.

(1ST CURTAIN): The flash fires immediately after the shutter opens (generally the best choice).
(2ND CURTAIN): The flash fires immediately before the shutter closes.
(AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only). The Fujifilm X-H1 automatically engages front-curtain high-speed sync at shutter speeds faster than the flash sync speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected for flash control mode.

Zoom:

The angle of illumination (flash coverage) for units that support flash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to be made from the Fujifilm X-H1. If AUTO is selected, zoom will automatically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length.

Lighting:

If the unit supports this feature, choose from:

(FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly reducing coverage.
(STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle.
(EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coverage for more even lighting.

LED light:

Choose how the built-in LED light functions during still photography (compatible units only): as a catchlight (/CATCHLIGHT), as an AF-assist illuminator (/AF ASSIST), or as both a catchlight and an AF-ASSIST illuminator (/AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT). Choose OFF to disable the LED during photography.

Number of flashes:

Choose the number of times the flash fires each time the shutter is released in MULTI mode.

Frequency:

Choose the frequency at which the flash fires in MULTI mode. The full value may not be applied if limits of flash control system are exceeded.

MASTER (OPTICAL)

The options at right will be displayed if the unit is currently functioning as master flash for optical wireless remote flash control.

The master and remote units can be placed in up to three groups (A, B, and C) and flash mode and flash level adjusted separately for each group. Four channels are available for communication between the units; separate channels can be used for different flash systems or to prevent interference when multiple systems are operating in close proximity.

Setting	Description
Flash control mode (group A)	Choose flash control modes for groups A, B, and C. TTL% is available for groups A and B only. TTL: The units in the group fire in TTL mode. Flash compensation can be adjusted separately for each group. TTL%: If TTL% is selected for either group A or B, you can specify the output of the selected group as a percentage of the other and adjust overall flash compensation for both groups. M: In mode M, the units in the group fire at the selected output (expressed as a fraction of full power) regardless of subject brightness or camera settings. MULTI: Choosing MULTI for any group sets all the units in all groups to repeating flash mode. All units will fire multiple times with each shot. (OFF): If OFF is selected, the units in the group will not fire.
Flash control mode (group B)
Flash control mode (group C)
Flash compensation/ output (group A)	Adjust flash level for the selected group according to option selected for flash control mode. Note that the full value may not be applied if the limits of the flash control system are exceeded. TTL: Adjust flash compensation. M/MULTI: Adjust flash output. TTL%: Choose the balance between groups A and B and adjust overall flash compensation.
Flash compensation/ output (group B)
Flash compensation/ output (group C)
Flash mode (TTL)	Choose a flash mode for TTL flash control. The options available vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected. (FLASH AUTO): The flash fires only as required; flash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. A icon displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indicates that the flash will fire when the photo is taken.(STANDARD): The flash fires with every shot if possible; flash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The flash will not fire if not fully charged when the shutter is released. (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the flash with slow shutter speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a backdrop of night scenery. The flash will not fire if not fully charged when the shutter is released.
Sync	Control flash timing. (1ST CURTAIN): The flash fires immediately after the shutter opens (generally the best choice). (2ND CURTAIN): The flash fires immediately before the shutter closes. (AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only). The Fujifilm X-H1 automatically engages front-curtain high-speed sync at shutter speeds faster than the flash sync speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected for flash control mode.
Zoom	The angle of illumination (flash coverage) for units that support flash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to be made from the Fujifilm X-H1. If AUTO is selected, zoom will automatically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length.
Lighting	If the unit supports this feature, choose from: (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly reducing coverage. (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle. (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coverage for more even lighting.
Master	Assign the master flash to group A (Gr A), B (Gr B), or C (Gr C). If OFF is selected, output from the master flash will be held to a level that does not affect the final picture. Available only if the unit is mounted on the Fujifilm X-H1 hot shoe as a master flash for FUJIFILM optical wireless remote flash control in TTL, TTL%, or M mode.
Number of flashes	Choose the number of times the flash fires each time the shutter is released in MULTI mode.
Channel	Choose the channel used by the master flash for communication with the remote flash units. Separate channels can be used for different flash systems or to prevent interference when multiple systems are operating in close proximity.
Frequency	Choose the frequency at which the flash fires in MULTI mode.

Red Eye Removal

Remove red-eye effects caused by the flash.

Option	Description
FLASH + REMOVAL	A red-eye reduction pre-flash is combined with digital red-eye removal.
FLASH	Flash red-eye reduction only.
REMOVAL	Digital red-eye removal only.
OFF	Flash red-eye reduction and digital red-eye removal off.

TTL-Lock Mode

Instead of adjusting flash level with each shot, TTL flash control can be locked for consistent results across a series of photographs.

Option	Description
LOCK WITH LAST FLASH	The value metered for the most recent photo taken using TTL will be used for subsequent photos. An error message will be displayed if no previously metered value exists.
LOCK WITH METERING FLASH	The value metered with the next series of pre-flashes will be used for subsequent photos.

To use TTL lock, assign TTL-LOCK to a Fujifilm X-H1 control and then use the control to enable or disable TTL lock.

Flash compensation can be adjusted while TTL lock is in effect.

LED Light Setting

Choose whether to use the flash unit’s LED video light (if available) as a catchlight or AF-assist illuminator when taking photos.

Option	Role of LED video light in still photography
CATCHLIGHT	Catchlight
AF ASSIST	AF-assist illuminator
AF ASSIST + CATCHLIGHT	AF-assist illuminator and catchlight
OFF	None

Master Setting

Choose a flash group (A, B, or C) for the flash mounted on the Fujifilm X-H1 hot shoe when it functions as a master flash controlling remote flash units via FUJIFILM wireless optical flash control, or choose OFF to limit master flash output to a level that does not affect the final picture.

Options
Gr A	Gr B	Gr C	OFF

CH Setting

Choose the channel used for communication between the master flash and remote flash units when using FUJIFILM optical wireless flash control. Separate channels can be used for different flash systems or to prevent interference when multiple systems are operating in close proximity.

Options
CH1	CH2	CH3	CH4

Movie Settings

Movie Setting Page 1 of 4

Movie Mode

Choose a frame size and rate for movie recording.

4096 x 2160p at 23.98, 24 fps (50, 100, 200 Mb/s MOV via MPEG-4)
3840 x 2160p at 23.98, 24, 25, 29.97 fps (50, 100, 200 Mb/s MOV via MPEG-4)
2048 x 1080p at 23.98, 24, 25, 29.97, 50, 59.94 fps (50, 100 Mb/s MOV via MPEG-4)
1920 x 1080p at 23.98, 24, 25, 29.97, 50, 59.94, 100, 120 fps (200 Mb/s MOV via MPEG-4)
1280 x 720p at 23.98, 24, 25, 29.97, 50, 59.94 fps (50 Mb/s MOV via MPEG-4)

Full HD High Speed Rec

For Recording high-speed movies, these are the options available:

2 x playback at 59.94p, record at 120p.
2 x playback at 2 x 50p, record at 100p.
4 x playback at 29.97p, record at 120p.
4 x playback at 25p, record at 100p.
5 x playback at 24p, record at 120p.
5 x playback at 23.98p, record at 120p.

Film Simulation (movie)Full HD High Speed Rec

PROVIA/STANDARD	Standard color reproduction. Suited to a wide range of subjects, from portraits to landscapes.
Velvia/VIVID	A high-contrast palette of saturated colors, suited to nature photos.
ASTIA/SOFT	Enhances the range of hues available for skin tones in portraits while preserving the bright blues of daylight skies. Recommended for outdoor portrait photography.
CLASSIC CHROME	Soft color and enhanced shadow contrast for a calm look.
PRO Neg. Hi	Offers slightly more contrast than PRO Neg. Std. Recommended for outdoor portrait photography.
PRO Neg. Std	A soft-toned palette. The range of hues available for skin tones is enhanced, making this a good choice for studio portrait photography.
ACROS	Take black-and-white photos with rich gradation and outstanding sharpness.
MONOCHROME	Take pictures in standard black and white.
SEPIA	Take pictures in sepia.

Dynamic Range (movie)

White Balance (movie)

For natural colors, choose a white balance option that matches the light source.

AUTO	White balance is adjusted automatically.
	Measure a value for white balance.
	Choose a color temperature.
	For subjects in direct sunlight.
	For subjects in the shade.
	Use under “daylight” fluorescent lights.
	Use under “warm white” fluorescent lights.
	Use under “cool white” fluorescent lights.
	Use under incandescent lighting.
	Reduces the blue cast typically associated with underwater lighting.

Fine-Tuning White Balance

Pressing MENU/OK after selecting a white balance option displays the dialog shown at right; use the selector to fine-tune white balance or press DISP/BACK to exit without fine-tuning.

Custom White Balance

Choose to adjust white balance for unusual lighting conditions. White balance measurement options will be displayed; frame a white object so that it fills the display and press the shutter button all the way down to measure white balance (to select the most recent custom value and exit without measuring white balance, press DISP/BACK, or press MENU/OK to select the most recent value and display the fine-tuning dialog).

If “COMPLETED!” is displayed, press MENU/OK to set white balance to the measured value.
If “UNDER” is displayed, raise exposure compensation and try again.
If “OVER” is displayed, lower exposure compensation and try again.

Color Temperature

Selecting in the white balance menu displays a list of color temperatures; highlight a color temperature and press MENU/OK to select the highlighted option and display.

Highlight Tone (Movie)

Adjust the appearance of highlights. Choose from seven options between +4 and −2.

Shadow Tone (Movie)

Adjust the appearance of shadows. Choose from seven options between +4 and −2.

Color (Movie)

Adjust color density. Choose from nine options between +4 and −4.

Movie Setting Page 2 of 4

Sharpness (Movie)

Sharpen or soften outlines. Choose from nine options between +4 and −4.

Noise Reduction (Movie)

Reduce noise in pictures taken at high sensitivities. Choose from nine options between +4 and −4.

F-Log Recording

Enable F-Log recording to the SD card.

Peripheral Light Correction (Movie)

Enable vignetting compensation for movies.

Focus Area (Movie)

Choose the focus area for autofocus, manual focus, and focus zoom.

Movie AF Mode

Choose the AF mode for focus modes S and C.

Option	Description
SINGLE POINT	The Fujifilm X-H1 focuses on the subject in the selected focus point. The number of focus points available can be selected using AF/MF SETTING > NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS. Use for pin-point focus on a selected subject.
ZONE	The Fujifilm X-H1 focuses on the subject in the selected focus zone. Focus zones include multiple focus points, making it easier to focus on subjects that are in motion.
WIDE/TRACKING	In focus mode C, the Fujifilm X-H1 tracks focus on the subject in the selected focus point while the shutter button is pressed halfway. In focus mode S, the camera automatically focuses on high-contrast subjects; the areas in focus are shown in the display. The Fujifilm X-H1 may be unable to focus on small objects or subjects that are moving rapidly.
ALL	Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection display to cycle through AF modes in the following order: SINGLE POINT, ZONE, and WIDE/TRACKING.

AF-C Custom Settings (Movie)

Select focus-tracking options for focus mode C. Choose from Sets 1–5 according to your subject or select Set 6 for custom focus-tracking options.

SET 1 MULTI PURPOSE	A standard tracking option that works well with the typical range of moving subjects.
SET 2 IGNORE OBSTACLES & CONTINUE TO TRACK SUBJECT	The focus system attempts to track the chosen subject. Choose with subjects that are hard to keep in the focus area or if other objects are likely to enter the focus area with the subject.
SET 3 FOR ACCELERATING/DECELERATING SUBJECT	The focus system attempts to compensate for subject acceleration or deceleration. Choose for subjects prone to rapid changes in velocity.
SET 4 FOR SUDDENLY APPEARING SUBJECT	The focus system attempts to focus quickly on subjects entering the focus area. Choose for subjects that appear abruptly or when rapidly switching subjects.
SET 5 FOR ERRATICALLY MOVING & ACCEL./DECEL. SUBJECT	Choose for hard-to-track subjects prone not only to sudden changes in velocity but also to large movements front to back and left to right.
SET 6 CUSTOM	Adjust TRACKING SENSITIVITY, SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY, and ZONE AREA SWITCHING to suit your preferences based on the values for Sets 1–5.

Focus Tracking Options

ZONE AREA SWITCHING: This parameter determines the focus area given priority in zone AF.

Option	Description
CENTER	Zone AF assigns priority to subjects in the center of the zone.
AUTO	The Fujifilm X-H1 locks focus on the subject at the center of the zone and then switches focus areas as necessary to track it.
FRONT	Zone AF assigns priority to the subjects closest to the Fujifilm X-H1.

This option takes effect only when ZONE is selected for AF mode.

Set Values

Parameter values for the different sets are listed below.

	TRACKING SENSITIVITY	SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY	ZONE AREA SWITCHING
SET 1	2	0	AUTO
SET 2	3	0	CENTER
SET 3	2	2	AUTO
SET 4	0	1	FRONT
SET 5	3	2	AUTO

Custom Focus Tracking Options:

Select AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS > SET 6 CUSTOM.
Press the selector up or down to highlight items and rotate the front command dial to change. To reset settings to their original values, press .
Press DISP/BACK when settings are complete.

Pre-AF

If ON is selected, the Fujifilm X-H1 will continue to adjust focus even when the shutter button is not pressed halfway. Note that this increases the drain on the battery.

Movie Setting Page 3 of 4

Face/Eye Detection Setting (Movie)

Option	Description
FACE ON/EYE OFF	Intelligent Face Detection only.
FACE ON/EYE AUTO	The Fujifilm X-H1 automatically chooses which eye to focus on when a face is detected.
FACE ON/RIGHT EYE PRIORITY	The Fujifilm X-H1 focuses on the right eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face Detection.
FACE ON/LEFT EYE PRIORITY	The Fujifilm X-H1 focuses on the left eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face Detection.
FACE OFF/EYE OFF	Intelligent Face Detection and eye priority off.

n some modes, the Fujifilm X-H1 may set exposure for the frame as a whole rather than the portrait subject.

If the subject moves as the shutter button is pressed, the face may not be in the area indicated by the green border when the picture is taken.

If the camera is unable to detect the subject’s eyes because they are hidden by hair, glasses, or other objects, the Fujifilm X-H1 will instead focus on faces.

MF Assist (Movie)

Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode.

Option	Description
STANDARD	Focus is displayed normally (focus peaking and digital split image are not available).
DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE	Displays a black-and-white (MONOCHROME) or color (COLOR) split image in the center of the frame. Frame the subject in the split-image area and rotate the focus ring until the three parts of the split image are correctly aligned.
FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT	The Fujifilm X-H1 heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a color and peaking level.

Focus Check (Movie)

If ON is selected, the display will automatically zoom in on the selected focus area when the focus ring is rotated in manual focus mode.

HDMI Output Info Display

Turn on on-screen information of the HDMI output. If ON is selected, HDMI devices to which the camera is connected will mirror the information in the Fujifilm X-H1 display.

4K Movie Output

Choose the destination for 4K movies shot while the Fujifilm X-H1 is connected to an HDMI recorder or other device that supports 4K.

Option	Description
CARD	4K movies are recorded to a Fujifilm X-H1 memory card in 4K and output to the HDMI device in Full HD.
HDMI	4K movies are output to the HDMI device in 4K, starting when the shutter button is pressed. The Fujifilm X-H1 does not record 4K movies to a memory card.
HDMI	The Fujifilm X-H1 outputs 4K movies to the HDMI device and does not record them to a memory card. Low gamma and a color space with a wide gamut are used to create footage suitable for post-processing. Minimum sensitivity is set to ISO 800.

Full HD Movie Output

When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.

Auto: The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.
2160p/1080p: Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.
1080p: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
1080i: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).

4K HDMI Standby Quality

Reduce the bitrate of the HDMI output when in standby to reduce heating of the Fujifilm X-H1 body.

HDMI Rec Control

Choose whether the Fujifilm X-H1 sends movie start and stop signals to the HDMI device when the shutter button is pressed to start and stop movie recording.

Movie Setting Page 4 of 4

Audio Setting

Internal Mic Level Adjustment

Adjust the recording level for the built-in and external microphones.

Option	Description
20—1	Choose a recording level.
OFF	Disable the microphone.

External Mic Level adjustment

Adjust the recording level for the built-in and external microphones.

Mic Level Limiter

The Fujifilm X-H1 adjusts the sound input level automatically, minimising sound distortion (clipping noise) when the volume is too high.

Wind Filter

This will reduce the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone while maintaining sound quality. You can choose either High, Standard or Off. This function works only with the built-in microphone.

Low Cut Filter

Cuts low frequency hum.

Headphone Volume

If you’re using a headphone, you can adjust the volume here.

Tally Light

Change settings for the tally light (signal lamp).

Movie Silent Control

Turn on the silent shooting for movie recording.

The Set Up Menus

Much functionality in regards to customisation is hidden in this very large menu with many sub pages.

User Setting

Format

Before using your Fujifilm X-H1, you should always format your memory card. This will erase all data that is on the SD card(s).

Highlight the slot containing the card you wish to format and press MENU/OK.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed. To format the memory card, highlight OK and press MENU/OK. To exit without formatting the memory card, select CANCEL or press DISP/BACK.

Date/Time

To set the Fujifilm X-H1 clock.

Time Difference

Switch the Fujifilm X-H1 clock instantly from your home time zone to the local time at your destination when traveling. To specify the difference between your local and home time zone.

Language

Choose a language for the menus.

My Menu Setting

Edit the items listed in the (MY MENU) tab, a personalized custom menu of frequently-used options.

Highlight USER SETTING > MY MENU SETTING in the (SET UP) tab and press MENU/OK to display the options at right.
Press the selector up or down to highlight ADD ITEMS and press MENU/OK. Options that can be added to “my menu” are highlighted in blue.

Items currently in “my menu” are indicated by check marks.
Highlight an item and press MENU/OK to add it to “my menu”.
Press MENU/OK to return to the edit display.
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until all the desired items have been added.

Sensor Cleaning

Remove dust from the Fujifilm X-H1 image sensor.

OK: Clean the sensor immediately.
WHEN SWITCHED ON: Sensor cleaning will be performed when the Fujifilm X-H1 is turned on.
WHEN SWITCHED OFF: Sensor cleaning will be performed when the Fujifilm X-H1 turns off (sensor cleaning is not however performed if the camera turns off in playback mode).

Reset

Reset shooting or setup menu options to default values.

Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK.

Option	Description
SHOOTING MENU RESET	Reset all shooting menu settings other than custom white balance and custom settings banks created using EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING to default values.
SET-UP RESET	Reset all setup menu settings other than DATE/TIME, TIME DIFFERENCE, and CONNECTION SETTING to default values.

A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK and press MENU/OK.

Sound Settings

AF Beep Vol.

Choose the volume of the beep that sounds when the Fujifilm X-H1 focuses. The beep can be muted by selecting.

Options
(high)	(medium)	(low)	(mute)

Self-Timer Beep Vol.

Choose the volume of the beep that sounds while the self-timer is active. The beep can be muted by selecting .

Options
(high)	(medium)	(low)	(mute)

Operation Vol.

Adjust the volume of the sounds produced when Fujifilm X-H1 controls are operated. Choose to disable control sounds.

Options
(high)	(medium)	(low)	(mute)

Headphones Volume

Adjust the volume of headphones connected via a VPB‑XT2 power booster grip (available separately). Choose from 10 options between 10 (high) and 1 (low) or select 0 to mute the headphones.

Options
10	9	8	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0

Shutter Volume

Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the electronic shutter. Choose to disable the shutter sound.

Options
(high)	(medium)	(low)	(mute)

Shutter Sound

Choose the sound made by the electronic shutter.

Playback Volume

Adjust the volume for movie playback. Choose from 10 options between 10 (high) and 1 (low) or select 0 to mute audio during movie playback.

Screen Settings page 1 of 3

EVF Brightness

Adjust the brightness of the display in the electronic viewfinder. Select MANUAL to choose from 11 options from +5 (bright) to −5 (dark), or select AUTO for automatic brightness adjustment.

EVF Color

Adjust the hue of the electronic viewfinder. +/-5

EVF Color Adjustment

Adjust EVF brightness. +/-5

LCD Brightness

Adjust monitor brightness. +/-5

LCD Color

Adjust the hue of the display in the LCD. +/-5

LCD Color Adjustment

Adjust LCD brightness. +/-5

Image Disp.

Choose how long images are displayed after shooting. Colors may differ slightly from those in the final image and “noise” mottling may be visible at high sensitivities.

Option	Description
CONTINUOUS	Pictures are displayed until the MENU/OK button is pressed or the shutter button is pressed halfway. To zoom in on the active focus point, press the center of the rear command dial; press again to cancel zoom.
1.5 SEC	Pictures are displayed for the selected time or until the shutter button is pressed halfway.
0.5 SEC
OFF	Pictures are not displayed after shooting.

Autorotate Displays

Choose whether the indicators in the viewfinder and LCD monitor rotate to match Fujifilm X-H1 orientation.

Screen Settings page 2 of 3

Preview Exp./WB in Manual Mode

Select PREVIEW EXP./WB to enable exposure and white balance preview in manual exposure mode, or choose PREVIEW WB to preview only white balance (PREVIEW WB is recommended in situations in which exposure and white balance are likely to change during shooting, as may be the case when you use a flash with an incandescent monitoring lamp). Select OFF when using a flash or on other occasions on which exposure may change when the picture is taken.

Options
PREVIEW EXP./WB	PREVIEW WB	OFF

Framing Guideline

Choose a framing grid for shooting mode.

	GRID 9	GRID 24	HD FRAMING
	Option
Display
Display	For “rule of thirds” composition.	A six-by-four grid.	Frame HD pictures in the crop shown by the lines at the top and bottom of the display. Framing guides can be changed as desired for tethered shooting.

Autorotate PB

Choose ON to automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures during playback.

Focus Scale Units

Choose the units used for the focus distance indicator between meter or feet.

Aperture Unit for cinema lens

Choose between T-stop or Aperture stops for lenses.

Dual Display Settings

In shooting mode, press DISP/BACK until standard indicators are displayed.
Press MENU/OK and select SCREEN SETTING > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING in the (SET UP) tab.

Highlight items and press MENU/OK to select or deselect.

Item	Default
FRAMING GUIDELINE
ELECTRONIC LEVEL
FOCUS FRAME
AF DISTANCE INDICATOR
MF DISTANCE INDICATOR
HISTOGRAM
LIVE VIEW HIGHLIGHT ALERT
SHOOTING MODE
APERTURE/S-SPEED/ISO
INFORMATION BACKGROUND
Expo. Comp. (Digit)
Expo. Comp. (Scale)
FOCUS MODE
PHOTOMETRY
SHUTTER TYPE
FLASH
CONTINUOUS MODE
DUAL IS MODE
TOUCH SCREEN MODE
WHITE BALANCE
FILM SIMULATION
DYNAMIC RANGE
FRAMES REMAINING
IMAGE SIZE/QUALITY
MOVIE MODE & REC. TIME
MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
BATTERY LEVEL
FRAMING OUTLINE

Press DISP/BACK to save changes.
Press DISP/BACK as needed to exit the menus and return to the shooting display.

Disp. Custom Setting

Choose the items shown in the standard indicator display.

Screen Settings page 3 of 3

Sub Monitor Settings

Choose the items shown in the secondary LCD monitor (the screen on the top plate).

Press MENU/OK and select SCREEN SETTING > SUB MONITOR SETTING in the (SET UP) tab.
Select STILL MODE or MOVIE MODE.
Highlight items for display in positions and press MENU/OK to select or deselect. Items not available when MOVIE MODE is selected are indicated by asterisks (“*”).

Text: SHUTTER SPEED, APERTURE, EXPO. COMP, ISO, MOVIE MODE, FRAMES REM., REC. TIME, NONE

Icons: FILM SIMULATION, WHITE BALANCE, IMAGE SIZE , SHOOTING MODE, PHOTOMETRY, DRIVE MODE , FOCUS MODE, IMAGE QUALITY ^* BATTERY LEVEL, CARD SLOT OPTIONS, SHUTTER TYPE , DYNAMIC RANGE , MOVIE MODE , NONE

Sub Monitor Background Color

Choose the color of the Sub Monitor B-background.

Button/Dial Setting page 1 of 3

Focus/Lever Setting

Choose the functions performed by the focus stick (focus lever).

Option	Description
LOCK (OFF)	The focus stick can not be used during shooting.
PUSH TO UNLOCK	Press the stick to view the focus-point display and tilt the stick to select a focus point.
ON	Tilt the stick to view the focus-point display and select a focus point.

Edit/Save Quick Menu

Choose the items displayed in the quick menu.

Select BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU in the (SET UP) tab.
The current quick menu will be displayed; use the selector to highlight the item you wish to change and press MENU/OK.
Highlight any of the following options and press MENU/OK to assign it to the selected position.

IMAGE SIZE

IMAGE QUALITY

FILM SIMULATION ^*

GRAIN EFFECT ^*

COLOR CHROME EFFECT

DYNAMIC RANGE ^*

WHITE BALANCE ^*

HIGHLIGHT TONE ^*

SHADOW TONE ^*

COLOR ^*

SHARPNESS ^*

NOISE REDUCTION ^*

SELECT CUSTOM SETTING ^*

AF MODE

AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS

FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING

MF ASSIST

TOUCH SCREEN MODE

SELF-TIMER

PHOTOMETRY

SHUTTER TYPE

FLASH FUNCTION SETTING

FLASH COMPENSATION

MOVIE MODE

MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS

EVF/LCD COLOR

NONE

* Stored in custom settings bank.

Select NONE to assign no option to the selected position. When SELECT CUSTOM SETTING is selected, current settings are shown in the quick menu by the label BASE.
Highlight the desired item and press MENU/OK to assign it to the selected position.

Function (Fn) Setting)

Choose the roles played by the function buttons.

Select BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING in the (SET UP) tab.
Highlight the desired control and press MENU/OK.

Highlight any of the following options and press MENU/OK to assign it to the selected control.

EXP. COMPENSATION

IMAGE SIZE

IMAGE QUALITY

RAW

FILM SIMULATION

GRAIN EFFECT

COLOR CHROME EFFECT

DYNAMIC RANGE

WHITE BALANCE

SELECT CUSTOM SETTING

FOCUS AREA

FOCUS CHECK

AF MODE

RAPID AF

FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING

SELF-TIMER

AE BKT SETTING

PHOTOMETRY

SHUTTER TYPE

ISO AUTO SETTING

WIRELESS COMMUNICATION

FLASH FUNCTION SETTING

TTL-LOCK

MODELING FLASH

MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD

PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE

PREVIEW PIC. EFFECT

HISTOGRAM

ELECTRONIC LEVEL

AE LOCK ONLY

AF LOCK ONLY

AE/AF LOCK

AF-ON

LOCK SETTING

PLAYBACK

NONE (control disabled)

AF‑ON

If AF‑ON is selected, you can press the control instead of keeping the shutter button pressed halfway.

MODELING FLASH

If MODELING FLASH is selected when a compatible shoe-mounted flash unit is attached, you can press the control to test-fire the flash and check for shadows and the like (modeling flash).

TTL-LOCK

If TTL-LOCK is selected, you can press the control to lock flash output according to the option selected for FLASH SETTING > TTL-LOCK MODE

Selector Button Setting

Choose the roles played by the up, down, left, and right buttons on the selector.

Option	Description
Fn BUTTON	The selector buttons serve as function buttons.
FOCUS AREA	The selector buttons can be used to position the focus area.

Selecting FOCUS AREA prevents you accessing the functions assigned to the function buttons.

Command Dial Setting

Choose the roles played by the command dials.

Option	Description
F S.S.	The front command dial controls aperture, the rear command dial shutter speed.
S.S. F	The front command dial controls shutter speed, the rear command dial aperture.

ISO Dial Setting (H)

ISO Dial Setting (L)

ISO Dial Setting (A)

Button/Dial Setting page 2 of 3 (Button/dial Setting)

Shutter AF

Choose whether the Fujifilm X-H1 focuses when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

Option	Description
ON	In focus mode S (AF‑S), the Fujifilm X-H1 focuses when the shutter button is pressed halfway and locks focus while the button remains in this position. In focus mode C (AF‑C), focus is adjusted continually while the button is pressed halfway.
OFF	The Fujifilm X-H1 does not focus when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

Shutter AE

If ON is selected, exposure will lock while the shutter button is pressed halfway.

Shoot Without LensSelect OFF to allow the Fujifilm X-H1 to adjust exposure before each shot taken in burst mode.

Shoot Without Lens

Choose ON to enable the shutter release when no lens is attached.

Shoot Without Card

Make sure this is set to Off. If not, you’ll be able to shoot without recording.

Focus Ring

Choose the function of the focus ring.

Focus Ring Operation

Choose the direction in which the focus ring is rotated to increase the focus distance.

AE/AF-Lock Mode

If AE & AF ON WHEN PRESSING is selected, exposure and/or focus will lock while you press the button to which exposure or focus lock is assigned. If AE & AF ON/OFF SWITCH is selected, exposure and/or focus will lock when the button is pressed and remain locked until it is pressed again.

Expo. Comp. Button Setting

Control the behavior of the rear command dial and the button to which exposure compensation is assigned. If ON WHEN PRESSING is selected, exposure compensation can be adjusted by holding the button while rotating dial; if ON/OFF SWITCH is selected, exposure compensation can be set by pressing the button once, rotating the dial, and then pressing the button again.

Button/Dial Setting page 3 of 3

Aperture Ring Setting (A)

Select the function of the Aperture ring.

Aperture Setting

Touch Screen Setting

Enable or disable touch-screen controls.

Lock

Lock selected controls to prevent unintended operation.

Option	Description
LOCK SETTING	Choose from the following: UNLOCK: Reset lock options. ALL FUNCTION: Lock all controls in the FUNCTION SELECTION list. SELECTED FUNCTION: Lock only the controls selected in the FUNCTION SELECTIONlist.
FUNCTION SELECTION	Choose the controls locked when SELECTED FUNCTION is chosen for LOCK SETTING.

Option

Description

LOCK SETTING

Choose from the following:

UNLOCK: Reset lock options.

ALL FUNCTION: Lock all controls in the FUNCTION SELECTION list.

SELECTED FUNCTION: Lock only the controls selected in the FUNCTION SELECTIONlist.

FUNCTION SELECTION

Choose the controls locked when SELECTED FUNCTION is chosen for LOCK SETTING.

Power Management

Auto Power Off

Choose the length of time before the Fujifilm X-H1 turns off automatically when no operations are performed. Shorter times increase battery life; if OFF is selected, the Fujifilm X-H1 must be turned off manually.

Performance

High Performance Mode speeds up autofocus at the cost of battery life.

Save Data Setting

Frame No.

New pictures are stored in image files named using a four-digit file number assigned by adding one to the last file number used. The file number is displayed during playback as shown. FRAME NO.controls whether file numbering is reset to 0001 when a new memory card is inserted or the current memory card is formatted.

ONTINUOUS	Numbering continues from the last file number used or the first available file number, whichever is higher. Choose this option to reduce the number of pictures with duplicate file names.
RENEW	Numbering is reset to 0001 after formatting or when a new memory card is inserted.

Save Org Image

Choose ON to save unprocessed copies of pictures taken using RED EYE REMOVAL.

Edit File Name

Change the file name prefix. sRGB images use a four-letter prefix (default “DSCF”), Adobe RGB images a three-letter prefix (“DSF”) preceded by an underscore.

Card Slot Settings (still image)

Choose the role played by the card in the second slot.

Option	Description
SEQUENTIAL	The card in the second slot is used only when the card in the first slot is full.
BACKUP	Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card.
RAW/JPEG	As for SEQUENTIAL, except that the RAW copy of pictures taken with FINE + RAW or NORMAL + RAW selected for IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > IMAGE QUALITY will be saved to the card in the first slot and the JPEG copy to the card in the second slot.

Select Slot (still image Sequential)

Choose the card that is recorded to first when SEQUENTIAL is selected for CARD SLOT SETTING (STILL IMAGE).

Select Slot (Movie Sequential)

Choose the card that is recorded to first when SEQUENTIAL is selected for CARD SLOT SETTING (Movies).

Select Folder

Select which folder to record to.

Copyright Info

Copyright information, in the form of Exif tags, can be added to new images as they are taken. Changes to copyright information are reflected only in images taken after the changes are made.

Option	Description
DISP COPYRIGHT INFO	View the current copyright information.
ENTER AUTHOR’S INFO	Enter the creator’s name.
ENTER COPYRIGHT INFO	Enter the name of the copyright holder.
DELETE COPYRIGHT INFO	Delete the current copyright information. This change applies only to images taken after this option is selected; copyright information recorded with existing images is not affected.

Connection Settings

Bluetooth Settings

Change Bluetooth connection settings.

Network Settings

Adjust settings for connection to wireless networks.

Option	Description
GENERAL SETTINGS	Choose a name (NAME) to identify the Fujifilm X-H1 on the wireless network (the Fujifilm X-H1 is assigned a unique name by default) or select RESET WIRELESS SETTINGS to restore default settings.
RESIZE IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE	Choose ON (the default setting, recommended in most circumstances) to resize larger images to for upload to smartphones, OFF to upload images at their original size. Resizing applies only to the copy uploaded to the smartphone; the original is not affected.
ACCESS POINT SETTINGS	SIMPLE SETUP: Connect to an access point using simple settings. MANUAL SETUP: Manually adjust settings for connection to a wireless network. Choose the network from a list (SELECT FROM NETWORK LIST) or enter the name manually (ENTER SSID).
IP ADDRESS	AUTO: The IP address is assigned automatically. MANUAL: Assign an IP address manually. Manually choose the IP address (IP ADDRESS), network mask (NETMASK), and gateway address (GATEWAY ADDRESS).

PC Auto Save

Choose the method used for connection to computers via a wireless LAN.

Option	Description
SIMPLE SETUP	Connect using WPS.
MANUAL SETUP	Choose the network from a list (SELECT FROM NETWORK LIST) or enter the name manually (ENTER SSID).

Instax Printer Connection Setting

Adjust settings for connection to optional FUJIFILM instax SHARE printers.

The Printer Name (SSID) and Password

The printer name (SSID) can be found on the bottom of the printer; the default password is “1111”. If you have already chosen a different password to print from a smartphone, enter that password instead.

PC connection Mode

Adjust settings for connection to a computer.

Option	Description
USB CARD READER	Connecting the Fujifilm X-H1 to a computer via USB automatically enables data transfer mode, allowing data to be copied to the computer. The Fujifilm X-H1 functions normally when not connected.
USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO	Connecting the Fujifilm X-H1 to a computer via USB automatically enables tethered shooting mode. You can also use FUJIFILM X Acquire to save and load Fujifilm X-H1 settings, allowing you to reconfi gure the X-H1 in an instant or share settings with other camerass of the same type. The Fujifilm X-H1 functions normally when not connected.
USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED	The Fujifilm X-H1 functions in tethered shooting mode even when not connected to a computer. At default settings, pictures are not saved to the memory card, but pictures taken while the Fujifilm X-H1 is not connected will be transferred to the computer when it is connected.
WIRELESS TETHER SHOOTING FIXED	Choose this option for wireless remote photography. Select a network using CONNECTION SETTING > WIRELESS SETTINGS.
USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE	Connecting the Fujifilm X-H1 to a computer via USB automatically enables USB RAW conversion/backup restore mode. The Fujifilm X-H1 functions normally when not connected. USB RAW CONV. (requires FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO): Use the Fujifilm X-H1’s image processing engine to rapidly convert RAW files to high-quality JPEG images. BACKUP RESTORE (requires FUJIFILM X Acquire): Save and load Fujifilm X-H1 settings. Reconfigure the Fujifilm X-H1 in an instant or share settings with other Fujifilm X-H1s of the same type.

General Settings

General Wi-Fi Settings.

Information

View the Fujifilm X-H1’s MAC address.

Reset Wireless Setting

Reset all wireless settings to fatory default.

Bugs and solutions

As the Fujifilm X-H1 is now officially available, some users have reported bugs. This is a full list of those bugs with a possible solution.

X-H1 Lockups

Possible solution – Use approved SD cards from Fujifilm‘s list online and only use cards that are 180MB/s or higherAlso use NP-126S batteries only.

Electronic Front Shutter mode shutter locks up

When in Electronic Front Shutter mode, shutter locks up and then exhibits error message to turn off and turn on camera.

Possible solution – Appears to be a manufacturing issue. Return to store and exchange for new one.

Inconsistent Autofocus Performance in both stills and photography modes.

Possible solution – Unknown at this time.

Auto ISO Settings memory bug

Possible solution – Unknown at this time.

February 16, 2018

Olympus E-PL9 settings, tips and tricks
Olympus E-PL9 settings, tips and tricks

Introduction

If you’re looking for an advanced guide for the Olympus E-PL9 with tips and tricks to improve your understanding of this little wonder, you’ve come to the right place.

I believe that the best way to learn all the features and functions is to have a good look at the menu system and gradually try to understand how everything works. This might take some time if you’ve never owned a Olympus mirrorless, and even if you have, the menus have totally changed it this product.

You can bookmark this page and simply refer back to it or continue reading whenever you feel like it. So take your Pen, press the Menu button and follow along.

Olympus E-PL9 menu run-through

MENU → camera icon 1 → shooting menu page 1

Reset:

The Olympus E-PL9 settings can be easily restored to default settings. To reset all settings except the time, date, and a few others, highlight Full and press the Q button.

Picture Mode:

You can make individual adjustments to contrast, sharpness and other parameters in Picture Mode settings. Changes to parameters are stored for each picture mode separately.

Digital Tele-converter:

Digital Tele-converter is used to zoom in beyond the current zoom ratio. The Olympus E-PL9 saves the center crop. The subject is nearly doubled in size. When a RAW image taken with Digital Tele-converter, the area visible in the monitor is indicated by a frame.

Metering:

You can choose how the Olympus E-PL9 meters subject brightness.
- Digital ESP metering: Meters exposure in 324 areas of the frame and optimises exposure for the current scene or portrait subject if an option other than OFF is selected for Face Priority. This mode is recommended for general use.
- Center weighted averaging metering: Provides the average metering between the subject and the background lighting, placing more weight on the subject at the center.
- Spot metering: Meters a small area (about 2% of the frame) with the Olympus E-PL9 pointed at the object you wish to meter. Exposure will be adjusted according to the brightness at the metered point.
- Spot metering (highlight): Increases spot metering exposure. Ensures bright subjects appear bright.
- Spot metering (shadow): Lowers spot metering exposure. Ensures dark subjects appear dark.
MENU → camera icon 2 → shooting menu page 2

Image stabiliser

You can reduce the amount of camera shake that can occur when shooting in low light situations or shooting with high magnification.
The image stabilizer starts when you press the shutter button halfway.

Still picture (S-IS) ON: the Olympus E-PL9 detects the panning direction and applies the appropriate image stabilisation.

Movie (M-IS):
- M-IS 1: the Olympus E-PL9 uses both sensor shift (VCM) and electronic correction. In this case the edges of the frame are cropped out reducing the area recorded.
- M-IS 2: The Olympus E-PL9 uses sensor shift (VCM) correction only. Electronic correction is not used.
Turn the image stabiliser OFF when using a tripod to get the best possible sharpness and rendering.

AF Illuminator

The Olympus E-PL9 AF illuminator (AF assist lamp) lights to assist the focus operation in dark environments. Select Off to disable AF illuminator.

Elec. Zoom Speed

Choose the speed at which electronic zoom lenses can be zoomed in or out using the zoom ring during still photography.

Flash plus/minus: Adjusting flash output

Flash output can be adjusted if you find that your subject to appears overexposed, or is underexposed even though the exposure in the rest of the frame is just right. Only Available in P, A, S or M mode. Changes to flash intensity made with the external flash unit are added to those made with the Olympus E-PL9.

Of course, this setting has no effect when the flash control mode for the external flash unit is set to MANUAL.

Interval. Sh./Time Lapse

You can set the Olympus E-PL9 to shoot automatically with a set time lapse. The shot frames can also be recorded as into a single movie. This setting is only available in P/A/S/M modes.

These settings can be adjusted:
Number of Frames: Sets the number of frames to be shot.

Start Waiting Time: Sets waiting time before starting to shoot.

Interval Length: Sets interval between shots after shooting starts.

Time Lapse Movie: Sets recording format of frame sequence. (Off: Records each frame as a still picture. On: Records each frame as a still picture and generates a single movie from the frame sequence.)

Movie Resolution: Choose a size for time lapse movies.

Frame Rate: Choose a frame rate for time lapse movies.
RC Mode

You can take wireless flash photos using the built-in flash and a special flash with a remote control function.

External flash units that are designated for use with this Olympus E-PL9 and have a remote control mode can be used for wireless flash photography. The Olympus E-PL9 can separately control each of three groups of remote flash units, and the internal flash.

MENU → Video icon 1 → Video Menu

Movie mic

Turn the internal microphone on or off here. It’s also possible to turn on wind noise reduction which will suppress noise free the wind blowing into the microphone.

Recording Volume

You can adjust the sensitivity of the built-in microphone. Adjust the sensitivity using the up and down buttons while checking the peak sound level picked up by the microphone over the previous few seconds.

AF Mode

Choose the autofocus mode for movie recording here.
S-AF (Single AF): The Olympus E-PL9 focuses once when the shutter button is pressed halfway. When the focus is locked, a beep sounds, and the AF confirmation mark and the AF target mark light up. This mode is suitable for taking picture.

C-AF (Continuous AF): The Olympus E-PL9 repeats focusing while the shutter button remains pressed halfway. When the subject is in focus, the AF confirmation mark lights up on the monitor and the beep sounds when the focus is locked at the first time. Even if the subject moves or you change the composition of the picture, the Olympus E-PL9 continues trying to focus.

MF (Manual focus): This function allows you to manually focus on any near position by operating the focus ring on the lens.

S-AF+MF (Simultaneous use of S-AF mode and MF mode): After pressing the shutter button halfway to focus in [S-AF] mode, you can turn the focus ring to fine-adjust focus manually.

C-AF+TR (AF tracking): Press the shutter button halfway to focus; the Olympus E-PL9 then tracks and maintains focus on the current subject while the shutter button is held in this position.

A word on AF tracking: The AF target is displayed in red if the Olympus E-PL9 can no longer track the subject. Release the shutter button and then frame the subject again and press the shutter button halfway. Also be aware of the fact that the tracking range will be narrow when using a Four Thirds systemlens. Autofocus does not work while the AF target is displayed in red even if the Olympus E-PL9 is tracking the subject.
Image stabiliser
Sets image stabilisation for movie recording. The image stabiliser starts when you press the shutter button halfway.

These options are available

M-IS Off: Image stabilizer is off.

M-IS 1: The Olympus E-PL9 uses both sensor shift (VCM) and electronic correction.

M-IS 2: the E-PL9 uses sensor shift (VCM) correction only. Electronic correction is not used.

Just like in the stills section, the edges of the frame are cropped out when [M-IS ] is selected, reducing the area recorded.

You can also use focal length information to reduce Olympus E-PL9 shake when shooting with lenses that are not Micro Four Thirds or Four Thirds system lenses.

Here is how to do this:

Press the INFO button while Image Stabilizer is selected, use FGHI to highlight a focal length, and press the Q button.

Choose a focal length between 0.1mm and 1000.0mm.

Choose the value that matches the one printed on the lens.

Selecting Reset and ‘basic’ in Shooting Menu 1 does not reset the focal length.
Elec. Zoom Speed

Choose the speed at which electronic zoom lenses can be zoomed in or out during movie recording.

Video frame rate
Choose the frame rate for movie recording. When shooting movies that will be viewed on a TV, choose a frame rate that matches the video standard used in the device, as otherwise the movie may not play back smoothly. Video standards vary by country or region: some use NTSC, others PAL.

Video bit rate

Choose the compression ratio for movie recording. The options available for movie quality vary with the movie mode and the options selected for Video Frame Rate (previous menu item) and Video Bit Rate in the video menu. It’s a case of mixing these according to your needs.

The following options are available when Standard is selected for movie mode or the mode dial is rotated to a position other than movie mode:

1920×1080 Super Fine 60p

1920×1080 Super Fine 30p

1280×720 Super Fine 30p

1920×1080 Fine 60p

1920×1080 Fine 30p

1280×720 Fine 30p

1920×1080 Normal 60p

1920×1080 Normal 30p

1280×720 Normal 30p

1920×1080 Super Fine 50p

1920×1080 Super Fine 25p

1280×720 Super Fine 25p

920×1080 Fine 50p

1920×1080 Fine 25p

1280×720 Fine 25p

1920×1080 Normal 50p

1920×1080 Normal 25p

1280×720 Normal 25p

1920×1080 Super Fine 24p

1280×720 Super Fine 24p

1920×1080 Fine 24p

1280×720 Fine 24p

1920×1080 Normal 24p

1280×720 Normal 24p

The following options are available when 4K is selected for movie mode:

3840×2160 30p

3840×2160 25p

3840×2160 24p

These options are available when ‘Clips’ is selected for movie mode:

1920×1080 Normal 60p

1920×1080 Normal 30p

1280×720 Normal 30p

1920×1080 Normal 50p

1920×1080 Normal 25p

1280×720 Normal 25p

1920×1080 Normal 24p

1280×720 Normal 24p

When High-speed is selected for movie mode, only 1280×720 HighSpeed 120fps is available.
MENU → play icon → Playback Menu

Slideshow

This function displays images stored on the card one after another on the Olympus E-PL9.

You can adjust some of the settings:
- Start: Start the slideshow. Images are displayed in order, starting with the current picture.
- BGM: Set Happy Days or Off.
If set to On, images in portrait orientation are automatically rotated to be displayed in the correct orientation on the playback display.

Edit

Editing still images

Recorded images can be edited and saved as separate images.

RAW Data Edit is displayed if a RAW image is selected, and JPEG Edit if a JPEG image is selected. For images recorded in RAW+JPEG format, both RAW Data Edit and JPEG Edit are displayed. Select the desired option from them.

RAW Data edit:
- Current: The JPEG copy is processed using the current E-PL9 settings. Adjust the camera settings before choosing this option. Some settings such as exposure compensation are not applied.
- ART BKT: The image is edited using settings for the selected art filter.
JPEG Edit:
- Aspect: Changes the aspect ratio of images from 4:3 to 3:2, 16:9, 1:1, or 3:4. After changing the aspect ratio, use FGHI to specify the trimming position.
- Black & White: Creates black and white images.
- Sepia: Creates sepia-toned images.
- Saturation: Increases the vividness of images. Adjust the color saturation checking the image on the screen.
- Q: Converts the image size to 1280 × 960, 640 × 480, or 320 × 240. Images with an aspect ratio other than 4:3 (standard) are converted to the closest image size.
- e-Portrait: Compensates the skin look for smoothness.
- Compensation cannot be applied in such a case that a face cannot be detected.
Audio recording

Audio can be added to still images up to 30 sec. long.

Image overlay

Up to 3 frames of RAW images taken with the Olympus E-PL9 can be overlaid and saved as a separate image.
The image is saved with the record mode set at the time the image is saved. (If RAW is selected, the copy will be saved in YN+RAW format.)

In-Movie Image Capture

Save selected frames from 4K movies as still images.

Movie Trimming

Trimming movies, cutting parts from the start or end can be done here.

Print order

You can save digital print orders to the memory card listing the pictures to be printed and the number of copies of each print. You can then have the pictures printed at a print shop that supports DPOF or print the pictures yourself by connecting the Olympus E-PL9 directly to a DPOF printer. A memory card is required when creating a print order.

Reset Protect

Protections of multiple images can be canceled at a time.

Reset share order

You can select an image you wish to share through WiFi, by setting ‘Share Order’ on the image. To cancel sharing selections. Clear share order from the selected images. If you want to reset the share order, this can be done here.

Device connection

You can adjust the settings for connection to your Smartphone here.

To connect to your smartphone:
1. Install and start the OI.Share App on your smartphone.
2. Select Device Connection in the Playback Menu and press the Q button.
3. Follow the on-screen guide to adjust Wi-Fi/Bluetooth settings.
4. Tap the Olympus E-PL9 icon at the bottom of the OI.Share display.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions in OI.Share to scan the QR code and adjust connection settings.
Some smartphones will need to be con fi gured manually after reading the QR code. If the smartphone is connected to another Wi-Fi network or device, you may need to change the network selected in the smartphone’s Setting app to the Olympus E-PL9 SSID

MENU → gear icon → Menu A (autofocus/manual focus settings)

AEL/AFL

Backbutton focus, a method where you decouple the autofocus function from the shutter button, is widely used for different shooting techniques like focus and recompose and birds-in-flight. The E-PL9 has a range of settings available to to this.

Firstly, you’ll need to assign the AEL/AFL functionality to a button of your choice.

Secondly, you have a few modes available with different functionality depending on you shooting mode.

Single AF (S-AF)

Mode 1:
- - Half pressing the shutter button engages Single Autofocus and Exposure is locked.
    
    A Full press of the shutter button does nothing.
    
    Holding dow your preferred AEL/AFL button locks Exposure.
Mode 2:
- - Half pressing the shutter button engages Single Autofocus.
    
    A Full press of the shutter button locks Exposure.
    
    Holding dow your preferred AEL/AFL button locks Exposure.
Mode 3: half pressing the shutter button
- - Half pressing the shutter button locks Exposure.
    
    A Full press of the shutter does nothing.
    
    Holding dow your preferred AEL/AFL engages Single Autofocus.
Continuous AF (C-AF)

Mode 1:
- - Half pressing the shutter button engages Continuous AutoFocus and Exposure is locked.
    
    A Full press of the shutter locks Focus at that point.
    
    Holding down your preferred AEL/AFL button locks Exposure.
Mode 2:
- - Half pressing the shutter button engages Continuous AutoFocus.
    
    A Full press of the shutter locks Focus at that point as well as Exposure.
    
    Holding down your preferred AEL/AFL button locks Exposure.
Mode 3:
- - Half pressing the shutter button locks Exposure.
    
    A Full press of the shutter locks Focus at that point.
    
    Holding down your preferred AEL/AFL button starts Continuous Autofocus.
Mode 4:
- - Half pressing the shutter does nothing.
    
    A Full press of the shutter locks Focus at that point as well as Exposure.
    
    Holding down your preferred AEL/AFL button starts Continuous Autofocus.
ManualFocus (MF)

Mode 1:
- - Half pressing the shutter button locks Exposure.
    
    A Full press of the shutter does nothing.
    
    Holding down your preferred AEL/AFL locks Exposure
Mode 2:
- - Half pressing the shutter button does nothing.
    
    A Full press of the shutter locks Exposure.
    
    Holding down your preferred AEL/AFL locks Exposure.
Mode 3:
- - Half pressing the shutter button locks Exposure.
    
    A Full press of the shutter does nothing.
    
    Holding down your preferred AEL/AFL actually starts single Autofocus.
Face Priority

The Olympus Pen detects faces and adjusts focus and digital ESP.

These settings are available:
- - Face Priority On: Face priority is on.
    
    Face Priority Off: Face priority is off.
    
    Face & Eye Priority On : The autofocus system selects the eye closest to the Olympus E-PL9 for face-priority AF.
MF Assist

This is a focus assist function for MF. When the focus ring is rotated, the edge of the subject is enhanced or a portion of the screen display is magnifi ed. When you stop operating the focus ring, the screen returns to the original display.

These options are available:
- - Magnify: Magnifies a portion of the screen. The portion to be magnifi ed can be set in advance using AF target.
    
    Peaking: Displays clearly defi ned outlines with edge enhancement. You can choose the color of the outlines in the Peaking Menu.
Reset Lens

When set to Off, the focus position of the lens is not reset even when the power is turned off. When set to On, the focus of power zoom lenses is also reset.

MENU → gear icon → Menu B (Button and dial settings)

Button Function

At default settings, the following functions are assigned to the buttons:
- Fn Function: Digital tele-converter
- Video record button: starts video recording
- AEL/AFL:Press the button to use AE lock or AF lock. The function changes according to the AEL/AFL setting. When AEL is selected, press the button once to lock the exposure and display AEL on the monitor. Press the button again to cancel the lock.
- One-touch white balance: Press the shutter button while the button is pressed to acquire a white balance value. Highlight the desired number and press the OK button to save the value.
- AF Area Select: Press the button to choose the AF target.
- MF: Press the button to select Manual Focus mode. Press the button again to restore the previously selected AF mode. Hold the button and rotate the control dial to choose a focus mode.
- Exposure compensation (plus/minus): Press the button to adjust exposure compensation. In P, A, S, ART, movie, and some AP modes, you can adjust exposure compensation by pressing the button and using left-right to choose the desired value. Some modes also offer program shift. In M mode, you can adjust shutter speed or aperture by pressing the button and using up/down/left/right or the control dial to choose the desired values.
- Magnify: Press the button to display the magnifi cation frame and press it again to magnify the image. Press and hold the button to cancel magnified display.
- Peaking: Press the button to turn on and off the peaking display. When peaking is displayed, histogram and highlight/ shadow display are not available.
- Switch/Lock: Press and hold the button to enable and disable touch screen operation.
You can, of course, change the function of all the buttons here in this menu!

Record button Function during

Choose the role played by the video record button during playback here:
- Select multiple pictures.
- Protect pictures.
- Mark pictures for sharing.
- Mark pictures for printing at a later date. The number of copies is set to 1. The date is not printed.
Dial Function

You can also change the function of the control dial.

MENU → gear icon → Menu C1 (Display, WiFI and PC settings)

Control Settings

For each shooting mode except movie, choose whether pressing the OK button displays live controls or LV super controls.

Info Settings

Choose the information displayed when the INFO button is pressed.
- Playback Info: Choose the information displayed in full frame playback.
- LV-Info: Choose the information displayed when the Olympus E-PL9 is in shooting mode.
- Information Settings: Choose the information displayed in index, “My Clips”, and calendar playback.
Live View Boost
- Off: Changes to settings such as exposure compensation are refl ected in the display in the monitor.
- On: Changes to settings such as exposure compensation are not refl ected in the display in the monitor; instead, brightness is adjusted to bring the display as close as possible to optimal exposure.
Flicker reduction

Reduce the effects of flicker under some kinds of lighting, including fluorescent lamps. When flicker is not reduced by the Auto setting, set to 50Hz or 60Hz in accordance with the commercial power frequency of the region where the Olympus E-PL9 is used.

Displayed Grid

Select the different types of grid to be displayed on the monitor to help you compose your shots.

Peaking Color

Choose the color of the outlines (red, yellow, white, or black) in the focus peaking display.

MENU → gear icon → Menu C2 (Display, WiFI and PC settings page 2)

Beep Sound

When set to Off, you can turn off the beep sound that is emitted when the focus locks by pressing the shutter button.

HDMI

Output Size: Selecting the digital video signal format for connecting to a TV via an HDMI cable.

HDMI Control: Select On to allow the Olympus E-PL9 to be operated using remotes for TVs that support HDMI control. This option takes effect when pictures are displayed on a TV.

If the E-PL9 is connected via an HDMI cable, you will be able to choose the digital video signal type. Choose a format that matches the input format selected with the TV.
- 4K: Priority is given to 4K HDMI output.
- 1080p: Priority is given to 1080p HDMI output.
- 720: Priority is given to 720p HDMI output.
- 480p/576p: 480p/576p HDMI output.
USB Mode

Choose a mode for connecting the Olympus E-PL9 to a computer or printer. Choose Auto to display USB mode options every time the Olympus E-PL9 is connected.

MENU → gear icon → Menu D1 (Exposure, ISO and Bulb settings)

Exposure Shift

Adjust correct exposure separately for each metering mode.
- This reduces the number of exposure compensation options available in the selected direction.
- The effects are not visible in the monitor. To make normal adjustments to the exposure, perform exposure compensation.
ISO-Auto Set

Choose the upper limit and default value used for ISO sensitivity when Auto is selected for ISO.
- High Limit: Choose the upper limit for auto ISO sensitivity selection.
- Default: Choose the default value for auto ISO sensitivity selection.
Noise Filter

Choose the amount of noise reduction performed at high ISO sensitivities.

While shooting at slow shutter speeds, noise may appear on screen. These phenomena occur when the temperature rises in the image pickup device or image pickup device internal drive circuit, causing current to be generated in those sections of the image pickup device that are not normally exposed to light. This can also occur when shooting with a high ISO setting in a high-temperature environment. To reduce this noise, the Olympus E-PL9 activates the noise reduction function.

Noise Reduct.

This function reduces the noise that is generated during long exposures.
- Auto: Noise reduction is performed at slow shutter speeds, or when the internal temperature of the Olympus E-PL9 has risen.
- On: Noise reduction is performed with every shot.
- Off: Noise reduction off.
- The time required for noise reduction is shown in the display.
- Off is selected automatically during sequential shooting.
- This function may not work effectively with some shooting conditions or subjects.
MENU → gear icon → Menu D2 (Exposure, ISO and Bulb settings page 2)

Bulb/Time Timer

Choose the maximum exposure for bulb and time photography.

Live Bulb

Choose the display interval during shooting. The number of update times is limited. The frequency drops at high ISO sensitivities. Tap the monitor or press the shutter button halfway to refresh the display. Choose Off to disable the display.

he shutter remains open while the shutter button is pressed. The exposure ends when the shutter button is released. The view through the lens is not displayed while exposure is in progress.
- Press the MENU button to choose the display interval for Live Bulb or Live Time photography. Select Off to disable the display while exposure is in progress.
- To refresh the display while exposure is in progress, tap the monitor or press the shutter button halfway (LIVE TIME only).
- BULB and LIVE TIME are not available at some ISO sensitivity settings.
- To reduce blur caused by Olympus E-PL9 shake, fix the Olympus E-PL9 securely to a tripod and use a remote shutter release controlled via OI.Share.
- During shooting, there are limits on the settings for the following functions.
- Sequential shooting, self-timer shooting, time lapse shooting, image stabilizer, etc.
Live Time

Settings for bulb/time maximum exposure and live composite photography apply only in mode M.

The exposure begins when the shutter button is pressed all the way down. To end the exposure, press the shutter button all the way down again. The view through the lens is displayed while exposure is in progress.

Composite Settings

Set an exposure time to be the reference in composite photography.

You can combine several exposures to create a photo that records light trails from stars or fireworks and other objects without changing the brightness of the background.
1. In M mode, set the shutter speed to LIVECOMP. In M mode, rotate the control dial in the direction shown until LIVECOMP is displayed in the monitor.
2. Press the MENU button to display [Composite Settings] and press FG to choose the exposure time for the individual exposures.
3. Press the shutter button to ready the Olympus E-PL9. The Olympus E-PL9 will shoot a frame as a reference for noise reduction. The Olympus E-PL9 is ready when [Ready for composite shooting] is displayed in the monitor.
4. Press the shutter button halfway down to focus. If the focus indicator blinks, the Olympus E-PL9 is not in focus.
5. Press the shutter button all with way down to start live composite photography. The combined image will be displayed in the monitor with each exposure.
6. Press the shutter button again to stop shooting. View the changing result in the monitor and press the shutter button to end shooting
7. once the desired result is achieved. The maximum length of composite shooting is 3 hours. However, the available shooting time will vary depending on shooting conditions, and charging state of the Olympus E-PL9.
MENU → gear icon → Menu E (Flash and custom settings)

Flash X-Sync

Choose the shutter speed used when the flash fires.

Flash Slow Limit

Choose the slowest shutter speed available when a flash is used.
- In P and A modes; The Olympus E-PL9 automatically sets the shutter speed. and the X-Sync setting is honoured.
- In S and M modes; The set shutter speed is used Adobe the X-Sync setting is no applied. There is no lower limit.
Plus/Minus

When set to ON, the exposure compensation value is added to the flash compensation value.

Choose positive values to make pictures brighter, negative values to make pictures darker. Exposure can be adjusted by ±5.0 EV.
- In mode P, ART mode, movie mode, and some AP modes, exposure compensation can be adjusted by rotating the control dial or by pressing the plus/minus button and then using up/down.
- In modes A and S, exposure compensation can be adjusted by pressing the plus/minus button and then rotating the control dial or using left-right.
- Exposure compensation is not available in Auto, M, or SCN mode or when Live Time or panorama is selected in AP mode.
- During live view, the brightness of the monitor will be adjusted to a maximum of only ±3.0 EV. If the exposure exceeds ±3.0 EV, the exposure bar will begin flashing.
- Movies can be corrected in a range up to ±3.0 EV.
Flash output can also be adjusted if you find that your subject to appears overexposed, or is underexposed even though the exposure in the rest of the frame is just right.

Flash Plus WB

Adjust white balance for use with a flash.

MENU → gear icon → Menu F (Sound, white balance and color settings)

Set

You can select the JPEG image quality mode from combinations of three image sizes and four compression rates.
- Large: 4608×3456 pixels
- Middle: 3200×2400 pixels
- Small: 1280×960 pixels
You can also choose between four compression rates ranging from Super Fine to Basic.

Since SD cards are cheap now, I suggest using lange and Super Fine for Jpeg.

WB

Set the white balance. You can also fi ne-tune the white balance for each mode.
- White balance ensures that white objects in images recorded by the Olympus E-PL9 appear white. AUTO is suitable in most circumstances, but other values can be selected according to the light source when AUTO fails to produce the desired results or you wish to introduce a deliberate color cast into your images.
- Auto white balance: For most light conditions (when there is a white portion framed on the monitor). Use this mode for general use.
- Preset white balance: 5300 K clear day outdoors, 7500 K clear day in the shadows, 6000 K, cloudy day, 3000 K tungsten light, 4000 K fluorescent light, 5500 K for flash.
- One-touch white balance: Press the INFO button to measure white balance using a white or gray target when using a flash or other light source of an unknown type or when shooting under mixed lighting.
- Custom white balance: select a color temperature and then press the OK button.
WB Auto Keep Warm Color

Select On to preserve “warm” colors in pictures taken under incandescent lighting.

Color Space

You can select a format to ensure that colors are correctly reproduced when shot images are regenerated on a monitor or using a printer.

This option is equivalent to the Color Space in Custom Menu.
- sRGB: This is the RGB color space standard stipulated by the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC). Normally, use sRGB as the standard setting.
- AdobeRGB:This is a standard provided by Adobe Systems. Compatible software and hardware such as a display, printer etc. are required for a correct output of images.
MENU → gear icon → Menu G (Record Settings)

File Name
- - Auto: Even when a new card is inserted, the file numbers are retained from the previous card. File numbering continues from the last number used or from the highest number available on the card.
    
    Reset: When you insert a new card, the folder numbers starts at 100 and the file name starts at 0001. If a card containing images is inserted, the fi le numbers start at the number following the highest file number on the card
Edit Filename

Choose how image files are named by editing the portion of the filename highlighted below in gray.

Copyright Settings

Add the names of the photographer and copyright holder to new photographs. Names can be up to 63 characters long.
- - Copyright Info.: Select On to include the names of the photographer and copyright holder in the Exif data for new photographs.
    
    Artist Name: Enter the name of the photographer.
    
    Copyright Name: Enter the name of the copyright holder.
MENU → gear icon → Menu H (Olympus E-PL9 Utility Settings)

Pixel Mapping

The pixel mapping feature allows the Olympus E-PL9 to check and adjust the image pickup device and image processing functions. Before using the pixel mapping function to ensure that it operates correctly, wait for 1 minute or longer immediately after shooting or playback.

Level Adjust

You can calibrate the angle of the level gauge.
- - Reset: Resets adjusted values to the default settings.
    
    Adjust: Sets the current Olympus E-PL9 orientation as the 0 position.
Touchscreen Settings

Activate the touch screen. Choose Off to disable the touch screen.

Sleep

The Olympus E-PL9 will enter sleep (energy saving) mode if no operations are performed for the selected period. The Olympus E-PL9 can be reactivated by pressing the shutter button halfway.

Eye-Fi

Enable or disable upload when using an Eye-Fi card. The setting can be changed when an Eye-Fi card is inserted.

Certification

Display certifi cation icons.

MENU → spanner icon → Setup Menu

Card Setup

Cards must be formatted with this Olympus E-PL9 before fi rst use or after being used with other Olympus E-PL9s or computers. All data stored on the card, including protected images, is erased when the card is formatted. When formatting a used card, confi rm there are no images that you still want to keep on the card.

Time and date

Set the local time and date of the Olympus E-PL9. This information will also be written to the EXIF data of your photos.

Language

Select the language of your menu and Olympus E-PL9 settings. I alway recommend to use the English language since most information available on the E-PL9 online will be in English.

Screen brightness and color temperature

You can adjust the brightness and color temperature of the monitor.

Rec View

Sets whether to display the captured image on the monitor after shooting, and the length of time for the display. This is useful for a brief check of the picture you have taken. You can shoot the next shot by pressing the shutter button halfway even while the captured image is displayed on the monitor.

0.3sec – 20sec: Sets the length of time (seconds) to display the captured image on the monitor.

Off: The captured image is not displayed on the monitor.

Auto q: Displays the captured image, and then switches to playback mode. This is useful for erasing a picture after checking it.

Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings

Adjust settings for connection to Wi-Fi/Bluetooth compatible smartphones using the Olympus E-PL9’s wireless function.
- You can choose whether the Olympus E-PL9 will maintain a wireless connection to the smartphone when off.
- Disable wireless LAN/Bluetooth.
- Change the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth passwords.
- Restore Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings to default values.
Firmware

Displays the fi rmware versions of the Olympus E-PL9 and connected accessories. Check the versions when you inquire about the Olympus E-PL9 or accessories or when you download the software.

Olympus E-PL9 Mode dial and different Modes

The mode dial on top of the Pen E-PL9 is of course one of the more powerful features of any digital Olympus E-PL9. You can select any of these 9 modes that will substantially alter the way the Olympus E-PL9 handles and operates. Let’s Look at these different modes a little closer

Program Mode (P)

The P mode allows you to have more control of the Olympus E-PL9. In P mode you can change your settings (including exposure) to what you like, but the Olympus E-PL9 will set Aperture and Shutter automatically for you.

In the P (program) Mode, there is a feature called Program Shift. Program Shift allows you to select Aperture Priority or Shutter Priority on the fly while still in Program Mode. When the Olympus E-PL9 is set to the P Mode, the letter P appears in the upper left corner of the LCD screen.

Aperture Mode (A)

The A mode allows you to set the aperture manually while the Olympus E-PL9 sets the shutter speed automatically. Changing the aperture value you can give your pictures different expressions – you can have separate subjects in the front and back of the picture both in focus, or you can narrow the area of the picture that is in focus so the main subject stands out against the background.

Shutter mode (S)

The S mode allows you to set the shutter speed manually while the Olympus E-PL9 sets the aperture value automatically. By changing the shutter speed you can “freeze” the subject’s movement in the picture, or you can deliberately create a blur, giving a stronger sense of motion to the picture.

Full Manual Mode (M)

In Manual Mode (M), the user selects both the aperture and the shutter speed. When shooting the moon in the night sky or the multi-colored lights shining in a night scene there is a great difference in light level with the brightness of the surroundings. In manual mode you can shoot without the brightness of the surroundings affecting the exposure of the main subject.

Bub Mode/Live Time

You can useBulb mode for photos such as fireworks or night scenery. In M mode, rotate the control dial in the direction shown until BULB or LIVE TIME is displayed in the monitor.
- Bulb photography (BULB): The shutter remains open while the shutter button is pressed. The exposure ends when the shutter button is released. The view through the lens is not displayed while exposure is in progress.
- Time photography (LIVE TIME): The exposure begins when the shutter button is pressed all the way down. To end the exposure, press the shutter button all the way down again. The view through the lens is displayed while exposure is in progress.
Movie mode (movie Olympus E-PL9 icon)

Movie movie sets your Olympus E-PL9 up for recording 4K movies. This crops and reformats your screen for video aspect.

Art Filter Mode (ART)

Your Olympus E-PL9 has a series of artistic filters built in. The are great fun and can also help you to get a sense of your photography style.

Simply turning your mode dial to ART allows you access to these art filters.
- Pop Art I/II: Creates an image that emphasizes the beauty of color.
- Soft Focus: Creates an image that expresses a soft tone atmosphere.
- Pale&Light Color I/II: Creates an image that expresses warm light by scattering overall light and slightly overexposing the image.
- Light Tone: Creates a high-quality image by softening both shadows and highlights.
- Grainy Film I/II: Creates an image that expresses the roughness of black and white images.
- Pin Hole I/II/III: Creates an image that looks as if it was taken using an old or toy Olympus E-PL9 by dimming the image perimeter.
- Diorama I/IICreates a miniature-like image by emphasizing saturation and contrast, and blurring unfocused areas.
- Cross Process I/II: Creates an image that expresses a surreal atmosphere. Cross Process II creates an image that emphasizes magenta.
- Gentle Sepia: Creates a high-quality image by drawing out shadows and softening the overall image.
- Dramatic Tone I/II: Creates an image that emphasizes the difference between brightness and darkness by partially increasing contrast.
- Key Line I/II: Creates an image that emphasizes edges and adds an illustrative style.
- Watercolor I/II: Creates a soft, bright image by removing dark areas, blending pale colors on a white canvas, and further softening contours.
- Vintage I/II/III: Expresses an everyday shot in a nostalgic, vintage tone using printed film discoloration and fading.
- Partial Color I/II/III: Impressively expresses a subject by extracting colors you want to emphasize and keeping everything else monotone.
- Bleach Bypass I/II: the “bleach bypass” effect, which you may recognize from motion pictures and the like, can be used to great effect in shots of streetscapes or metal objects.
- Instant Film: A contemporary take on the skin tones and shadow gradations typical of film.
Advanced Photo Mode (AP)

In the AP mode you can choose from 9 different shooting modes. These are all from the Olympus special tips and tricks cabinet and worth a closer look.

Live Composite

Creates photos that record light trails from stars and other objects without changing the brightness of the background; during shooting, the changing results can be viewed on screen. You can adjust white balance or picture mode and other settings not available with the SCN mode “Light Trails” option.

Highlight Live Composite in the AP mode menu and press the OK button.
1. Press the shutter button halfway down to focus. (To reduce blur caused by Olympus E-PL9 shake, use a tripod and use a remote shutter release)
2. Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot. (The Olympus E-PL9 configures the proper settings automatically and starts shooting)
3. Press the shutter button again to stop shooting. (View the changing result in the monitor and press the shutter button to end shooting once the desired result is achieved.)
Live Time

You can make long exposures without having to keep the shutter button pressed. The changing result can be viewed in the monitor during shooting.
1. Highlight Live Time in the AP mode menu.
2. Press down, use left/right to choose the maximum exposure time, and press the OK button. (The shorter the maximum exposure time, the faster the display refresh rate.)
3. Press the shutter button halfway down to focus. (If the focus indicator blinks, the Olympus E-PL9 is not in focus.)
4. Press the shutter button all the way down to start live time photography. (The Olympus E-PL9 adjusts settings automatically and begins shooting.)
5. Press the shutter button again to stop shooting. (Shooting ends automatically when the selected exposure time is reached.)
Multiple Exposure

Combines two different images on top of one another.
1. Highlight Multiple Exposure in the AP mode menu and press the OK button.
2. Press the shutter button halfway down to focus. ( If the focus indicator blinks, the Olympus E-PL9 is not in focus.)
3. Press the shutter button all the way down for the first shot. (The image is shown superimposed on the monitor. Press bin to delete the last shot.)
4. Take the second shot. (Use the first image as a guide to compose the second shot.)
HDR

Capture details in both highlights and shadows.
- HDR1: Four shots are taken, each with a different exposure, and the shots are combined into one HDR image inside the Olympus E-PL9.
- HDR2: provides a more processed image than HDR1. ISO sensitivity is fixed to 200.
Silent heart

Disable Olympus E-PL9 sounds and lights in situations in which they may be unwanted.

Since you’re using only the electronic shutter, flickering light sources such as fluorescent or LED lamps might cause banding. If the subject moves to quickly, you might get stretched features.

Panorama

Take a series of shots that are joined together to create a wide-angle photo. Choose from angles of view approximately double or four times the angle of normal shots.

Pan the Olympus E-PL9 following an on-screen guide to create a single wide-angle (panorama) photo.
- STD: Take panoramas with an angle of view of approximately double that of other shots.
- FULL: Take panoramas with an angle of view of approximately four times that of other shots.
Keystone Compensation

Correct the effects of perspective in photos of buildings or landscapes, really cool feature.

Firstly, make the vertical adjustment while viewing the effect in the display and frame the shot.
- Use the control dial to choose the compensation amount.
- Use the left and right buttons to choose the area to be recorded. Depending on the compensation amount, you may be unable to choose the area recorded.
- Press and hold the OK button to cancel any changes.
Secondly, press the INFO button and then make the horizontal adjustment and frame the shot.
- Use the control dial to choose the compensation amount.
- Use HI to choose the area to be recorded. Depending on the compensation amount, you may be unable to choose the area recorded.
Then press and hold the Q button to cancel any changes.
- Press the INFO button to toggle between the vertical (Step 2) and horizontal (Step 3) adjustment displays as desired.
Finally press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
- If the focus indicator blinks, the Olympus E-PL9 is not in focus. 5 Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot.
Remember always that photos are recorded in RAW+JPEG format when RAW is selected for image quality.

AE Bracketing

Each time the shutter button is pressed, the Olympus E-PL9 takes a series of photos, varying exposure with each shot.
- 3f: Take 3 shots, the first at optimal exposure (±0.0 EV), the second at −1.0 EV, and the third at +1.0 EV.
- 5f: Take 5 shots, the first at optimal exposure (±0.0 EV), the second at −1.3 EV, the third at −0.7 EV, the fourth at +0.7 EV, and the fifth at +1.3 EV.
Focus Bracketing

Each time the shutter button is pressed, the Olympus E-PL9 takes a series of eight photos, varying the focus distance with each shot. 46
- Small distances: The focus distance changes by a small amount with each shot.
- Large distances: The focus distance changes by a large amount with each shot.
Scene Mode (SCN)

The Olympus E-PL9 automatically optimizes settings for the subject or scene. These are very helpful preset scenarios for beginners.

People
- Portrait: Suitable for portrait shooting. Brings out skin texture.
- e-Portrait: Smooths out skin tones and texture. This mode is suitable when viewing images on a high-definition TV. The Pen E-PL9 records two pictures: one with the effect applied and one without.
- Portrait + Landscape: Suitable for portraits featuring a landscape in the background. Blues, greens, and skin tones are captured beautifully.
- Portrait + Nightscape: Suitable for portrait shooting against a background of night view. Raise the flash and use of a tripod and remote control via OI.Share.
- Children: Suitable for photographs of children and other active subjects.
Nightscapes
- Nightscape: Suitable for tripod shooting of night scenes. Use of a tripod and remote control via OI.Share is recommended
- Portrait + Nightscape: Suitable for portrait shooting against a background of night view. Raise the flash (P. 71). Use of a tripod and remote control via OI.Share is recommended.
- Handheld Starlight: Suitable for shooting night scenes without a tripod. Reduces blur when shooting low light/illuminated scenes. The Pen E-PL9 makes eight exposures and combines them into a single photograph.
- Fireworks: Suitable for shooting fireworks at night. Use of a tripod and remote control via OI.Share is recommended.
- Light Trails: The Pen E-PL9 automatically shoots multiple images, takes newly bright areas only, and composites them into a single image. With normal long exposure, an image of light trace such as star trails with bright buildings tends to get too bright. You can capture them without over exposure while checking the progress. Press the shutter button to start shooting, then view the changing result in the monitor and press the shutter button again to end shooting once the desired result is achieved (maximum 3 hours). Use of a tripod and remote control via OI.Share is recommended. Advanced settings can be accessed via live composite photography (dark and light field composite) in M mode.
Motion
- Sport: Suitable for fast action shooting. The Pen E-PL9 will take photos while the shutter button is pressed.
- Children: Suitable for photographs of children and other active subjects.
- Panning: Choose to blur the background behind moving objects. The Olympus camerachooses the optimal shutter speed for panning shots based on Pen E-PL9 motion.
Scenery
- Landscape: Suitable for landscape shooting. Sunset: Suitable for shooting the sunset. Beach & Snow: Suitable for shooting at snow-capped mountains, seascapes in the sun, and other whitish scenes.
- Panorama: Take panoramas with an angle of view of approximately double that of other shots.
- Backlight HDR: Suitable for high-contrast scenes. Each time the shutter button is pressed, the Pen E-PL9 takes four shots and subsequently merges them into one, correctly exposed image.
Indoors
- Candlelight: Suitable for shots of candlelit scenes. Warm colors are preserved.
- Silent hart: Disable Pen E-PL9 sounds and lights in situations in which they may be unwelcome.
- Portrait: Suitable for portrait shooting. Brings out skin texture.
- e-Portrait: Smooths out skin tones and texture. This mode is suitable when viewing images on a high-definition TV. The Pen E-PL9 records two pictures: one with the effect applied and one without.
- Children: Suitable for photographs of children and other active subjects.
- Backlight HDR: Suitable for high-contrast scenes. Each time the shutter button is pressed, the Pen E-PL9 takes four shots and subsequently merges them into one, correctly exposed image.
Close-Ups
- Macro: Suitable for close-ups. j Nature Macro Suitable for vivid close-ups of flowers or insects.
- Documents: Suitable for scanning photos of timetables or other documents. The Olympus cameraheightens the contrast between the text and background.
- Multi Focus Shot: The Olympus cameratakes eight photos, varying the focus distance with each shot.
Auto Mode (AUTO)

The Pen E-PL9 adjusts settings to suit the scene; all you have to do is press the shutter button.
February 7, 2018
Panasonic Lumix GX8 settings, tips and tricks
Panasonic Lumix GX8 settings, tips and tricks

Introduction

Welcome to my Panasonic GX8 advanced manual with tips and tricks. This guide starts from your Menu settings and goes through all aspects of this interesting camera. I know it is a lot of information, but you’ll get the hang of it soon, I promise.

The GX8 was the first Micro Four Thirds camera to leave the world of 16 Megapixel sensors behind, moving to 20MP.

Key Features
- 20MP Four Thirds MOS sensor
- Dual IS capability
- Depth from Defocus AF system
- 2.36M-dot tilting OLED EVF
- 1.04M-dot, vari-angle OLED touchscreen display
- 4K video / photo
- Weatherproof magnesium alloy body
- Wi-Fi with NFC
I’ll be going over the entire Menu structure in this post, and giving you tips, pointers, and tricks along the way.

Diving into the MENU system

When you switch on your Panasonic Lumix GX8 you’ll be asked to enter a date, time and timezone. This setting is necessary, as all images captured will have a timestamp, making it easy to find your favorite pictures in the future. After this is setup, press the MENU button. You’ll see a range of icons and pages. We’ll start at page 1 of the camera Icon (camera settings)

MENU → Camera Icon → page 1 of 8 (also called the Rec menu)

Photo Style

This applies only to Jpeg images, and the RAW preview. You can select a colour effect here.
- Standard: standard Panasonic colour and contrast rendering.
- Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
- Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.
- Monochrome: Monochrome (black and white)effect with no color shades.
- L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
- Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
- Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
- Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.
As mentioned earlier, it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customise the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.
- Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.
- Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.
- Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.
- Saturation: add more vividness to the colours. Or remove some.
- Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.
Filter Settings

The filter Settings go a step further than merely a photo style. These include artistic effects like Low Key, Sepia, Cross Process and retro stylings. You can turn them ON or OFF here, select the effect you want to use and change the settings by using the touch screen. You can also set your Lumix GX8 up to shoot one with and one without an image effect simultaneously.

If you’re wondering how you get to Creative Control mode, you need to set the mode dial to the paint palette.

And simply press up and down to select the image effects. You can also display the selection screen by touching the Recording Mode icon in recording screen.

These are all the image effects available:
- Expressive
- High Key
- Monochrome
- Silky Monochrome
- Cross Process
- Bleach Bypass
- Fantasy
- Sunshine: you can select the position and size of the light source here.
- Retro
- Low Key
- Dynamic Monochrome
- Impressive Art
- Toy Effect
- Miniature Effect: you can select the portion of your image that is in focus here (and where the blur effect won’t happen)
- Star Filter
- Old Days
- Sepia
- Rough Monochrome
- High Dynamic
- Toy Pop
- Soft Focus
- One Point Color: you can select the color to leave in here by using a color picker.
Aspect Ratio

You can change the aspect ratio of your photos here. Changing the aspect ratio can be used as a way to boost your creativity, for instance landscapes often look great with a 16:9 ratio, or for sharing on Instagram, a 1:1 crop might suit you better.

An M43 (Micro Four-thirds) camera has a native aspect ratio of (not surprisingly) 4:3. You should realise that changing the aspect ratio to anything else than this will actually crop the sensor, meaning that you’ll lose pixels. You should look at it as re-framing your image (like you can do in Lightroom or other photo editors) inside the Panasonic GX8. Jpeg’s will be stored with the chosen ratio, but RAW images (although previewed with the chosen ratio), will still have the full information of the 4:3 sensor retained.

These are the aspect ratios available:
- 4:3: native sensor ratio
- 3:2: the ratio used in full frame cameras
- 16:9: for a wider looking view
- 1:1: Square aspect ratio, mostly used for social sharing
Picture Size

Picture Size sets the number of pixels for Jpeg (nor RAW). The higher the numbers of pixels, the more detail your pictures will have.
- When the aspect ratio is set to 4:3, you use all the 20 MP of the sensor for a maximum image size of 5184 x 3888.
- When the aspect ratio is 16:9, you only use a wide crop of 14.5 MP of the sensor for a maximum image size of 5184k x 920.
- When the aspect ratio is 3:2 you use 17 MP of the sensor and have an 5184 x 3456 image size.
- When the aspect ratio is 1:1, you use 14,5 MP of the sensor for an 3888 x 3888 image size.
The Panasonic GX8 also has a digital teleconverter option, allowing you to zoom in by a factor of times 2 or times 4. This can be a handy feature if you don’t shoot RAW (see next item for more info). Thanks to in-body digital processing, the resulting Jpegs actually retain a larger image size than what you’d expect of de facto cropping the sensor by a factor 2 or 4. I would however only recommend using this feature if you’re a die hard jpeg shooter, since using RAW files and developing your images in Lightroom or another app will almost always get you better results.

Quality

Probably the most important setting is Quality. You can select either Jpeg, where the RAW data from the sensor is processed by an in-camera algorithm to produce a viewable image, or save your images in this RAW format. RAW retains all the data of the sensor, and is meant to be edited afterwards in a desktop application like Lightroom or Luminar. Saving as RAW means that you have much more creative freedom afterwards to push shadows or pull highlights, sharpen and enhance your image in any way you please. A Jpeg retains only a fraction of this information, according to the algorithm inside the Lumix GX8 which might or might not suit your style and/or needs.

Hence, my recommendation is always to shoot RAW or RAW Jpeg. This does mean larger files, but SD cards are inexpensive compared to your beautiful new Lumix. But some photographers prefer to shoot in Jpeg only because they are for instance not interested in post-processing images. In this case, I would set the Jpeg to the highest quality setting.

MENU → Camera Icon → page 2 of 8 (also called the Rec menu)

AFS/AFF

AFS is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Single and AFF is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Flexible. In AFS, the focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway and in AFF focus is continuously readjusted according to the movement of the subject. See AFF as a function between Single AF and Continuous AF.

This can easily be changed by using the dial on the right of the ECF too:

The AFC function below AFS/AFF continuously changes focus according to the movement of your subject.

Some more info on these modes for clarification:
- AFS will find focus and stay focused at that distance until you take a photo or release the shutter button. This is handy if you want to focus and then recompose your shot for instance.
- AFF will do the same unless it detects subject movement, at which time it will temporarily switch to AFC operation in order to re-focus.
- AFC won’t start to seek focus until you half-press the shutter, and will continually evaluate subject movement and change focus as needed.
- With AFS you can can lock focus on a particular point, then swing the camera to get the right framing; with AFC, it will not lock focus, but will keep re-focusing. That’s why Pinpoint focusing can’t be used with AFC.
Metering Mode

You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the Lumix GX8. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

Implementation of this is quite basic in the Lumix GX8, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:
- Multiple: This is the method in which the Lumix GX8 measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
- Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
- Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.
Burst Rate

You can choose your bust shot setting here for continuous drive mode.

Burst shooting means that you’ll shoot continuously when you press the shutter button.

You’ll see SH (for super high burst rates), This SH modes are only available with the electronic shutter. Then we have High, Medium and Low which work with the Mechanical shutter too. The actual burst rate will be higher if you shoot Jpeg only.

4K Photo

4K photo mode is designed to help you to capture fleeting moments by letting you shoot at an incredible 30fps. Continuous autofocus mode is automatically activated and it draws on 4K video technology to shoot 8 MP images at this fast frame rate. You’re basically recording video where you can extract the frames in-camera.

There are three 4K Photo Modes: 4K Burst, 4K Burst (S/S) and 4K Pre-Burst. These modes determine at how and when the footage will be recorded.
- In 4K Burst mode the Lumix GX8 shoots 4K footage for as long as you hold down the shutter release button.
- In 4K Burst (S/S), S/S stands for Start/Stop and recording is started and ended with a press of the shutter release.
- 4K Pre-Burst mode is useful for short bursts of action because it only records for 2 seconds. However, the camera starts scanning the moment it’s active and it records the 30 images from the 1 second prior to you pressing the shutter button as well as the 30 from the 1 second after you pressed it.
Extracting 8Mp stills from the GX85’s 4K Photo Mode footage is pretty easy as follows:
1. Press the play button to located the files. Clips recorded in 4K Photo Mode are marked with the 4K Photo icon to make the easy to identify. Once you’ve found the clip you want, either tap the 6K Photo Icon on-screen or the Up navigation key.
2. If you have a long clip with fleeting moments of action you may like to use the slide bar at the top to quickly scroll to an interesting bit of footage. Alternatively, there’s a playback option (button Fn1) that you can use to play and pause the movie.
3. Once you’ve found the area you’re interested in, tap the Frame View Icon to see a scrollable stack of frames, just swipe right and left to locate the best shots.
4. When you find an image you like, tap the Menu/Set button or 4K Icon to save the image. Images are saved as jpegs.
it’s possible to save all the frames from 5 second sections of your 4K movie. To do this:
1. Tap the Menu button and scroll down to Playback (the 6th tab), then scroll to the second page of options and select 4K PHOTO Bulk Saving.
2. Then swipe on the screen until you find the clip that you want to extract stills from.
3. Now use the same on-screen movie navigation controls as you used before to find the first frame of the 5 seconds that you want to pull the stills from and tap the 6K Photo icon to save it and the image from the next 5 seconds.
Auto Bracket

The Exposure Bracket function allows you to take multiple pictures while automatically adjusting the exposure or aperture by pressing the shutter button. You can select the number of pictures to be taken and the exposure range (from 1/3 EV to 1 EV stops difference).

MENU → Camera Icon → page 3 of 8 (also called the Rec menu)

Updated firmware has a change:

Self Timer

In this menu, you can select what type of self timer you’d like to use: a 10 second delay and one shot, 10 seconds with 3 shots with 2 second intervals or a 2 second delay, all after pressing the shutter.

Highlight Shadow

This allows you to lighten the shadows and darkens the highlights in your image (or video). So this is a method of creating balance in your image if you feel like the highlights are too strong or the shadows too dark. You have 4 presets available, and you can also make 3 custom presets yourself:
- Standard: no adjustments is set.
- Raise the contrast: Bright areas are brightened, and dark areas are darkened.
- Lower the contrast: Bright areas are darkened, and dark areas are brightened.
- Brighten dark areas: Dark areas are brightened.
- Custom: make your own preset.
This is how to adjust the parameters for Custom presets:
1. Rotate the front/rear dial to adjust the brightness of bright/dark portions.
2. A – Bright portion B – Dark portion
  - The rear dial is for adjusting dark areas, and the front dial is for adjusting bright areas.
  - To register a preferred setting, press ▲, and select the destination where the custom setting will be registered to [Custom1]/[Custom2]/[Custom3].
  - Adjustments can also be made by dragging the graph.
3. Press [MENU/SET].
  - The screen display can be switched by pressing [DISP.] on the brightness adjustment screen.
  - Turning off this unit will return the setting adjusted with / / / back to the default setting.
  - When [Photo Style] is set to [Like709] or [V-Log L], setting is fixed to [ ] (Standard).
i. Dynamic

This setting will change contrast and exposure when there is a big difference from the darkest area to the brightest are in your image. What really happens is that the camera adjusts the exposure in order to capture more details in the highlights. You can choose between High, Standard, Low or Off.

This naturally causes an under-exposure in the shadow areas. But inside the jpeg engine, the Lumix GX8 will compensate for this by boosting shadows. The downside here is that this will obviously lead to more noise in the boosted regions, but because this is done with data directly coming from the sensor, it can be quite useful if you are a jpeg shooter.

There is also an impact on RAW images, because the exposure will be underexposed.

i. Resolution

Another jpeg only functionality, i-Resolution is a form of sharpening. High, Standard, Low and Off are selectable, and you should see these like the threshold for sharpening in an application like Lightroom. Many photographers discard these intelligent functions, and if you shoot RAW only, it’s not that important for you (except i Dynamic which can change your exposure plus or minus 1/3 stop). But if you shoot jpeg only, you should set it to Low at least, since most of the time RAW files would be sharpened in post processing too.

iHandheld Night Shot

With iHandheld night shot, pictures of the night scenery will be taken at a high burst speed and composed into a single picture. This mode is useful if you want to take stunning night shots with minimal jitter and noise, without using a tripod. You can turn this feature on or off.

Post Focus

Post focus means controlling your focus point afterwards. This might sound like a scifi concept, but it’s quite simple if you know what is really happening. The Panasonic GX8 performs a burst of shots while automatically shifting the focus to different areas. After the recording, you can select your desired focus point from the list of per second captures. It works best with scenes with little to no movement, as having someone move around would of course add another degree of shifting focus points to the mix.

In the same way, focus stacking can be achieved. Focus stacking is a method of making an images that is sharp across the frame. By recording the same scene multiple times with different focus points and later on combining all these images, you can get an image that is sharp across the frame. This is a technique often used in macro photography where your depth of field is very shallow (only a small part, where focus lies, is sharp) because of the nature of shooting at close distances. But it can also be used for other types of photography like landscapes.

It’s recommended to use a very fast SD card in order to achieve these high frame rates by the way.

For post focus:

Select your series of images you just captured, there is an icon that reassures you this is a batch of images to avoid any confusion:

Once selected, all you need to do is use the touch screen to select the focus point you desire. And now touch this icon to save:

The Focus stacking function can be performed in-camera. This methods also starts with selecting the series of images you just captured. Then you press the FN1 button and you’ll be in the focus stacking menu. There are two types of merging, Auto and range. Auto automatically selects the best images to merge into a more sharp composite image, and Range allows you to select a specified focus range with your finger on the touch screen. When you have done this, touch the icon on the bottom right of the screen and the Lumix S1r will save the resulting composite image with the EXIF data from the closest focussed image.

MENU → Camera Icon → page 4 of 8 (also called the Rec menu)

iHDR

Intelligent HDR will take multiple still pictures are recorded with differing exposures and combined to create a single still picture rich in dynamic range.

HDR

You can combine 3 pictures with different levels of exposure into a single picture with rich gradation. You can minimize the loss of gradations in bright areas and dark areas when, for example, the contrast between the background and the subject is large.

Two settings are available:
- Dynamic Range: Either set this to auto where the camera decides the exposure difference between shots or plus/minus 1, 2 or 3 EV.
- Auto Align: the Panasonic Lumix GX8 will align your three shots, for handheld shooting or turn this feature off when you use a tripod.
Multi Exp.

Gives an effect like multi exposure. (layering images on top of each other, up to 4).
1. Decide on the composition, and take the first picture.
2. After taking the picture, press the shutter button halfway down to take the next picture.
3. Press up/down to select the item and then press MENU/SET to either go to the next image, retake your image or exit.$Shooting the second, third, and fourth exposures
4. Press down to select Exit and then press MENU/SET.
5. Your multiple exposure is made and saved.
Two settings are available:
- Auto gain: the camera automatically adjusts the gain of the separate images to match.
- Overlay: if set to ON, you can apply Multi Exposure to previously recorded images.
Time Lapse Shot

You can take a sequential number of images with relatively long delays in between to achieve a time-lapse movie
1. Switch to Time Lapse Shot if it is not selected.
2. change start time and shooting interval according to your preferences.
3. press te shutter half way to exit the menu.
4. press the shutter to start your time-lapse.
Stop Motion Animation

You can take a sequential number of images with relatively long delays in between to achieve a stop motion/animation.
1. Switch to Stop Motion Animation
2. Change auto shooting and shooting interval according to your preferences
3. press te shutter half way to exit the menu.
4. press the shutter to start your time-lapse.
5. move the subject per frame
6. press the folder menu to end the recording
MENU → Camera Icon → page 5 of 8 (also called the Rec menu)

Panorama Settings

You can change settings for the Panorama shot mode on your mode dial here.
- Direction: sets the recording direction to either horizontal or vertical.
- Picture Size: set to either Standard or Wide.
Electronic Shutter

You can use either the mechanical or electronic shutter.

Remember that in artificial light or when using a flash, you best use the mechanical shutter only to avoid artefacts.

Shutter Delay

To reduce the influence of hand shake or shutter vibration, shutter is released after the specified time has passed. 1, 2, 4 or 8 second delay are selectable. Keep your hands steady and don’t use this delay, else you might miss that critical moment.

Flash

You’ll find all the flash functions in this menu for the hotshoe flash you want to use.

Using a flash takes some skill, but you have a couple of tweaks available for you if you want to make the most of your photography.

Firing Mode
- TTL: The camera automatically sets the flash output. This system meters the light coming through the lens, this includes both ambient and flash light. It calculates the best exposure according to these measurements. Preferred for most users.
- Manual: Set the luminosity ratio of the flash manually. 1/1 means full power, and you can decrease the power to an output that best suits your scenery. It’s not the easiest way to use a flash, but you’ll gain a lot of knowledge in how to balance your flash and ambient light this way.
Flash Mode

like your smartphone camera, you can tell the flash to always be on, turn it off or use a ‘pro’ feature called slow sync. In Slow Sync, the Lumix GX8 will attempt to balance the ambient light with the light of the flash, even in near darkness by slowing down the shutter speed.

These three options are available for the built-in flash. If you’re using a hotshoe flash, or a controller for off camera flashes, you’ll have a few more modes available:

Flash Synchro
- 1st: the flash will sync with the first movement of the shutter (when it opens). This is the normal mode used for normal photography.
- 2nd:The flash fires right before the second operation of an exposure, namely the closing of the shutter.
Second curtain sync is often uses for creative effect, where you’d see the light source appear behind the subject.

Flash Adjust

You can adjust the output power of the flash here in 1/3EV steps in TTL metering mode. In essence, this will give you more or less flash power than when set to zero. If you, for instance , feel that there is always too much flash light in your photos, you could dial it down a little here.

Auto Exposure Comp.

Normally, when you use the compensation dial on the camera body, you’ll also increase or decrease the flash output power. You can turn this OFF here, so the compensation dial will only affect your exposure (brighter or darker) and not flash power.

Wireless Flash Settings

If you want up your game in regards to flash photography, you’ll quickly turn to wireless flashes. These will enable you to use the flash power in a creative way, adjusting power and angle of light by positioning your off-camera flashes differently. Panasonic make a few wireless enabled flashes like the DMW-FL200L, DMW-FL360L or DMW-FL580L, but you can also invest in a few third party brands like Godox. An entire book could be written (and probably has been) on this subject. But for nowWe’ll stick with what is in the menu system.
- Wireless: set to ON if you want to use a wireless flash.
- Wireless Channel: Select the channel you have set for the wireless flashes.
- Wireless Setup: You’ll have three groups of flashes available (A, B and C) as well as your on-camera hotshoe controller flash.. Each flash group can be set to TTL (metering through the lens), Auto, Manual or OFF. You can also dial in flash adjust +-3 EV per group here.
Wireless FP

FP is most commonly known as high speed sync. This system uses a series of high speed flash burst in sync with the shutter in order to achieve flash at high shutter speeds. This is useful in situations where you’d normally be overpowered by sunlight and/or you want to shoot at large apertures for a shallow depth-of-field effect.

You can enable or disable this function for wireless flashes here.

Red-Eye Removal

If you use a flash when using Red-Eye Reduction, the Lumix GX8 will automatically detect red-eye and corrects the picture.

MENU → Camera Icon → page 6 of 8 (also called the Rec menu)

ISO Limit Set

Sets the upper limits of the ISO sensitivity when you use Auto ISO or i ISO. Lower Limit should be set to 200 and upper limit to 1600, this is the range where you’ll get usable images without too much noise.

ISO Increments

Choose the increments of exposure changes between 1/3 EV or 1 EV.

Extended ISO

ISO sensitivity can be set up to minimum of ISO 100. Base ISO of the sensor is 200, so this extended ISO basically halves this in software, with a slight decrease in quality.

Long Shtr NR

The camera will automatically apply noise reduction to long exposures. This applies to both Jpeg and RAW files. A black frame is taken after your initial shot to measure the noise present. Since many environmental factors (like temperature and location) have an effect on the amount of noise that you’ll see, this is the best way to determine what is noise in your frame. This data is then subtracted from your image for a noise-free (more-or-less) result.

Shading Comp.

All lenses have a lens profile that registers both distortion and shading in the corners at all apertures. These lens profiles can be applied in-camera to counter unwanted vignetting in your images. Especially important for jpeg shooters to turn this on. RAW shooters can apply these corrections later on (and with better results) in a desktop application like DXO optics Pro.

MENU → Camera Icon → page 7 of 8 (also called the Rec menu)

Diffraction Compensation

When you stop down your lens to a smaller aperture (normally from f/11 to f/22), a phenomenon called diffraction causes a loss in sharpness. It happens because light begins to disperse when passing through a small opening. When diffraction compensation is set to ON, the Panasonic GX8 will add sharpening to your image to try and counter this phenomenon.

Ex. Tele Conv.

You can digitally enlarge pictures without too much quality deterioration with this function. Only for jpeg use, you can extend the range of your lens by times 1.4 or 1.6 using this function.

Digital Zoom

Digital zoom takes this a step further, allowing you to zoom in up to 4 times for jpeg’s. I would not recommend either of these functions, as it is better to shoot RAW in this case and crop in processing for the best possible quality.

Color Space

Select either sRGB or Adobe RGB here. Adobe RGB has a greater range of reproducible colors than sRGB, so it might be worth looking into this color space if you print to paper a lot. But remember that you’ll also need a monitor capable of reproducing the larger color range too. And this can often lead to problems when converting to sRGB or editing your images in external applications. Because of all this, I have it set to sRGB.

Image Stabilizer

The Panasonic Lumix GX8 has a stabilised sensor. The sensor inside the Lumix GX8 is suspended on a magnetic field and can compensate for movement like the minute shakes of your hands or any other kind of movement. There are also many lenses available with an optical image stabilisation unit, that physically move glass elements around inside the lens to do the same. Both systems have their pros and cons, and it is generally accepted that a stabilised sensor works better for wide angle lenses (below 40mm) whilst optical lens stabilisation is more efficient for the tele range. It is also possible to use both systems at the same time (called Dual I.S. or 5 Axis hybrid for video), where you’ll take advantage of the best of both worlds.

It’s also possible to use the in-body sensor stabilisation with older, manual primes that don’t relay EXIF information (like most importantly focal length in this case). You’ll need to manually set the focal length in the Focal length Set function to get an optimal performance.

MENU → Camera Icon → page 8 of 8 (also called the Rec menu)

Face Recog.

Face Recognition is a function on the Panasonic GX8 which finds a face resembling a registered face and priorities focus and exposure automatically. Even if the person is located towards the back or on the end of a line in a group photo, the camera can still take a clear picture.

On will automatically recognise faces, but you can also register up to six faces yourself.
1. In this Menu, select an empty frame (or overwrite one).
2. Take an picture of the face you want to register.
3. Register this face. Note that you can register up to 3 images per face for more accurate results.
Profile Setup

If you set the name and birthday of your baby or pet in advance, you can record their name and age in months and years in the images.

You can display these at playback or stamp the recorded images using the Text Stamp tool. This way, you’ll have a nice overview of your imageges as your child gets older.

Select the Profile Setup menu.
1. Press up/down to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET].
2. Press up/down to select [Baby1], [Baby2] or [Pet] and then press [MENU/SET].
3. Enter age and name of the pet or person.
4. Press 4 to select [Exit] and then press [MENU/SET] to finish.
MENU → Film Camera Icon → page 1 of 5 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

These are all movie related settings, and menu of them are the same as the stills related menu options. You can however (obviously) set them up differently for video.

Photo Style

This applies only to Jpeg images, and the RAW preview. You can select a colour effect here.
- Standard: standard Panasonic colour and contrast rendering.
- Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
- Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.
- Monochrome: Monochrome (black and white)effect with no color shades.
- L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
- Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
- Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
- Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.
it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customise the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.
- Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.
- Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.
- Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.
- Saturation: add more vividness to the colours. Or remove some.
- Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.
Filter Settings

The filter Settings go a step further than merely a photo style. These include artistic effects like Low Key, Sepia, Cross Process and retro stylings. You can turn them ON or OFF here, select the effect you want to use and change the settings by using the touch screen. You can also set your Panasonic GX8 up to shoot one with and one without an image effect simultaneously.

If you’re wondering how you get to Creative Control mode, you need to set the mode dial to the paint palette.

And simply press up and down to select the image effects. You can also display the selection screen by touching the Recording Mode icon in recording screen.

These are all the image effects available:
- Expressive
- High Key
- Monochrome
- Silky Monochrome
- Cross Process
- Bleach Bypass
- Fantasy
- Sunshine: you can select the position and size of the light source here.
- Retro
- Low Key
- Dynamic Monochrome
- Impressive Art
- Toy Effect
- Miniature Effect: you can select the portion of your image that is in focus here (and where the blur effect won’t happen)
- Star Filter
- Old Days
- Sepia
- Rough Monochrome
- High Dynamic
- Toy Pop
- Soft Focus
- One Point Color: you can select the color to leave in here by using a color picker.
Snap Movie

You can specify the recording time in advance and record motion pictures casually like you take snapshots. The function also allows you to shift a focus at the start of recording and add fade in/out effects in advance.
1. Select the Snap Movie menu
2. Start recording
Rec Format

You can either choose to record in AVCHD or MP4 format. The higher the Bit rate value is, the higher the picture quality becomes. Since the camera employs the VBR recording method, the bit rate is changed automatically depending on the subject to record. As a result, the recording time is shortened when a fast-moving subject is recorded. Different frame rates and bitrates are selectable per format in the Rec Quality setting

Rec Quality

Select the quality of video here.

AVCHD

MP4

MENU → Film Camera Icon → page 2 of 5 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

Exposure Mode

These are the same modes available with the mode dial (P, A, S or M)

AFS/AFF

AFS is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Single and AFF is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Flexible. In AFS, the focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway and in AFF focus is continuously readjusted according to the movement of the subject. See AFF as a function between Single AF and Continuous AF.

Picture Mode

You can record still pictures while recording a movie on the Panasonic GX8. During movie recording, press the shutter button fully to record a still picture when turned On. Aspect will always be 16:9.

There are 2 settings available:

Video Priority
- Pictures will be recorded with a picture size determined by the Rec Quality setting for motion pictures.
- Only JPEG images are recorded when Quality is set to Raw (still pictures will be recorded in jpeg)
- Up to 80 still pictures can be recorded during recording of the motion picture. (Up to 20 still pictures during 4K motion picture recording)
Photo Priority
- Pictures will be recorded with the set picture size and quality.
- The screen will go dark while recording pictures. A still picture will be recorded in the motion picture during that period, and audio is not recorded.
- Up to 20 still pictures can be recorded during recording of the motion picture. (Up to 10 still pictures during 4K motion picture recording)
Continuous AF

Focusing changes depending on the Focus Mode setting and the Continuous AF setting in this menu.

AFS/AFF/AFC:
- On: TheLumix GX8 automatically keeps focusing on subjects during recording.
- Off: The camera maintains the focus position at the start of recording.
MF

You can use manual focus.

Metering Mode

You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the camera. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:
- Multiple: This is the method in which the Lumix GX8 measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
- Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
- Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.
MENU → Film Camera Icon → page 3 of 5 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

Highlight Shadow

This allows you to lighten the shadows and darkens the highlights in your image (or video). So this is a method of creating balance in your image if you feel like the highlights are too strong or the shadows too dark. You have 4 presets available, and you can also make 3 custom presets yourself:
- Standard: no adjustments is set.
- Raise the contrast: Bright areas are brightened, and dark areas are darkened.
- Lower the contrast: Bright areas are darkened, and dark areas are brightened.
- Brighten dark areas: Dark areas are brightened.
- Custom: make your own preset.
For more info, see the equivalent setting for photos above.

i.Dynamic

This setting will change contrast and exposure when there is a big difference from the darkest area to the brightest are in your image. What really happens is that the camera adjusts the exposure in order to capture more details in the highlights. You can choose between High, Standard, Low or Off.

This naturally causes an under-exposure in the shadow areas. But inside the jpeg engine, the Lumix GX8 will compensate for this by boosting shadows. The downside here is that this will obviously lead to more noise in the boosted regions, but because this is done with data directly coming from the sensor, it can be quite useful.

i.Resolution

i-Resolution is a form of sharpening. High, Standard, Low and Off are selectable, and you should see these like the threshold for sharpening in an application like Lightroom. Many photographers discard these intelligent functions, and if you shoot RAW only, it’s not that important for you (except i Dynamic which can change your exposure plus or minus 1/3 stop).

Diffraction Compensation

When you stop down your lens to a smaller aperture (normally from f/11 to f/22), a phenomenon called diffraction causes a loss in sharpness. It happens because light begins to disperse when passing through a small opening. When diffraction compensation is set to ON, the Panasonic GX8 will add sharpening to your image to try and counter this phenomenon.

Luminance Level

Select the luminance range to match the use of video.

MENU → Film Camera Icon → page 4 of 5 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

Ex. Tele Conv.

You can digitally enlarge movies without too much quality deterioration with this function. You can extend the range of your lens by times 1.4 or 1.6 using this function.

Digital Zoom

Digital zoom takes this a step further, allowing you to zoom in up to 4 times.

Flkr Decrease

The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in your movies. 1/50,/1/60,1/100 or 1/120 second are available.

Silent Operation

The operational sound of the zoom or button operation may be recorded when it is operated during the recording of a motion picture. Using touch icons allows silent operation while recording motion pictures.

Mic Level Disp.

Select if you want to display the microphone level on the recording screen.

MENU → Film Camera Icon → page 5 of 5 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

Mic Level Adj.

Adjust the sound input level to 19 different levels (-12 dB to +6 dB).

Wind Noise Canceller

This will reduce the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone while maintaining sound quality. You can choose either High, Standard or Off. This function works only with the built-in microphone.

Custom settings page 1 of 9

You’ll find all customisable settings of the Panasonic GX8 in this Menu.

You’ll find all customisable settings of the Panasonic GX8 in this Menu.

Cust. Set Mem.

Up to 3 sets of current camera settings can be registered using C1, C2, C3-1, C3-2 or C3-3. These are directly accessible via the Mode Dial.

Saving a custom camera is quite simple, set the mode dial to C1, C2 or C3, change the Lumix GX8 settings to your preferences, go in the Menu to this setting and press MENU/SET on the screen.

Silent Mode

Disables operational sounds and output of light at once. • Audio from the speaker will be muted and the flash and the AF Assist lamp will be disabled.

The following settings are fixed:

– Shutter Type: ESHTR.

– Flash Mode]:forced flash off.

– AF Assist Lamp: Off.

– Beep Volume: Off.

– E-Shutter Volume: Off.

AF/AE Lock

Lock focus and exposure with AF/AE LOCK. To clear the lock, press AF/AE LOCK again.

AF/AE Lock Hold

When ON is selected, focus and exposure stays locked even if you press and release AF/AE LOCK. To clear the lock, press AF/AE LOCK again.

Shutter AF

Set whether or not the focus is adjusted automatically when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

Custom settings 2 of 9

Half Press Release

The shutter will immediately fire when the shutter button is pressed halfway when this is ON.

Quick AF

As long as the camera is held steady, the Lumix GX8 will automatically adjust the focus and focus adjustment will then be quicker when the shutter is pressed. You’ll get better AF performance at the expense of battery life.

Eye Sensor AF

The Panasonic GX8 will automatically start autofocus when the eye sensor is activated.

Pinpoint AF Time

Sets the time for which the screen is enlarged when the shutter button is pressed halfway with Auto Focus Mode set to MF assist.

Pinpoint AF Display

Sets whether to display the assist screen that appears when Auto Focus Mode is set to manual focus assist: in a window or full screen.

Custom settings page 3 of 9

AF Assist lamp

AF assist lamp will illuminate the subject when the shutter button is pressed half-way making it easier for the camera to focus when recording in low light conditions. Range is about 1 meter.

Direct Focus Area

Moves the AF area or MF assist using the cursor button when recording.

Focus/release Priority

This will prevent you from taking pictures when focus is not achieved.

AF+MF

When AF Lock is ON (press the shutter button halfway with the focus mode set to AFS or set AF Lock using AF/AE LOCK), you can make fine adjustments to the focus manually.

MF Assist

Sets the display method of MF Assist (enlarged screen) on the Panasonic GX8.

Custom settings page 4 of 9

MF Assist Display

Sets whether MF Assist (enlarged screen) will appear in a windowed screen display or in a full screen display.

MF Guide

When you set the focus manually, an MF guide that allows you to check the direction to achieve focus is displayed.

Peaking

In-focus portions (portions on the screen with clear outlines) are highlighted when focus is being adjusted manually. Great focussing aide for manual focussing. Can be set to High or Low.

Histogram

Display the histogram. A histogram is a graph that displays brightness along the horizontal axis (black to white) and the number of pixels at each brightness level on the vertical axis. It allows you to easily check a picture’s exposure.

Guide Line

This will set the pattern of guide lines displayed when taking a picture.

Custom settings page 5 of 9

Center Marker

The center of the recording screen will be displayed as [+].

Highlight

When the Auto Review function is activated or when playing back, white saturated areas appear blinking in black and white.

Zebra Pattern

Indicates parts that may become white saturated through overexposure in a zebra pattern. You can select a brightness value between 50% and 105%. In Zebra 2, you can select OFF. If you select 100% or 105%, only the areas that are already white saturated are displayed in a zebra pattern. The smaller the value is, the wider the brightness range to be processed as a zebra pattern will be.

Monochrome Live View

You can display the recording screen in black and white. This function is convenient when a black and white screen will make it easier to set focus with Manual Focus.

Constant Preview

You can check the effects of the chosen aperture and shutter speed on the recording screen in Manual Exposure Mode. Some camera makers call this Live View.

Custom settings page 6 of 9

Expo.Meter

Display the exposure meter.
- Set to ON to display the Exposure meter when performing Program Shift, setting aperture, and setting shutter speed.
- Unsuitable areas of the range are displayed in red.
- When the Exposure meter is not displayed, switch the display information for screen by pressing DISP.
- If no operations are performed for approximately 4 seconds, the Exposure meter disappears.
LVF Disp. Style

This will set the display style of the viewfinder. You can choose between detailed information (icons), tilt sensor display or without any information.

Monitor Disp. Style

This will set the display style of the screen. Here too, you can choose between detailed information (icons), tilt sensor display or without any information.

Monitor Info. Disp.

Display the recording information screen.

Viewfinder style: Scales down images slightly so that you can better review the composition of the images.

Monitor style: Scales images to fill the entire screen so that you can see their details.

Rec Area

This changes the angle of view during motion picture recording and still picture recording. Displays the recording area according to the angle of view for still picture recording or video.

Custom settings page 7 of 9

Remaining Disp.

This will switch display between the number of recordable pictures and available recording time.

Auto Review

Displays a picture immediately after it is taken.

FN Button Set

You can assign various recording and other functions to the function buttons.

Lens Position Resume

Saves the focus position when you turn off the Lumix GX8. When an interchangeable lens that is compatible with power zoom is in use, the zoom position is also saved.

Q.MENU

In Custom operations, you can customise the Q Menu according to your liking.

You can add a maximum of 15 preferred settings to the Quick Menu.
1. Press Q.MENU to display the Quick Menu.
2. Press down to select the custom tool and then press MENU/SET.
3. Press left/right arrow to select the menu item in the top row and then press MENU/SET.
4. Press left/right to select the empty space in the bottom row and then press MENU/SET. (You can also set the menu item by dragging it from the top row to the bottom row)
5. Press return to switch to the recording screen.
Custom settings page 8 of 9

Video Button

Enables/disables the motion picture button.

Power Zoom Lens

Change the settings for a power zoom lens. Sets the screen display and lens operations when using an interchangeable lens that is compatible with power zoom.
- Disp Focal Length: When you zoom, the focal distance is displayed and you can confirm the zoom position.
- Step Zoom: When you operate the zoom with this setting [ON], the zoom will stop at positions corresponding to predetermined distances.
- Zoom Speed: You can set the zoom speed for zoom operations for both stills and vide to high, medium or low.
- Zoom Ring: When set to OFF] the operations controlled by the zoom ring are disabled to prevent accidental operation.
Eye Sensor

This sets the automatic viewfinder/monitor switching functionality. Automatic viewfinder/monitor switching enables the eye sensor to switch the display to the viewfinder automatically when you bring your eye or an object near it.

You can select whether to Turn off the monitor when the EVF is engaged with the Eye sensor, and also the Eye Sensor sensitivity.

Touch Settings

Enables/disables the Touch screen operation.
- Touch Screen: All touch operations are turned on.
- Touch Tab: Operations of tabs are enabled.
- Touch AF: Operation to bring the subject you touch into focus AF or adjust the focus and brightness AF+AE are enabled.
- Touch Pad AF: Operation to move the AF area by touching the monitor when the viewfinder is in use.
Touch Scroll

This allows you to set the speed of continuously forwarding or rewinding pictures using touch operation.

Custom settings page 9 of 9

Menu Guide

Sets whether or not to display a selection screen when you set the mode dial to SCN.

Shoot w/o Lens

Sets whether or not the shutter can be released when no lens is attached to the main body.

MENU → Setup Menu → page 1 of 5 (General Camera Setup)

Clock Set

You have already probably set time and date when you first turned on the Panasonic GX8, but you can also change this here.

World Time

Sets the times for the region where you live (HOME) and your travel destination (DESTINATION). Time and date will be altered to reflect the local time and date at your travel destination.

Travel Date

If you set Travel Setup, elapsed days of your trip i.e. which day of the trip based on its departure and return dates will be recorded The travel date is automatically canceled if the current date is after the return date.

If you set Location, the name of the travel destination that you enter will be recorded.

Wi-Fi

It’s possible to control your Panasonic GX8 with a smartphone or a tablet, display pictures on TV, print Wirelessly, Send images to a PC or use Web Services from Panasonic all via WiFi.

To use the Wi-Fi function on this camera, a wireless access point is needed off course.

By default, Wi-Fi is assigned to the Fn6 button when the Panasonic Lumix GX8 is in Recording Mode, while it is assigned to Fn1 when the camera is in Playback Mode. You can assign it to any button you want.

When you want to connect to WiFi, simply press this button.

Wi-Fi Setup

Priority of Remote Device: Sets either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be used during remote recording.
- Wi-Fi Password: You can improve security by enabling password entry for a direct connection to a smartphone.
- LUMIX CLUB: Acquires or changes the “LUMIX CLUB” login ID.
- PC Connection: You can set the workgroup. To send images to a PC, a connection to the same workgroup as the destination PC is required.
- Device Name: You can change the name (SSID) of this unit.
- Wi-Fi Function Lock: To prevent incorrect operation and use of the Wi-Fi function by a third party and to protect saved personal information, protect the Wi-Fi function with a password.
- Network Address: Displays the MAC address and IP address of this unit.
- Approved Regulations: Displays the certification number for radio regulations.
Beep

This allows you to set the electronic sound and the electronic shutter sound. Remember this will be off if you’re in Silent Mode!

MENU → Setup Menu → page 2 of 5 (General Camera Setup)

Live View Mode

This sets the viewfinder frame rate, to either 30 or 60fps. At 60fps you’ll see movement smoother at the cost of battery life.

Monitor Display

This sets the monitor frame rate to either 30fps or 60fps. Again, at 60fps you’ll see movement smoother at the cost of battery life.

Monitor Luminance

These settings will affect how and when brightness of the monitor is adjusted.

Auto: The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright it is around the camera.

Mode 1: Makes the monitor brighter than normal.

Mode 2: Set the monitor to the standard brightness.

Mode 3: Makes the monitor brighter than standard.

Economy

These settings will determine the way the camera handles inactivity on your part to save battery life.
- Sleep Mode: The Lumix GX8 is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time selected on the setting.
- Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi): The camera is automatically turned off if it is not connected to a Wi-Fi network and has not been used for 15 minutes (
- Auto LVF/ Monitor Off: The monitor/viewfinder is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time selected on the setting.
- Power Save LVF Shooting: If you display the monitor using the viewfinder/monitor automatic switching function, the camera will turn off automatically after being left idle.
USB Mode

Sets the communication method when connecting using the USB connection cable.
- Select on Connection: Select this setting to select the USB communication system when connecting to another device.
- PC Storage: Select this setting to export images to a connected PC.
- PC Tether: Select this setting to control the Lumix GX8 from a PC installed with supported software.
- Pictbridge PTP: Select this setting when connecting to a printer supporting PictBridge.
MENU → Setup Menu → page 3 of 5 (General Camera Setup)

TV Connection

Set the format for the HDMI output when playing back on the HDMI compatible TV and monitor connected with this unit using the HDMI cable. It’s possible to set it to Auto or 4K, 1080p, 1080i, etc…

Menu Resume

Stores the location of the last-used menu item for each menu, so that when you enter that menu, the last opened page is used.

Menu Background

Set the background color for the menu screen.

Menu Information

Descriptions of menu items or their settings are displayed on the menu screen.

Language

Set the language displayed on the screen.

MENU → Setup Menu → page 4 of 5 (General Camera Setup)

Version Disp

This enables the firmware versions of the camera and lens to be checked before an upgrade for instance.

Self Timer Auto

Set whether to cancel the self-timer when the unit is turned off.

No.Reset

Reset the file number of the next recording to 0001.

Reset

The following settings are reset to the default:
- Recording settings.
- Setup settings Wi-Fi Setup and Bluetooth settings.
- Custom settings (Face Recog. and[Profile Setup settings.
- Setup/custom settings (except for Wi-Fi Setup, Bluetooth, Face Recog. and Profile Setup).
Reset Wi-Fi Settings

Reset all Wi-Fi settings used to the factory defaults.

MENU → Setup Menu → page 5 of 5 (General Camera Setup)

Pixel Refresh

It will perform optimization of imaging device and image processing. Use this function when you start seeing hot or dead pixels in your images.

Sensor Cleaning

Dust reduction to blow off the debris and dust that have affixed to the front of the imaging device is performed.Level

Format

Format the card before recording a picture with this unit.

Since data cannot be recovered after formatting, make sure to back up necessary data in advance.

MENU → Playback Menu → Page 1 of 4

Slide Show

You can play back the pictures you have taken in synchronization with music, and you can do this in sequence while leaving a fixed interval between each of the pictures.

You can also put together a slide show composed of only still pictures, only motion pictures, etc.

You can change the settings for slide show playback by selecting [Effect] or [Setup] on the slide show menu screen.

Playback Mode

Playback in Normal Play, Picture Only or Video Only can be selected.

Location Logging

You can write location information sent from a smartphone (latitude and longitude) on images.

You need to install the Panasonic Image App on your smartphone to do this.

RAW Processing

You can process the pictures taken in RAW format. The processed pictures will be saved in JPEG format.
- White Balance: Allows you to select a White Balance preset and adjust it. If you select an item you can process the image with the setting at the time of recording.
- Brightness correction: Allows you to correct the brightness within the range between – 2 EV and +2 EV.
- Photo Style: Allows you to select a photo style effect.
- i.Dynamic: Allows you to select an i.Dynamic setting.
- Contrast: Allows you to adjust the contrast.
- Highlight: Allows you to adjust the brightness of bright portions.
- Shadow: Allows you to adjust the brightness of dark portions.
- Saturation and Color Tone: Allows you to adjust the saturation.
- Filter Effect: Allows you to select a filter effect.
- Noise Reduction: Allows you to adjust the noise reduction setting.
- i.Resolution: Allows you to select an i.Resolution setting.
- Sharpness: Allows you to adjust the resolution effect.
Clear Retouch

Remove unwanted objects and such right from the camera menu. The erasure operation can only be performed by touching. Clear Retouch automatically enables the touch operation.

MENU → Playback Menu → Page 2 of 4

Title Edit

You can add text (comments) to pictures. After text has been registered, it can be stamped in prints using Text Stamp.

Text Stamp

You can stamp recording information like names, dates, places on recorded images.

Video Divide

Recorded motion picture and 6K/4K burst files can be divided in two. It is recommended for when you want to divide a part you need with a part you do not need.

Time Lapse Video

This function allows you to create a motion picture from a picture group recorded with Time Lapse Shot.

Stop Motion Video

A Motion picture is created from group pictures taken with Stop Motion Animation.

MENU → Playback Menu → Page 3 of 4

Resize

To allow easy posting to web pages, attachment to e-mail etc., picture size (number of pixels) is reduced.

Cropping

You can enlarge and then clip the important part of the recorded picture.

Rotate

Rotate pictures manually in 90 degree steps.

Rotate Disp.

This mode allows you to display pictures vertically if they were recorded holding the Lumix GX8 vertically.

Favorite

You can do the following if a mark has been added to pictures and they have been set as favourites:
- Play back the pictures set as favourites only as a slide show.
- Play back only the pictures set as favourites. ([Favorite Play)
MENU → Playback Menu → Page 4 of 4

Print Set

DPOF “Digital Print Order Format” is a system that allows the user to select which pictures to print, how many copies of each picture to print and whether or not to print the recording date on the pictures when using a DPOF compatible photo printer or photo printing store.

Protect

You can set protection for pictures you do not want to delete by mistake.

Face Rec Edit

You can clear and replace all information relating to face recognition in selected images.

Picture Sort

You can set the order in which the camera displays images during playback.Either via file name or date/time.

Delete Confirmation

This sets which option, Yes or No, will be highlighted first when the confirmation screen for deleting a picture is displayed.

Quick access with the Q Menu (Fn 2)

The most commonly used settings can be accessed through what is called the Q Menu. This is the FN2 button that you’ll find right next to the screen, above the trash bucket button.

The features that can be adjusted using Quick Menu are determined by the mode or a display style the Lumix GX8 is in.

Photo Style

This applies only to Jpeg images, and the RAW preview when you load them into an app like Lightroom.. You can select a colour effect here.
- Standard: standard Panasonic colour and contrast rendering.
- Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
- Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.
- Monochrome: Monochrome (black and white)effect with no color shades.
- L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
- Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
- Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
- Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.
As mentioned earlier, it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customise the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.
- Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.
- Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.
- Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.
- Saturation: add more vividness to the colours. Or remove some.
- Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.
Motion Pic. Set

You can change bitrate and frame-rate for video here, as well as select the appropriate movie container.

AVCHD

MP4

Picture Setting

You can quickly change picture size and picture quality here for your Jpeg’s.

These are the aspect ratios available:
- 4:3: native sensor ratio
- 3:2: the ratio used in full frame cameras
- 16:9: for a wider looking view
- 1:1: Square aspect ratio, mostly used for social sharing
Quality wise, you can choose between Small (S), Medium (M) and Large (L) files sizes. Obviously, Large will have the best quality Jpeg’s, at the expense of larger files. If you only shoot Jpeg (and not RAW) set it to Large. If you shoot both (Jpeg+RAW, see next screen), you could set it to small or medium since you’ll always work with the RAW in post processing. This way, you’ll still have a Jpeg for sharing quickly online or as a reference whilst still saving some space.

Quality

Probably the most important setting is Quality. You can select either Jpeg, where the RAW data from the sensor is processed by an in-camera algorithm to produce a viewable image, or save your images in this RAW format. RAW retains all the data of the sensor, and is meant to be edited afterwards in a desktop application like Lightroom or Luminar. Saving as RAW means that you have much more creative freedom afterwards to push shadows or pull highlights, sharpen and enhance your image in any way you please. A Jpeg retains only a fraction of this information, according to the algorithm inside the Lumix GX8 which might or might not suit your style and/or needs.

Hence, my recommendation is always to shoot RAW or RAW Jpeg. This does mean larger files, but SD cards are inexpensive compared to your beautiful new Lumix. But some photographers prefer to shoot in Jpeg only because they are for instance not interested in post-processing images. In this case, I would set the Jpeg to the highest quality setting.

AFS/AFF

AFS is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Single and AFF is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Flexible. In AFS, the focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway and in AFF focus is continuously readjusted according to the movement of the subject. See AFF as a function between Single AF and Continuous AF.

This can easily be changed by using the dial on the right of the ECF too:

The AFC function below AFS/AFF continuously changes focus according to the movement of your subject.

Some more info on these modes for clarification:
- AFS will find focus and stay focused at that distance until you take a photo or release the shutter button. This is handy if you want to focus and then recompose your shot for instance.
- AFF will do the same unless it detects subject movement, at which time it will temporarily switch to AFC operation in order to re-focus.
- AFC won’t start to seek focus until you half-press the shutter, and will continually evaluate subject movement and change focus as needed.
- With AFS you can can lock focus on a particular point, then swing the camera to get the right framing; with AFC, it will not lock focus, but will keep re-focusing. That’s why Pinpoint focusing can’t be used with AFC.
AF Mode

This allows the focusing method that suits the positions and number of the subjects to be selected. There are 6 different methods available, each suited for different scenarios.

Face/Eye Detection

A person’s face, eyes, and body (the entire body or the upper half of the body) are automatically detected

When the Lumix GX8 detects a person’s face or body, an AF area is displayed over the detected person.
Yellow: This is the AF area for the person to be brought into focus. The camera automatically selects the person.

White: These are the AF areas for people other than the person to be brought into focus. This type of AF area is displayed when more than one person is detected

When a person’s face or eyes are detected, the eye closer to the camera will be brought into focus, if the eyes are inside the yellow frame.

The camera can detect the faces of up to 15 people. To specify the person or eye to be brought into focus, align an AF area with the desired person or eye. You can do so easily by touching a person indicated with an AF area.

Tracking

The Lumix GX8 keeps adjusting the focus and exposure automatically to the specified moving object. Perform either of the following operations to lock the subject to be tracked:

Use a button: aim the AF tracking frame D over the subject, and press the shutter button halfway.

Use the touch screen: touch the subject on the screen

If it fails to lock, AF area will flash in red, and disappear.

The AF area turns yellow while the subject is locked and green while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Press the Menu button to cancel the lock.

49 Area

Widest setting with all AF points used. Up to 49 AF areas can be focused. This is effective when your subject is not in the center of the screen.

Custom Multi

From among 48 AF areas, you can freely set the optimum shape of the AF area for the subject.

1-Area

The camera focuses on the subject in the AF area on the screen.

Pinpoint

You can achieve a more precise focus on a point that is smaller than 1-Area. If you press the shutter button halfway, the screen that lets you check the focus by enlarging it.

Burst Shot Setting

You can choose your bust shot setting here for continuous drive mode.

Burst shooting means that you’ll shoot continuously when you press the shutter button. You can apply different Burst Mode settings to Burst Shot 1 and and Burst Shot 2 Setting in these menus.

You’ll see SH (for super high burst rates), SH pre (which actually goes back a few seconds in time and saves these images too). These SH modes are only available with the electronic shutter. Version 2 is always faster that version 1.

Then we have High, Medium and Low which work with the Mechanical shutter too. The actual burst rate will be higher if you shoot Jpeg only.

Metering Mode

You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the Lumix GX8. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:

Multiple: This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.

Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.

Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.

Exposure Comp

If you feel like your Lumix GX8 is over- or underexposing your images (or you want to purposely underexpose), you can dial in what is called exposure compensation here. A range of plus minus 5 is available here to correct the auto exposure of the camera.

ISO sensitivity

Sets the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when you use Auto ISO or i ISO. Lower Limit should be set to 200 and upper limit to 3200, this is the range where you’ll get usable images without too much noise.

Conclusion

So this was a quick run-though of all the Panasonic GX8 Menu items, with pointers, tips and tricks along the way. This information should get you familiarised with this fantastic mirrorless camera. If you would like any clarification or extra information on any functionality here, let me know through the comment section below. Happy shooting!
February 1, 2018
Panasonic Lumix GX7 settings, tips and tricks
Panasonic Lumix GX7 settings, tips and tricks

Introduction

If you were looking for a small micro-four-thirds camera with a stabilised sensor at an attractive price point, I’m sure you have not regretted buying the Panasonic Lumix GX7. You can achieve a high color reproduction in the display based on the field sequential system.Seamless 16MP Photos and Full HD Video 1080/60p. The very popular Creative Control mode performs beautifully with 22 filter effects. You can even adjust the parameter of each filter effect to capture your true artistic vision.

Key Features
- 16MP CMOS Four Thirds sensor
- ISO 200-25600 (extendable ISO 125)
- Up to 5 FPS continuous shooting (40 FPS with electronic shutter)
- 3 inch tiltable touch LCD with 1,040,000 dots
- Flip-up electronic viewfinder with 2,764,800 dots and eye sensor
- 1080/60p/30p/24p HD video (AVCHD/MPEG-4) with PASM control
- Creative Control mode with 22 filter effects + PSAM
Whether you’re a beginner or advanced photographer, there is always more to learn, and I’ll be going over the entire Menu structure in this post, giving you tips, pointers, and tricks along the way.

Diving into the MENU system

When you switch on your Panasonic Lumix GX7 you’ll be asked to enter a date, time and timezone. This setting is necessary, as all images captured will have a timestamp, making it easy to find your favorite pictures in the future. After this is setup, press the MENU button. You’ll see a range of icons and pages. We’ll start at page 1 of the camera Icon (camera settings)

MENU → Camera Icon → page 1 of 7 (also called the Rec menu)

Photo Style

This applies only to Jpeg images, and the RAW preview. You can select a colour effect here.
- Standard: standard Panasonic colour and contrast rendering.
- Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
- Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.
- Monochrome: Monochrome (black and white)effect with no color shades.
- L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
- Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
- Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
- Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.
it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customise the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.
- Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.
- Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.
- Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.
- Saturation: add more vividness to the colours. Or remove some.
- Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.
Aspect Ratio

You can change the aspect ratio of your photos here. Changing the aspect ratio can be used as a way to boost your creativity, for instance landscapes often look great with a 16:9 ratio, or for sharing on Instagram, a 1:1 crop might suit you better.

An M43 (Micro Four-thirds) camera has a native aspect ratio of (not surprisingly) 4:3. You should realise that changing the aspect ratio to anything else than this will actually crop the sensor, meaning that you’ll lose pixels. You should look at it as re-framing your image (like you can do in Lightroom or other photo editors) inside the Lumix GX7. Jpeg’s will be stored with the chosen ratio, but RAW images (although previewed with the chosen ratio), will still have the full information of the 4:3 sensor retained.

These are the aspect ratios available:
- 4:3: native sensor ratio
- 3:2: the ratio used in full frame cameras
- 16:9: for a wider looking view
- 1:1: Square aspect ratio, mostly used for social sharing
Picture Size

Picture Size sets the number of pixels for Jpeg (nor RAW). The higher the numbers of pixels, the more detail your pictures will have. We’ll have a look at what the number of pixels are when set to Jpeg Large (L).
- When the aspect ratio is set to 4:3, you use all the 16 MP of the sensor for a maximum image size of 4592 x 3448.
- When the aspect ratio is 16:9, you only use a wide crop of the sensor for a maximum image size of 4592 x 2584.
- When the aspect ratio is 3:2 you use a crop of the sensor with an 4592 x 3064 image size.
- When the aspect ratio is 1:1, you use a square crop of the sensor for an 3424 x 3424 image size.
The Panasonic GX7 also has a digital teleconverter option, allowing you to zoom in by a factor of times 2 or times 4. This can be a handy feature if you don’t shoot RAW (see next item for more info). Thanks to in-body digital processing, the resulting Jpegs actually retain a larger image size than what you’d expect of de facto cropping the sensor by a factor 2 or 4. I would however only recommend using this feature if you’re a die hard jpeg shooter, since using RAW files and developing your images in Lightroom or another app will almost always get you better results.

Quality

Probably the most important setting is Quality. You can select either Jpeg, where the RAW data from the sensor is processed by an in-camera algorithm to produce a viewable image, or save your images in this RAW format. RAW retains all the data of the sensor, and is meant to be edited afterwards in a desktop application like Lightroom or Luminar. Saving as RAW means that you have much more creative freedom afterwards to push shadows or pull highlights, sharpen and enhance your image in any way you please. A Jpeg retains only a fraction of this information, according to the algorithm inside the Lumix GX7 which might or might not suit your style and/or needs.

Hence, my recommendation is always to shoot RAW or RAW + Jpeg. This does mean larger files, but SD cards are inexpensive compared to your beautiful new Lumix. But some photographers prefer to shoot in Jpeg only because they are for instance not interested in post-processing images. In this case, I would set the Jpeg to the highest quality setting.

Metering Mode

You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the camera. If you feel that the Lumix GX7 takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:
- Multiple: This is the method in which the Panasonic GX7 measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
- Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
- Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.
MENU → Camera Icon → page 2 of 7 (also called the Rec menu)

Burst Rate

You can choose your bust shot setting here for continuous drive mode.

Burst shooting means that you’ll shoot continuously when you press the shutter button.

You’ll see SH (for super high burst rates), This SH modes are only available with the electronic shutter. Then we have High, Medium and Low which work with the Mechanical shutter too. The actual burst rate will be higher if you shoot Jpeg only.

Auto Bracket

The Bracket function allows you to take multiple pictures while automatically adjusting a setting like exposure or aperture by pressing the shutter button.

Possible bracket types:
- Exposure Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix will sequentially take multiple images with different exposures. You can select the number of pictures to be taken and the exposure range (from 1/3 EV to 1 EV stops difference).
- Aperture Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix will sequentially take multiple images at different apertures. Either select all apertures or a number of shots (3-5) within a selected range.
- Focus Bracket:Press the shutter button and the Panasonic GX7 will sequentially take multiple images with different focus positions. You can select the distance between focus positions, the number of exposures and the sequence from far to near or the other way around.
- White Balance Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix GX7 will take three pictures with different white balance settings automatically
- White Balance Bracket (color temperature): Press the shutter button once to take three pictures with different White Balance Color Temperature values automatically. You can also set the correction range by touching the up/down slider on the screen.
Self Timer

In this menu, you can select what type of self timer you’d like to use: a 10 second delay and one shot, 10 seconds with 3 shots with 2 second intervals or a 2 second delay, all after pressing the shutter.

Highlight Shadow

This allows you to lighten the shadows and darkens the highlights in your image (or video). So this is a method of creating balance in your image if you feel like the highlights are too strong or the shadows too dark. You have 4 presets available, and you can also make 3 custom presets yourself:
- Standard: no adjustments is set.
- Raise the contrast: Bright areas are brightened, and dark areas are darkened.
- Lower the contrast: Bright areas are darkened, and dark areas are brightened.
- Brighten dark areas: Dark areas are brightened.
- Custom: make your own preset.
This is how to adjust the parameters for Custom presets:
1. Rotate the front/rear dial to adjust the brightness of bright/dark portions.
3. A – Bright portion
4. B – Dark portion
  - The rear dial is for adjusting dark areas, and the front dial is for adjusting bright areas.
  - To register a preferred setting, press ▲, and select the destination where the custom setting will be registered to [Custom1]/[Custom2]/[Custom3].
  - Adjustments can also be made by dragging the graph.
5. Press [MENU/SET].
  - The screen display can be switched by pressing [DISP.] on the brightness adjustment screen
  - .
  - Turning off this unit will return the setting adjusted with / / / back to the default setting.
i. Dynamic

This setting will change contrast and exposure when there is a big difference from the darkest area to the brightest are in your image. What really happens is that the GX7 adjusts the exposure in order to capture more details in the highlights. You can choose between High, Standard, Low or Off.

This naturally causes an under-exposure in the shadow areas. But inside the jpeg engine, the Lumix GX7 will compensate for this by boosting shadows. The downside here is that this will obviously lead to more noise in the boosted regions, but because this is done with data directly coming from the sensor, it can be quite useful if you are a jpeg shooter.

There is also an impact on RAW images, because the exposure will be underexposed.

MENU → Camera Icon → page 3 of 7 (also called the Rec menu)

i. Resolution

Another jpeg only functionality, i-Resolution is a form of sharpening. High, Standard, Low and Off are selectable, and you should see these like the threshold for sharpening in an application like Lightroom. Many photographers discard these intelligent functions, and if you shoot RAW only, it’s not that important for you (except i Dynamic which can change your exposure plus or minus 1/3 stop). But if you shoot jpeg only, you should set it to Low at least, since most of the time RAW files would be sharpened in post processing too.

HDR

You can combine 3 pictures with different levels of exposure into a single picture with rich gradation. You can minimize the loss of gradations in bright areas and dark areas when, for example, the contrast between the background and the subject is large.

Two settings are available:
- Dynamic Range: Either set this to auto where the camera decides the exposure difference between shots or plus/minus 1, 2 or 3 EV.
- Auto Align: the Lumix GX7 will align your three shots, for handheld shooting or turn this feature off when you use a tripod.
Multi Exp.

Gives an effect like multi exposure. (layering images on top of each other, up to 4).
1. Decide on the composition, and take the first picture.
2. After taking the picture, press the shutter button halfway down to take the next picture.
3. Press up/down to select the item and then press MENU/SET to either go to the next image, retake your image or exit.$Shooting the second, third, and fourth exposures
4. Press down to select Exit and then press MENU/SET.
5. Your multiple exposure is made and saved.
Two settings are available:
- Auto gain: the camera automatically adjusts the gain of the separate images to match.
- Overlay: if set to ON, you can apply Multi Exposure to previously recorded images.
Time Lapse Shot

You can take a sequential number of images with relatively long delays in between to achieve a time-lapse movie
1. Switch to Time Lapse Shot if it is not selected.
2. change start time and shooting interval according to your preferences.
3. press te shutter half way to exit the menu.
4. press the shutter to start your time-lapse.
Stop Motion Animation

You can take a sequential number of images with relatively long delays in between to achieve a stop motion/animation.
1. Switch to Stop Motion Animation
2. Change auto shooting and shooting interval according to your preferences
3. press te shutter half way to exit the menu.
4. press the shutter to start your time-lapse.
5. move the subject per frame
6. press the folder menu to end the recording
MENU → Camera Icon → page 4 of 7 (also called the Rec menu)

Panorama Settings

You can change settings for the Panorama shot mode on your mode dial here.
- Direction: sets the recording direction to either horizontal or vertical.
- Picture Size: set to either Standard or Wide.
Electronic Shutter

You can use either the mechanical or electronic shutter.

Remember that in artificial light or when using a flash, you best use the mechanical shutter only to avoid artefacts.

Shutter Delay

To reduce the influence of hand shake or shutter vibration, shutter is released after the specified time has passed. 1, 2, 4 or 8 second delay are selectable. Keep your hands steady and don’t use this delay, else you might miss that critical moment.

Flash

You’ll find all the flash functions in this menu for the built-in flash as well as any hotshoe flash you would want to use.

If you’d like to use the built in flash, you’ll need to pop it up using this button:

Using a flash takes some skill, but you have a couple of tweaks available for you if you want to make the most of your photography.

Firing Mode
- TTL: The camera automatically sets the flash output. This system meters the light coming through the lens, this includes both ambient and flash light. It calculates the best exposure according to these measurements. Preferred for most users.
- Manual: Set the luminosity ratio of the flash manually. 1/1 means full power, and you can decrease the power to an output that best suits your scenery. It’s not the easiest way to use a flash, but you’ll gain a lot of knowledge in how to balance your flash and ambient light this way.
Flash Mode

like your smartphone camera, you can tell the flash to always be on, turn it off or use a ‘pro’ feature called slow sync. In Slow Sync, the Lumix GX7 will attempt to balance the ambient light with the light of the flash, even in near darkness by slowing down the shutter speed.

These three options are available for the built-in flash. If you’re using a hotshoe flash, or a controller for off camera flashes, you’ll have a few more modes available:

Flash Synchro
- 1st: the flash will sync with the first movement of the shutter (when it opens). This is the normal mode used for normal photography.
- 2nd:The flash fires right before the second operation of an exposure, namely the closing of the shutter.
Second curtain sync is often uses for creative effect, where you’d see the light source appear behind the subject.

Flash Adjust

You can adjust the output power of the flash here in 1/3EV steps in TTL metering mode. In essence, this will give you more or less flash power than when set to zero. If you, for instance , feel that there is always too much flash light in your photos, you could dial it down a little here.

Auto Exposure Comp.

Normally, when you use the compensation dial on the Lumix GX7 body, you’ll also increase or decrease the flash output power. You can turn this OFF here, so the compensation dial will only affect your exposure (brighter or darker) and not flash power.

Wireless Flash Settings

If you want up your game in regards to flash photography, you’ll quickly turn to wireless flashes. These will enable you to use the flash power in a creative way, adjusting power and angle of light by positioning your off-camera flashes differently. Panasonic make a few wireless enabled flashes like the DMW-FL200L, DMW-FL360L or DMW-FL580L, but you can also invest in a few third party brands like Godox. An entire book could be written (and probably has been) on this subject. But for nowWe’ll stick with what is in the menu system.
- Wireless: set to ON if you want to use a wireless flash.
- Wireless Channel: Select the channel you have set for the wireless flashes.
- Wireless Setup: You’ll have three groups of flashes available (A, B and C) as well as your on-camera hotshoe controller flash.. Each flash group can be set to TTL (metering through the lens), Auto, Manual or OFF. You can also dial in flash adjust +-3 EV per group here.
Wireless FP

FP is most commonly known as high speed sync. This system uses a series of high speed flash burst in sync with the shutter in order to achieve flash at high shutter speeds. This is useful in situations where you’d normally be overpowered by sunlight and/or you want to shoot at large apertures for a shallow depth-of-field effect.

You can enable or disable this function for wireless flashes here.

Red-Eye Removal

If you use a flash when using Red-Eye Reduction, the Panasonic GX7 will automatically detect red-eye and corrects the picture.

MENU → Camera Icon → page 5 of 7 (also called the Rec menu)

ISO Limit Set

Sets the upper limits of the ISO sensitivity when you use Auto ISO or i ISO. Lower Limit should be set to 200 and upper limit to 1600, this is the range where you’ll get usable images without too much noise.

ISO Increments

Choose the increments of exposure changes between 1/3 EV or 1 EV.

Extended ISO

ISO sensitivity can be set up to minimum of ISO 100. Base ISO of the sensor is 200, so this extended ISO basically halves this in software, with a slight decrease in quality.

Long Shtr NR

The Lumix GX7 will automatically apply noise reduction to long exposures. This applies to both Jpeg and RAW files. A black frame is taken after your initial shot to measure the noise present. Since many environmental factors (like temperature and location) have an effect on the amount of noise that you’ll see, this is the best way to determine what is noise in your frame. This data is then subtracted from your image for a noise-free (more-or-less) result.

Shading Comp.

All lenses have a lens profile that registers both distortion and shading in the corners at all apertures. These lens profiles can be applied in-camera to counter unwanted vignetting in your images. Especially important for jpeg shooters to turn this on. RAW shooters can apply these corrections later on (and with better results) in a desktop application like DXO optics Pro.

MENU → Camera Icon → page 6 of 7 (also called the Rec menu)

Ex. Tele Conv.

You can digitally enlarge pictures without too much quality deterioration with this function. Only for jpeg use, you can extend the range of your lens by times 1.4 or 1.6 using this function.

Digital Zoom

Digital zoom takes this a step further, allowing you to zoom in up to 4 times for jpeg’s. I would not recommend either of these functions, as it is better to shoot RAW in this case and crop in processing for the best possible quality.

Color Space

Select either sRGB or Adobe RGB here. Adobe RGB has a greater range of reproducible colors than sRGB, so it might be worth looking into this color space if you print to paper a lot. But remember that you’ll also need a monitor capable of reproducing the larger color range too. And this can often lead to problems when converting to sRGB or editing your images in external applications. Because of all this, I have it set to sRGB.

Image Stabilizer

The Panasonic Lumix GX7 has a stabilised sensor. The sensor inside the camera is suspended on a magnetic field and can compensate for movement like the minute shakes of your hands or any other kind of movement. There are also many lenses available with an optical image stabilisation unit, that physically move glass elements around inside the lens to do the same. Both systems have their pros and cons, and it is generally accepted that a stabilised sensor works better for wide angle lenses (below 40mm) whilst optical lens stabilisation is more efficient for the tele range. It is also possible to use both systems at the same time (called Dual I.S. or 5 Axis hybrid for video), where you’ll take advantage of the best of both worlds.

It’s also possible to use the in-body sensor stabilisation with older, manual primes that don’t relay EXIF information (like most importantly focal length in this case). You’ll need to manually set the focal length in the Focal length Set function to get an optimal performance.

Face Recog.

Face Recognition is a function on the Panasonic GX7 which finds a face resembling a registered face and priorities focus and exposure automatically. Even if the person is located towards the back or on the end of a line in a group photo, the camera can still take a clear picture.

On will automatically recognise faces, but you can also register up to six faces yourself.
1. In this Menu, select an empty frame (or overwrite one).
2. Take an picture of the face you want to register.
3. Register this face. Note that you can register up to 3 images per face for more accurate results.
MENU → Camera Icon → page 7 of 7 (also called the Rec menu)

Profile Setup

Setup names and faces of babies or pets so you can track their development mover time.

You can display these at playback or stamp the recorded images using the Text Stamp tool. This way, you’ll have a nice overview of your imageges as your child gets older.

Select the Profile Setup menu.
1. Press up/down to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET].
2. Press up/down to select [Baby1], [Baby2] or [Pet] and then press [MENU/SET].
3. Enter age and name of the pet or person.
4. Press 4 to select [Exit] and then press [MENU/SET] to finish.
MENU → Film Camera Icon → page 1 of 4 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

These are all movie related settings, and menu of them are the same as the stills related menu options. You can however (obviously) set them up differently for video.

Photo Style

This applies only to Jpeg images, and the RAW preview. You can select a colour effect here.
- Standard: standard Panasonic colour and contrast rendering.
- Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
- Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.
- Monochrome: Monochrome (black and white)effect with no color shades.
- L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
- Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
- Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
- Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.
it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customise the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.
- Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.
- Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.
- Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.
- Saturation: add more vividness to the colours. Or remove some.
- Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.
Rec Format

You can either choose to record in AVCHD or MP4 format. The higher the Bit rate value is, the higher the picture quality becomes. Since the Panasonic Lumix GX7 employs the VBR recording method, the bit rate is changed automatically depending on the subject to record. As a result, the recording time is shortened when a fast-moving subject is recorded. Different frame rates and bitrates are selectable per format in the Rec Quality setting.

Rec Quality

Select the quality of video here.

AVCHD

MP4

Exposure Mode

You can select the exposure mode for video here. Choose between these modes:
- Program (P): A semi-auto mode that automatically selects aperture and shutter time.
- Aperture (A): Choose the aperture and the GX7 will adjust the shutter speed accordingly.
- Shutter (S): Choose the shutter speed and the camera will adjust the aperture and ISO automatically according to your preferences.
- Manual (M): select both aperture and shutter speed manually.
Picture Mode

Recording method for the still pictures taken while recording a motion picture can be set with Picture Mode in the Motion Picture menu.

Motion picture priorities
- Pictures will be recorded with a picture size of S. The picture quality may be different to S of standard pictures.
- Only JPEG images are recorded when Quality]is set to RAW,
- Up to 40 still pictures can be taken during recording of the motion picture.
- In Miniature Effect of Creative Control Mode, there may be a slight delay between fully pressing the shutter button and recording.
Still picture priorities
- Pictures will be recorded with the set picture size and quality.
- The screen will go dark while recording pictures. A still picture will be recorded in the motion picture during that period, and audio is not recorded.
- Up to 10 still pictures can be taken during recording of the motion picture.
MENU → Film Camera Icon → page 2 of 4 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

Continuous AF

Focusing changes depending on the Focus Mode setting and the Continuous AF setting in this menu.

AFS/AFF/AFC:
- On: The camera automatically keeps focusing on subjects during recording.
- Off: The Lumix GX7 maintains the focus position at the start of recording.
MF

You can use manual focus.

Metering Mode

You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the camera. If you feel that the Lumix GX7 takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

Implementation of this is quite basic in this Panasonic, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:
- Multiple: This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
- Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
- Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.
Highlight Shadow

This allows you to lighten the shadows and darkens the highlights in your image (or video). So this is a method of creating balance in your image if you feel like the highlights are too strong or the shadows too dark. You have 4 presets available, and you can also make 3 custom presets yourself:
- Standard: no adjustments is set.
- Raise the contrast: Bright areas are brightened, and dark areas are darkened.
- Lower the contrast: Bright areas are darkened, and dark areas are brightened.
- Brighten dark areas: Dark areas are brightened.
- Custom: make your own preset.
For more info, see the equivalent setting for photos above.

i.Dynamic

This setting will change contrast and exposure when there is a big difference from the darkest area to the brightest are in your image. What really happens is that the camera adjusts the exposure in order to capture more details in the highlights. You can choose between High, Standard, Low or Off.

This naturally causes an under-exposure in the shadow areas. But inside the jpeg engine, the Lumix GX7 will compensate for this by boosting shadows. The downside here is that this will obviously lead to more noise in the boosted regions, but because this is done with data directly coming from the sensor, it can be quite useful.

i.Resolution

i-Resolution is a form of sharpening. High, Standard, Low and Off are selectable, and you should see these like the threshold for sharpening in an application like Lightroom. Many photographers discard these intelligent functions, and if you shoot RAW only, it’s not that important for you (except i Dynamic which can change your exposure plus or minus 1/3 stop).

MENU → Film Camera Icon → page 3 of 4 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

Rec Highlight

White saturated areas appear blinking in black and white. f there are any white saturated areas, I recommend compensating the exposure towards negative referring to the histogram and then recording.

Ex. Tele Conv.

You can digitally enlarge movies without too much quality deterioration with this function. You can extend the range of your lens by times 1.4 or 1.6 using this function.

Digital Zoom

Digital zoom takes this a step further, allowing you to zoom in up to 4 times.

Flkr Decrease

The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in your movies. 1/50,/1/60,1/100 or 1/120 second are available.

Silent Operation

The operational sound of the zoom or button operation may be recorded when it is operated during the recording of a motion picture. Using touch icons allows silent operation while recording motion pictures.

These are the icons available:

MENU → Film Camera Icon → page 4 of 4 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

Mic Level Disp.

Select if you want to display the microphone level on the recording screen.

Mic Level Adj.

Adjust the sound input level to 19 different levels (-12 dB to +6 dB).

Wind Cut

This will reduce the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone while maintaining sound quality. You can choose either High, Standard or Off. This function works only with the built-in microphone.

Custom settings page 1 of 8

You’ll find all customisable settings of the Panasonic GX7 in this Menu.

Cust. Set Mem.

Up to 3 sets of current camera settings can be registered using C1, C2, C3-1, C3-2 or C3-3. These are directly accessible via the Mode Dial.

Saving a custom setting is quite simple, set the mode dial to C1, C2 or C3, change the cameras settings to your preferences, go in the Menu to this setting and press MENU/SET on the screen.

Silent Mode

Disables operational sounds and output of light at once. • Audio from the speaker will be muted and the flash and the AF Assist lamp will be disabled.

The following settings are fixed:
- Shutter Type: ESHTR.
- Flash Mode:forced flash off.
- AF Assist Lamp: Off.
- Beep Volume: Off.
- E-Shutter Volume: Off.
AF/AE Lock

Lock focus and exposure with AF/AE LOCK. To clear the lock, press AF/AE LOCK again.

AF/AE Lock Hold

When ON is selected, focus and exposure stays locked even if you press and release AF/AE LOCK. To clear the lock, press AF/AE LOCK again.

Shutter AF

Set whether or not the focus is adjusted automatically when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

Custom settings 2 of 8

Half Press Release

The shutter will immediately fire when the shutter button is pressed halfway when this is ON.

AFS/AFF/AFC

You can change autofocus modes here. Select focus mode according to the movement of the subject and the scene you are recording. The set focus mode will be assigned to AF of the focus mode lever.
- AFS: Subject is still. AFS” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Single”. Focus is set automatically when the shutter button is pressed halfway. Focus will be fixed while it is pressed halfway.
- AFF: Movement cannot be predicted. “AFF” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Flexible”. In this mode, focusing is performed automatically when the shutter button is pressed halfway. If the subject moves while the shutter button is pressed halfway, the focus is corrected to match the movement automatically.
- AFC: Subject is moving. “AFC” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Continuous”. In this mode, while the shutter button is pressed halfway, focusing is constantly performed to match the movement of the subject. When the subject is moving, the focusing is performed by predicting the subject position at the time of recording.
Quick AF

As long as the camera is held steady, the Lumix GX7 will automatically adjust the focus and focus adjustment will then be quicker when the shutter is pressed. You’ll get better AF performance at the expense of battery life.

Eye Sensor AF

The Panasonic GX7 will automatically start autofocus when the eye sensor is activated.

Pinpoint AF Time

Sets the time for which the screen is enlarged when the shutter button is pressed halfway with Auto Focus Mode set to MF assist.

Custom settings page 3 of 8

AF Assist lamp

AF assist lamp will illuminate the subject when the shutter button is pressed half-way making it easier for the camera to focus when recording in low light conditions. Range is about 1 meter.

Direct Focus Area

Moves the AF area or MF assist using the cursor button when recording.

Focus/release Priority

This will prevent you from taking pictures when focus is not achieved.

AF+MF

When AF Lock is ON (press the shutter button halfway with the focus mode set to AFS or set AF Lock using AF/AE LOCK), you can make fine adjustments to the focus manually.

MF Assist

Sets the display method of MF Assist (enlarged screen) on the Panasonic GX7.

Custom settings page 4 of 8

MF Guide

When you set the focus manually, an MF guide that allows you to check the direction to achieve focus is displayed.

Peaking

In-focus portions (portions on the screen with clear outlines) are highlighted when focus is being adjusted manually. Great focussing aide for manual focussing. Can be set to High or Low.

Histogram

Display the histogram. A histogram is a graph that displays brightness along the horizontal axis (black to white) and the number of pixels at each brightness level on the vertical axis. It allows you to easily check a picture’s exposure.

Guide Line

This will set the pattern of guide lines displayed when taking a picture.

Highlight

When the Auto Review function is activated or when playing back, white saturated areas appear blinking in black and white.

Custom settings page 5 of 8

Constant Preview

You can check the effects of the chosen aperture and shutter speed on the recording screen in Manual Exposure Mode. Some camera makers call this Live View.

Expo.Meter

Display the exposure meter.
- Set to ON to display the Exposure meter when performing Program Shift, setting aperture, and setting shutter speed.
- Unsuitable areas of the range are displayed in red.
- When the Exposure meter is not displayed, switch the display information for screen by pressing DISP.
- If no operations are performed for approximately 4 seconds, the Exposure meter disappears.
Dial Guide

When turned on, the operation guide for dials, buttons, etc. is displayed on the recording screen. (Like you see on the screenshots)

LVF Disp. Style

This will set the display style of the viewfinder. You can choose between detailed information (icons), tilt sensor display or without any information.

Monitor Disp. Style

This will set the display style of the screen. Here too, you can choose between detailed information (icons), tilt sensor display or without any information.

Monitor style:

Scales images to fill the entire screen so that you can see their details.

Custom settings page 6 of 8

Monitor Info. Disp.

Display the recording information screen.

Viewfinder style: Scales down images slightly so that you can better review the composition of the images.

Monitor style: Scales images to fill the entire screen so that you can see their details.

Rec Area

This changes the angle of view during motion picture recording and still picture recording. Displays the recording area according to the angle of view for still picture recording or video.

Remaining Disp.

This will switch display between the number of recordable pictures and available recording time.

Auto Review

Displays a picture immediately after it is taken.

FN Button Set

You can assign various recording and other functions to the function buttons.

Custom settings page 7 of 8

Q.MENU

In Custom operations, you can customise the Q Menu according to your liking.

You can add a maximum of 15 preferred settings to the Quick Menu.
1. Press Q.MENU to display the Quick Menu.
2. Press down to select the custom tool and then press MENU/SET.
3. Press left/right arrow to select the menu item in the top row and then press MENU/SET.
4. Press left/right to select the empty space in the bottom row and then press MENU/SET. (You can also set the menu item by dragging it from the top row to the bottom row)
5. Press return to switch to the recording screen.
Dial Set.

Assign Dial (F/SS): Assigns the operations of the aperture value and shutter speed in Manual Exposure Mode.

Rotation (F/SS): Changes the rotation direction of the dials for adjusting the aperture value and shutter speed.

Control Dial Assignment: It sets the item to be assigned to the control dial while the recording screen is displayed.

Exposure Comp.: Assigns the Exposure Compensation to the front dial or rear dial so that you can directly adjust it.

Dial Operation Switch Setup: Sets the items to be assigned temporarily to the front/rear dials when you press the function button to which Dial Operation Switch is assigned.

Video Button

Enables/disables the motion picture button.

Power Zoom Lens

Change the settings for a power zoom lens. Sets the screen display and lens operations when using an interchangeable lens that is compatible with power zoom.
- Disp Focal Length: When you zoom, the focal distance is displayed and you can confirm the zoom position.
- Step Zoom: When you operate the zoom with this setting [ON], the zoom will stop at positions corresponding to predetermined distances.
- Zoom Speed: You can set the zoom speed for zoom operations for both stills and vide to high, medium or low.
- Zoom Ring: When set to OFF] the operations controlled by the zoom ring are disabled to prevent accidental operation.
Eye Sensor

This sets the automatic viewfinder/monitor switching functionality. Automatic viewfinder/monitor switching enables the eye sensor to switch the display to the viewfinder automatically when you bring your eye or an object near it.

You can select whether to Turn off the monitor when the EVF is engaged with the Eye sensor, and also the Eye Sensor sensitivity.

Custom settings page 8 of 8

Touch Settings

Enables/disables the Touch screen operation.
- Touch Screen: All touch operations are turned on.
- Touch Tab: Operations of tabs are enabled.
- Touch AF: Operation to bring the subject you touch into focus AF or adjust the focus and brightness AF+AE are enabled.
- Touch Pad AF: Operation to move the AF area by touching the monitor when the viewfinder is in use.
Touch Scroll

This allows you to set the speed of continuously forwarding or rewinding pictures using touch operation.

Menu Guide

Sets whether or not to display a selection screen when you set the mode dial to SCN.

Shoot w/o Lens

Sets whether or not the shutter can be released when no lens is attached to the main body.

MENU → Setup Menu → page 1 of 6 (General Camera Setup)

Clock Set

You have already probably set time and date when you first turned on the Panasonic GX7, but you can also change this here.

World Time

Sets the times for the region where you live (HOME) and your travel destination (DESTINATION). Time and date will be altered to reflect the local time and date at your travel destination.

Travel Date

If you set Travel Setup, elapsed days of your trip i.e. which day of the trip based on its departure and return dates will be recorded The travel date is automatically canceled if the current date is after the return date.

If you set Location, the name of the travel destination that you enter will be recorded.

Wi-Fi

It’s possible to control your Panasonic GX7 with a smartphone or a tablet, display pictures on TV, print Wirelessly, Send images to a PC or use Web Services from Panasonic all via WiFi.

To use the Wi-Fi function on this camera, a wireless access point is needed off course.

By default, Wi-Fi is assigned to the Fn6 button when the Lumix GX7 is in Recording Mode, while it is assigned to Fn1 when the camera is in Playback Mode. You can assign it to any button you want.

When you want to connect to WiFi, simply press this button.

Wi-Fi Setup

Priority of Remote Device: Sets either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be used during remote recording.

Wi-Fi Password: You can improve security by enabling password entry for a direct connection to a smartphone.

LUMIX CLUB: Acquires or changes the “LUMIX CLUB” login ID.

PC Connection: You can set the workgroup. To send images to a PC, a connection to the same workgroup as the destination PC is required.

Device Name: You can change the name (SSID) of this unit.

Wi-Fi Function Lock: To prevent incorrect operation and use of the Wi-Fi function by a third party and to protect saved personal information, protect the Wi-Fi function with a password.

Network Address: Displays the MAC address and IP address of this unit.

Approved Regulations: Displays the certification number for radio regulations.

Beep

This allows you to set the electronic sound and the electronic shutter sound. Remember this will be off if you’re in Silent Mode!

MENU → Setup Menu → page 2 of 6 (General Camera Setup)

Speaker Volume

Adjust the volume of the speaker to any of the 7 levels.

Monitor Display

Brightness, color, or red or blue tint of the Monitor/viewfinder can be adjusted.

Monitor Luminance

These settings will affect how and when brightness of the monitor is adjusted.

Auto: The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright it is around the camera.
- Mode 1: Makes the monitor brighter than normal.
- Mode 2: Set the monitor to the standard brightness.
- Mode 3: Makes the monitor brighter than standard.
Economy

These settings will determine the way the camera handles inactivity on your part to save battery life.
- Sleep Mode: The camera is automatically turned off if the Lumix GX7 has not been used for the time selected on the setting.
- Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi): The camera is automatically turned off if it is not connected to a Wi-Fi network and has not been used for 15 minutes (
- Auto LVF/ Monitor Off: The monitor/viewfinder is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time selected on the setting.
- Power Save LVF Shooting: If you display the monitor using the viewfinder/monitor automatic switching function, the camera will turn off automatically after being left idle.
USB Mode

Sets the communication method when connecting using the USB connection cable.
- Select on Connection: Select this setting to select the USB communication system when connecting to another device.
- PC Storage: Select this setting to export images to a connected PC.
- PC Tether: Select this setting to control the camera from a PC installed with supported software.
- Pictbridge PTP: Select this setting when connecting to a printer supporting PictBridge.
MENU → Setup Menu → page 3 of 6 (General Camera Setup)

Output

This sets how the unit connects to a television etc.

TV Aspect
- 16:9: When connecting to a 16:9 screen TV.
- 4:3:When connecting to a 4:3 screen TV.
HDMI Mode

Set the format for the HDMI output when playing back on the HDMI compatible high-definition TV connected with this unit using the HDMI mini cable.
- AUTO: The output resolution is automatically set based on the information from the connected TV.
- 1080p: The progressive method with 1080 available scan lines is used for output.
- 1080i:The interlace method with 1080 available scan lines is used for output.
- 720p: The progressive method with 720 available scan lines is used for output.
- 480p:The progressive method with 480 available scan lines is used for output.
VIERA Link

Settings that allow this unit to be controlled by the remote control of the VIERA equipment by automatically coupling this unit with the VIERA Link compatible equipment using HDMI mini cable.

3D Playback

Set the output method for 3D pictures.

Menu Resume

Stores the location of the last-used menu item for each menu, so that when you enter that menu, the last opened page is used.

Menu Background

Set the background color for the menu screen.

MENU → Setup Menu → page 4 of 6 (General Camera Setup)

Menu Information

Descriptions of menu items or their settings are displayed on the menu screen.

Language

Set the language displayed on the screen.

Version Disp

This enables the firmware versions of the camera and lens to be checked before an upgrade for instance.Folder/File Settings

Set the folder and file name patterns in which images are to be saved.

Exposure Comp. Reset

The exposure value used previously can be reset when the Recording Mode is changed or the Lumix GX7 is turned off.

Self Timer Auto Off

Set whether to cancel the self-timer when the unit is turned off.

MENU → Setup Menu → page 5 of 6 (General Camera Setup)

No.Reset

Reset the file number of the next recording to 0001.

Reset

The following settings are reset to the default:
- Recording settings.
- Setup settings Wi-Fi Setup and Bluetooth settings.
- Custom settings (Face Recog. and[Profile Setup settings.
- Setup/custom settings (except for Wi-Fi Setup, Bluetooth, Face Recog. and Profile Setup).
Reset Wi-Fi Settings

Reset all Wi-Fi settings used.

Pixel Refresh

It will perform optimization of imaging device and image processing. Use this function when you start seeing hot or dead pixels in your images.

Sensor Cleaning

Dust reduction to blow off the debris and dust that have affixed to the front of the imaging device is performed.Level

MENU → Setup Menu → page 6 of 6 (General Camera Setup)

Format

Format the card before recording with the camera. Always a good idea to format every time you start a new shoot in order to maintain the integrity of the SD card.

Since data cannot be recovered after formatting, make sure to back up necessary data in advance.

MENU → Playback Menu → Page 1 of 4

Slide Show

ou can play back the pictures you have taken in synchronization with music, and you can do this in sequence while leaving a fixed interval between each of the pictures.

You can also put together a slide show composed of only still pictures, only motion pictures, etc.

You can change the settings for slide show playback by selecting [Effect] or [Setup] on the slide show menu screen.

Playback Mode

Playback in Normal Play, Picture Only or Video Only can be selected.

Location Logging

You can write location information sent from a smartphone (latitude and longitude) on images.

You need to install “Panasonic Image App” on your smartphone to do this.

Clear Retouch

Remove unwanted objects and such right from the Lumix GX7 menu. The erasure operation can only be performed by touching. Clear Retouch automatically enables the touch operation.

Title Edit

You can add text (comments) to pictures. After text has been registered, it can be stamped in prints using the Text Stamp. Just select the picture you want and edit the text.

MENU → Playback Menu → Page 2 of 4

Text Stamp

You can stamp recording information like names, dates, places on recorded images.

Video Divide

Recorded motion picture and 4K burst files can be divided in two. It is recommended for when you want to divide a part you need with a part you do not need.

Time Lapse Video

This function allows you to create a motion picture from a picture group recorded with Time Lapse Shot.

Stop Motion Video

A Motion picture is created from group pictures taken with Stop Motion Animation.

Resize

To allow easy posting to web pages, attachment to e-mail etc., picture size (number of pixels) is reduced.

MENU → Playback Menu → Page 3 of 4

Cropping

You can enlarge and then clip the important part of the recorded picture.

Rotate

Rotate pictures manually in 90 degree steps.

Rotate Disp.

This mode allows you to display pictures vertically if they were recorded holding the Lumix GX7 vertically.

Favorite

You can do the following if a mark has been added to pictures and they have been set as favourites:
- Play back the pictures set as favourites only as a slide show.
- Play back only the pictures set as favourites. ([Favorite Play)
- Delete all the pictures not set as favourites. (All Delete Except Favourite)
Print Set

DPOF “Digital Print Order Format” is a system that allows the user to select which pictures to print, how many copies of each picture to print and whether or not to print the recording date on the pictures when using a DPOF compatible photo printer or photo printing store.

MENU → Playback Menu → Page 4 of 4

Protect

You can set protection for pictures you do not want to delete by mistake.

Face Rec Edit

You can clear and replace all information relating to face recognition in selected images.

Delete Confirmation

This sets which option, Yes or No, will be highlighted first when the confirmation screen for deleting a picture is displayed.

Quick access with the Q Menu (Fn 1 )

The most commonly used settings can be accessed through what is called the Q Menu. This is the FN1 button that you’ll find right next to the screen, above the trash bucket button.

The features that can be adjusted using Quick Menu are determined by the mode or a display style the camera is in.

Photo Style

This applies only to Jpeg images, and the RAW preview when you load them into an app like Lightroom.. You can select a colour effect here.
- Standard: standard Panasonic colour and contrast rendering.
- Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
- Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.
- Monochrome: Monochrome (black and white)effect with no color shades.
- Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
- Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
- Custom: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.
- Cinelike D: Gives priority to the dynamic range by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images. Suited for editing.
- Cinelike V: Gives priority to the contrast by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images.
As mentioned earlier, it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customise the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.
- Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.
- Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.
- Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.
- Saturation: add more vividness to the colours. Or remove some.
- Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.
Flash Mode

Set the built-in flash to a suitable setting:
- Forced Flash On: The flash is activated every time regardless of the recording conditions.
- Forced On/ Red-Eye: The flash is activated every time regardless of the recording conditions. A pre-flash is given to counter the so-called red-eye flash phenomenon.
- Slow Sync: When taking pictures against a dark background landscape, this feature will slow the shutter speed when the flash is activated. Dark background landscape will appear brighter. Use this when you take pictures of people in front of a dark background.
- Slow Sync./ Red-Eye: When taking pictures against a dark background landscape, this feature will slow the shutter speed when the flash is activated. A pre-flash is given to counter the so-called red-eye flash phenomenon.
Motion Pic. Set

You can change bitrate and frame-rate for video here, as well as select the appropriate movie container.

AVCHD

MP4

Picture Setting

You can quickly change picture size and picture quality here for your Jpeg’s.

These are the aspect ratios available:
- 4:3: native sensor ratio
- 3:2: the ratio used in full frame cameras
- 16:9: for a wider looking view
- 1:1: Square aspect ratio, mostly used for social sharing
Quality wise, you can choose between Small (S), Medium (M) and Large (L) files sizes. Obviously, Large will have the best quality Jpeg’s, at the expense of larger files. If you only shoot Jpeg (and not RAW) set it to Large. If you shoot both (Jpeg+RAW, see next screen), you could set it to small or medium since you’ll always work with the RAW in post processing. This way, you’ll still have a Jpeg for sharing quickly online or as a reference whilst still saving some space.

Quality

Probably the most important setting is Quality. You can select either Jpeg, where the RAW data from the sensor is processed by an in-camera algorithm to produce a viewable image, or save your images in this RAW format. RAW retains all the data of the sensor, and is meant to be edited afterwards in a desktop application like Lightroom. Saving as RAW means that you have much more creative freedom afterwards to push shadows or pull highlights, sharpen and enhance your image in any way you please. A Jpeg retains only a fraction of this information, according to the algorithm inside the Panasonic Lumix GX7 which might or might not suit your style and/or needs.

Hence, my recommendation is always to shoot RAW or RAW Jpeg. This does mean larger files, but SD cards are inexpensive compared to your beautiful new Lumix. But some photographers prefer to shoot in Jpeg only because they are for instance not interested in post-processing images. In this case, I would set the Jpeg to the highest quality setting.

AFS/AFF

AFS is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Single and AFF is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Flexible. In AFS, the focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway and in AFF focus is continuously readjusted according to the movement of the subject. See AFF as a function between Single AF and Continuous AF.

Some more info on these modes for clarification:
- AFS will find focus and stay focused at that distance until you take a photo or release the shutter button. This is handy if you want to focus and then recompose your shot for instance.
- AFF will do the same unless it detects subject movement, at which time it will temporarily switch to AFC operation in order to re-focus.
AF Mode

This allows the focusing method that suits the positions and number of the subjects to be selected. There are 6 different methods available, each suited for different scenarios.

Face/Eye Detection

A person’s face, eyes, and body (the entire body or the upper half of the body) are automatically detected.

When the camera detects a person’s face or body, an AF area is displayed over the detected person.
Yellow: This is the AF area for the person to be brought into focus. The Lumix GX7 automatically selects the person.

White: These are the AF areas for people other than the person to be brought into focus. This type of AF area is displayed when more than one person is detected.
When a person’s face or eyes are detected, the eye closer to the camera will be brought into focus, if the eyes are inside the yellow frame.

The Lumix GX7 can detect the faces of up to 15 people. To specify the person or eye to be brought into focus, align an AF area with the desired person or eye. You can do so easily by touching a person indicated with an AF area.

Tracking

The camera keeps adjusting the focus and exposure automatically to the specified moving object. Perform either of the following operations to lock the subject to be tracked:
- Use a button: aim the AF tracking frame D over the subject, and press the shutter button halfway.
- Use the touch screen: touch the subject on the screen.
If it fails to lock, AF area will flash in red, and disappear.

The AF area turns yellow while the subject is locked and green while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Press the Menu button to cancel the lock.

49 Area

Widest setting with all AF points used. Up to 49 AF areas can be focused. This is effective when your subject is not in the center of the screen.

Custom Multi

From among 49 AF areas, you can freely set the optimum shape of the AF area for the subject.

1-Area

The camera focuses on the subject in the AF area on the screen.

Pinpoint

You can achieve a more precise focus on a point that is smaller than 1-Area. If you press the shutter button halfway, the screen that lets you check the focus by enlarging it.

Metering Mode

You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the Lumix GX7. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:
- Multiple: This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
- Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
- Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.
Aperture Value

Manually change the aperture of your lens here.

Exposure Comp

If you feel like your Lumix GX7 is over- or underexposing your images (or you want to purposely underexpose), you can dial in what is called exposure compensation here. A range of plus minus 5 is available here to correct the auto exposure of the camera.

ISO sensitivity

Sets the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when you use Auto ISO or i ISO. Lower Limit should be set to 200 and upper limit to 3200, this is the range where you’ll get usable images without too much noise.

White Balance

Manually change white balance here or choose a preset.
- AWB: Automatic adjustment.
- Sun: When taking pictures outdoors under a clear sky.
- Cloudy: When taking pictures outdoors under a cloudy sky.
- Shade: When taking pictures outdoors in the shade.
- Incandescent Lights: When taking pictures under incandescent lights.
- Flash: When taking pictures with the flash only.
- Manual presets: The manually set value is used.
- Color temperature: When using the preset color temperature setting.
Conclusion

Take some time to go through of all the Panasonic GX7 Menu items, with pointers, tips and tricks along the way. This information should get you familiarised with this fantastic mirrorless camera. If you would like any clarification or extra information on any functionality here, let me know through the comment section below. Happy shooting!
January 31, 2018
Panasonic Lumix GX85 and GX80 settings, tips and tricks
Panasonic Lumix GX80 and GX85 settings, tips and tricks

Introduction

If you were looking for a small micro-four-thirds camera with a stabilised sensor at an attractive price point, I’m sure you have not regretted buying the Panasonic Lumix GX80 (or GX80 in Europe). This camera has a lot of features normally found in more expensive counterparts, like a swivelling screen and 4K video and it is barely bigger than the GM5. With a no anti-aliasing filter version of the 16-megapixel 4/3 “CMOS sensor and 4K video functionality, you’ll get excellent stills and movies from this little beast.

Key Features
- 16MP Four Thirds MOS sensor
- Electromagnetically driven shutter
- Depth from Defocus AF
- 2.76M-dot field sequential EVF
- 1.04M-dot tilting touchscreen display
- 4K video / photo
- 5-axis image stabilisation with Dual I.S.
- Bouncable pop-up flash
- Wi-Fi
Whether you’re a beginner or advanced photographer, there is always more to learn, and I’ll be going over the entire Menu structure in this post, giving you tips, pointers, and tricks along the way.

Diving into the MENU system

When you switch on your Panasonic Lumix GX80 you’ll be asked to enter a date, time and timezone. This setting is necessary, as all images captured will have a timestamp, making it easy to find your favorite pictures in the future. After this is setup, press the MENU button. You’ll see a range of icons and pages. We’ll start at page 1 of the camera Icon (camera settings)

MENU → Camera Icon → page 1 of 8 (also called the Rec menu)

Photo Style

This applies only to Jpeg images, and the RAW preview. You can select a colour effect here.
- Standard: standard Panasonic colour and contrast rendering.
- Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
- Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.
- Monochrome: Monochrome (black and white)effect with no color shades.
- L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
- Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
- Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
- Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.
it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customise the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.
- Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.
- Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.
- Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.
- Saturation: add more vividness to the colours. Or remove some.
- Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.
Filter Settings

The filter Settings go a step further than merely a photo style. These include artistic effects like Low Key, Sepia, Cross Process and retro stylings. You can turn them ON or OFF here, select the effect you want to use and change the settings by using the touch screen. You can also set your camera up to shoot one with and one without an image effect simultaneously.

If you’re wondering how you get to Creative Control mode, you need to set the mode dial to the paint palette.

And simply press up and down to select the image effects. You can also display the selection screen by touching the Recording Mode icon in recording screen.

These are all the image effects available:
- Expressive
- High Key
- Monochrome
- Silky Monochrome
- Cross Process
- Bleach Bypass
- Fantasy
- Sunshine: you can select the position and size of the light source here.
- Retro
- Low Key
- Dynamic Monochrome
- Impressive Art
- Toy Effect
- Miniature Effect: you can select the portion of your image that is in focus here (and where the blur effect won’t happen)
- Star Filter
- Old Days
- Sepia
- Rough Monochrome
- High Dynamic
- Toy Pop
- Soft Focus
- One Point Color: you can select the color to leave in here by using a color picker.
Aspect Ratio

You can change the aspect ratio of your photos here. Changing the aspect ratio can be used as a way to boost your creativity, for instance landscapes often look great with a 16:9 ratio, or for sharing on Instagram, a 1:1 crop might suit you better.

An M43 (Micro Four-thirds) camera has a native aspect ratio of (not surprisingly) 4:3. You should realise that changing the aspect ratio to anything else than this will actually crop the sensor, meaning that you’ll lose pixels. You should look at it as re-framing your image (like you can do in Lightroom or other photo editors) inside the camera. Jpeg’s will be stored with the chosen ratio, but RAW images (although previewed with the chosen ratio), will still have the full information of the 4:3 sensor retained.

These are the aspect ratios available:
- 4:3: native sensor ratio
- 3:2: the ratio used in full frame cameras
- 16:9: for a wider looking view
- 1:1: Square aspect ratio, mostly used for social sharing
Picture Size

Picture Size sets the number of pixels for Jpeg (nor RAW). The higher the numbers of pixels, the more detail your pictures will have. We’ll have a look at what the number of pixels are when set to Jpeg Large (L).
- When the aspect ratio is set to 4:3, you use all the 16 MP of the sensor for a maximum image size of 4592 x 3448.
- When the aspect ratio is 16:9, you only use a wide crop of the sensor for a maximum image size of 4592 x 2584.
- When the aspect ratio is 3:2 you use a crop of the sensor with an 4592 x 3064 image size.
- When the aspect ratio is 1:1, you use a square crop of the sensor for an 3424 x 3424 image size.
The Panasonic GX80 also has a digital teleconverter option, allowing you to zoom in by a factor of times 2 or times 4. This can be a handy feature if you don’t shoot RAW (see next item for more info). Thanks to in-body digital processing, the resulting Jpegs actually retain a larger image size than what you’d expect of de facto cropping the sensor by a factor 2 or 4. I would however only recommend using this feature if you’re a die hard jpeg shooter, since using RAW files and developing your images in Lightroom or another app will almost always get you better results.

Quality

Probably the most important setting is Quality. You can select either Jpeg, where the RAW data from the sensor is processed by an in-camera algorithm to produce a viewable image, or save your images in this RAW format. RAW retains all the data of the sensor, and is meant to be edited afterwards in a desktop application like Lightroom or Luminar. Saving as RAW means that you have much more creative freedom afterwards to push shadows or pull highlights, sharpen and enhance your image in any way you please. A Jpeg retains only a fraction of this information, according to the algorithm inside the camera which might or might not suit your style and/or needs.

Hence, my recommendation is always to shoot RAW or RAW + Jpeg. This does mean larger files, but SD cards are inexpensive compared to your beautiful new Lumix. But some photographers prefer to shoot in Jpeg only because they are for instance not interested in post-processing images. In this case, I would set the Jpeg to the highest quality setting.

MENU → Camera Icon → page 2 of 8 (also called the Rec menu)

AFS

AFS is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Single and AFF is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Flexible. In AFS, the focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway and in AFF focus is continuously readjusted according to the movement of the subject. See AFF as a function between Single AF and Continuous AF.

The AFC function below AFS/AFF continuously changes focus according to the movement of your subject.

Some more info on these modes for clarification:
- AFS will find focus and stay focused at that distance until you take a photo or release the shutter button. This is handy if you want to focus and then recompose your shot for instance.
- AFF will do the same unless it detects subject movement, at which time it will temporarily switch to AFC operation in order to re-focus.
- AFC won’t start to seek focus until you half-press the shutter, and will continually evaluate subject movement and change focus as needed.
- With AFS you can can lock focus on a particular point, then swing the camera to get the right framing; with AFC, it will not lock focus, but will keep re-focusing. That’s why Pinpoint focusing can’t be used with AFC.
- MF: manually focus the lens.
Metering Mode

You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the camera. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:
- Multiple: This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
- Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
- Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.
Burst Rate

You can choose your bust shot setting here for continuous drive mode.

Burst shooting means that you’ll shoot continuously when you press the shutter button.

You’ll see SH (for super high burst rates), This SH modes are only available with the electronic shutter. Then we have High, Medium and Low which work with the Mechanical shutter too. The actual burst rate will be higher if you shoot Jpeg only.

4K Photo

4K photo mode is designed to help you to capture fleeting moments by letting you shoot at an incredible 30fps. Continuous autofocus mode is automatically activated and it draws on 4K video technology to shoot 8 MP images at this fast frame rate. You’re basically recording video where you can extract the frames in-camera.

There are three 4K Photo Modes: 4K Burst, 4K Burst (S/S) and 4K Pre-Burst. These modes determine at how and when the footage will be recorded.
- In 4K Burst mode the camera shoots 4K footage for as long as you hold down the shutter release button.
- In 4K Burst (S/S), S/S stands for Start/Stop and recording is started and ended with a press of the shutter release.
- 4K Pre-Burst mode is useful for short bursts of action because it only records for 2 seconds. However, the camera starts scanning the moment it’s active and it records the 30 images from the 1 second prior to you pressing the shutter button as well as the 30 from the 1 second after you pressed it.
4K is the same, except it allows you to go up to 60 frames per second.

Extracting 8Mp stills from the GX85’s 4K Photo Mode footage is pretty easy as follows:
1. Press the play button to located the files. Clips recorded in 4K Photo Mode are marked with the 4K Photo icon to make the easy to identify. Once you’ve found the clip you want, either tap the 6K Photo Icon on-screen or the Up navigation key.
2. If you have a long clip with fleeting moments of action you may like to use the slide bar at the top to quickly scroll to an interesting bit of footage. Alternatively, there’s a playback option (button Fn1) that you can use to play and pause the movie.
3. Once you’ve found the area you’re interested in, tap the Frame View Icon to see a scrollable stack of frames, just swipe right and left to locate the best shots.
4. When you find an image you like, tap the Menu/Set button or 4K Icon to save the image. Images are saved as jpegs.
it’s possible to save all the frames from 5 second sections of your 4K movie. To do this:
1. Tap the Menu button and scroll down to Playback (the 6th tab), then scroll to the second page of options and select 4K PHOTO Bulk Saving.
2. Then swipe on the screen until you find the clip that you want to extract stills from.
3. Now use the same on-screen movie navigation controls as you used before to find the first frame of the 5 seconds that you want to pull the stills from and tap the 6K Photo icon to save it and the image from the next 5 seconds.
Bracket

The Bracket function allows you to take multiple pictures while automatically adjusting a setting like exposure or aperture by pressing the shutter button.

Possible bracket types:
- Exposure Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix will sequentially take multiple images with different exposures. You can select the number of pictures to be taken and the exposure range (from 1/3 EV to 1 EV stops difference).
- Aperture Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix will sequentially take multiple images at different apertures. Either select all apertures or a number of shots (3-5) within a selected range.
- Focus Bracket:Press the shutter button and the Panasonic GX80 will sequentially take multiple images with different focus positions. You can select the distance between focus positions, the number of exposures and the sequence from far to near or the other way around.
- White Balance Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix GX80 will take three pictures with different white balance settings automatically
- White Balance Bracket (color temperature): Press the shutter button once to take three pictures with different White Balance Color Temperature values automatically. You can also set the correction range by touching the up/down slider on the screen.
MENU → Camera Icon → page 3 of 8 (also called the Rec menu)

Self Timer

In this menu, you can select what type of self timer you’d like to use: a 10 second delay and one shot, 10 seconds with 3 shots with 2 second intervals or a 2 second delay, all after pressing the shutter.

Highlight Shadow

This allows you to lighten the shadows and darkens the highlights in your image (or video). So this is a method of creating balance in your image if you feel like the highlights are too strong or the shadows too dark. You have 4 presets available, and you can also make 3 custom presets yourself:
- Standard: no adjustments is set.
- Raise the contrast: Bright areas are brightened, and dark areas are darkened.
- Lower the contrast: Bright areas are darkened, and dark areas are brightened.
- Brighten dark areas: Dark areas are brightened.
- Custom: make your own preset.
This is how to adjust the parameters for Custom presets:
1. Rotate the front/rear dial to adjust the brightness of bright/dark portions.
3. A – Bright portion
4. B – Dark portion
  - The rear dial is for adjusting dark areas, and the front dial is for adjusting bright areas.
  - To register a preferred setting, press ▲, and select the destination where the custom setting will be registered to [Custom1]/[Custom2]/[Custom3].
  - Adjustments can also be made by dragging the graph.
5. Press [MENU/SET].
  - The screen display can be switched by pressing [DISP.] on the brightness adjustment screen
  - .
  - Turning off this unit will return the setting adjusted with / / / back to the default setting.
i. Dynamic

This setting will change contrast and exposure when there is a big difference from the darkest area to the brightest are in your image. What really happens is that the camera adjusts the exposure in order to capture more details in the highlights. You can choose between High, Standard, Low or Off.

This naturally causes an under-exposure in the shadow areas. But inside the jpeg engine, the camera will compensate for this by boosting shadows. The downside here is that this will obviously lead to more noise in the boosted regions, but because this is done with data directly coming from the sensor, it can be quite useful if you are a jpeg shooter.

There is also an impact on RAW images, because the exposure will be underexposed.

i. Resolution

Another jpeg only functionality, i-Resolution is a form of sharpening. High, Standard, Low and Off are selectable, and you should see these like the threshold for sharpening in an application like Lightroom. Many photographers discard these intelligent functions, and if you shoot RAW only, it’s not that important for you (except i Dynamic which can change your exposure plus or minus 1/3 stop). But if you shoot jpeg only, you should set it to Low at least, since most of the time RAW files would be sharpened in post processing too.

Post Focus

You can record 4K burst pictures while changing the focus point and then select a focus point after recording. This function is best for non-moving subjects. You can select multiple focus points and combine them into one picture.

This function is suited for recording still objects.

MENU → Camera Icon → page 4 of 8 (also called the Rec menu)

iHandheld Night Shot

With iHandheld night shot, pictures of the night scenery will be taken at a high burst speed and composed into a single picture. This mode is useful if you want to take stunning night shots with minimal jitter and noise, without using a tripod. You can turn this feature on or off.

iHDR

Intelligent HDR will take multiple still pictures are recorded with differing exposures and combined to create a single still picture rich in dynamic range.

HDR

You can combine 3 pictures with different levels of exposure into a single picture with rich gradation. You can minimize the loss of gradations in bright areas and dark areas when, for example, the contrast between the background and the subject is large.

Two settings are available:
- Dynamic Range: Either set this to auto where the camera decides the exposure difference between shots or plus/minus 1, 2 or 3 EV.
- Auto Align: the camera will align your three shots, for handheld shooting or turn this feature off when you use a tripod.
Multi Exp.

Gives an effect like multi exposure. (layering images on top of each other, up to 4).
1. Decide on the composition, and take the first picture.
2. After taking the picture, press the shutter button halfway down to take the next picture.
3. Press up/down to select the item and then press MENU/SET to either go to the next image, retake your image or exit.$Shooting the second, third, and fourth exposures
4. Press down to select Exit and then press MENU/SET.
5. Your multiple exposure is made and saved.
Two settings are available:
- Auto gain: the camera automatically adjusts the gain of the separate images to match.
- Overlay: if set to ON, you can apply Multi Exposure to previously recorded images.
Time Lapse

You can take a sequential number of images with relatively long delays in between to achieve a time-lapse movie.

Time Lapse:
1. Switch to Time Lapse Shot if it is not selected.
2. change start time and shooting interval according to your preferences.
3. press te shutter half way to exit the menu.
4. press the shutter to start your time-lapse.
MENU → Camera Icon → page 5 of 8 (also called the Rec menu)

Stop motion/Animation
1. Switch to Stop Motion Animation
2. Change auto shooting and shooting interval according to your preferences
3. press te shutter half way to exit the menu.
4. press the shutter to start your time-lapse.
5. move the subject per frame
6. press the folder menu to end the recording
Panorama Settings

You can change settings for the Panorama shot mode on your mode dial here.
- Direction: sets the recording direction to either horizontal or vertical.
- Picture Size: set to either Standard or Wide.
Shutter Type

You can use either the mechanical or electronic shutter, or 50/50, or let the Panasonic GX80 decide what is most appropriate. The electronic shutter has a maximum speed of 1/16000 sec, the mechanical shutter can go up to 1/4000 second.
- AUTO: Switches the shutter type automatically depending on the recording condition and shutter speed.
- MSHTR: Takes pictures in Mechanical Shutter Mode.
- ESHTR: Takes pictures in Electronic Shutter Mode.
Remember that in artificial light or when using a flash, you best use the mechanical shutter only to avoid artefacts.

Shutter Delay

To reduce the influence of hand shake or shutter vibration, shutter is released after the specified time has passed. 1, 2, 4 or 8 second delay are selectable. Keep your hands steady and don’t use this delay, else you might miss that critical moment.

Flash

You’ll find all the flash functions in this menu for the built-in flash as well as any hotshoe flash you would want to use.

If you’d like to use the built in flash, you’ll need to pop it up using this button:

Using a flash takes some skill, but you have a couple of tweaks available for you if you want to make the most of your photography.

Firing Mode
- TTL: The camera automatically sets the flash output. This system meters the light coming through the lens, this includes both ambient and flash light. It calculates the best exposure according to these measurements. Preferred for most users.
- Manual: Set the luminosity ratio of the flash manually. 1/1 means full power, and you can decrease the power to an output that best suits your scenery. It’s not the easiest way to use a flash, but you’ll gain a lot of knowledge in how to balance your flash and ambient light this way.
Flash Mode

like your smartphone camera, you can tell the flash to always be on, turn it off or use a ‘pro’ feature called slow sync. In Slow Sync, the camera will attempt to balance the ambient light with the light of the flash, even in near darkness by slowing down the shutter speed.

These three options are available for the built-in flash. If you’re using a hotshoe flash, or a controller for off camera flashes, you’ll have a few more modes available:

Flash Synchro
- 1st: the flash will sync with the first movement of the shutter (when it opens). This is the normal mode used for normal photography.
- 2nd:The flash fires right before the second operation of an exposure, namely the closing of the shutter.
Second curtain sync is often uses for creative effect, where you’d see the light source appear behind the subject.

Flash Adjust

You can adjust the output power of the flash here in 1/3EV steps in TTL metering mode. In essence, this will give you more or less flash power than when set to zero. If you, for instance , feel that there is always too much flash light in your photos, you could dial it down a little here.

Auto Exposure Comp.

Normally, when you use the compensation dial on the camera body, you’ll also increase or decrease the flash output power. You can turn this OFF here, so the compensation dial will only affect your exposure (brighter or darker) and not flash power.

Wireless Flash Settings

If you want up your game in regards to flash photography, you’ll quickly turn to wireless flashes. These will enable you to use the flash power in a creative way, adjusting power and angle of light by positioning your off-camera flashes differently. Panasonic make a few wireless enabled flashes like the DMW-FL200L, DMW-FL360L or DMW-FL580L, but you can also invest in a few third party brands like Godox. An entire book could be written (and probably has been) on this subject. But for nowWe’ll stick with what is in the menu system.
- Wireless: set to ON if you want to use a wireless flash.
- Wireless Channel: Select the channel you have set for the wireless flashes.
- Wireless Setup: You’ll have three groups of flashes available (A, B and C) as well as your on-camera hotshoe controller flash.. Each flash group can be set to TTL (metering through the lens), Auto, Manual or OFF. You can also dial in flash adjust +-3 EV per group here.
Wireless FP

FP is most commonly known as high speed sync. This system uses a series of high speed flash burst in sync with the shutter in order to achieve flash at high shutter speeds. This is useful in situations where you’d normally be overpowered by sunlight and/or you want to shoot at large apertures for a shallow depth-of-field effect.

You can enable or disable this function for wireless flashes here.

Communication Light

Communication light, or focus assist beam is a small infrared light that can help your camera achieve faster focus in dim or low light. Some people find this helpful, others prefer to shoot without it. You can turn it on or off here.

MENU → Camera Icon → page 6 of 8 (also called the Rec menu)

Red-Eye Removal

If you use a flash when using Red-Eye Reduction, the camera will automatically detect red-eye and corrects the picture.

ISO Limit Set

Sets the upper limits of the ISO sensitivity when you use Auto ISO or i ISO. Lower Limit should be set to 200 and upper limit to 1600, this is the range where you’ll get usable images without too much noise.

ISO Increments

Choose the increments of exposure changes between 1/3 EV or 1 EV.

Extended ISO

ISO sensitivity can be set up to minimum of ISO 100. Base ISO of the sensor is 200, so this extended ISO basically halves this in software, with a slight decrease in quality.

Long Shtr NR

The camera will automatically apply noise reduction to long exposures. This applies to both Jpeg and RAW files. A black frame is taken after your initial shot to measure the noise present. Since many environmental factors (like temperature and location) have an effect on the amount of noise that you’ll see, this is the best way to determine what is noise in your frame. This data is then subtracted from your image for a noise-free (more-or-less) result.

MENU → Camera Icon → page 7 of 8 (also called the Rec menu)

Shading Comp.

All lenses have a lens profile that registers both distortion and shading in the corners at all apertures. These lens profiles can be applied in-camera to counter unwanted vignetting in your images. Especially important for jpeg shooters to turn this on. RAW shooters can apply these corrections later on (and with better results) in a desktop application like DXO optics Pro.

Diffraction Compensation

When you stop down your lens to a smaller aperture (normally from f/11 to f/22), a phenomenon called diffraction causes a loss in sharpness. It happens because light begins to disperse when passing through a small opening. When diffraction compensation is set to ON, the Panasonic GX80 will add sharpening to your image to try and counter this phenomenon.

Ex. Tele Conv.

You can digitally enlarge pictures without too much quality deterioration with this function. Only for jpeg use, you can extend the range of your lens by times 1.4 or 1.6 using this function.

Digital Zoom

Digital zoom takes this a step further, allowing you to zoom in up to 4 times for jpeg’s. I would not recommend either of these functions, as it is better to shoot RAW in this case and crop in processing for the best possible quality.

Color Space

Select either sRGB or Adobe RGB here. Adobe RGB has a greater range of reproducible colors than sRGB, so it might be worth looking into this color space if you print to paper a lot. But remember that you’ll also need a monitor capable of reproducing the larger color range too. And this can often lead to problems when converting to sRGB or editing your images in external applications. Because of all this, I have it set to sRGB.

MENU → Camera Icon → page 8 of 8 (also called the Rec menu)

Stabilizer

The Panasonic Lumix GX80 and GX85 have a stabilised sensor. The sensor inside the camera is suspended on a magnetic field and can compensate for movement like the minute shakes of your hands or any other kind of movement. There are also many lenses available with an optical image stabilisation unit, that physically move glass elements around inside the lens to do the same. Both systems have their pros and cons, and it is generally accepted that a stabilised sensor works better for wide angle lenses (below 40mm) whilst optical lens stabilisation is more efficient for the tele range. It is also possible to use both systems at the same time (called Dual I.S. or 5 Axis hybrid for video), where you’ll take advantage of the best of both worlds.

It’s also possible to use the in-body sensor stabilisation with older, manual primes that don’t relay EXIF information (like most importantly focal length in this case). You’ll need to manually set the focal length in the Focal length Set function to get an optimal performance.

Face Recog.

Face Recognition is a function on the Panasonic GX80 which finds a face resembling a registered face and priorities focus and exposure automatically. Even if the person is located towards the back or on the end of a line in a group photo, the camera can still take a clear picture.

On will automatically recognise faces, but you can also register up to six faces yourself.
1. In this Menu, select an empty frame (or overwrite one).
2. Take an picture of the face you want to register.
3. Register this face. Note that you can register up to 3 images per face for more accurate results.
Profile Setup

If you set the name and birthday of your baby or pet in advance, you can record their name and age in months and years in the images.

You can display these at playback or stamp the recorded images using the Text Stamp tool. This way, you’ll have a nice overview of your imageges as your child gets older.

Select the Profile Setup menu.
1. Press up/down to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET].
2. Press up/down to select [Baby1], [Baby2] or [Pet] and then press [MENU/SET].
3. Enter age and name of the pet or person.
4. Press 4 to select [Exit] and then press [MENU/SET] to finish.
MENU → Film Camera Icon → page 1 of 5 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

These are all movie related settings, and menu of them are the same as the stills related menu options. You can however (obviously) set them up differently for video.

Photo Style

This applies only to Jpeg images, and the RAW preview. You can select a colour effect here.
- Standard: standard Panasonic colour and contrast rendering.
- Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
- Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.
- Monochrome: Monochrome (black and white)effect with no color shades.
- L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
- Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
- Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
- Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.
it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customise the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.
- Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.
- Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.
- Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.
- Saturation: add more vividness to the colours. Or remove some.
- Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.
Filter Settings

The filter Settings go a step further than merely a photo style. These include artistic effects like Low Key, Sepia, Cross Process and retro stylings. You can turn them ON or OFF here, select the effect you want to use and change the settings by using the touch screen. You can also set your camera up to shoot one with and one without an image effect simultaneously.

If you’re wondering how you get to Creative Control mode, you need to set the mode dial to the paint palette.

And simply press up and down to select the image effects. You can also display the selection screen by touching the Recording Mode icon in recording screen.

These are all the image effects available:
- Expressive
- High Key
- Monochrome
- Silky Monochrome
- Cross Process
- Bleach Bypass
- Fantasy
- Sunshine: you can select the position and size of the light source here.
- Retro
- Low Key
- Dynamic Monochrome
- Impressive Art
- Toy Effect
- Miniature Effect: you can select the portion of your image that is in focus here (and where the blur effect won’t happen)
- Star Filter
- Old Days
- Sepia
- Rough Monochrome
- High Dynamic
- Toy Pop
- Soft Focus
- One Point Color: you can select the color to leave in here by using a color picker.
4K Live Cropping

By cropping your motion picture down from the 4K angle of view to Full High Definition, you can record a motion picture that pans and zooms in/out while leaving the camera in a fixed position.
Set mode dial to Movie Manual.

Select the 4K Live cropping menu

Set the cropping start frame.

Set the cropping end frame.

press the movie button to start recording
Snap Movie

You can specify the recording time in advance and record motion pictures casually like you take snapshots. The function also allows you to shift a focus at the start of recording and add fade in/out effects in advance.
1. Select the Snap Movie menu
2. Start recording
Rec Format

You can either choose to record in AVCHD or MP4 format. The higher the Bit rate value is, the higher the picture quality becomes. Since the camera employs the VBR recording method, the bit rate is changed automatically depending on the subject to record. As a result, the recording time is shortened when a fast-moving subject is recorded. Different frame rates and bitrates are selectable per format in the Rec Quality setting.

MENU → Film Camera Icon → page 2 of 5 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

Rec Quality

Select the quality of video here.

AVCHD

MP4

Exposure Mode

These are the same modes available with the mode dial (P, A, S or M)

AFS/AFF

AFS is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Single and AFF is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Flexible. In AFS, the focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway and in AFF focus is continuously readjusted according to the movement of the subject. See AFF as a function between Single AF and Continuous AF.

Picture Mode

You can record still pictures while recording a movie on the Panasonic GX80. During movie recording, press the shutter button fully to record a still picture when turned On. Aspect will always be 16:9.

There are 2 settings available:

Video Priority
- Pictures will be recorded with a picture size determined by the Rec Quality setting for motion pictures.
- Only JPEG images are recorded when Quality is set to Raw (still pictures will be recorded in jpeg)
- Up to 80 still pictures can be recorded during recording of the motion picture. (Up to 20 still pictures during 4K motion picture recording)
Photo Priority
- Pictures will be recorded with the set picture size and quality.
- The screen will go dark while recording pictures. A still picture will be recorded in the motion picture during that period, and audio is not recorded.
- Up to 20 still pictures can be recorded during recording of the motion picture. (Up to 10 still pictures during 4K motion picture recording)
Continuous AF

Focusing changes depending on the Focus Mode setting and the Continuous AF setting in this menu.

AFS/AFF/AFC:
- On: The camera automatically keeps focusing on subjects during recording.
- Off: The camera maintains the focus position at the start of recording.
MENU → Film Camera Icon → page 3 of 5 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

Metering Mode

You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the camera. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:
- Multiple: This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
- Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
- Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.
Highlight Shadow

This allows you to lighten the shadows and darkens the highlights in your image (or video). So this is a method of creating balance in your image if you feel like the highlights are too strong or the shadows too dark. You have 4 presets available, and you can also make 3 custom presets yourself:
- Standard: no adjustments is set.
- Raise the contrast: Bright areas are brightened, and dark areas are darkened.
- Lower the contrast: Bright areas are darkened, and dark areas are brightened.
- Brighten dark areas: Dark areas are brightened.
- Custom: make your own preset.
For more info, see the equivalent setting for photos above.

i.Dynamic

This setting will change contrast and exposure when there is a big difference from the darkest area to the brightest are in your image. What really happens is that the camera adjusts the exposure in order to capture more details in the highlights. You can choose between High, Standard, Low or Off.

This naturally causes an under-exposure in the shadow areas. But inside the jpeg engine, the camera will compensate for this by boosting shadows. The downside here is that this will obviously lead to more noise in the boosted regions, but because this is done with data directly coming from the sensor, it can be quite useful.

i.Resolution

i-Resolution is a form of sharpening. High, Standard, Low and Off are selectable, and you should see these like the threshold for sharpening in an application like Lightroom. Many photographers discard these intelligent functions, and if you shoot RAW only, it’s not that important for you (except i Dynamic which can change your exposure plus or minus 1/3 stop).

Diffraction Compensation

When you stop down your lens to a smaller aperture (normally from f/11 to f/22), a phenomenon called diffraction causes a loss in sharpness. It happens because light begins to disperse when passing through a small opening. When diffraction compensation is set to ON, the Panasonic GX80 will add sharpening to your image to try and counter this phenomenon.

MENU → Film Camera Icon → page 4 of 5 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

Ex. Tele Conv.

You can digitally enlarge movies without too much quality deterioration with this function. You can extend the range of your lens by times 1.4 or 1.6 using this function.

Digital Zoom

Digital zoom takes this a step further, allowing you to zoom in up to 4 times.

Stabilizer

The Panasonic Lumix GX80 has a stabilised sensor. The sensor inside the camera is suspended on a magnetic field and can compensate for movement like the minute shakes of your hands or any other kind of movement. There are also many lenses available with an optical image stabilisation unit, that physically move glass elements around inside the lens to do the same. Both systems have their pros and cons, and it is generally accepted that a stabilised sensor works better for wide angle lenses (below 40mm) whilst optical lens stabilisation is more efficient for the tele range. It is also possible to use both systems at the same time (called Dual I.S.), where you’ll take advantage of the best of both worlds.

Flkr Decrease

The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in your movies. 1/50,/1/60,1/100 or 1/120 second are available.

Silent Operation

The operational sound of the zoom or button operation may be recorded when it is operated during the recording of a motion picture. Using touch icons allows silent operation while recording motion pictures.

MENU → Film Camera Icon → page 5 of 5 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

Mic Level Disp.

Select if you want to display the microphone level on the recording screen.

Mic Level Adj.

Adjust the sound input level to 19 different levels (-12 dB to +6 dB).

Wind Noise Canceller

This will reduce the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone while maintaining sound quality. You can choose either High, Standard or Off. This function works only with the built-in microphone.

Custom settings page 1 of 9

You’ll find all customisable settings of the Panasonic GX80 in this Menu.

Cust. Set Mem.

Up to 3 sets of current camera settings can be registered using C1, C2, C3-1, C3-2 or C3-3. These are directly accessible via the Mode Dial.

Saving a custom camera is quite simple, set the mode dial to C1, C2 or C3, change the cameras settings to your preferences, go in the Menu to this setting and press MENU/SET on the screen.

Silent Mode

Disables operational sounds and output of light at once. • Audio from the speaker will be muted and the flash and the AF Assist lamp will be disabled.

The following settings are fixed:
- Shutter Type: ESHTR.
- Flash Mode :forced flash off.
- AF Assist Lamp: Off.
- Beep Volume: Off.
- E-Shutter Volume: Off.
AF/AE Lock

Lock focus and exposure with AF/AE LOCK. To clear the lock, press AF/AE LOCK again.

AF/AE Lock Hold

When ON is selected, focus and exposure stays locked even if you press and release AF/AE LOCK. To clear the lock, press AF/AE LOCK again.

Shutter AF

Set whether or not the focus is adjusted automatically when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

Custom settings 2 of 9

Half Press Release

The shutter will immediately fire when the shutter button is pressed halfway when this is ON.

Quick AF

As long as the camera is held steady, the camera will automatically adjust the focus and focus adjustment will then be quicker when the shutter is pressed. You’ll get better AF performance at the expense of battery life.

Eye Sensor AF

The Panasonic GX80 will automatically start autofocus when the eye sensor is activated.

Pinpoint AF Time

Sets the time for which the screen is enlarged when the shutter button is pressed halfway with Auto Focus Mode set to MF assist.

Pinpoint AF Display

Sets whether to display the assist screen that appears when Auto Focus Mode is set to manual focus assist: in a window or full screen.

Custom settings page 3 of 9

AF Assist lamp

AF assist lamp will illuminate the subject when the shutter button is pressed half-way making it easier for the camera to focus when recording in low light conditions. Range is about 1 meter.

Direct Focus Area

Moves the AF area or MF assist using the cursor button when recording.

Focus/release Priority

This will prevent you from taking pictures when focus is not achieved.

AF Sensitivity

You can make the autofocus more sensitive to rapid movements here.

AF+MF

When AF Lock is ON (press the shutter button halfway with the focus mode set to AFS or set AF Lock using AF/AE LOCK), you can make fine adjustments to the focus manually.

Custom settings page 4 of 9

MF Assist Display

Sets whether MF Assist (enlarged screen) will appear in a windowed screen display or in a full screen display.

MF Guide

When you set the focus manually, an MF guide that allows you to check the direction to achieve focus is displayed.

Peaking

In-focus portions (portions on the screen with clear outlines) are highlighted when focus is being adjusted manually. Great focussing aide for manual focussing. Can be set to High or Low.

Histogram

Display the histogram. A histogram is a graph that displays brightness along the horizontal axis (black to white) and the number of pixels at each brightness level on the vertical axis. It allows you to easily check a picture’s exposure.

Guide Line

This will set the pattern of guide lines displayed when taking a picture.

Custom settings page 5 of 9

Highlight

When the Auto Review function is activated or when playing back, white saturated areas appear blinking in black and white.

Zebra Pattern

Indicates parts that may become white saturated through overexposure in a zebra pattern. You can select a brightness value between 50% and 105%. In Zebra 2, you can select OFF. If you select 100% or 105%, only the areas that are already white saturated are displayed in a zebra pattern. The smaller the value is, the wider the brightness range to be processed as a zebra pattern will be.

Monochrome Live View

You can display the recording screen in black and white. This function is convenient when a black and white screen will make it easier to set focus with Manual Focus.

Constant Preview

You can check the effects of the chosen aperture and shutter speed on the recording screen in Manual Exposure Mode. Some camera makers call this Live View.

Expo.Meter

Display the exposure meter.
- Set to ON to display the Exposure meter when performing Program Shift, setting aperture, and setting shutter speed.
- Unsuitable areas of the range are displayed in red.
- When the Exposure meter is not displayed, switch the display information for screen by pressing DISP.
- If no operations are performed for approximately 4 seconds, the Exposure meter disappears.
Custom settings page 6 of 9

LVF Disp. Style

This will set the display style of the viewfinder. You can choose between detailed information (icons), tilt sensor display or without any information.

Monitor Disp. Style

This will set the display style of the screen. Here too, you can choose between detailed information (icons), tilt sensor display or without any information.

Monitor Info. Disp.

Display the recording information screen.

Viewfinder style: Scales down images slightly so that you can better review the composition of the images.

Monitor style: Scales images to fill the entire screen so that you can see their details.

Rec Area

This changes the angle of view during motion picture recording and still picture recording. Displays the recording area according to the angle of view for still picture recording or video.

Custom settings page 7 of 9

Remaining Disp.

This will switch display between the number of recordable pictures and available recording time.

Auto Review

Displays a picture immediately after it is taken.

FN Button Set

You can assign various recording and other functions to the function buttons.

Lens Position Resume

Saves the focus position when you turn off the camera. When an interchangeable lens that is compatible with power zoom is in use, the zoom position is also saved.

Q.MENU

In Custom operations, you can customise the Q Menu according to your liking.

You can add a maximum of 15 preferred settings to the Quick Menu.
1. Press Q.MENU to display the Quick Menu.
2. Press down to select the custom tool and then press MENU/SET.
3. Press left/right arrow to select the menu item in the top row and then press MENU/SET.
4. Press left/right to select the empty space in the bottom row and then press MENU/SET. (You can also set the menu item by dragging it from the top row to the bottom row)
5. Press return to switch to the recording screen.
Dial Set.

Assign Dial (F/SS): Assigns the operations of the aperture value and shutter speed in Manual Exposure Mode.

Rotation (F/SS): Changes the rotation direction of the dials for adjusting the aperture value and shutter speed.

Control Dial Assignment: It sets the item to be assigned to the control dial while the recording screen is displayed.

Exposure Comp.: Assigns the Exposure Compensation to the front dial or rear dial so that you can directly adjust it.

Dial Operation Switch Setup: Sets the items to be assigned temporarily to the front/rear dials when you press the function button to which Dial Operation Switch is assigned.

Custom settings page 8 of 9

Video Button

Enables/disables the motion picture button.

Power Zoom Lens

Change the settings for a power zoom lens. Sets the screen display and lens operations when using an interchangeable lens that is compatible with power zoom.
- Disp Focal Length: When you zoom, the focal distance is displayed and you can confirm the zoom position.
- Step Zoom: When you operate the zoom with this setting [ON], the zoom will stop at positions corresponding to predetermined distances.
- Zoom Speed: You can set the zoom speed for zoom operations for both stills and vide to high, medium or low.
- Zoom Ring: When set to OFF] the operations controlled by the zoom ring are disabled to prevent accidental operation.
Eye Sensor

This sets the automatic viewfinder/monitor switching functionality. Automatic viewfinder/monitor switching enables the eye sensor to switch the display to the viewfinder automatically when you bring your eye or an object near it.

You can select whether to Turn off the monitor when the EVF is engaged with the Eye sensor, and also the Eye Sensor sensitivity.

Touch Settings

Enables/disables the Touch screen operation.
- Touch Screen: All touch operations are turned on.
- Touch Tab: Operations of tabs are enabled.
- Touch AF: Operation to bring the subject you touch into focus AF or adjust the focus and brightness AF+AE are enabled.
- Touch Pad AF: Operation to move the AF area by touching the monitor when the viewfinder is in use.
Touch Scroll

This allows you to set the speed of continuously forwarding or rewinding pictures using touch operation.

Custom settings page 9 of 9

Menu Guide

Sets whether or not to display a selection screen when you set the mode dial to SCN.

Shoot w/o Lens

Sets whether or not the shutter can be released when no lens is attached to the main body.

MENU → Setup Menu → page 1 of 6 (General Camera Setup)

Online Manual

Display the URL or QR code to go to the online manual.

Clock Set

You have already probably set time and date when you first turned on the Panasonic GX80, but you can also change this here.

World Time

Sets the times for the region where you live (HOME) and your travel destination (DESTINATION). Time and date will be altered to reflect the local time and date at your travel destination.

Travel Date

If you set Travel Setup, elapsed days of your trip i.e. which day of the trip based on its departure and return dates will be recorded The travel date is automatically canceled if the current date is after the return date.

If you set Location, the name of the travel destination that you enter will be recorded.

Wi-Fi

It’s possible to control your Panasonic GX80 with a smartphone or a tablet, display pictures on TV, print Wirelessly, Send images to a PC or use Web Services from Panasonic all via WiFi.

To use the Wi-Fi function on this camera, a wireless access point is needed off course.

By default, Wi-Fi is assigned to the Fn6 button when the camera is in Recording Mode, while it is assigned to Fn1 when the camera is in Playback Mode. You can assign it to any button you want.

When you want to connect to WiFi, simply press this button.

Wi-Fi Setup

Priority of Remote Device: Sets either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be used during remote recording.

Wi-Fi Password: You can improve security by enabling password entry for a direct connection to a smartphone.

LUMIX CLUB: Acquires or changes the “LUMIX CLUB” login ID.

PC Connection: You can set the workgroup. To send images to a PC, a connection to the same workgroup as the destination PC is required.

Device Name: You can change the name (SSID) of this unit.

Wi-Fi Function Lock: To prevent incorrect operation and use of the Wi-Fi function by a third party and to protect saved personal information, protect the Wi-Fi function with a password.

Network Address: Displays the MAC address and IP address of this unit.

Approved Regulations: Displays the certification number for radio regulations.

MENU → Setup Menu → page 2 of 6 (General Camera Setup)

Beep

This allows you to set the electronic sound and the electronic shutter sound. Remember this will be off if you’re in Silent Mode!

Live View Mode

This sets the viewfinder frame rate, to either 30 or 60fps. At 60fps you’ll see movement smoother at the cost of battery life.

Monitor Display

This sets the monitor frame rate to either 30fps or 60fps. Again, at 60fps you’ll see movement smoother at the cost of battery life.

Night Mode

This displays the monitor and viewfinder screens in red. It reduces the difficulty in seeing the surroundings caused by brightly-lit screens at night or in any low-light environment.

Monitor Display

Brightness, color, or red or blue tint of the Monitor/viewfinder can be adjusted.

Monitor Luminance

These settings will affect how and when brightness of the monitor is adjusted.

Auto: The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright it is around the camera.
- Mode 1: Makes the monitor brighter than normal.
- Mode 2: Set the monitor to the standard brightness.
- Mode 3: Makes the monitor brighter than standard.
Economy

These settings will determine the way the camera handles inactivity on your part to save battery life.
- Sleep Mode: The camera is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time selected on the setting.
- Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi): The camera is automatically turned off if it is not connected to a Wi-Fi network and has not been used for 15 minutes (
- Auto LVF/ Monitor Off: The monitor/viewfinder is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time selected on the setting.
- Power Save LVF Shooting: If you display the monitor using the viewfinder/monitor automatic switching function, the camera will turn off automatically after being left idle.
MENU → Setup Menu → page 3 of 6 (General Camera Setup)

USB Mode

Sets the communication method when connecting using the USB connection cable.
- Select on Connection: Select this setting to select the USB communication system when connecting to another device.
- PC Storage: Select this setting to export images to a connected PC.
- PC Tether: Select this setting to control the camera from a PC installed with supported software.
- Pictbridge PTP: Select this setting when connecting to a printer supporting PictBridge.
TV Connection

Set the format for the HDMI output when playing back on the HDMI compatible TV and monitor connected with this unit using the HDMI cable. It’s possible to set it to Auto or 4K, 1080p, 1080i, etc…

Menu Resume

Stores the location of the last-used menu item for each menu, so that when you enter that menu, the last opened page is used.

Menu Background

Set the background color for the menu screen.

Menu Information

Descriptions of menu items or their settings are displayed on the menu screen

MENU → Setup Menu → page 4 of 6 (General Camera Setup)

Language

Set the language displayed on the screen.

Version Disp

This enables the firmware versions of the camera and lens to be checked before an upgrade for instance.Folder/File Settings

Set the folder and file name patterns in which images are to be saved.

Exposure Comp. Reset

The exposure value used previously can be reset when the Recording Mode is changed or the camera is turned off.

Save/Restore Camera Setting

Save the camera’s setup information to the card. Since saved setup information can be imported to the camera, you can apply the same setup to more than one camera.

No.Reset

Reset the file number of the next recording to 0001.

MENU → Setup Menu → page 5 of 6 (General Camera Setup)

Reset

The following settings are reset to the default:
- Recording settings.
- Setup settings Wi-Fi Setup and Bluetooth settings.
- Custom settings (Face Recog. and[Profile Setup settings.
- Setup/custom settings (except for Wi-Fi Setup, Bluetooth, Face Recog. and Profile Setup).
Reset Wi-Fi Settings

Reset all Wi-Fi settings used.

Pixel Refresh

It will perform optimization of imaging device and image processing. Use this function when you start seeing hot or dead pixels in your images.

Sensor Cleaning

Dust reduction to blow off the debris and dust that have affixed to the front of the imaging device is performed.Level

Level Gauge Assist

Adjust: Hold the camera in a horizontal position, and press MENU/SET. The level gauge will be adjusted.

Level Gauge Value Reset: Restores the default level gauge setting.

MENU → Setup Menu → page 6 of 6 (General Camera Setup)

Demo Mode

Used for demo purposes in camera stores.

Format

Format the card before recording with the camera. Always a good idea to format every time you start a new shoot in order to maintain the integrity of the SD card.

Since data cannot be recovered after formatting, make sure to back up necessary data in advance.

MENU → Playback Menu → Page 1 of 5

Slide Show

ou can play back the pictures you have taken in synchronization with music, and you can do this in sequence while leaving a fixed interval between each of the pictures.

You can also put together a slide show composed of only still pictures, only motion pictures, etc.

You can change the settings for slide show playback by selecting [Effect] or [Setup] on the slide show menu screen.

Playback Mode

Playback in Normal Play, Picture Only or Video Only can be selected.

Location Logging

You can write location information sent from a smartphone (latitude and longitude) on images.

You need to install “Panasonic Image App” on your smartphone to do this.

RAW Processing

You can process the pictures taken in RAW format. The processed pictures will be saved in JPEG format.
- White Balance: Allows you to select a White Balance preset and adjust it. If you select an item you can process the image with the setting at the time of recording.
- Brightness correction: Allows you to correct the brightness within the range between – 2 EV and +2 EV.
- Photo Style: Allows you to select a photo style effect.
- i.Dynamic: Allows you to select an i.Dynamic setting.
- Contrast: Allows you to adjust the contrast.
- Highlight: Allows you to adjust the brightness of bright portions.
- Shadow: Allows you to adjust the brightness of dark portions.
- Saturation and Color Tone: Allows you to adjust the saturation. (When Monochrome or L.Monochrome is selected in Photo Style, you can adjust the color tone.)
- Filter Effect: Allows you to select a filter effect. (Only when Monochrome or L.Monochrome is selected in Photo Style)
- Noise Reduction: Allows you to adjust the noise reduction setting.
- i.Resolution: Allows you to select an i.Resolution setting.
- Sharpness: Allows you to adjust the resolution effect.
Light composition

Select multiple frames from 4K burst files that you wish to combine. Parts of the image that are brighter than the preceding frame will be superimposed on the preceding frame to combine the frames into one picture.

MENU → Playback Menu → Page 2 of 6

Clear Retouch

Remove unwanted objects and such right from the camera menu. The erasure operation can only be performed by touching. Clear Retouch automatically enables the touch operation.

Title Edit

You can add text (comments) to pictures. After text has been registered, it can be stamped in prints using the Text Stamp. Just select the picture you want and edit the text.

Text Stamp

You can stamp recording information like names, dates, places on recorded images.

Video Divide

Recorded motion picture and 4K burst files can be divided in two. It is recommended for when you want to divide a part you need with a part you do not need.

Time Lapse Video

This function allows you to create a motion picture from a picture group recorded with Time Lapse Shot.

MENU → Playback Menu → Page 3 of 5

Stop Motion Video

This function allows you to create a motion picture from a picture group recorded with Time Lapse Shot.

Resize

To allow easy posting to web pages, attachment to e-mail etc., picture size (number of pixels) is reduced.

Cropping

You can enlarge and then clip the important part of the recorded picture.

Rotate

Rotate pictures manually in 90 degree steps.

Rotate Disp

This mode allows you to display pictures vertically if they were recorded holding the camera vertically.

MENU → Playback Menu → Page 4 of 5

Favorite

You can do the following if a mark has been added to pictures and they have been set as favourites:
- Play back the pictures set as favourites only as a slide show.
- Play back only the pictures set as favourites. ([Favorite Play)
- Delete all the pictures not set as favourites. (All Delete Except Favourite)
Print Set

DPOF “Digital Print Order Format” is a system that allows the user to select which pictures to print, how many copies of each picture to print and whether or not to print the recording date on the pictures when using a DPOF compatible photo printer or photo printing store. For details, ask at your photo printing store.

Protect

You can set protection for pictures you do not want to delete by mistake.

Face Rec Edit

You can clear and replace all information relating to face recognition in selected images.

Picture Sort

You can set the order in which the camera displays images during playback.Either via file name or date/time.

MENU → Playback Menu → Page 5 of 5

Delete Confirmation

This sets which option, Yes or No, will be highlighted first when the confirmation screen for deleting a picture is displayed.

Quick access with the Q Menu (Fn 2)

The most commonly used settings can be accessed through what is called the Q Menu. This is the FN2 button that you’ll find right next to the screen, above the trash bucket button.

The features that can be adjusted using Quick Menu are determined by the mode or a display style the camera is in

.

Photo Style

This applies only to Jpeg images, and the RAW preview when you load them into an app like Lightroom.. You can select a colour effect here.
- Standard: standard Panasonic colour and contrast rendering.
- Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
- Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.
- Monochrome: Monochrome (black and white)effect with no color shades.
- L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
- Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
- Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
- Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.
As mentioned earlier, it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customise the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.
- Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.
- Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.
- Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.
- Saturation: add more vividness to the colours. Or remove some.
- Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.
Motion Pic. Set

You can change bitrate and frame-rate for video here, as well as select the appropriate movie container.

AVCHD

MP4

Picture Setting

You can quickly change picture size and picture quality here for your Jpeg’s.

These are the aspect ratios available:
- 4:3: native sensor ratio
- 3:2: the ratio used in full frame cameras
- 16:9: for a wider looking view
- 1:1: Square aspect ratio, mostly used for social sharing
Quality wise, you can choose between Small (S), Medium (M) and Large (L) files sizes. Obviously, Large will have the best quality Jpeg’s, at the expense of larger files. If you only shoot Jpeg (and not RAW) set it to Large. If you shoot both (Jpeg+RAW, see next screen), you could set it to small or medium since you’ll always work with the RAW in post processing. This way, you’ll still have a Jpeg for sharing quickly online or as a reference whilst still saving some space.

Quality

Probably the most important setting is Quality. You can select either Jpeg, where the RAW data from the sensor is processed by an in-camera algorithm to produce a viewable image, or save your images in this RAW format. RAW retains all the data of the sensor, and is meant to be edited afterwards in a desktop application like Lightroom or Luminar. Saving as RAW means that you have much more creative freedom afterwards to push shadows or pull highlights, sharpen and enhance your image in any way you please. A Jpeg retains only a fraction of this information, according to the algorithm inside the camera which might or might not suit your style and/or needs.

Hence, my recommendation is always to shoot RAW or RAW Jpeg. This does mean larger files, but SD cards are inexpensive compared to your beautiful new Lumix. But some photographers prefer to shoot in Jpeg only because they are for instance not interested in post-processing images. In this case, I would set the Jpeg to the highest quality setting.

AFS/AFF

AFS is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Single and AFF is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Flexible. In AFS, the focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway and in AFF focus is continuously readjusted according to the movement of the subject. See AFF as a function between Single AF and Continuous AF.

The AFC function below AFS/AFF continuously changes focus according to the movement of your subject.

Some more info on these modes for clarification:
- AFS will find focus and stay focused at that distance until you take a photo or release the shutter button. This is handy if you want to focus and then recompose your shot for instance.
- AFF will do the same unless it detects subject movement, at which time it will temporarily switch to AFC operation in order to re-focus.
- AFC won’t start to seek focus until you half-press the shutter, and will continually evaluate subject movement and change focus as needed.
- With AFS you can can lock focus on a particular point, then swing the camera to get the right framing; with AFC, it will not lock focus, but will keep re-focusing. That’s why Pinpoint focusing can’t be used with AFC.
AF Mode

This allows the focusing method that suits the positions and number of the subjects to be selected. There are 6 different methods available, each suited for different scenarios.

Face/Eye Detection

A person’s face, eyes, and body (the entire body or the upper half of the body) are automatically detected.

When the camera detects a person’s face or body, an AF area is displayed over the detected person.
Yellow: This is the AF area for the person to be brought into focus. The camera automatically selects the person.

White: These are the AF areas for people other than the person to be brought into focus. This type of AF area is displayed when more than one person is detected.
When a person’s face or eyes are detected, the eye closer to the camera will be brought into focus, if the eyes are inside the yellow frame.

The camera can detect the faces of up to 15 people. To specify the person or eye to be brought into focus, align an AF area with the desired person or eye. You can do so easily by touching a person indicated with an AF area.

Tracking

The camera keeps adjusting the focus and exposure automatically to the specified moving object. Perform either of the following operations to lock the subject to be tracked:
- Use a button: aim the AF tracking frame D over the subject, and press the shutter button halfway.
- Use the touch screen: touch the subject on the screen.
If it fails to lock, AF area will flash in red, and disappear.

The AF area turns yellow while the subject is locked and green while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Press the Menu button to cancel the lock.

225 Area

Widest setting with all AF points used. Up to 225 AF areas can be focused. This is effective when your subject is not in the center of the screen.

Custom Multi

From among 225 AF areas, you can freely set the optimum shape of the AF area for the subject.

1-Area

The camera focuses on the subject in the AF area on the screen.

Pinpoint

You can achieve a more precise focus on a point that is smaller than 1-Area. If you press the shutter button halfway, the screen that lets you check the focus by enlarging it.

Burst Shot Setting

You can choose your bust shot setting here for continuous drive mode.

Burst shooting means that you’ll shoot continuously when you press the shutter button. You can apply different Burst Mode settings to Burst Shot 1 and and Burst Shot 2 Setting in these menus.

You’ll see SH (for super high burst rates), SH pre (which actually goes back a few seconds in time and saves these images too). These SH modes are only available with the electronic shutter. Version 2 is always faster that version 1.

Then we have High, Medium and Low which work with the Mechanical shutter too. The actual burst rate will be higher if you shoot Jpeg only.

Metering Mode

You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the camera. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:
- Multiple: This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
- Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
- Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.
Exposure Comp

If you feel like your Lumix GX80 is over- or underexposing your images (or you want to purposely underexpose), you can dial in what is called exposure compensation here. A range of plus minus 5 is available here to correct the auto exposure of the camera.

ISO sensitivity

Sets the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when you use Auto ISO or i ISO. Lower Limit should be set to 200 and upper limit to 3200, this is the range where you’ll get usable images without too much noise.

Even more tips for the Panasonic Lumix GX-85 for specific scenarios

Birds in Flight and street photography settings

Camera Settings
- AF switch set to AF-C
- Focus Mode set to 1-AF or 49-AF. I often use both
- Program Mode with the shutter speed set to at least 1000th. of a second
- ISO based on light and shutter speed
Record Tab
- Photo Style= Standard
- Aspect Ratio= 4:3
- Quality= RAW+Jpeg Fine (Jpeg is for a backup image as well as to easily load to my if needed)
- AFS/AFF= AFS ( Don’t confuse this with the SWITCH for AF which should be set to AF-C)
- Metering mode= Matrix or Evaluative
- Bust Rate= High
- ISO Limit set = 1600
- ISO Increments= 1/3 EV
- Extended ISO= On
- Long Shutter Noise Reduction= On
- Color Space= sRGB
Motion Picture Tab
- Photo Style= Standard
- 4K Photo=On when Needed (Manual Exposure)
- Rec Format= MOV
- Rec Quality= Depends on every shoot
- AFS/AFF= AFS
- Continues AF= On (Sometimes Off if I’m using Manual focus which is almost never)
- Metering= Matrix or evaluative
- Sound Output= Recorded Sound
- Mic Level Display= On
- Mic Level Limiter= On
Custom Tab
- AF/AE Lock= (This is the option for using rear button AF) I sometimes turn this off and just go with front shutter button AF for birds in flight
- Shutter AF= Off (This needs to be turned off if you have the above option set to rear button AF)
- Quick AF= Off
- Eye Sensor AF=Off
- Direct Focus Area=Off
- Focus Release Priority=Focus
- Peaking=On
- Histogram=On
- Zebra Pattern=Zebra2
- Constant Preview=Off
- Monitor Info Display=On
- Auto Review Duration Time=Off (Very, very important to turn this off for action photography)
- Fn Button Set-None other than what is the default.
- Eye Sensor=Low
- Touch Settings
  - Touch Screen=On
  - Touch Tab= On
  - Touch AF=AF
  - AF=OFFSET (This has to be set to move AF sensor around LCD with finger
Conclusion

I hope you find my Panasonic Lumix GX-85 tutorial with settings, tips and tricks useful. If you have any questions, feel free to comment below.
January 29, 2018
Panasonic Lumix GH5S settings, tips and tricks
Panasonic Lumix GH5S settings, tips and tricks

Introduction

Welcome to my Panasonic GH5S advanced manual with tips and tricks. This guide starts from your Menu settings and goes through all aspects of this interesting camera. I know it is a lot of information, but you’ll get the hang of it soon, I promise.

The biggest change in the GH5s is the new dual ISO 10.2-megapixel sensor. This is half the resolution of the 20.2-megapixel sensor in the GH5, but in return offers better performance in low light. Panasonic says users can get up to ISO 51200 native with minimal noise, and up to ISO 204800 when extended ISO is use

I’ll be going over the entire Menu structure in this post, and giving you tips, pointers, and tricks along the way.

Diving into the MENU system

When you switch on your Panasonic Lumix GH5S you’ll be asked to enter a date, time and timezone. This setting is necessary, as all images captured will have a timestamp, making it easy to find your favorite pictures in the future.
After this is setup, press the MENU button. You’ll see a range of icons and pages.
We’ll start on page 1 of the camera Icon (camera settings)

MENU → Camera Icon → page 1 of 5 (also called the Rec menu)

Aspect Ratio

You can change the aspect ratio of your photos here. Changing the aspect ratio can be used as a way to boost your creativity, for instance, landscapes often look great with a 16:9 ratio, or for sharing on Instagram, a 1:1 crop might suit you better.

An M43 (Micro Four-thirds) camera has a native aspect ratio of (not surprisingly) 4:3. You should realize that changing the aspect ratio to anything else than this will actually crop the sensor, meaning that you’ll lose pixels. You should look at it as re-framing your image (like you can do in Lightroom or other photo editors) inside the camera. Jpeg’s will be stored with the chosen ratio, but RAW images (although previewed with the chosen ratio), will still have the full information of the 4:3 sensor retained.

These are the aspect ratios available:
- 4:3: native sensor ratio
- 3:2: the ratio used in full-frame cameras
- 16:9: for a wider looking view
- 1:1: Square aspect ratio, mostly used for social sharing
Picture Size

Picture Size sets the number of pixels for Jpeg. The higher the numbers of pixels, the more detail your pictures will have.
- When the aspect ratio is set to 4:3, you use all the 10 MP of the sensor for a maximum image size of 3680 x 2760.
- When the aspect ratio is 16:9, you only use a wide crop of the sensor for a maximum image size of 4016 x 2256.
- When the aspect ratio is 3:2 you use 17 MP of the sensor and have a 3840 x 2560 image size.
- When the aspect ratio is 1:1, you use 14,5 MP of the sensor for a 2752 x 2752 image size.
The Panasonic GH5S also has a digital teleconverter option, allowing you to zoom in by a factor of times 2 or times 4. This can be a handy feature if you don’t shoot RAW (see the next item for more info). Thanks to in-body digital processing, the resulting Jpegs actually retain a larger image size than what you’d expect of de facto cropping the sensor by a factor 2 or 4. I would however only recommend using this feature if you’re a die-hard jpeg shooter, since using RAW files and developing your images in Lightroom or another app will almost always get you better results.

Quality

Probably the most important setting is Quality. You can select either Jpeg, where the RAW data from the sensor is processed by an in-camera algorithm to produce a viewable image, or save your images in this RAW format. RAW retains all the data of the sensor and is meant to be edited afterward in a desktop application like Lightroom or Luminar. Saving as RAW means that you have much more creative freedom afterwards to push shadows or pull highlights, sharpen and enhance your image in any way you please. A Jpeg retains only a fraction of this information, according to the algorithm inside the camera which might or might not suit your style and/or needs.

Hence, my recommendation is always to shoot RAW or RAW Jpeg. This does mean larger files, but SD cards are inexpensive compared to your beautiful new Lumix. But some photographers prefer to shoot in Jpeg only because they are for instance not interested in post-processing images. In this case, I would set the Jpeg to the highest quality setting.

AFS/AFF

AFS is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Single and AFF is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Flexible. In AFS, the focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway and in AFF focus is continuously readjusted according to the movement of the subject. See AFF as a function between Single AF and Continuous AF.

This can easily be changed by using the dial on the right of the ECF too:

The AFC function below AFS/AFF continuously changes focus according to the movement of your subject.

Some more info on these modes for clarification:
- AFS will find focus and stay focused at that distance until you take a photo or release the shutter button. This is handy if you want to focus and then recompose your shot for instance.
- AFF will do the same unless it detects subject movement, at which time it will temporarily switch to AFC operation in order to re-focus.
- AFC won’t start to seek focus until you half-press the shutter, and will continually evaluate subject movement and change focus as needed.
- With AFS you can lock focus on a particular point, then swing the camera to get the right framing; with AFC, it will not lock focus but will keep re-focusing. That’s why Pinpoint focusing can’t be used with AFC.
AF Custom Setting (Photo)

You can customize the operation settings of Auto Focus for stills here. These presets apply only when you’re in AFF or AFC.

There are 4 Sets (or presets) to choose from:
- Set 1: This is a basic general-purpose setting.
- Set 2: This is a setting suited for scenes where the subject moves in only one direction at a constant speed.
- Set 3: This is a setting suited for scenes where the subject moves in random directions and obstacles are likely to appear in the image.
- Set 4: This is a setting suited for scenes where the speed of the subject changes significantly.
There are three areas in which these presets can be tweaked according to your preferences:
- AF Sensitivity: increase or decrease how sensitive the autofocus readjustment reacts to the movement of your subject.
- AF Area Sensitivity: increase or decrease how sensitive the autofocus readjustment reacts to your subject moving out of the selected AF area.
- Moving Object prediction: For still subjects, you can prevent defocusing caused by a sudden movement of the subject.
Photo Style

This applies only to Jpeg images, and the RAW preview. You can select a color effect here.
- Standard: standard Panasonic color and contrast rendering.
- Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
- Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.
- Monochrome: Monochrome (black and white)effect with no color shades.
- L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
- Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
- Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
- Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.
- Cinelike D: Gives priority to the dynamic range by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images. Suited for editing.
- Cinelike V: Gives priority to the contrast by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images.
As mentioned earlier, it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customize the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.
- Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.
- Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.
- Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.
- Saturation: add more vividness to the colors. Or remove some.
- Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.
Filter Settings

The filter Settings go a step further than merely a photo style. These include artistic effects like Low Key, Sepia, Cross Process and retro stylings. You can turn them ON or OFF here, select the effect you want to use and change the settings by using the touch screen. You can also set your camera up to shoot one with and one without an image effect simultaneously.

If you’re wondering how you get to Creative Control mode, you need to set the mode dial to the paint palette.

And simply press up and down to select the image effects. You can also display the selection screen by touching the Recording Mode icon in the recording screen.

These are all the image effects available:
- Expressive
- High Key
- Monochrome
- Silky Monochrome
- Cross Process
- Bleach Bypass
- Fantasy
- Sunshine: you can select the position and size of the light source here.
- Retro
- Low Key
- Dynamic Monochrome
- Impressive Art
- Toy Effect
- Miniature Effect: you can select the portion of your image that is in focus here (and where the blur effect won’t happen)
- Star Filter
- Old Days
- Sepia
- Rough Monochrome
- High Dynamic
- Toy Pop
- Soft Focus
- One Point Color: you can select the color to leave in here by using a color picker.
Color Space

Select either sRGB or Adobe RGB here. Adobe RGB has a greater range of reproducible colors than sRGB, so it might be worth looking into this color space if you print to paper a lot. But remember that you’ll also need a monitor capable of reproducing the larger color range too. And this can often lead to problems when converting to sRGB or editing your images in external applications. Because of all this, I have it set to sRGB.

MENU → Camera Icon → page 2 of 5 (also called the Rec menu)

Metering Mode

You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the camera. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:
- Multiple: This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
- Center-weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
- Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.
Highlight Shadow

This allows you to lighten the shadows and darkens the highlights in your image (or video). So this is a method of creating balance in your image if you feel like the highlights are too strong or the shadows too dark. You have 4 presets available, and you can also make 3 custom presets yourself:
- Standard: no adjustments are set.
- Raise the contrast: Bright areas are brightened, and dark areas are darkened.
- Lower the contrast: Bright areas are darkened, and dark areas are brightened.
- Brighten dark areas: Dark areas are brightened.
- Custom: make your own preset.
This is how to adjust the parameters for Custom presets:
1. Rotate the front/rear dial to adjust the brightness of bright/dark portions.A – Bright portion
  B – Dark portion
  - The rear dial is for adjusting dark areas, and the front dial is for adjusting bright areas.
  - To register a preferred setting, press ▲, and select the destination where the custom setting will be registered to [Custom1]/[Custom2]/[Custom3].
  - Adjustments can also be made by dragging the graph.
2. Press [MENU/SET].
  - The screen display can be switched by pressing [DISP.] on the brightness adjustment screen.
  - Turning off this unit will return the setting adjusted with / / / back to the default setting.
  - When [Photo Style] is set to [Like709] or [V-Log L], setting is fixed to [ ] (Standard).
i. Dynamic

This setting will change contrast and exposure when there is a big difference from the darkest area to the brightest are in your image. What really happens is that the camera adjusts the exposure in order to capture more details in the highlights. You can choose between High, Standard, Low or Off.

This naturally causes an under-exposure in the shadow areas. But inside the jpeg engine, the camera will compensate for this by boosting shadows. The downside here is that this will obviously lead to more noise in the boosted regions, but because this is done with data directly coming from the sensor, it can be quite useful if you are a jpeg shooter.

There is also an impact on RAW images because the exposure will be underexposed.

i. Resolution

Another jpeg only functionality, i-Resolution is a form of sharpening. High, Standard, Low, and Off are selectable, and you should see these like the threshold for sharpening in an application like Lightroom. Many photographers discard these intelligent functions, and if you shoot RAW only, it’s not that important for you (except i Dynamic which can change your exposure plus or minus 1/3 stop). But if you shoot jpeg only, you should set it to Low at least, since most of the time RAW files would be sharpened in post-processing too.

Red-Eye Removal

If you use a flash when using Red-Eye Reduction, the camera will automatically detect red-eye and corrects the picture.

ISO Sensitivity

Sets the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when you use Auto ISO or i ISO. Lower Limit should be set to 200 and upper limit to 3200, this is the range where you’ll get usable images without too much noise.

Min. Shtr Speed

A very important setting if you feel that the Panasonic GH5S is producing blurry images for your shooting style. Birds in flight, for instance, will need a faster shutter speed than many other types of photography.

Since most of the time, you’ll need to raise ISO to gain faster shutter speeds, Panasonic (and many other camera producers) have made this option available. You can set it to Auto, or choose a minimum shutter speed up to 1/32000. The latter is a bit high, but as I mentioned, if you shoot action sports or for certain types of nature photography, a minimum shutter speed of 1/1000 or 1/2000 should be set. At these speeds, you can begin to “freeze” action.

MENU → Camera Icon → page 3 of 5 (also called the Rec menu)

Long Shtr NR

The camera will automatically apply noise reduction to long exposures. This applies to both Jpeg and RAW files. A black frame is taken after your initial shot to measure the noise present. Since many environmental factors (like temperature and location) have an effect on the amount of noise that you’ll see, this is the best way to determine what is noise in your frame. This data is then subtracted from your image for a noise-free (more-or-less) result.

Shading Comp.

All lenses have a lens profile that registers both distortion and shading in the corners at all apertures. These lens profiles can be applied in-camera to counter unwanted vignetting in your images. Especially important for jpeg shooters to turn this on. RAW shooters can apply these corrections later on (and with better results) in a desktop application like DXO optics Pro.

Diffraction Compensation

When you stop down your lens to a smaller aperture (normally from f/11 to f/22), a phenomenon called diffraction causes a loss in sharpness. It happens because light begins to disperse when passing through a small opening. When diffraction compensation is set to ON, the Panasonic GH5S will add sharpening to your image to try and counter this phenomenon. You should use it if you shoot jpeg.

Image Stabilizer

There are many lenses available with an optical image stabilization unit, that physically move glass elements around inside the lens.

It’s also possible to use the in-body sensor stabilization with older, manual primes that don’t relay EXIF information (like most importantly focal length in this case). You’ll need to manually set the focal length in the Focal length Set function to get optimal performance.

Ex. Tele Conv.

You can digitally enlarge pictures without too much quality deterioration with this function. Only for jpeg use, you can extend the range of your lens by times 1.4 or 1.6 using this function.

Digital Zoom

Digital zoom takes this a step further, allowing you to zoom in up to 4 times for jpegs. I would not recommend either of these functions, as it is better to shoot RAW in this case and crop in processing for the best possible quality.

Burst rate

The drive mode dial has two options for burst shooting. Burst shooting means that you’ll shoot continuously when you press the shutter button. You can apply different Burst Mode settings to Burst Shot 1 and Burst Shot 2 Setting in these menus.

You’ll see SH (for super high burst rates), SH pre (which actually goes back a few seconds in time and saves these images too). These SH modes are only available with the electronic shutter. Version 2 is always faster than version 1.

Then we have High, Medium and Low which work with the Mechanical shutter too. The actual burst rate will be higher if you shoot Jpeg only.

4K Photo

4K photo mode is designed to help you to capture fleeting moments by letting you shoot at up to an incredible 60fps. Continuous autofocus mode is automatically activated and it draws on 4K video technology to shoot 8 MP images at this fast frame rate. You’re basically recording a video where you can extract the frames in-camera.

There are three 4K modes.

Extracting 8Mp stills from the GH5’s 6K Photo Mode footage is pretty easy as follows:
1. Press the play button to located the files. Clips recorded in 4K Photo Mode are marked with the 4K Photo icon to make them easy to identify.
  Once you’ve found the clip you want, either tap the 4K Photo Icon on-screen or the Up navigation key.
2. If you have a long clip with fleeting moments of action you may like to use the slide bar at the top to quickly scroll to an interesting bit of footage. Alternatively, there’s a playback option (button Fn1) that you can use to play and pause the movie.
3. Once you’ve found the area you’re interested in, tap the Frame View Icon to see a scrollable stack of frames, just swipe right and left to locate the best shots.
4. When you find an image you like, tap the Menu/Set button or 4K Icon to save the image. Images are saved as jpegs.
it’s possible to save all the frames from 5-second sections of your 4K movie. To do this:
1. Tap the Menu button and scroll down to Playback (the 6th tab), then scroll to the second page of options and select 4K PHOTO Bulk Saving.
2. Then swipe on the screen until you find the clip that you want to extract stills from.
3. Now use the same on-screen movie navigation controls as you used before to find the first frame of the 5 seconds that you want to pull the stills from and tap the 6K Photo icon to save it and the image from the next 5 seconds.
MENU → Camera Icon → page 4 of 5 (also called the Rec menu)

Self Timer

The self-timer function is self-explanatory. If you actually want to use this function, you’ll need to set the drive mode to:

In this menu, you can select what type of self-timer you’d like to use: a 10-second delay and one-shot, 10 seconds with 3 shots with 2-second intervals or a 2-second delay, all after pressing the shutter.

Time Lapse/Animation

You can take a sequential number of images with relatively long delays in between to achieve a time-lapse movie or stop motion/animation. You’ll need to turn the drive mode dial to Time Lapse for this:

You can choose between Time Lapse or Animation in this menu.

Time Lapse:
1. Switch to Time Lapse Shot if it is not selected.
2. Change the start time and shooting interval according to your preferences.
3. Press the shutter halfway to exit the menu.
4. Press the shutter to start your time-lapse.
Stop motion/Animation
1. Switch to Stop Motion Animation
2. Change auto shooting and shooting interval according to your preferences
3. Press the shutter halfway to exit the menu.
4. Press the shutter to start your time-lapse.
5. Move the subject per frame
6. Press the folder menu to end the recording
Silent Mode

Disables operational sounds and output of light at once for completely silent stealth mode shooting with the Panasonic GH5S.

Shutter Type

You can use either the mechanical or electronic shutter, or 50/50, or let the Panasonic GH5S decide what is most appropriate. The electronic shutter has a maximum speed of 1/32000 sec, the mechanical shutter can go up to 1/8000 second and if you use the Electronic first curtain shutter, you can only go up to 1/2000 second.
- AUTO: Switches the shutter type automatically depending on the recording condition and shutter speed.
- MSHTR: Takes pictures in Mechanical Shutter Mode.
- EFC: Takes pictures in Electronic Front Curtain Mode.
- ESHTR: Takes pictures in Electronic Shutter Mode.
Remember that in artificial light or when using a flash, you best use the mechanical shutter only to avoid artifacts.

Shutter Delay

To reduce the influence of hand shake or shutter vibration, the shutter is released after the specified time has passed. 1, 2, 4 or 8-second delay are selectable. Keep your hands steady and don’t use this delay, else you might miss that critical moment.

Bracket

The Bracket function allows you to take multiple pictures while automatically adjusting a setting like exposure or aperture by pressing the shutter button.

Possible bracket types:
- Exposure Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix will sequentially take multiple images with different exposures. You can select the number of pictures to be taken and the exposure range (from 1/3 EV to 1 EV stops difference).
- Aperture Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix will sequentially take multiple images at different apertures. Either select all apertures or a number of shots (3-5) within a selected range.
- Focus Bracket:Press the shutter button and the Panasonic GH5S will sequentially take multiple images with different focus positions. You can select the distance between focus positions, the number of exposures and the sequence from far to near or the other way around.
- White Balance Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix GH5S will take three pictures with different white balance settings automatically
- White Balance Bracket (color temperature): Press the shutter button once to take three pictures with different White Balance Color Temperature values automatically. You can also set the correction range by touching the up/down slider on the screen.
HDR

You can combine 3 images with different levels of exposure into a single picture with a high dynamic range. This way, you can minimize the loss of gradations in bright areas and dark areas when, for example, the contrast between the background and the subject is large.

Two settings are available:
- Dynamic range: either select Auto where the camera will decide what range of exposure is suitable or manually select plus/minus 1,2 or 3 EV.
- Auto Align: Automatically aligns the resulting images to adjust for movement or not.
Multi Exp.

Multiple exposure is basically laying 2 (or more) images on top of each other. This is different from an HDR or composite shot in the sense that these images should be totally different from each other. It’s a technique the comes from the darkroom photography area where 2 negatives where placed on top of each other to create a totally new image with the two images combined.

How to do this:
1. Press up/down to select start and then press Menu/Set.
2. Decide on the composition and take the first picture. After this first image, press the shutter halfway down to take the next image.
3. Shoot a third or fourth exposure. all these images will add up to make multiple exposures.
4. Press the down arrow to exit or press the shutter button fully down.
5. Your multiple exposure is finished, and you can view it on the screen.
MENU → Camera Icon → page 5 of 5 (also called the Rec menu)

Time Stamp Rec

A timestamp can be printed on your images with the Panasonic GH5S, the data will include hour and day. If you decide to do this, remember that it cannot be deleted afterward.

MENU → Film Camera Icon → page 1 of 5 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

These are all movie related settings, and the menu of them is the same as the stills related menu options. YOu can however (obviously) set them up differently for video.

Rec Format

You can either choose to record in AVCHD, MP4, MP4 HEVC, PM4 (LPCM) or MOV format. The higher the Bit rate value is, the higher the picture quality becomes. Since the camera employs the VBR recording method, the bit rate is changed automatically depending on the subject to record. As a result, the recording time is shortened when a fast-moving subject is recorded. Different frame rates and bitrates are selectable per format in the Rec Quality setting.
- AVCHD: Best for HDTV
- MP4: Best for viewing on a PC
- MP4 HEVC: records HDR video.
- MP4 (LPCM): best for creating still from video or shooting to be edited later
- MOV: best for post-processing
Rec Quality

AVCHD

NTSC (59.94Hz):
FHD/28M/60p: 1920×1080, 59.94p, 28 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/17M/60i:1920×1080, 59.94i, 17 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/24M/30p: 1920×1080, 59.94i, 24 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/24M/24p: 1920×1080, 23.98p, 24 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

PAL (50,00 Hz):

FHD/28M/50p: 1920×1080, 50.00p, 28 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/17M/50i: 1920×1080, 50.00i, 17 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/24M/25p: 1920×1080, 50.00i, 24 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.
MP4

NTSC (59.94Hz):
4K/100M/30p: 3840×2160, 29.97p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

4K/100M/24p: 3840×2160, 23.98p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/28M/60p: 1920×1080, 59.94p, 28 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/20M/30p: 1920×1080, 29.97p, 20 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/24M/24p: 1920×1080, 23.98p, 24 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

PAL (50,00 Hz):

4K/100M/25p: 3840×2160, 25.00p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/28M/50p: 1920×1080, 50.00p, 28 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/20M/25p: 1920×1080, 25.00p, 20 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

Cinema (24,00 Hz):

FHD/24M/24p: 1920×1080, 24.00p, 24 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.
MP4 HEVC

NTSC (59,94 Hz):

4K/72M/30p: 3840×2160, 29.97p, 72 Mbps, 4:2:0/10 bit.

4K/72M/24p: 3840×2160, 23.98p, 72 Mbps, 4:2:0/10 bit.

PAL (50.00 Hz):

4K/72M/25p: 3840×2160, 25.00p, 72 Mbps, 4:2:0/10 bit.

MP4 (LPCM) and MOV

NTSC (59.94Hz):

C4K/8bit/150M/60p: 4096×2160, 59.94p, 150 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

C4K/10bit/150M/30p: 4096×2160, 29.97p, 150 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

C4K/8bit/100M/30p: 4096×2160, 29.97p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

C4K/ALL-I/400M/24p: 4096×2160, 23.98p, 400 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

C4K/10bit/150M/24p:4096×2160, 23.98p, 150 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

C4K/8bit/100M/24p: 4096×2160, 23.98p, 100 Mbps,4:2:0/8 bit.

4K/8bit/150M/60p: 3840×2160, 59.94p, 150 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

4K/ALL-I/400M/30p: 3840×2160, 59.94p, 400 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

4K/10bit/150M/30p: 3840×2160, 59.94p, 150 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

4K/8bit/100M/30p: 3840×2160, 59.94p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

4K/ALL-I/400M/24p: 3840×2160,23.98p, 400 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

4K/10bit/150M/24p: 3840×2160,23.98p, 150 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

4K/8bit/100M/24p: 3840×2160, 23.98p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/ALL-I/200M/60p: 1920×1080, 59.94p, 200 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

FHD/10bit/100M/60p: 1920×1080, 59.94p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

FHD/8bit/100M/60p: 1920×1080, 59.94p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/ALL-I/200M/30p: 1920×1080,29.97p, 200 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

FHD/10bit/100M/30p: 1920×1080, 29.97p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

FHD/8bit/100M/30p: 1920×1080, 29.97p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/ALL-I/200M/24p: 1920×1080, 23.98p, 200 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

FHD/10bit/100M/24p: 1920×1080, 23.98p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

FHD/8bit/100M/24p: 1920×1080, 23.98p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

PAL (50,00 Hz):

C4K/8bit/150M/50p: 4096×2160, 50.00p, 150 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

C4K/10bit/150M/25p: 4096×2160, 25.00p, 150 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

C4K/8bit/100M/25p: 4096×2160, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

4K/8bit/150M/50p: 3840×2160, 50.00p, 150 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

4K/ALL-I/400M/25p: 3840×2160, 25.00p, 400 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

4K/10bit/150M/25p: 3840×2160, 25.00p, 150 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

4K/8bit/100M/25p: 1920×1080, 25.00p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/ALL-I/200M/50p: 1920×1080, 50.00p, 200 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

FHD/10bit/100M/50p: 1920×1080, 50.00p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

FHD/8bit/100M/50p: 1920×1080, 50.00p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/ALL-I/200M/25p: 1920×1080, 25.00p, 200 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

FHD/10bit/100M/25p:1920×1080, 25.00p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

FHD/8bit/100M/25p: 1920×1080, 25.00p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

Cinema (24,00 Hz):

C4K/ALL-I/400M/24p: 4096×2160, 24.00p, 400 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

C4K/10bit/150M/24p: 4096×2160, 24.00p, 150 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

C4K/8bit/100M/24p: 4096×2160, 24.00p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

4K/ALL-I/400M/24p: 3840×2160, 24.00p, 400 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

4K/10bit/150M/24p: 3840×2160, 24.00p, 150 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

4K/8bit/100M/24p: 3840×2160, 24.00p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/ALL-I/200M/24p: 1920×1080, 24.00p, 200 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

FHD/10bit/100M/24p: 1920×1080, 24.00p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

FHD/8bit/100M/24p: 1920×1080, 24.00p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.
AFS/AFF

AFS is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Single and AFF is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Flexible. In AFS, the focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway and in AFF focus is continuously readjusted according to the movement of the subject. See AFF as a function between Single AF and Continuous AF.

This can easily be changed by using the dial on the right of the ECF too:

The AFC function below AFS/AFF continuously changes focus according to the movement of your subject.

Some more info on these modes for clarification:
- AFS will find focus and stay focused at that distance until you take a photo or release the shutter button. This is handy if you want to focus and then recompose your shot for instance.
- AFF will do the same unless it detects subject movement, at which time it will temporarily switch to AFC operation in order to re-focus.
- AFC won’t start to seek focus until you half-press the shutter, and will continually evaluate subject movement and change focus as needed.
- With AFS you can lock focus on a particular point, then swing the camera to get the right framing; with AFC, it will not lock focus but will keep re-focusing. That’s why Pinpoint focusing can’t be used with AFC.
Continuous AF

Focusing changes depending on the Focus Mode setting and the Continuous AF setting in this menu.

AFS/AFF/AFC:
- On: The camera automatically keeps focusing on subjects during recording.
- Off: The camera maintains the focus position at the start of recording.
MF

You can use manual focus.

Photo Style

You can select a photo style (like for photography, see above) for video too.

Filter Settings

You can add the image effects (filters) of Creative Control Mode, see the stills info on this above.

MENU → Film Camera Icon → page 2 of 5 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

Luminance Level

Select the luminance range to match the use of video.

Metering Mode

You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the camera. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:
- Multiple: This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
- Center-weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
- Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.
Highlight Shadow

This allows you to lighten the shadows and darkens the highlights in your image (or video). So this is a method of creating balance in your image if you feel like the highlights are too strong or the shadows too dark. You have 4 presets available, and you can also make 3 custom presets yourself:
- Standard: no adjustments are set.
- Raise the contrast: Bright areas are brightened, and dark areas are darkened.
- Lower the contrast: Bright areas are darkened, and dark areas are brightened.
- Brighten dark areas: Dark areas are brightened.
- Custom: make your own preset.
For more info, see the equivalent setting for the photos above.

i.Dynamic

This setting will change contrast and exposure when there is a big difference from the darkest area to the brightest area in your image. What really happens is that the camera adjusts the exposure in order to capture more details in the highlights. You can choose between High, Standard, Low or Off.

This naturally causes an under-exposure in the shadow areas. But inside the jpeg engine, the camera will compensate for this by boosting shadows. The downside here is that this will obviously lead to more noise in the boosted regions, but because this is done with data directly coming from the sensor, it can be quite useful.

i.Resolution

i-Resolution is a form of sharpening. High, Standard, Low, and Off are selectable, and you should see these like the threshold for sharpening in an application like Lightroom. Many photographers discard these intelligent functions, and if you shoot RAW only, it’s not that important for you (except i Dynamic which can change your exposure plus or minus 1/3 stop).

ISO Sensitivity

Set the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when it is set to AUTO.

Shading Comp.

All lenses have a lens profile that registers both distortion and shading in the corners at all apertures. These lens profiles can be applied in-camera to counter unwanted vignetting in your images.

Diffraction Compensation

When you stop down your lens to a smaller aperture (normally from f/11 to f/22), a phenomenon called diffraction causes a loss in sharpness. It happens because light begins to disperse when passing through a small opening. When diffraction compensation is set to ON, the Panasonic GH5S will add sharpening to your image to try and counter this phenomenon.

MENU → Film Camera Icon → page 3 of 5 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

Stabilizer

The Panasonic Lumix GH5S has a stabilized sensor. The sensor inside the camera is suspended on a magnetic field and can compensate for movement like the minute shakes of your hands or any other kind of movement. There are also many lenses available with an optical image stabilization unit, that physically move glass elements around inside the lens to do the same. Both systems have their pros and cons, and it is generally accepted that a stabilized sensor works better for wide-angle lenses (below 40mm) whilst optical lens stabilization is more efficient for the tele range. It is also possible to use both systems at the same time (called Dual I.S.), where you’ll take advantage of the best of both worlds.

Flkr Decrease

The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in your movies. 1/50,/1/60,1/100 or 1/120 seconds are available.

Ex. Tele Conv.

You can digitally enlarge movies without too much quality deterioration with this function. You can extend the range of your lens by times 1.4 or 1.6 using this function.

Digital Zoom

Digital zoom takes this a step further, allowing you to zoom in up to 4 times.

Picture Mode in Rec.

You can record still pictures while recording a movie on the Panasonic GH5S. During movie recording, press the shutter button fully to record a still picture when turned On. The aspect will always be 16:9.

There are 2 settings available:

Video Priority
- Pictures will be recorded with a picture size determined by the Rec Quality setting for motion pictures.
- Only JPEG images are recorded when Quality is set to Raw (still pictures will be recorded in jpeg)
- Up to 80 still, pictures can be recorded during the recording of the motion picture. (Up to 20 still pictures during 4K motion picture recording)
Photo Priority
- Pictures will be recorded with the set picture size and quality.
- The screen will go dark while recording pictures. A still picture will be recorded in the motion picture during that period, and audio is not recorded.
- Up to 20 still, pictures can be recorded during the recording of the motion picture. (Up to 10 still pictures during 4K motion picture recording)
Time Stamp Rec

Puts a time and date stamp on your recorded videos. Once turned on, this cannot be removed afterward.

Sound Rec Level Disp.

Select if you want to display the microphone level on the recording screen.

Sound Rec Level Adj.

Adjust the sound input level to 19 different levels (-12 dB to +6 dB).

MENU → Film Camera Icon → page 4 of 5 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

Sound Rec Level Limiter

The Panasonic GH5S adjusts the sound input level automatically, minimizing sound distortion (clipping noise) when the volume is too high.

Wind Noise Canceller

This will reduce the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone while maintaining sound quality. You can choose either High, Standard or Off. This function works only with the built-in microphone.

Lens Noise Cut

You can reduce the zoom sound of an interchangeable lens compatible with power zoom that is produced during motion picture recording. This function works only when an interchangeable lens that supports power zoom is used. (All micro-four-thirds lenses made by Panasonic)

Special Mic.

Only available only when you use an external stereo shotgun microphone like the Panasonic DMW-MS2. You have a few options on how to use a microphone like this:
- Stereo: Allows stereo recording of sound over a wide area.
- Lens Auto: Allows recording within the range that is set automatically according to the angle of view of the lens.
- Shotgun: Allows recording from one direction by shutting out the background and surrounding noise.
- S.Shotgun: Allows recording within the range even narrower than that of [SHOTGUN].
- Manual: Allows recording within the range you set manually.
Mic Socket

Select what is plugged into your mic socket.
- Mic Input (powered by the camera): When your mic socket works as a mic input, power is supplied to an external mic by the camera.
- Mic: a mic is plugged in that does not need to be powered by the camera.
- Line: The Mic socket works as a line input. Power is not supplied by the camera.
- Sound Output
You can record motion pictures while hearing the sounds that are being recorded by connecting commercially available headphones to this unit.

Sound Output

You can switch the sound output:
- Realtime: Actual sound without time lag. It can be different from the audio recorded in the movie.
- Rec Sound: Sound that is being recorded in motion pictures. The audio may be output slower than the actual audio. If you use the HDMI output during recording, the setting is fixed to this.
XLR Mic adaptor setting

This item is only available when using an XLR Microphone adapter.
- 96kHz/24bit: Records High-resolution sound at 96Khz /24 bit (when rec format is set to MOV)
- 48kHz/24 bit: records sound at 48kHz/24 bit (when set to MOV)
- 48kHz/16 bit: sound is recorded at 48 kHz, 16 bit
- OFF: Sound will be recorded with the built-in microphone.
HDMI Rec Output

Settings for your HDMI output when recording to an external recorder like the Atomos Shogun/Ninja.
- Info Display
- Down Convert
- HDMI Recording Control
- LUT HDMI Display
MENU → Film Camera Icon → page 5 of 5 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

Color Bars

You can display color bars and output a test tone. You can set the test tone level from among three options (s12 dB, s18 dB, and s20 dB). SMPTE, EBU or ARIB bars are available.

MENU → Custom Tool (Custom Menu)

You’ll find all customizable settings of the Panasonic GH5S in this Menu.

Exposure Menu page 1 of 7 (Exposure and Shutter button behavior settings)

Dual Native ISO setting

The Panasonic GH5s uses a dual gain architecture for better results at high ISO. When using higher ISO’s, a traditional sensor will increase the gain of the base ISO of the sensor. This increase in gain will also boost the noise level already inherently present at base ISO. A dual gain architecture sensor like this has two analog gain paths for each pixel. One is used for base ISO as usual, the second analog gain path is used for a higher iso (2500 in this case). This means that instead of having to boost the sensor digitally from ISO 200, you’ll basically start the process from zero gain once you reach ISO 2500. This leads to less noise at higher ISO.

The available ISO range varies depending on the Dual Native ISO Setting.
- Auto: ISO 160 to 51200 (80 to 204800 Extended). Sensitivity changes automatically depending on the brightness and other recording conditions.
- Low: ISO 160 to 800
- High: ISO 800 to 51200
Note: Even if you select Low or High in Intelligent Auto Plus or Creative mode, this setting will work the same way as in Auto. (Automatically)

ISO Increments

Choose the increments of exposure changes between 1/3 EV or 1 EV.

Extended ISO

ISO sensitivity can be set up to a minimum of ISO 100. Base ISO of the sensor is 200, so this extended ISO basically halves this in software, with a slight decrease in quality.

Exposure Comp. Reset

Exposure value can be reset when the Recording Mode is changed or the camera is turned off.

AF/AE Lock

Lock focus and exposure with AF/AE LOCK. To clear the lock, press AF/AE LOCK again.

AF/AE Lock Hold

When ON is selected, focus and exposure stay locked even if you press and release AF/AE LOCK. To clear the lock, press AF/AE LOCK again.

Shutter AF

Set whether or not the focus is adjusted automatically when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

Half Press Release

The shutter will immediately fire when the shutter button is pressed halfway when this is ON.

Focus Menu page 2 of 7 (more Focus/Release Shutter settings)

Quick AF

As long as the camera is held steady, the camera will automatically adjust the focus and focus adjustment will then be quicker when the shutter is pressed. You’ll get better AF performance at the expense of battery life.

Eye Sensor AF

The Panasonic GH5S will automatically start autofocus when the eye sensor is activated.

Pinpoint AF Setting

The screen will be zoomed in when the shutter is pressed halfway, selectable in full screen or in a window.

AF-point Scope Setting

The methods for displaying the magnification window. View magnification full screen or picture in picture.

AF Assist lamp

AF assist lamp will illuminate the subject when the shutter button is pressed half-way making it easier for the camera to focus when recording in low light conditions. The range is about 1 meter.

Focus/Release Priority

Set whether to give priority to focus or shutter release during Auto Focus. Setting it to Focus priority means you won’t be able to take an image if the focus is not acquired. Release will.

Focus Switching for Vert / Hor

Memorises separate positions for horizontal and vertical orientations (two vertical orientations, left and right, are available).

Loop Movement Focus Frame

When setting the AF area position or the MF Assist display position, you can now loop the position from one edge to the other edge of the screen.

AF Area Display

Selects whether you want to see a visual representation of your selected AF area on the screen.

Focus Menu page 3 of 7 (more Focus/Release Shutter settings)

AF+MF

When AF Lock is ON (press the shutter button halfway with the focus mode set to AFS or set AF Lock using AF/AE LOCK), you can make fine adjustments to the focus manually.

MF Assist

Sets the display method of MF Assist (enlarged screen) on the Panasonic GH5S.

MF Assist Display

Sets whether MF Assist (enlarged screen) will appear in a windowed screen display or in a full-screen display.

Fn Button Set

You can assign various features, such as recording functions, to specific buttons and icons as well as the function lever.
1. Press up/down to select the function button you want to assign a function to and then press MENU/SET.
2. Press up/down to select the function you want to assign and then press [MENU/SET].
Q.MENU

In Custom operations, you can customize the Q Menu according to your liking.

You can add a maximum of 15 preferred settings to the Quick Menu.
1. Press Q.MENU to display the Quick Menu.
2. Press down to select the custom tool and then press MENU/SET.
3. Press the left/right arrow to select the menu item in the top row and then press MENU/SET.
4. Press left/right to select the empty space in the bottom row and then press MENU/SET. (You can also set the menu item by dragging it from the top row to the bottom row)
5. Press return to switch to the recording screen.
Dial Set.

Assign Dial (F/SS): Assigns the operations of the aperture value and shutter speed in Manual Exposure Mode.

Rotation (F/SS): Changes the rotation direction of the dials for adjusting the aperture value and shutter speed.

Control Dial Assignment: It sets the item to be assigned to the control dial while the recording screen is displayed.

Exposure Comp.: Assigns the Exposure Compensation to the front dial or rear dial so that you can directly adjust it.

Dial Operation Switch Setup: Sets the items to be assigned temporarily to the front/rear dials when you press the function button to which Dial Operation Switch is assigned.

Joystick Setting

The joystick provides the same functions as the cursor buttons MENU/SET button.

Operation Lock Settings

Sets the control functions on the Panasonic GH5S to be disabled with the function button Operation Lock. Cursor, Joystick and Touch screen can be turned off.

Operation Menu page 4 of 7 (dial and buttons operation settings)

Video Button

Enables/disables the motion picture button.

Touch Settings

Enables/disables the Touch operation.
- Touch Screen: All touch operations are turned on.
- Touch Tab: Operations of tabs are enabled.
- Touch AF: Operation to bring the subject you touch into focus AF or adjust the focus and brightness AF+AE are enabled.
- Touch Pad AF: Operation to move the AF area by touching the monitor when the viewfinder is in use.
Auto Review

Displays a picture immediately after it is taken.

Monochrome Live View

You can display the recording screen in black and white. Recorded images will not be affected.

Constant Preview

You can check the effects of the chosen aperture and shutter speed on the recording screen in Manual Exposure Mode. Some camera makers call this Live View.

Live view boost

The screen will appear brighter than the captured image so you can check the composition in a low-light environment, such as at night.

V-LOGL view assist
- LUT Select: Allows you to select the LUT data that is used between the preset options (Vlog_709) and registered LUT data.
- LUT Monitor Display: Allows you to set the display on the monitor/viewfinder of your camera use when Photo Style is set to V-Log L.
Peaking

In-focus portions (portions on the screen with clear outlines) are highlighted when the focus is being adjusted manually. A great focussing aide for manual focussing. It can be set to High or Low.

Monitor/ Display Menu page 5 of 7 (settings for the display)

Histogram

Display the histogram. A histogram is a graph that displays brightness along the horizontal axis (black to white) and the number of pixels at each brightness level on the vertical axis. It allows you to easily check a picture’s exposure.

Guide Line

This will set the pattern of guidelines displayed when taking a picture.

Center Marker

The center of the recording screen will be displayed as [+].

Highlight

When the Auto Review function is activated or when playing back, white saturated areas appear blinking in black and white.

Zebra Pattern

Indicates parts that may become white saturated through overexposure in a zebra pattern. You can select a brightness value between 50% and 105%. In Zebra 2, you can select OFF. If you select 100% or 105%, only the areas that are already white saturated are displayed in a zebra pattern. The smaller the value is, the wider the brightness range to be processed as a zebra pattern will be.

Expo.Meter

Display the exposure meter.
- Set to ON to display the Exposure meter when performing Program Shift, setting the aperture, and setting shutter speed.
- Unsuitable areas of the range are displayed in red.
- When the Exposure meter is not displayed, switch the display information for the screen by pressing DISP.
- If no operations are performed for approximately 4 seconds, the Exposure meter disappears.
MF Guide

When you set the focus manually, an MF guide that allows you to check the direction to achieve focus is displayed.

Monitor/ Display Menu page 6 of 7 (monitor and lens behavior settings)

LVF/Monitor Disp. Set

You can select separate screen display styles for the viewfinder and the monitor.

Monitor Info. Disp.

Display the recording information screen.

Viewfinder style: Scales down images slightly so that you can better review the composition of the images.

Monitor style: Scales images to fill the entire screen so that you can see their details.

Rec Area

This changes the angle of view during motion picture recording and still picture recording. Displays the recording area according to the angle of view for still picture recording or video.

Remaining Disp.

This will switch the display between the number of recordable pictures and available recording time.

Menu Guide

Display a selection screen when you set the mode dial to the paint palette icon.

Lens Position Resume

Saves the focus position when you turn off the camera. When an interchangeable lens that is compatible with power zoom is in use, the zoom position is also saved.

Power Zoom Lens

Change the settings for a power zoom lens. Sets the screen display and lens operations when using an interchangeable lens that is compatible with power zoom.
- Disp Focal Length: When you zoom, the focal distance is displayed and you can confirm the zoom position.
- Step Zoom: When you operate the zoom with this setting [ON], the zoom will stop at positions corresponding to predetermined distances.
- Zoom Speed: You can set the zoom speed for zoom operations for both stills and vide to high, medium or low.
- Zoom Ring: When set to OFF] the operations controlled by the zoom ring are disabled to prevent accidental operation.
Lens Fn Button Setting

Sets the function to be assigned to the focus button of an interchangeable lens. You can call up the assigned function by setting the focus selector switch of a compatible interchangeable lens to Fn and then pressing the focus button of the lens.

Monitor/ Display Menu page 7 of 7 (monitor and lens behavior settings)

Face Recog.

Face Recognition is a function on the Panasonic GH5S which finds a face resembling a registered face and priorities focus and exposure automatically. Even if the person is located towards the back or on the end of a line in a group photo, the camera can still take a clear picture.

On will automatically recognize faces, but you can also register up to six faces yourself.
1. In this Menu, select an empty frame (or overwrite one).
2. Take a picture of the face you want to register.
3. Register this face. Note that you can register up to 3 images per face for more accurate results.
Profile Setup

If you set the name and birthday of your baby or pet in advance, you can record their name and age in months and years in the images.

MENU → Setup Menu → page 1 of 5 (General Camera Setup)

Online Manual

Display the URL or QR code to go to the online manual.

Cust. Set Mem.

Up to 5 sets of current camera settings can be registered using C1, C2, C3-1, C3-2 or C3-3. The first three are directly accessible via the Mode Dial.

Saving a custom camera is quite simple, set the mode dial to C1, C2 or C3, change the camera’s settings to your preferences, go in the Menu to this setting and press MENU/SET on the screen.

Clock Set

You have already probably set time and date when you first turned on the Panasonic GH5S, but you can also change this here.

World Time

Sets the times for the region where you live (HOME) and your travel destination (DESTINATION). Time and date will be altered to reflect the local time and date at your travel destination.

Travel Date

If you set Travel Setup, elapsed days of your trip i.e. which day of the trip based on its departure and return dates will be recorded The travel date is automatically canceled if the current date is after the return date.

If you set Location, the name of the travel destination that you enter will be recorded.

Wi-Fi

It’s possible to control your Panasonic GH5S with a smartphone or a tablet, display pictures on TV, print Wirelessly, Send images to a PC or use Web Services from Panasonic all via WiFi.

To use the Wi-Fi function on this camera, a wireless access point is needed of course.

By default, Wi-Fi is assigned to the Fn6 button when the camera is in Recording Mode, while it is assigned to Fn1 when the camera is in Playback Mode. You can assign it to any button you want.

When you want to connect to WiFi, simply press this button.

Wi-Fi Setup

The priority of Remote Device: Sets either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be used during remote recording.

Wi-Fi Password: You can improve security by enabling password entry for a direct connection to a smartphone.

LUMIX CLUB: Acquires or changes the “LUMIX CLUB” login ID.

PC Connection: You can set the workgroup. To send images to a PC, a connection to the same workgroup as the destination PC is required.

Device Name: You can change the name (SSID) of this unit.

Wi-Fi Function Lock: To prevent incorrect operation and use of the Wi-Fi function by a third party and to protect saved personal information, protect the Wi-Fi function with a password.

Network Address: Displays the MAC address and IP address of this unit.

Approved Regulations: Displays the certification number for radio regulations.

Bluetooth

You can also connect to your Smartphone, Tablet or TV if your device has the Bluetooth functionality. A function called pairing is needed in order to establish a connection. You’ll find it in this menu, remember to also turn Bluetooth on if you want to do so.

Wireless Connection Lamp

This enables/disables the wireless connection lamp.

MENU → Setup Menu → page 2 of 5 (General Camera Setup)

Beep

This allows you to set the electronic sound and the electronic shutter sound. Remember this will be off if you’re in Silent Mode!

Headphone volume

If you’re using a headphone, you can adjust the volume here.

Economy

These settings will determine the way the camera handles inactivity on your part to save battery life.

Sleep Mode: The camera is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time selected on the setting.

Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi): The camera is automatically turned off if it is not connected to a Wi-Fi network and has not been used for 15 minutes (

Auto LVF/ Monitor Off: The monitor/viewfinder is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time selected on the setting.

Power Save LVF Shooting: If you display the monitor using the viewfinder/monitor automatic switching function, the camera will turn off automatically after being left idle.

Monitor Display Speed

This sets the monitor frame rate to either 30fps or 60fps. 60fps will run smoother at the cost of battery life.

LVF Display Speed

This sets the viewfinder frame rate, to either 30 or 60fps. Again, at 60fps you’ll see movement smoother at the cost of battery life.

Night Mode

This displays the monitor and viewfinder screens in red. It reduces the difficulty in seeing the surroundings caused by brightly-lit screens at night or in any low-light environment.

Monitor Display

Brightness, color, or red or blue tint of the Monitor/viewfinder can be adjusted.

Monitor Luminance

These settings will affect how and when the brightness of the monitor is adjusted.

Auto: The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright it is around the camera.

Mode 1: Makes the monitor brighter than normal.

Mode 2: Set the monitor to the standard brightness.

Mode 3: Makes the monitor brighter than standard.

MENU → Setup Menu → page 3 of 5 (General Camera Setup)

Status LCD Backlight

You can set the LCD Backlight to High, Low or Off.

Eye Sensor

Sensitivity will set the sensitivity of the eye sensor.

LVF/Monitor Switch will set the method for switching between the monitor and viewfinder.

USB Mode

Sets the communication method when connecting using the USB connection cable.

Select on Connection: Select this setting to select the USB communication system when connecting to another device.

PC Storage: Select this setting to export images to a connected PC.

PC Tether: Select this setting to control the camera from a PC installed with supported software.

Pictbridge PTP: Select this setting when connecting to a printer supporting PictBridge.

USB Power Supply

Supplies power via the USB connection cable when the camera is connected to a PC or PowerBank.

TV Connection

Set the format for the HDMI output when playing back on the HDMI compatible TV and monitor connected with this unit using the HDMI cable. It’s possible to set it to Auto or 4K, 1080p, 1080i, etc…

Language

Set the language displayed on the screen.

Version Disp

This enables the firmware versions of the camera and lens to be checked before an upgrade for instance.

MENU → Setup Menu → page 4 of 5 (General Camera Setup)

Folder/File Settings

Set the folder and file name patterns in which images are to be saved.

Double Slot Function

Set the way recording to the card slots 1 and 2 are performed.
- Relay Rec: Relays recording to the other card slot even after the first card runs out of free space during recording. Records the same images to the two cards.
- Backup Rec: Records the same images to the two cards.
- Allocation Rec: Allows you to specify the card slot to be used for recording for different image formats like Jpeg on one and RAW on the other.
Save/Restore Camera Setting

Save the camera’s setup information to the card. Since saved setup information can be imported to the camera, you can apply the same setup to more than one camera.

No.Reset

Reset the file number of the next recording to 0001.

Reset

The following settings are reset to the default:
- Recording settings.
- Setup settings Wi-Fi Setup and Bluetooth settings.
- Custom settings (Face Recog. and[Profile Setup settings.
- Setup/custom settings (except for Wi-Fi Setup, Bluetooth, Face Recog. and Profile Setup).
Reset Network Settings

The following network settings are reset to the default:
- Wi-Fi Setup (Excluding LUMIX CLUB).
- Registered device information in Bluetooth and values in Wi-Fi network settings.
Pixel Refresh

It will perform the optimization of the imaging device and image processing. Use this function when you start seeing hot or dead pixels in your images.

Sensor Cleaning

Dust reduction to blow off the debris and dust that have affixed to the front of the imaging device is performed.

MENU → Setup Menu → page 5 of 5 (General Camera Setup)

Level Gauge Assist

Adjust: Hold the camera in a horizontal position, and press MENU/SET. The level gauge will be adjusted.

Level Gauge Value Reset: Restores the default level gauge setting.

Format

Format the card before recording a picture with this unit.

Since data cannot be recovered after formatting, make sure to back up necessary data in advance.

MENU → My Menu (that little man)

Light Composition

Select multiple frames from 6K/4K burst files that you wish to combine in a composite image. Very cool feature. Parts of the image that are brighter than the preceding frame will be superimposed on the preceding frame to combine the frames into one picture.

My Menu Setting

You can register frequently-used menus and display them in My Menu. You can register up to 23 menus for quick access.
- Add: Specifies the menu to be displayed in My Menu to register it.
- Sorting: Rearranges the menus displayed in My Menu. Select the menu you want to move and set the destination.
- Delete: Deletes registered menus from the displayed menu list.
- Display from my menu: Sets the type of the menu screen to be displayed.
MENU → Playback Menu → Page 1 of 4

Slide Show

ou can play back the pictures you have taken in synchronization with music, and you can do this in sequence while leaving a fixed interval between each of the pictures.

You can also put together a slide show composed of only still pictures, only motion pictures, etc.

You can change the settings for slide show playback by selecting [Effect] or [Setup] on the slide show menu screen.

Playback Mode

Playback in Normal Play, Picture Only or Video Only can be selected.

Protect

You can set protection for pictures you do not want to delete by mistake.

Rating

You can set five different rating levels for images to do the following:
- Delete all the pictures not set as ratings.
- Checking the rating level on the file detail display of an operating system, such as Windows 10.
Title Edit

You can add text (comments) to pictures. After the text has been registered, it can be stamped in prints using Text Stamp.

Face Rec Edit

You can clear and replace all information relating to face recognition in selected images.

RAW Processing

You can process the pictures taken in RAW format. The processed pictures will be saved in JPEG format.
- White Balance: Allows you to select a White Balance preset and adjust it. If you select an item you can process the image with the setting at the time of recording.
- Brightness correction: Allows you to correct the brightness within the range between – 2 EV and +2 EV.
- Photo Style: Allows you to select a photo style effect.
- i.Dynamic: Allows you to select the i.Dynamic setting.
- Contrast: Allows you to adjust the contrast.
- Highlight: Allows you to adjust the brightness of bright portions.
- Shadow: Allows you to adjust the brightness of dark portions.
- Saturation and Color Tone: Allows you to adjust the saturation. (When Monochrome or L.Monochrome is selected in Photo Style, you can adjust the color tone.)
- Filter Effect: Allows you to select a filter effect. (Only when Monochrome or L.Monochrome is selected in Photo Style)
- Noise Reduction: Allows you to adjust the noise reduction setting.
- i.Resolution: Allows you to select the i.Resolution setting.
- Sharpness: Allows you to adjust the resolution effect.
4K PHOTO Bulk Saving

You can save pictures of a 4K burst file that was extracted from any 5 second period at once.

MENU → Playback Menu → Page 2 of 4

4K PHOTO Noise Reduction

When saving pictures, reduce the noise produced during recording by high ISO sensitivity.

Light composition

Select multiple frames from 6K/4K burst files that you wish to combine. Parts of the image that are brighter than the preceding frame will be superimposed on the preceding frame to combine the frames into one picture.

Clear Retouch

Remove unwanted objects and such right from the camera menu. The erasure operation can only be performed by touching. Clear Retouch automatically enables the touch operation.

Text Stamp

You can stamp recording information like names, dates, places on recorded images.

Copy

Copy images on the card to the other card.

Resize

To allow easy posting to web pages, attachment to e-mail, etc., picture size (the number of pixels) is reduced.

Cropping

You can enlarge and then clip the important part of the recorded picture.

Rotate

Rotate pictures manually in 90-degree steps.

MENU → Playback Menu → Page 3 of 4

Video Divide

Recorded motion pictures and 6K/4K burst files can be divided into two. It is recommended for when you want to divide a part you need a part you do not need.

Time-Lapse Video

This function allows you to create a motion picture from a picture group recorded with Time Lapse Shot.

Stop Motion Video

A Motion picture is created from group pictures taken with Stop Motion Animation.

Rotate Disp.

This mode allows you to display pictures vertically if they were recorded holding the camera vertically.

Anamorphic Desqueeze Display

Lets you view an enlarged image in Cinescope size while recording with 2.0x and 1.33x Anamorphic lens.

LUT Monitor display

The Panasonic GH5 allows users to load custom LUTs as well so that they can preview different looks straight in their camera while shooting in V-Log. LUT Monitor Display needs to be ON in order for this to work.

Picture Sort

You can set the order in which the camera displays images during playback. Either via file name or date/time.

MENU → Playback Menu → Page 4 of 4

Delete Confirmation

This sets which option, Yes or No, will be highlighted first when the confirmation screen for deleting a picture is displayed.

Quick access with the Q Menu (Fn 2)

The most commonly used settings can be accessed through what is called the Q Menu. This is the FN2 button that you’ll find right next to the screen, above the trash bucket button.
The features that can be adjusted using Quick Menu are determined by the mode or a display style the camera is in.

Photo Style

This applies only to Jpeg images, and the RAW preview when you load them into an app like Lightroom. You can select a color effect here.

Standard: standard Panasonic color and contrast rendering.

Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.

Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.

Monochrome: Monochrome (black and white)effect with no color shades.

L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.

Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.

Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.

Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.

Cinelike D: Gives priority to the dynamic range by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images. Suited for editing.

Cinelike V: Gives priority to the contrast by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images.

As mentioned earlier, it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customize the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.

Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.

Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.

Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.

Saturation: add more vividness to the colors. Or remove some.

Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.

Motion Pic. Set

You can change bitrate and frame-rate for the video here, as well as select the appropriate movie container.

AVCHD

NTSC (59.94Hz):

FHD/28M/60p: 1920×1080, 59.94p, 28 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/17M/60i:1920×1080, 59.94i, 17 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/24M/30p: 1920×1080, 59.94i, 24 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/24M/24p: 1920×1080, 23.98p, 24 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

PAL (50,00 Hz):

FHD/28M/50p: 1920×1080, 50.00p, 28 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/17M/50i: 1920×1080, 50.00i, 17 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/24M/25p: 1920×1080, 50.00i, 24 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

MP4

NTSC (59.94Hz):

4K/100M/30p: 3840×2160, 29.97p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

4K/100M/24p: 3840×2160, 23.98p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/28M/60p: 1920×1080, 59.94p, 28 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/20M/30p: 1920×1080, 29.97p, 20 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/24M/24p: 1920×1080, 23.98p, 24 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

PAL (50,00 Hz):

4K/100M/25p: 3840×2160, 25.00p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/28M/50p: 1920×1080, 50.00p, 28 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/20M/25p: 1920×1080, 25.00p, 20 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

Cinema (24,00 Hz):

FHD/24M/24p: 1920×1080, 24.00p, 24 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

MP4 HEVC

NTSC (59,94 Hz):

4K/72M/30p: 3840×2160, 29.97p, 72 Mbps, 4:2:0/10 bit.

4K/72M/24p: 3840×2160, 23.98p, 72 Mbps, 4:2:0/10 bit.

PAL (50.00 Hz):

4K/72M/25p: 3840×2160, 25.00p, 72 Mbps, 4:2:0/10 bit.

MP4 (LPCM) and MOV

NTSC (59.94Hz):

C4K/8bit/150M/60p: 4096×2160, 59.94p, 150 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

C4K/10bit/150M/30p: 4096×2160, 29.97p, 150 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

C4K/8bit/100M/30p: 4096×2160, 29.97p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

C4K/ALL-I/400M/24p: 4096×2160, 23.98p, 400 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

C4K/10bit/150M/24p:4096×2160, 23.98p, 150 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

C4K/8bit/100M/24p: 4096×2160, 23.98p, 100 Mbps,4:2:0/8 bit.

4K/8bit/150M/60p: 3840×2160, 59.94p, 150 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

4K/ALL-I/400M/30p: 3840×2160, 59.94p, 400 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

4K/10bit/150M/30p: 3840×2160, 59.94p, 150 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

4K/8bit/100M/30p: 3840×2160, 59.94p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

4K/ALL-I/400M/24p: 3840×2160,23.98p, 400 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

4K/10bit/150M/24p: 3840×2160,23.98p, 150 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

4K/8bit/100M/24p: 3840×2160, 23.98p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/ALL-I/200M/60p: 1920×1080, 59.94p, 200 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

FHD/10bit/100M/60p: 1920×1080, 59.94p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

FHD/8bit/100M/60p: 1920×1080, 59.94p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/ALL-I/200M/30p: 1920×1080,29.97p, 200 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

FHD/10bit/100M/30p: 1920×1080, 29.97p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

FHD/8bit/100M/30p: 1920×1080, 29.97p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/ALL-I/200M/24p: 1920×1080, 23.98p, 200 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

FHD/10bit/100M/24p: 1920×1080, 23.98p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

FHD/8bit/100M/24p: 1920×1080, 23.98p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

PAL (50,00 Hz):

C4K/8bit/150M/50p: 4096×2160, 50.00p, 150 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

C4K/10bit/150M/25p: 4096×2160, 25.00p, 150 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

C4K/8bit/100M/25p: 4096×2160, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

4K/8bit/150M/50p: 3840×2160, 50.00p, 150 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

4K/ALL-I/400M/25p: 3840×2160, 25.00p, 400 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

4K/10bit/150M/25p: 3840×2160, 25.00p, 150 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

4K/8bit/100M/25p: 1920×1080, 25.00p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/ALL-I/200M/50p: 1920×1080, 50.00p, 200 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

FHD/10bit/100M/50p: 1920×1080, 50.00p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

FHD/8bit/100M/50p: 1920×1080, 50.00p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/ALL-I/200M/25p: 1920×1080, 25.00p, 200 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

FHD/10bit/100M/25p:1920×1080, 25.00p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

FHD/8bit/100M/25p: 1920×1080, 25.00p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

Cinema (24,00 Hz):

C4K/ALL-I/400M/24p: 4096×2160, 24.00p, 400 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

C4K/10bit/150M/24p: 4096×2160, 24.00p, 150 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

C4K/8bit/100M/24p: 4096×2160, 24.00p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

4K/ALL-I/400M/24p: 3840×2160, 24.00p, 400 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

4K/10bit/150M/24p: 3840×2160, 24.00p, 150 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

4K/8bit/100M/24p: 3840×2160, 24.00p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

FHD/ALL-I/200M/24p: 1920×1080, 24.00p, 200 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

FHD/10bit/100M/24p: 1920×1080, 24.00p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:2/10 bit.

FHD/8bit/100M/24p: 1920×1080, 24.00p, 100 Mbps, 4:2:0/8 bit.

Picture Setting

You can quickly change the picture size and picture quality here for your Jpeg’s.

These are the aspect ratios available:

4:3: native sensor ratio

3:2: the ratio used in full-frame cameras

16:9: for a wider looking view

1:1: Square aspect ratio, mostly used for social sharing

Quality-wise, you can choose between Small (S), Medium (M) and Large (L) file sizes. Obviously, Large will have the best quality Jpeg’s, at the expense of larger files. If you only shoot Jpeg (and not RAW) set it to Large. If you shoot both (Jpeg+RAW, see next screen), you could set it to small or medium since you’ll always work with the RAW in post-processing. This way, you’ll still have a Jpeg for sharing quickly online or as a reference whilst still saving some space.

Quality

Probably the most important setting is Quality. You can select either Jpeg, where the RAW data from the sensor is processed by an in-camera algorithm to produce a viewable image, or save your images in this RAW format. RAW retains all the data of the sensor and is meant to be edited afterward in a desktop application like Lightroom or Luminar. Saving as RAW means that you have much more creative freedom afterward to push shadows or pull highlights, sharpen and enhance your image in any way you please. A Jpeg retains only a fraction of this information, according to the algorithm inside the camera which might or might not suit your style and/or needs.

Hence, my recommendation is always to shoot RAW or RAW Jpeg. This does mean larger files, but SD cards are inexpensive compared to your beautiful new Lumix. But some photographers prefer to shoot in Jpeg only because they are for instance not interested in post-processing images. In this case, I would set the Jpeg to the highest quality setting.

AFS/AFF

AFS is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Single and AFF is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Flexible. In AFS, the focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway and in AFF focus is continuously readjusted according to the movement of the subject. See AFF as a function between Single AF and Continuous AF.

The AFC function below AFS/AFF continuously changes focus according to the movement of your subject.

Some more info on these modes for clarification:

AFS will find focus and stay focused at that distance until you take a photo or release the shutter button. This is handy if you want to focus and then recompose your shot for instance.

AFF will do the same unless it detects subject movement, at which time it will temporarily switch to AFC operation in order to re-focus.

AFC won’t start to seek focus until you half-press the shutter, and will continually evaluate subject movement and change focus as needed.

With AFS you can lock focus on a particular point, then swing the camera to get the right framing; with AFC, it will not lock focus but will keep re-focusing. That’s why Pinpoint focusing can’t be used with AFC.

AF Mode

This allows the focusing method that suits the positions and number of the subjects to be selected. There are 6 different methods available, each suited for different scenarios.

Face/Eye Detection

A person’s face, eyes, and body (the entire body or the upper half of the body) are automatically detected.

When the camera detects a person’s face or body, an AF area is displayed over the detected person.

Yellow: This is the AF area for the person to be brought into focus. The camera automatically selects the person.

White: These are the AF areas for people other than the person to be brought into focus. This type of AF area is displayed when more than one person is detected.

When a person’s face or eyes are detected, the eye closer to the camera will be brought into focus, if the eyes are inside the yellow frame.

The camera can detect the faces of up to 15 people. To specify the person or eye to be brought into focus, align an AF area with the desired person or eye. You can do so easily by touching a person indicated with an AF area.

Tracking

The camera keeps adjusting the focus and exposure automatically to the specified moving object. Perform either of the following operations to lock the subject to be tracked:

Use a button: aim the AF tracking frame D over the subject, and press the shutter button halfway.

Use the touch screen: touch the subject on the screen.

If it fails to lock, the AF area will flash in red, and disappear.

The AF area turns yellow while the subject is locked and green while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Press the Menu button to cancel the lock.

225 Area

Widest setting with all AF points used. Up to 225 AF areas can be focused on. This is effective when your subject is not in the center of the screen.

Custom Multi

From among 225 AF areas, you can freely set the optimum shape of the AF area for the subject.

1-Area

The camera focuses on the subject in the AF area on the screen.

Pinpoint

You can achieve a more precise focus on a point that is smaller than 1-Area. If you press the shutter button halfway, the screen that lets you check the focus by enlarging it.

Metering Mode

You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the camera. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:

Multiple: This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.

Center-weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.

Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.

Exposure Comp

If you feel like your Lumix GH5S is over- or underexposing your images (or you want to purposely underexpose), you can dial in what is called exposure compensation here. A range of plus-minus 5 is available here to correct the auto exposure of the camera.

ISO sensitivity
Sets the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when you use Auto ISO or i ISO. Lower Limit should be set to 200 and upper limit to 3200, this is the range where you’ll get usable images without too much noise.

Conclusion

So this was a quick run-through of all the Panasonic Lumix GH5S Menu items, with pointers, tips, and tricks along the way. This information should get you familiarised with this fantastic mirrorless video camera. If you would like any clarification or extra information on any functionality here, let me know through the comment section below. Happy shooting!
January 19, 2018
Panasonic Lumix G9 settings, tips and tricks
Panasonic Lumix G9 settings, tips and tricks

[smartpay_product id=”12″]

Introduction

Welcome to my Panasonic G9 advanced manual with tips and tricks. This guide starts from your Menu settings and goes through all aspects of this interesting camera. I know it is a lot of information, but you’ll get the hang of it soon, I promise.

As opposed the the video centric Panasonic GH5, the G9 is more stills oriented camera, but it can still shoot 4K/60p video and offers both headphone and microphone jacks.

Key Features
- 20.3MP Live MOS sensor with no AA filter (same as GH5)
- 3.68M-dot electronic viewfinder w/ 0.83x equivalent magnification
- 1.04M-dot 3″ articulating touchscreen display
- 5-axis in-body image stabilization with Dual I.S. 2 (CIPA rated 6.5 stops)
- 20 fps burst w/continuous AF using the e-shutter (for ~50 frames)
- 9 fps burst w/continuous AF using mechanical shutter (for 600 frames)
- 80MP Raw and/or JPEG files using High-Resolution mode
- 4K/60p UHD video capture
- Magnesium body designed to be dust/weather-sealed
- Dual UHS-II card slots supporting new high-speed ‘V’-rated cards
- Assortment of 4K and 6K Photo modes and in-camera focus stacking
- USB charge and power capability
- Top plate LCD
- AF joystick
- Wi-Fi Bluetooth
I’ll be going over the entire Menu structure in this post, and giving you tips, pointers, and tricks along the way.

Diving into the MENU system

When you switch on your Panasonic Lumix G9 you’ll be asked to enter a date, time and timezone. This setting is necessary, as all images captured will have a timestamp, making it easy to find your favorite pictures in the future.
After this is setup, press the MENU button. You’ll see a range of icons and pages.
We’ll start at page 1 of the camera Icon (camera settings)

MENU → Camera Icon → page 1 of 5 (also called the Rec menu)

Aspect Ratio

You can change the aspect ratio of your photos here. Changing the aspect ratio can be used as a way to boost your creativity, for instance landscapes often look great with a 16:9 ratio, or for sharing on Instagram, a 1:1 crop might suit you better.

An M43 (Micro Four-thirds) camera has a native aspect ratio of (not surprisingly) 4:3. You should realise that changing the aspect ratio to anything else than this will actually crop the sensor, meaning that you’ll lose pixels. You should look at it as re-framing your image (like you can do in Lightroom or other photo editors) inside the camera. Jpeg’s will be stored with the chosen ratio, but RAW images (although previewed with the chosen ratio), will still have the full information of the 4:3 sensor retained.

These are the aspect ratios available:
- 4:3: native sensor ratio
- 3:2: the ratio used in full frame cameras
- 16:9: for a wider looking view
- 1:1: Square aspect ratio, mostly used for social sharing
Picture Size

Picture Size sets the number of pixels for Jpeg (nor RAW). The higher the numbers of pixels, the more detail your pictures will have.
- When the aspect ratio is set to 4:3, you use all the 20 MP of the sensor for a maximum image size of 5184 x 3888
- When the aspect ratio is 16:9, you only use a wide crop of 14.5 MP of the sensor for a maximum image size of 5184 x 2920.
- When the aspect ratio is 3:2 you use 17 MP of the sensor and have an 5184 x 3456 image size.
- When the aspect ratio is 1:1, you use 14,5 MP of the sensor for an 3888 x 3888 image size.
The Panasonic G9 also has a digital teleconverter option, allowing you to zoom in by a factor of times 2 or times 4. This can be a handy feature if you don’t shoot RAW (see next item for more info). Thanks to in-body digital processing, the resulting Jpegs actually retain a larger image size than what you’d expect of de facto cropping the sensor by a factor 2 or 4. I would however only recommend using this feature if you’re a die hard jpeg shooter, since using RAW files and developing your images in Lightroom or another app will almost always get you better results.

Quality

Probably the most important setting is Quality. You can select either Jpeg, where the RAW data from the sensor is processed by an in-camera algorithm to produce a viewable image, or save your images in this RAW format. RAW retains all the data of the sensor, and is meant to be edited afterwards in a desktop application like Lightroom or Luminar. Saving as RAW means that you have much more creative freedom afterwards to push shadows or pull highlights, sharpen and enhance your image in any way you please. A Jpeg retains only a fraction of this information, according to the algorithm inside the camera which might or might not suit your style and/or needs.

Hence, my recommendation is always to shoot RAW or RAW Jpeg. This does mean larger files, but SD cards are inexpensive compared to your beautiful new Lumix. But some photographers prefer to shoot in Jpeg only because they are for instance not interested in post-processing images. In this case, I would set the Jpeg to the highest quality setting.

If you only shoot in RAW, the image on the rear screen when reviewing the images are of a very low quality. When you import to the computer they are fine but it might be better to shoot both RAW and JPEG.

AFS/AFF

AFS is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Single and AFF is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Flexible. In AFS, the focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway and in AFF focus is continuously readjusted according to the movement of the subject. See AFF as a function between Single AF and Continuous AF.

This can easily be changed by using the dial on the right of the ECF too:

The AFC function below AFS/AFF continuously changes focus according to the movement of your subject.

Some more info on these modes for clarification:
- AFS will find focus and stay focused at that distance until you take a photo or release the shutter button. This is handy if you want to focus and then recompose your shot for instance.
- AFF will do the same unless it detects subject movement, at which time it will temporarily switch to AFC operation in order to re-focus.
- AFC won’t start to seek focus until you half-press the shutter, and will continually evaluate subject movement and change focus as needed.
- With AFS you can can lock focus on a particular point, then swing the camera to get the right framing; with AFC, it will not lock focus, but will keep re-focusing. That’s why Pinpoint focusing can’t be used with AFC.
AF Custom Setting (Photo)

You can customise the operation settings of Auto Focus for stills here. These presets apply only when you’re in AFF or AFC.

There are 4 Sets (or presets) to choose from:
- Set 1: This is a basic general purpose setting.
- Set 2: This is a setting suited for scenes where the subject moves in only one direction at a constant speed.
- Set 3: This is a setting suited for scenes where the subject moves in random directions and obstacles are likely to appear in the image.
- Set 4: This is a setting suited for scenes where the speed of the subject changes significantly.
There are three areas in which these presets can tweaked according to your preferences:
- AF Sensitivity: increase or decrease how sensitive the autofocus readjustment reacts to movement of your subject.
- AF Area Sensitivity: increase or decrease how sensitive the autofocus readjustment reacts to your subject moving out of the selected AF area.
- Moving Object prediction: For still subjects, you can prevent defocusing caused by a sudden movement of the subject.
Photo Style

This applies only to Jpeg images, and the RAW preview. You can select a colour effect here.
- Standard: standard Panasonic colour and contrast rendering.
- Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
- Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.
- Monochrome: Monochrome (black and white)effect with no color shades.
- L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
- Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
- Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
- Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.
- Cinelike D: Gives priority to the dynamic range by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images. Suited for editing.
- Cinelike V: Gives priority to the contrast by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images.
As mentioned earlier, it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customise the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.
- Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.
- Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.
- Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.
- Saturation: add more vividness to the colours. Or remove some.
- Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.
Filter Settings

The filter Settings go a step further than merely a photo style. These include artistic effects like Low Key, Sepia, Cross Process and retro stylings. You can turn them ON or OFF here, select the effect you want to use and change the settings by using the touch screen. You can also set your camera up to shoot one with and one without an image effect simultaneously.

If you’re wondering how you get to Creative Control mode, you need to set the mode dial to the paint palette.

And simply press up and down to select the image effects. You can also display the selection screen by touching the Recording Mode icon in recording screen.

These are all the image effects available:
- Expressive
- High Key
- Monochrome
- Silky Monochrome
- Cross Process
- Bleach Bypass
- Fantasy
- Sunshine: you can select the position and size of the light source here.
- Retro
- Low Key
- Dynamic Monochrome
- Impressive Art
- Toy Effect
- Miniature Effect: you can select the portion of your image that is in focus here (and where the blur effect won’t happen)
- Star Filter
- Old Days
- Sepia
- Rough Monochrome
- High Dynamic
- Toy Pop
- Soft Focus
- One Point Color: you can select the color to leave in here by using a color picker.
Color Space

Select either sRGB or Adobe RGB here. Adobe RGB has a greater range of reproducible colors than sRGB, so it might be worth looking into this color space if you print to paper a lot. But remember that you’ll also need a monitor capable of reproducing the larger color range too. And this can often lead to problems when converting to sRGB or editing your images in external applications. Because of all this, I have it set to sRGB.

MENU → Camera Icon → page 2 of 5 (also called the Rec menu)

Metering Mode

You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the camera. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:
- Multiple: This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
- Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
- Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.
Highlight Shadow

This allows you to lighten the shadows and darkens the highlights in your image (or video). So this is a method of creating balance in your image if you feel like the highlights are too strong or the shadows too dark. You have 4 presets available, and you can also make 3 custom presets yourself:
- Standard: no adjustments is set.
- Raise the contrast: Bright areas are brightened, and dark areas are darkened.
- Lower the contrast: Bright areas are darkened, and dark areas are brightened.
- Brighten dark areas: Dark areas are brightened.
- Custom: make your own preset.
This is how to adjust the parameters for Custom presets:
1. Rotate the front/rear dial to adjust the brightness of bright/dark portions.A – Bright portion
  B – Dark portion
  - The rear dial is for adjusting dark areas, and the front dial is for adjusting bright areas.
  - To register a preferred setting, press ▲, and select the destination where the custom setting will be registered to [Custom1]/[Custom2]/[Custom3].
  - Adjustments can also be made by dragging the graph.
2. Press [MENU/SET].
  - The screen display can be switched by pressing [DISP.] on the brightness adjustment screen.
  - Turning off this unit will return the setting adjusted with / / / back to the default setting.
  - When [Photo Style] is set to [Like709] or [V-Log L], setting is fixed to [ ] (Standard).
i. Dynamic

This setting will change contrast and exposure when there is a big difference from the darkest area to the brightest are in your image. What really happens is that the camera adjusts the exposure in order to capture more details in the highlights. You can choose between High, Standard, Low or Off.

This naturally causes an under-exposure in the shadow areas. But inside the jpeg engine, the camera will compensate for this by boosting shadows. The downside here is that this will obviously lead to more noise in the boosted regions, but because this is done with data directly coming from the sensor, it can be quite useful if you are a jpeg shooter.

There is also an impact on RAW images, because the exposure will be underexposed.

i. Resolution

Another jpeg only functionality, i-Resolution is a form of sharpening. High, Standard, Low and Off are selectable, and you should see these like the threshold for sharpening in an application like Lightroom. Many photographers discard these intelligent functions, and if you shoot RAW only, it’s not that important for you (except i Dynamic which can change your exposure plus or minus 1/3 stop). But if you shoot jpeg only, you should set it to Low at least, since most of the time RAW files would be sharpened in post processing too.

Red-Eye Removal

If you use a flash when using Red-Eye Reduction, the camera will automatically detect red-eye and corrects the picture.

ISO Sensitivity

Sets the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when you use Auto ISO or i ISO. Lower Limit should be set to 200 and upper limit to 3200, this is the range where you’ll get usable images without too much noise.

Min. Shtr Speed

A very important setting if you feel that the Panasonic G9 is producing blurry images for your shooting style. Birds in flight, for instance, will need a faster shutter speed than many other types of photography.

Since most of the time, you’ll need to raise ISO to gain faster shutter speeds, Panasonic (and many other camera producers) have made this option available. You can set it to Auto, or choose a minimum shutter speed up to 1/32000. The latter is a bit high, but as I mentioned, if you shoot action sports or for certain types of nature photography, a minimum shutter speed of 1/1000 or 1/2000 should be set. At these speeds, you can begin to “freeze” action.

MENU → Camera Icon → page 3 of 5 (also called the Rec menu)

Long Shtr NR

The camera will automatically apply noise reduction to long exposures. This applies to both Jpeg and RAW files. A black frame is taken after your initial shot to measure the noise present. Since many environmental factors (like temperature and location) have an effect on the amount of noise that you’ll see, this is the best way to determine what is noise in your frame. This data is then subtracted from your image for a noise-free (more-or-less) result.

Shading Comp.

All lenses have a lens profile that registers both distortion and shading in the corners at all apertures. These lens profiles can be applied in-camera to counter unwanted vignetting in your images. Especially important for jpeg shooters to turn this on. RAW shooters can apply these corrections later on (and with better results) in a desktop application like DXO optics Pro.

Diffraction Compensation

When you stop down your lens to a smaller aperture (normally from f/11 to f/22), a phenomenon called diffraction causes a loss in sharpness. It happens because light begins to disperse when passing through a small opening. When diffraction compensation is set to ON, the Panasonic G9 will add sharpening to your image to try and counter this phenomenon. You should use it if you shoot jpeg.

Image Stabilizer

The Panasonic Lumix G9 has a stabilised sensor. The sensor inside the camera is suspended on a magnetic field and can compensate for movement like the minute shakes of your hands or any other kind of movement. There are also many lenses available with an optical image stabilisation unit, that physically move glass elements around inside the lens to do the same. Both systems have their pros and cons, and it is generally accepted that a stabilised sensor works better for wide angle lenses (below 40mm) whilst optical lens stabilisation is more efficient for the tele range. It is also possible to use both systems at the same time (called Dual I.S.), where you’ll take advantage of the best of both worlds.

It’s also possible to use the in-body sensor stabilisation with older, manual primes that don’t relay EXIF information (like most importantly focal length in this case). You’ll need to manually set the focal length in the Focal length Set function to get an optimal performance.

Ex. Tele Conv.

You can digitally enlarge pictures without too much quality deterioration with this function. Only for jpeg use, you can extend the range of your lens by times 1.4 or 1.6 using this function.

Digital Zoom

Digital zoom takes this a step further, allowing you to zoom in up to 4 times for jpeg’s. I would not recommend either of these functions, as it is better to shoot RAW in this case and crop in processing for the best possible quality.

Burst Shot 1 Setting

The drive mode dial has two options for burst shooting. Burst shooting means that you’ll shoot continuously when you press the shutter button. You can apply different Burst Mode settings to Burst Shot 1 and and Burst Shot 2 Setting in these menus.

You’ll see SH (for super high burst rates), SH pre (which actually goes back a few seconds in time and saves these images too). These SH modes are only available with the electronic shutter. Version 2 is always faster that version 1.

Then we have High, Medium and Low which work with the Mechanical shutter too. The actual burst rate will be higher if you shoot Jpeg only.

Burst Shot 2 Setting

You can assign any of these presets to 1 or 2 on the mode dial of thePanasonic G9.

MENU → Camera Icon → page 4 of 5 (also called the Rec menu)

6K/4K Photo

6K/4K photo mode is designed to help you to capture fleeting moments by letting you shoot at an incredible 30fps (60fps for 4K mode). Continuous autofocus mode is automatically activated and it draws on 4K/6K video technology to shoot 18 MP image at this fast frame rate. You’re basically recording video where you can extract the frames in-camera.

There are three 6K Photo Modes, 6K Burst, 6K Burst (S/S) and 6K Pre-Burst. These modes determine at how and when the footage will be recorded.
- In 6K Burst mode the camera shoots 6K footage for as long as you hold down the shutter release button.
- In 6K Burst (S/S), S/S stands for Start/Stop and recording is started and ended with a press of the shutter release.
- 6K Pre-Burst mode is useful for short bursts of action because it only records for 2 seconds. However, the camera starts scanning the moment it’s active and it records the 30 images from the 1 second prior to you pressing the shutter button as well as the 30 from the 1 second after you pressed it.
4K is the same, except it allows you to go up to 60 frames per second.

Extracting 18Mp stills from the GH5’s 6K Photo Mode footage is pretty easy as follows:
1. Press the play button to located the files. Clips recorded in 6K Photo Mode are marked with the 6K Photo icon to make the easy to identify.
  Once you’ve found the clip you want, either tap the 6K Photo Icon on-screen or the Up navigation key.
2. If you have a long clip with fleeting moments of action you may like to use the slide bar at the top to quickly scroll to an interesting bit of footage. Alternatively, there’s a playback option (button Fn1) that you can use to play and pause the movie.
3. Once you’ve found the area you’re interested in, tap the Frame View Icon to see a scrollable stack of frames, just swipe right and left to locate the best shots.
4. When you find an image you like, tap the Menu/Set button or 6K Icon to save the image. Images are saved as jpegs.
it’s possible to save all the frames from 5 second sections of your 6K movie. To do this:
1. Tap the Menu button and scroll down to Playback (the 6th tab), then scroll to the second page of options and select 6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving.
2. Then swipe on the screen until you find the clip that you want to extract stills from.
3. Now use the same on-screen movie navigation controls as you used before to find the first frame of the 5 seconds that you want to pull the stills from and tap the 6K Photo icon to save it and the image from the next 5 seconds.
Post Focus

Post focus means controlling your focus point afterwards. This might sound like a scifi concept, but it’s quite simple if you know what is really happening. The Panasonic G9 performs a burst of shots ( same picture quality and system as the fore-mentioned 6K/4K photo recording) while automatically shifting the focus to different areas. After the recording, you can select your desired focus point from the list of 30(6K) or 60(4K) per second captures. It works best with scenes with little to no movement, as having someone move around would of course add another degree of shifting focus points to the mix.

In the same way, focus stacking can be achieved. Focus stacking is a method of making an images that is sharp across the frame. By recording the same scene multiple times with different focus points and later on combining all these images, you can get an image that is sharp across the frame. This is a technique often used in macro photography where your depth of field is very shallow (only a small part, where focus lies, is sharp) because of the nature of shooting at close distances. But it can also be used for other types of photography like landscapes.

It’s recommended to use a very fast SD card in order to achieve these high frame rates by the way.

You’ll need to set your drive mode dial to this setting:

Now press the shutter button halfway so the Lumix can detect the possible focus areas, and then fully press the shooter to record the scene in burst mode (which is actually video as I mentioned earlier).

For post focus:

Select your series of images you just captured, there is an icon that reassures you this is a batch of images to avoid any confusion:

Once selected, all you need to do is use the touch screen to select the focus point you desire. And now touch this icon to save:

The Focus stacking function can be performed in-camera. This methods also starts with selecting the series of images you just captured. Then you press the FN1 button and you’ll be in the focus stacking menu. There are two types of merging, Auto and range. Auto automatically selects the best images to merge into a more sharp composite image, and Range allows you to select a specified focus range with your finger on the touch screen. When you have done this, touch the icon on the bottom right of the screen and the Lumix G9 will save the resulting composite image with the EXIF data from the closest focussed image.

Self Timer

The self timer function is self explanatory. If you actually want to use this function, you’ll need to set the drive mode to:

In this menu, you can select what type of self timer you’d like to use: a 10 second delay and one shot, 10 seconds with 3 shots with 2 second intervals or a 2 second delay, all after pressing the shutter.

High Resolution Mode

Ah yes, High Resolution Mode. Probably one of the most talked about new camera features of the last few years. You’ll definitely try it once, but you’ll be hard-pressed to find a real use for it in day to day shooting. What happens in High resolution mode is that the camera uses the stabilised sensor to make two exposures of the same scene with a one pixel difference (effectively moving the sensor by a pixel in the second capture). This doubles the resolution of your output file. This will really only work in still scenes where there is absolutely no movement, and it is best to use a tripod to avoid camera shake.

It is a quite simple process:
1. Press up/down to select Start, and press MENU/SET. If there is any camera shake, the High-Res Mode icon will flash, telling you it is not possible to make a high res image.
2. Decide on the composition, and perform recording. The screen will go dark during recording. The recording state indicator (red) will flash. Do not move the camera while the indicator is flashing. Recording will finish automatically. When the recording has finished, the camera will combine the pictures, so it will not be able to perform the next recording for a while.
3. Press Fn2 to end High-Res Mode.
Time Lapse/Animation

You can take a sequential number of images with relatively long delays in between to achieve a time-lapse movie or stop motion/animation. You’ll need to turn the drive mode dial to Time Lapse for this:

You can choose between Time Lapse or Animation in this menu.

Time Lapse:
1. Switch to Time Lapse Shot if it is not selected.
2. change start time and shooting interval according to your preferences.
3. press te shutter half way to exit the menu.
4. press the shutter to start your time-lapse.
Stop motion/Animation
1. Switch to Stop Motion Animation
2. Change auto shooting and shooting interval according to your preferences
3. press te shutter half way to exit the menu.
4. press the shutter to start your time-lapse.
5. move the subject per frame
6. press the folder menu to end the recording
Silent Mode

Disables operational sounds and output of light at once for completely silent stealth mode shooting with the Panasonic G9.

Shutter Type

You can use either the mechanical or electronic shutter, or 50/50, or let the Panasonic G9 decide what is most appropriate. The electronic shutter has a maximum speed of 1/32000 sec, the mechanical shutter can go up to 1/8000 second and if you use the Electronic first curtain shutter, you can only go up to 1/2000 second.
- AUTO: Switches the shutter type automatically depending on the recording condition and shutter speed.
- MSHTR: Takes pictures in Mechanical Shutter Mode.
- EFC: Takes pictures in Electronic Front Curtain Mode.
- ESHTR: Takes pictures in Electronic Shutter Mode.
Remember that in artificial light or when using a flash, you best use the mechanical shutter only to avoid artefacts.

Shutter Delay

To reduce the influence of hand shake or shutter vibration, shutter is released after the specified time has passed. 1, 2, 4 or 8 second delay are selectable. Keep your hands steady and don’t use this delay, else you might miss that critical moment.

MENU → Camera Icon → page 5 of 5 (also called the Rec menu)

Bracket

The Bracket function allows you to take multiple pictures while automatically adjusting a setting like exposure or aperture by pressing the shutter button.

Possible bracket types:
- Exposure Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix will sequentially take multiple images with different exposures. You can select the number of pictures to be taken and the exposure range (from 1/3 EV to 1 EV stops difference).
- Aperture Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix will sequentially take multiple images at different apertures. Either select all apertures or a number of shots (3-5) within a selected range.
- Focus Bracket:Press the shutter button and the Panasonic G9 will sequentially take multiple images with different focus positions. You can select the distance between focus positions, the number of exposures and the sequence from far to near or the other way around.
- White Balance Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix G9 will take three pictures with different white balance settings automatically
- White Balance Bracket (color temperature): Press the shutter button once to take three pictures with different White Balance Color Temperature values automatically. You can also set the correction range by touching the up/down slider on the screen.
HDR

You can combine 3 image with different levels of exposure into a single picture a high dynamic range. This way, you can minimise the loss of gradations in bright areas and dark areas when, for example, the contrast between the background and the subject is large.

Two setting are available:
- Dynamic range: either select Auto where the camera will decide what range of exposure is suitable, or manually select plus/minus 1,2 or 3 EV.
- Auto Align: Automatically aligns the resulting images to adjust for movement or not.
Multi Exp.

I multiple exposure is basically laying 2 (or more) images on top of each other. This is different to a HDR or composite shot in the sense that these images should be totally different from each other. It’s a technique the comes from the darkroom photography area where 2 negatives where placed on top of each other to create a totally new image with the two images combined.

How to do this:
1. Press up/down to select start and then press Menu/Set.
2. Decide on the composition and take the first picture. After this first image, press the shutter halfway down to take the next image.
3. Shoot a third or fourth exposure. all these images will add up to make a multiple exposure.
4. Press the down arrow to exit or press the shutter button fully down.
5. You multiple exposure is finished, and you can view it on the screen.
Time Stamp Rec

A time stamp can be printed on your images with the Panasonic G9, the data will include hour and day. If you decide to do this, remember that it cannot be deleted afterwards .

MENU → Film Camera Icon → page 1 of 4 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

These are all movie related settings, and menu of them are the same as the stills related menu options. YOu can however (obviously) set them up differently for video.

Rec Format

You can either choose to record in AVCHD or MP4 format. The higher the Bit rate value is, the higher the picture quality becomes. Since the camera employs the VBR recording method, the bit rate is changed automatically depending on the subject to record. As a result, the recording time is shortened when a fast-moving subject is recorded. Different frame rates and bitrates are selectable per format in the Rec Quality setting.

Rec Quality

AVCHD

MP4

AFS/AFF

AFS is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Single and AFF is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Flexible. In AFS, the focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway and in AFF focus is continuously readjusted according to the movement of the subject. See AFF as a function between Single AF and Continuous AF.

This can easily be changed by using the dial on the right of the ECF too:

The AFC function below AFS/AFF continuously changes focus according to the movement of your subject.

Some more info on these modes for clarification:
- AFS will find focus and stay focused at that distance until you take a photo or release the shutter button. This is handy if you want to focus and then recompose your shot for instance.
- AFF will do the same unless it detects subject movement, at which time it will temporarily switch to AFC operation in order to re-focus.
- AFC won’t start to seek focus until you half-press the shutter, and will continually evaluate subject movement and change focus as needed.
- With AFS you can can lock focus on a particular point, then swing the camera to get the right framing; with AFC, it will not lock focus, but will keep re-focusing. That’s why Pinpoint focusing can’t be used with AFC.
Continuous AF

Focusing changes depending on the Focus Mode setting and the Continuous AF setting in this menu.

AFS/AFF/AFC:
- On: The camera automatically keeps focusing on subjects during recording.
- Off: The camera maintains the focus position at the start of recording.
MF

You can use manual focus.

Photo Style

You can select a photo style (like for photography, see above) for video too.

Filter Settings

You can add the image effects (filters) of Creative Control Mode, see the stills info on this above.

Luminance Level

Select the luminance range to match the use of video.

Metering Mode

You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the camera. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:
- Multiple: This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
- Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
- Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.
MENU → Film Camera Icon → page 2 of 4 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

Highlight Shadow

This allows you to lighten the shadows and darkens the highlights in your image (or video). So this is a method of creating balance in your image if you feel like the highlights are too strong or the shadows too dark. You have 4 presets available, and you can also make 3 custom presets yourself:
- Standard: no adjustments is set.
- Raise the contrast: Bright areas are brightened, and dark areas are darkened.
- Lower the contrast: Bright areas are darkened, and dark areas are brightened.
- Brighten dark areas: Dark areas are brightened.
- Custom: make your own preset.
For more info, see the equivalent setting for photos above.

i.Dynamic

This setting will change contrast and exposure when there is a big difference from the darkest area to the brightest are in your image. What really happens is that the camera adjusts the exposure in order to capture more details in the highlights. You can choose between High, Standard, Low or Off.

This naturally causes an under-exposure in the shadow areas. But inside the jpeg engine, the camera will compensate for this by boosting shadows. The downside here is that this will obviously lead to more noise in the boosted regions, but because this is done with data directly coming from the sensor, it can be quite useful.

i.Resolution

i-Resolution is a form of sharpening. High, Standard, Low and Off are selectable, and you should see these like the threshold for sharpening in an application like Lightroom. Many photographers discard these intelligent functions, and if you shoot RAW only, it’s not that important for you (except i Dynamic which can change your exposure plus or minus 1/3 stop).

ISO Sensitivity

Set the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when it is set to AUTO.

Shading Comp.

All lenses have a lens profile that registers both distortion and shading in the corners at all apertures. These lens profiles can be applied in-camera to counter unwanted vignetting in your images.

Diffraction Compensation

When you stop down your lens to a smaller aperture (normally from f/11 to f/22), a phenomenon called diffraction causes a loss in sharpness. It happens because light begins to disperse when passing through a small opening. When diffraction compensation is set to ON, the Panasonic G9 will add sharpening to your image to try and counter this phenomenon.

Stabilizer

The Panasonic Lumix G9 has a stabilised sensor. The sensor inside the camera is suspended on a magnetic field and can compensate for movement like the minute shakes of your hands or any other kind of movement. There are also many lenses available with an optical image stabilisation unit, that physically move glass elements around inside the lens to do the same. Both systems have their pros and cons, and it is generally accepted that a stabilised sensor works better for wide angle lenses (below 40mm) whilst optical lens stabilisation is more efficient for the tele range. It is also possible to use both systems at the same time (called Dual I.S.), where you’ll take advantage of the best of both worlds.

Flkr Decrease

The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in your movies. 1/50,/1/60,1/100 or 1/120 second are available.

MENU → Film Camera Icon → page 3 of 4 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

Ex. Tele Conv.

You can digitally enlarge movies without too much quality deterioration with this function. You can extend the range of your lens by times 1.4 or 1.6 using this function.

Digital Zoom

Digital zoom takes this a step further, allowing you to zoom in up to 4 times.

Picture Mode in Rec.

You can record still pictures while recording a movie on the Panasonic G9. During movie recording, press the shutter button fully to record a still picture when turned On. Aspect will always be 16:9.

There are 2 settings available:

Video Priority
- Pictures will be recorded with a picture size determined by the Rec Quality setting for motion pictures.
- Only JPEG images are recorded when Quality is set to Raw (still pictures will be recorded in jpeg)
- Up to 80 still pictures can be recorded during recording of the motion picture. (Up to 20 still pictures during 4K motion picture recording)
Photo Priority
- Pictures will be recorded with the set picture size and quality.
- The screen will go dark while recording pictures. A still picture will be recorded in the motion picture during that period, and audio is not recorded.
- Up to 20 still pictures can be recorded during recording of the motion picture. (Up to 10 still pictures during 4K motion picture recording)
Time Stamp Rec

Puts a time and date stamp on your recorded videos. Once turned on, this cannot be removed afterwards.

Mic Level Disp.

Select if you want to display the microphone level on the recording screen.

Mic Level Adj.

Adjust the sound input level to 19 different levels (-12 dB to +6 dB).

Mic Level Limiter

The Panasonic G9 adjusts the sound input level automatically, minimising sound distortion (clipping noise) when the volume is too high.

Wind Noise Canceller

This will reduce the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone while maintaining sound quality. You can choose either High, Standard or Off. This function works only with the built-in microphone.

MENU → Film Camera Icon → page 4 of 4 (also called Motion Picture Menu)

Lens Noise Cut

You can reduce the zoom sound of an interchangeable lens compatible with power zoom that is produced during motion picture recording. This function works only when an interchangeable lens that supports power zoom is used. (All micro-four-third lenses made by Panasonic)

Special Mic.

Only available only when you use an external stereo shotgun microphone like the Panasonic DMW-MS2. You have a few options on how to use a microphone like this:
- Stereo: Allows stereo recording of sound over a wide area.
- Lens Auto: Allows recording within the range that is set automatically according to the angle of view of the lens.
- Shotgun: Allows recording from one direction by shutting out background and surrounding noise.
- S.Shotgun: Allows recording within the range even narrower than that of [SHOTGUN].
- Manual: Allows recording within the range you set manually.
Sound Output

You can record motion pictures while hearing the sounds that are being recorded by connecting a commercially available headphones to this unit.

You can switch the sound output:
- Realtime: Actual sound without time lag. It can be different to the audio recorded in the movie.
- Rec Sound: Sound that is being recorded in motion pictures. The audio may be output slower than the actual audio. If you use the HDMI output during recording, the setting is fixed to this.
MENU → Custom Tool (Custom Menu)

You’ll find all customisable settings of the Panasonic G9 in this Menu.

Exposure Menu page 1 of 6 (Exposure and Shutter button behaviour settings)

ISO Increments

Choose the increments of exposure changes between 1/3 EV or 1 EV.

Extended ISO

ISO sensitivity can be set up to minimum of ISO 100. Base ISO of the sensor is 200, so this extended ISO basically halves this in software, with a slight decrease in quality.

Exposure Comp. Reset

An exposure value can be reset when the Recording Mode is changed or the camera is turned off.

AF/AE Lock

Lock focus and exposure with AF/AE LOCK. To clear the lock, press AF/AE LOCK again.

AF/AE Lock Hold

When ON is selected, focus and exposure stays locked even if you press and release AF/AE LOCK. To clear the lock, press AF/AE LOCK again.

Shutter AF

Set whether or not the focus is adjusted automatically when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

Half Press Release

The shutter will immediately fire when the shutter button is pressed halfway when this is ON.

Quick AF

As long as the camera is held steady, the camera will automatically adjust the focus and focus adjustment will then be quicker when the shutter is pressed. You’ll get better AF performance at the expense of battery life.

Focus Menu page 2 of 6 (more Focus/Release Shutter settings)

Eye Sensor AF

The Panasonic G9 wil automatically start autofocus when the eye sensor is activated.

Pinpoint AF Setting

The screen will be zoomed in when the shutter is pressed halfway, selectable in full screen or in a window.

AF-point Scope Setting

The methods for displaying the magnification window. View magnification full screen or picture in picture.

AF Assist lamp

AF assist lamp will illuminate the subject when the shutter button is pressed half-way making it easier for the camera to focus when recording in low light conditions. Range is about 1 meter.

Focus/Release Priority

Set whether to give priority to focus or shutter release during Auto Focus. Setting it to Focus priority means you won’t be able to take an image if focus is not acquired. Release will.

Focus Switching for Vert / Hor

Memorises separate positions for horizontal and vertical orientations (two vertical orientations, left and right, are available).

Loop Movement Focus Frame

When setting the AF area position or the MF Assist display position, you can now loop the position from one edge to the other edge of the screen.

AF Area Display

Selects whether you want to see a visual representation of you selected AF area on screen.

Focus Menu page 3 of 6 (more Focus/Release Shutter settings)

AF+MF

When AF Lock is ON (press the shutter button halfway with the focus mode set to AFS or set AF Lock using AF/AE LOCK), you can make fine adjustments to the focus manually.

MF Assist

Sets the display method of MF Assist (enlarged screen) on the Panasonic G9.

MF Assist Display

Sets whether MF Assist (enlarged screen) will appear in a windowed screen display or in a full screen display.

Fn Button Set

You can assign various features, such as recording functions, to specific buttons and icons as well as the function lever.
1. Press up/down to select the function button you want to assign a function to and then press MENU/SET.
2. Press up/down to select the function you want to assign and then press [MENU/SET].
FN Lever Setting

You are also free to assign any function to the FN lever using the same method as Fn Button set.

Q.MENU

In Custom operations, you can customise the Q Menu according to your liking.

You can add a maximum of 15 preferred settings to the Quick Menu.
1. Press Q.MENU to display the Quick Menu.
2. Press down to select the custom tool and then press MENU/SET.
3. Press left/right arrow to select the menu item in the top row and then press MENU/SET.
4. Press left/right to select the empty space in the bottom row and then press MENU/SET. (You can also set the menu item by dragging it from the top row to the bottom row)
5. Press return to switch to the recording screen.
Dial Set.

Assign Dial (F/SS): Assigns the operations of the aperture value and shutter speed in Manual Exposure Mode.

Rotation (F/SS): Changes the rotation direction of the dials for adjusting the aperture value and shutter speed.

Control Dial Assignment: It sets the item to be assigned to the control dial while the recording screen is displayed.

Exposure Comp.: Assigns the Exposure Compensation to the front dial or rear dial so that you can directly adjust it.

Dial Operation Switch Setup: Sets the items to be assigned temporarily to the front/rear dials when you press the function button to which Dial Operation Switch is assigned.

Joystick Setting

The joystick provides the same functions as the cursor buttons MENU/SET button.

Operation Menu page 4 of 6 (dial and buttons operation settings)

Operation Lock Settings

Sets the control functions on the Panasonic G9 to be disabled with the function button Operation Lock. Cursor, Joystick and Touch screen can be turned off.

Video Button

Enables/disables the motion picture button.

Touch Settings

Enables/disables the Touch operation.
- Touch Screen: All touch operations are turned on.
- Touch Tab: Operations of tabs are enabled.
- Touch AF: Operation to bring the subject you touch into focus AF or adjust the focus and brightness AF+AE are enabled.
- Touch Pad AF: Operation to move the AF area by touching the monitor when the viewfinder is in use.
Auto Review

Displays a picture immediately after it is taken.

Monochrome Live View

You can display the recording screen in black and white. Recorded images will not be affected.

Constant Preview

You can check the effects of the chosen aperture and shutter speed on the recording screen in Manual Exposure Mode. Some camera makers call this Live View.

Peaking

In-focus portions (portions on the screen with clear outlines) are highlighted when focus is being adjusted manually. Great focussing aide for manual focussing. Can be set to High or Low.

Histogram

Display the histogram. A histogram is a graph that displays brightness along the horizontal axis (black to white) and the number of pixels at each brightness level on the vertical axis. It allows you to easily check a picture’s exposure.

Monitor/ Display Menu page 5 of 6 (settings for the display)

Guide Line

This will set the pattern of guide lines displayed when taking a picture.

Center Marker

The center of the recording screen will be displayed as [+].

Highlight

When the Auto Review function is activated or when playing back, white saturated areas appear blinking in black and white.

Zebra Pattern

Indicates parts that may become white saturated through overexposure in a zebra pattern. You can select a brightness value between 50% and 105%. In Zebra 2, you can select OFF. If you select 100% or 105%, only the areas that are already white saturated are displayed in a zebra pattern. The smaller the value is, the wider the brightness range to be processed as a zebra pattern will be.

Expo.Meter

Display the exposure meter.
- Set to ON to display the Exposure meter when performing Program Shift, setting aperture, and setting shutter speed.
- Unsuitable areas of the range are displayed in red.
- When the Exposure meter is not displayed, switch the display information for screen by pressing DISP.
- If no operations are performed for approximately 4 seconds, the Exposure meter disappears.
MF Guide

When you set the focus manually, an MF guide that allows you to check the direction to achieve focus is displayed.

LVF/Monitor Disp. Set

You can select separate screen display styles for the viewfinder and the monitor.

Monitor Info. Disp.

Display the recording information screen.

Viewfinder style: Scales down images slightly so that you can better review the composition of the images.

Monitor style: Scales images to fill the entire screen so that you can see their details.

Monitor/ Display Menu page 6 of 6 (monitor and lens behaviour settings)

Rec Area

This changes the angle of view during motion picture recording and still picture recording. Displays the recording area according to the angle of view for still picture recording or video.

Remaining Disp.

This will switch display between the number of recordable pictures and available recording time.

Menu Guide

Display a selection screen when you set the mode dial to the paint palette icon.

Lens Position Resule

Saves the focus position when you turn off the camera. When an interchangeable lens that is compatible with power zoom is in use, the zoom position is also saved.

Power Zoom Lens

Change the settings for a power zoom lens. Sets the screen display and lens operations when using an interchangeable lens that is compatible with power zoom.
- Disp Focal Length: When you zoom, the focal distance is displayed and you can confirm the zoom position.
- Step Zoom: When you operate the zoom with this setting [ON], the zoom will stop at positions corresponding to predetermined distances.
- Zoom Speed: You can set the zoom speed for zoom operations for both stills and vide to high, medium or low.
- Zoom Ring: When set to OFF] the operations controlled by the zoom ring are disabled to prevent accidental operation.
Lens Fn Button Setting

Sets the function to be assigned to the focus button of an interchangeable lens. You can call up the assigned function by setting the focus selector switch of a compatible interchangeable lens to Fn and then pressing the focus button of the lens.

Face Recog.

Face Recognition is a function on the Panasonic G9 which finds a face resembling a registered face and priorities focus and exposure automatically. Even if the person is located towards the back or on the end of a line in a group photo, the camera can still take a clear picture.

On will automatically recognise faces, but you can also register up to six faces yourself.
1. In this Menu, select an empty frame (or overwrite one).
2. Take an picture of the face you want to register.
3. Register this face. Note that you can register up to 3 images per face for more accurate results.
Profile Setup

If you set the name and birthday of your baby or pet in advance, you can record their name and age in months and years in the images.

MENU → Setup Menu → page 1 of 5 (General Camera Setup)

Online Manual

Display the URL or QR code to go to the online manual.

Cust. Set Mem.

Up to 5 sets of current camera settings can be registered using C1, C2, C3-1, C3-2 or C3-3. The first three are directly accessible via the Mode Dial.

Saving a custom camera is quite simple, set the mode dial to C1, C2 or C3, change the cameras settings to your preferences, go in the Menu to this setting and press MENU/SET on the screen.

Clock Set

You have already probably set time and date when you first turned on the Panasonic G9, but you can also change this here.

World Time

Sets the times for the region where you live (HOME) and your travel destination (DESTINATION). Time and date will be altered to reflect the local time and date at your travel destination.

Travel Date

If you set Travel Setup, elapsed days of your trip i.e. which day of the trip based on its departure and return dates will be recorded The travel date is automatically canceled if the current date is after the return date.

If you set Location, the name of the travel destination that you enter will be recorded.

Wi-Fi

It’s possible to control your Panasonic G9 with a smartphone or a tablet, display pictures on TV, print Wirelessly, Send images to a PC or use Web Services from Panasonic all via WiFi.

To use the Wi-Fi function on this camera, a wireless access point is needed off course.

By default, Wi-Fi is assigned to the Fn6 button when the camera is in Recording Mode, while it is assigned to Fn1 when the camera is in Playback Mode. You can assign it to any button you want.

When you want to connect to WiFi, simply press this button.

Wi-Fi Setup

Priority of Remote Device: Sets either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be used during remote recording.

Wi-Fi Password: You can improve security by enabling password entry for a direct connection to a smartphone.

LUMIX CLUB: Acquires or changes the “LUMIX CLUB” login ID.

PC Connection: You can set the workgroup. To send images to a PC, a connection to the same workgroup as the destination PC is required.

Device Name: You can change the name (SSID) of this unit.

Wi-Fi Function Lock: To prevent incorrect operation and use of the Wi-Fi function by a third party and to protect saved personal information, protect the Wi-Fi function with a password.

Network Address: Displays the MAC address and IP address of this unit.

Approved Regulations: Displays the certification number for radio regulations.

Bluetooth

You can also connect to your Smartphone, Tablet or TV if your device has the Bluetooth functionality. A function called pairing is needed in order to establish a connection. You’ll find it in this menu, remember to also turn Bluetooth on if you want to do so.

Wireless Connection Lamp

This enables/disables the wireless connection lamp.

MENU → Setup Menu → page 2 of 5 (General Camera Setup)

Beep

This allows you to set the electronic sound and the electronic shutter sound. Remember this will be off if you’re in Silent Mode!

Headphone volume

If you’re using a headphone, you can adjust the volume here.

Economy

These settings will determine the way the camera handles inactivity on your part to save battery life.

Sleep Mode: The camera is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time selected on the setting.

Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi): The camera is automatically turned off if it is not connected to a Wi-Fi network and has not been used for 15 minutes (

Auto LVF/ Monitor Off: The monitor/viewfinder is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time selected on the setting.

Power Save LVF Shooting: If you display the monitor using the viewfinder/monitor automatic switching function, the camera will turn off automatically after being left idle.

Monitor Display Speed

This sets the monitor frame rate to either 120fps or 60fps. 120fps will run smoother at the cost of battery life.

LVF Display Speed

This sets the viewfinder frame rate, to either 60 or 120fps. Again, at 120 fps you’ll see movement smoother at the cost of battery life.

Night Mode

This displays the monitor and viewfinder screens in red. It reduces the difficulty in seeing the surroundings caused by brightly-lit screens at night or in any low-light environment.

Monitor Display

Brightness, color, or red or blue tint of the Monitor/viewfinder can be adjusted.

Monitor Luminance

These settings will affect how and when brightness of the monitor is adjusted.

Auto: The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright it is around the camera.

Mode 1: Makes the monitor brighter than normal.

Mode 2: Set the monitor to the standard brightness.

Mode 3: Makes the monitor brighter than standard.

MENU → Setup Menu → page 3 of 5 (General Camera Setup)

Status LCD Backlight

You can set the LCD Backlight to High, Low or Off.

Eye Sensor

Sensitivity will This will set the sensitivity of the eye sensor.

LVF/Monitor Switch will This will set the method for switching between the monitor and viewfinder.

USB Mode

Sets the communication method when connecting using the USB connection cable.

Select on Connection: Select this setting to select the USB communication system when connecting to another device.

PC Storage: Select this setting to export images to a connected PC.

PC Tether: Select this setting to control the camera from a PC installed with supported software.

Pictbridge PTP: Select this setting when connecting to a printer supporting PictBridge.

USB Power Supply

Supplies power via the USB connection cable when the camera is connected to a PC or PowerBank.

TV Connection

Set the format for the HDMI output when playing back on the HDMI compatible TV and monitor connected with this unit using the HDMI cable. It’s possible to set it to Auto or 4K, 1080p, 1080i, etc…

Language

Set the language displayed on the screen.

Version Disp

This enables the firmware versions of the camera and lens to be checked before an upgrade for instance.

MENU → Setup Menu → page 4 of 5 (General Camera Setup)

Folder/File Settings

Set the folder and file name patterns in which images are to be saved.

Double Slot Function

Set the way recording to the card slots 1 and 2 is performed.
- Relay Rec: Relays recording to the other card slot even after the first card runs out of free space during recording. Records same images to the two cards.
- Backup Rec: Records same images to the two cards.
- Allocation Rec: Allows you to specify the card slot to be used for recording for different image formats like Jpeg on one and RAW on the other.
Save/Restore Camera Setting

Save the camera’s setup information to the card. Since saved setup information can be imported to the camera, you can apply the same setup to more than one camera.

No.Reset

Reset the file number of the next recording to 0001.

Reset

The following settings are reset to the default:
- Recording settings.
- Setup settings Wi-Fi Setup and Bluetooth settings.
- Custom settings (Face Recog. and[Profile Setup settings.
- Setup/custom settings (except for Wi-Fi Setup, Bluetooth, Face Recog. and Profile Setup).
Reset Network Settings

The following network settings are reset to the default:
- Wi-Fi Setup (Excluding LUMIX CLUB).
- Registered device information in Bluetooth and values in Wi-Fi network settings.
Pixel Refresh

It will perform optimization of imaging device and image processing. Use this function when you start seeing hot or dead pixels in your images.

Sensor Cleaning

Dust reduction to blow off the debris and dust that have affixed to the front of the imaging device is performed.

MENU → Setup Menu → page 5 of 5 (General Camera Setup)

Level Gauge Assist

Adjust: Hold the camera in a horizontal position, and press MENU/SET. The level gauge will be adjusted.

Level Gauge Value Reset: Restores the default level gauge setting.

Format

Format the card before recording a picture with this unit.

Since data cannot be recovered after formatting, make sure to back up necessary data in advance.

MENU → My Menu (that little man)

Light Composition

Select multiple frames from 6K/4K burst files that you wish to combine in a composite image. Very cool feature. Parts of the image that are brighter than the preceding frame will be superimposed on the preceding frame to combine the frames into one picture.

My Menu Setting

You can register frequently-used menus and display them in My Menu. You can register up to 23 menus for quick access.
- Add: Specifies the menu to be displayed in My Menu to register it.
- Sorting: Rearranges the menus displayed in My Menu. Select the menu you want to move and set the destination.
- Delete: Deletes registered menus from the displayed menu list.
- Display from my menu: Sets the type of the menu screen to be displayed.
MENU → Playback Menu → Page 1

Slide Show

ou can play back the pictures you have taken in synchronization with music, and you can do this in sequence while leaving a fixed interval between each of the pictures.

You can also put together a slide show composed of only still pictures, only motion pictures, etc.

You can change the settings for slide show playback by selecting [Effect] or [Setup] on the slide show menu screen.

Playback Mode

Playback in Normal Play, Picture Only or Video Only can be selected.

Protect

You can set protection for pictures you do not want to delete by mistake.

Rating

You can set five different rating levels for images to do the following:
- Delete all the pictures not set as ratings.
- Checking the rating level on the file detail display of an operating system, such as Windows 10.
Title Edit

You can add text (comments) to pictures. After text has been registered, it can be stamped in prints using Text Stamp.

Face Rec Edit

You can clear and replace all information relating to face recognition in selected images.

RAW Processing

You can process the pictures taken in RAW format. The processed pictures will be saved in JPEG format.
- White Balance: Allows you to select a White Balance preset and adjust it. If you select an item you can process the image with the setting at the time of recording.
- Brightness correction: Allows you to correct the brightness within the range between – 2 EV and +2 EV.
- Photo Style: Allows you to select a photo style effect.
- i.Dynamic: Allows you to select an i.Dynamic setting.
- Contrast: Allows you to adjust the contrast.
- Highlight: Allows you to adjust the brightness of bright portions.
- Shadow: Allows you to adjust the brightness of dark portions.
- Saturation and Color Tone: Allows you to adjust the saturation. (When Monochrome or L.Monochrome is selected in Photo Style, you can adjust the color tone.)
- Filter Effect: Allows you to select a filter effect. (Only when Monochrome or L.Monochrome is selected in Photo Style)
- Noise Reduction: Allows you to adjust the noise reduction setting.
- i.Resolution: Allows you to select an i.Resolution setting.
- Sharpness: Allows you to adjust the resolution effect.
6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving

You can save pictures of a 6K/4K burst file that were extracted from any 5 second period at once.

MENU → Playback Menu → Page 2

6K/4K PHOTO Noise Reduction

When saving pictures, reduce the noise produced during recording by high ISO sensitivity.

Light composition

Select multiple frames from 6K/4K burst files that you wish to combine. Parts of the image that are brighter than the preceding frame will be superimposed on the preceding frame to combine the frames into one picture.

Clear Retouch

Remove unwanted objects and such right from the camera menu. The erasure operation can only be performed by touching. Clear Retouch automatically enables the touch operation.

Text Stamp

You can stamp recording information like names, dates, places on recorded images.

Copy

Copy images on the card to the other card.

Resize

To allow easy posting to web pages, attachment to e-mail etc., picture size (number of pixels) is reduced.

Cropping

You can enlarge and then clip the important part of the recorded picture.

Rotate

Rotate pictures manually in 90 degree steps.

MENU → Playback Menu → Page 3

Video Divide

Recorded motion picture and 6K/4K burst files can be divided in two. It is recommended for when you want to divide a part you need with a part you do not need.

Time Lapse Video

This function allows you to create a motion picture from a picture group recorded with Time Lapse Shot.

Stop Motion Video

A Motion picture is created from group pictures taken with Stop Motion Animation.

Rotate Disp.

This mode allows you to display pictures vertically if they were recorded holding the camera vertically.

Picture Sort

You can set the order in which the camera displays images during playback.Either via file name or date/time.

Delete Confirmation

This sets which option, Yes or No, will be highlighted first when the confirmation screen for deleting a picture is displayed.

Quick access with the Q Menu (Fn 2)

The most commonly used settings can be accessed through what is called the Q Menu. This is the FN2 button that you’ll find right next to the screen, above the trash bucket button.
The features that can be adjusted using Quick Menu are determined by the mode or a display style the camera is in.

Photo Style

This applies only to Jpeg images, and the RAW preview when you load them into an app like Lightroom.. You can select a colour effect here.

Standard: standard Panasonic colour and contrast rendering.

Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.

Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.

Monochrome: Monochrome (black and white)effect with no color shades.

L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.

Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.

Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.

Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.

Cinelike D: Gives priority to the dynamic range by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images. Suited for editing.

Cinelike V: Gives priority to the contrast by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images.

As mentioned earlier, it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customise the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.

Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.

Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.

Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.

Saturation: add more vividness to the colours. Or remove some.

Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.

Motion Pic. Set

You can change bitrate and frame-rate for video here, as well as select the appropriate movie container.

AVCHD

MP4

Picture Setting

You can quickly change picture size and picture quality here for your Jpeg’s.

These are the aspect ratios available:

4:3: native sensor ratio

3:2: the ratio used in full frame cameras

16:9: for a wider looking view

1:1: Square aspect ratio, mostly used for social sharing

Quality wise, you can choose between Small (S), Medium (M) and Large (L) files sizes. Obviously, Large will have the best quality Jpeg’s, at the expense of larger files. If you only shoot Jpeg (and not RAW) set it to Large. If you shoot both (Jpeg+RAW, see next screen), you could set it to small or medium since you’ll always work with the RAW in post processing. This way, you’ll still have a Jpeg for sharing quickly online or as a reference whilst still saving some space.

Quality

Probably the most important setting is Quality. You can select either Jpeg, where the RAW data from the sensor is processed by an in-camera algorithm to produce a viewable image, or save your images in this RAW format. RAW retains all the data of the sensor, and is meant to be edited afterwards in a desktop application like Lightroom or Luminar. Saving as RAW means that you have much more creative freedom afterwards to push shadows or pull highlights, sharpen and enhance your image in any way you please. A Jpeg retains only a fraction of this information, according to the algorithm inside the camera which might or might not suit your style and/or needs.

Hence, my recommendation is always to shoot RAW or RAW Jpeg. This does mean larger files, but SD cards are inexpensive compared to your beautiful new Lumix. But some photographers prefer to shoot in Jpeg only because they are for instance not interested in post-processing images. In this case, I would set the Jpeg to the highest quality setting.

AFS/AFF

AFS is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Single and AFF is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Flexible. In AFS, the focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway and in AFF focus is continuously readjusted according to the movement of the subject. See AFF as a function between Single AF and Continuous AF.

This can easily be changed by using the dial on the right of the ECF too:

The AFC function below AFS/AFF continuously changes focus according to the movement of your subject.

Some more info on these modes for clarification:

AFS will find focus and stay focused at that distance until you take a photo or release the shutter button. This is handy if you want to focus and then recompose your shot for instance.

AFF will do the same unless it detects subject movement, at which time it will temporarily switch to AFC operation in order to re-focus.

AFC won’t start to seek focus until you half-press the shutter, and will continually evaluate subject movement and change focus as needed.

With AFS you can can lock focus on a particular point, then swing the camera to get the right framing; with AFC, it will not lock focus, but will keep re-focusing. That’s why Pinpoint focusing can’t be used with AFC.

AF Mode

This allows the focusing method that suits the positions and number of the subjects to be selected. There are 6 different methods available, each suited for different scenarios.

Face/Eye Detection

A person’s face, eyes, and body (the entire body or the upper half of the body) are automatically detected.

When the camera detects a person’s face or body, an AF area is displayed over the detected person.

Yellow: This is the AF area for the person to be brought into focus. The camera automatically selects the person.

White: These are the AF areas for people other than the person to be brought into focus. This type of AF area is displayed when more than one person is detected.

When a person’s face or eyes are detected, the eye closer to the camera will be brought into focus, if the eyes are inside the yellow frame.

The camera can detect the faces of up to 15 people. To specify the person or eye to be brought into focus, align an AF area with the desired person or eye. You can do so easily by touching a person indicated with an AF area.

Tracking

The camera keeps adjusting the focus and exposure automatically to the specified moving object. Perform either of the following operations to lock the subject to be tracked:

Use a button: aim the AF tracking frame D over the subject, and press the shutter button halfway.

Use the touch screen: touch the subject on the screen.

If it fails to lock, AF area will flash in red, and disappear.

The AF area turns yellow while the subject is locked and green while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Press the Menu button to cancel the lock.

225 Area

Widest setting with all AF points used. Up to 225 AF areas can be focused. This is effective when your subject is not in the center of the screen.

Custom Multi

From among 225 AF areas, you can freely set the optimum shape of the AF area for the subject.

1-Area

The camera focuses on the subject in the AF area on the screen.

Pinpoint

You can achieve a more precise focus on a point that is smaller than 1-Area. If you press the shutter button halfway, the screen that lets you check the focus by enlarging it.

Burst Shot Setting

You can choose your bust shot setting here for continuous drive mode.

Burst shooting means that you’ll shoot continuously when you press the shutter button. You can apply different Burst Mode settings to Burst Shot 1 and and Burst Shot 2 Setting in these menus.

You’ll see SH (for super high burst rates), SH pre (which actually goes back a few seconds in time and saves these images too). These SH modes are only available with the electronic shutter. Version 2 is always faster that version 1.

Then we have High, Medium and Low which work with the Mechanical shutter too. The actual burst rate will be higher if you shoot Jpeg only.

Metering Mode

You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the camera. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.

Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:

Multiple: This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.

Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.

Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.

Exposure Comp

If you feel like your Lumix G9 is over- or underexposing your images (or you want to purposely underexpose), you can dial in what is called exposure compensation here. A range of plus minus 5 is available here to correct the auto exposure of the camera.

ISO sensitivity
Sets the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when you use Auto ISO or i ISO. Lower Limit should be set to 200 and upper limit to 3200, this is the range where you’ll get usable images without too much noise.

Conclusion

So this was a quick run-though of all the Panasonic G9 Menu items, with pointers, tips and tricks along the way. This information should get you familiarised with this fantastic mirrorless camera. If you would like any clarification or extra information on any functionality here, let me know through the comment section below. Happy shooting!
January 10, 2018

Sony A7r III setup guide with tips and tricks

Introduction

Although the Sony A7r III uses the same 42.2MP Full-frame BSI sensor as the older mark 2 version, there are also many new features and functions. These mainly focus on enhanced speed, with now more AF points, a write-to-SD-card-buffer and an entirely new Bionz X processor. These will definitely make the ILCE-7RM3 a more useable camera in terms of speed and functionality whilst still retaining the fantastic image quality of the original mark 2. There are a few changes in the menu system when compared to previous Sony models, especially If you upgraded from an A7rm2. We’ll have a page-by-page look at the menus in this post. If you’re looking for a particular feature, I would suggest that you use the search function in your preferred browser, as this post is quite long.

Sony A7r III menu system overview

MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 1

File Format:

Do you edit your pictures on your desktop? If so, set to RAW or RAW jpeg. A RAW file saves all information the camera pixels register during shooting and will make for better quality images if you want to edit in something like Adobe Lightroom.

A jpeg is a compressed image (available in FINE (larger) and STANDARD (smaller, less quality) which takes up less space on your SD card but is less suited for editing afterward. Jpeg images will also have in-camera noise reduction applied, something you might or might not want to take care of yourself later, depending on your style and preference.image size

RAW file type:

You can choose between either compressed or uncompressed RAW. Compressed files are smaller, but there is also a small degradation of quality, especially noticeable in long exposures and scenes with high contrast. If you notice haloing in the sky during post-processing for instance, then this is an artifact of that compression.

JPEG Quality:

Standard, fine and extra fine are selectable. Extra fine will give you the best possible quality JPEG. This includes noise reduction and sharpening from the on-board JPEG engine.

JPEG Image size:

Large, medium or small is selectable. Large is preferred.

Aspect ratio:

You can choose 3:2 (which uses the full sensor surface) or 16:9 (crop but a more broad view). Leave as is at 3:2, you can always crop your pictures later.

APS-C/Super 35mm:

This setting tells the camera what to do when you’ve attached an APS-C lens to this full-frame camera. An APS-C lens won’t cover the full surface of the sensor, or you’ll notice heavy vignetting towards the edges of the frame. When recording movies, this crop is called Super 35mm. The principle here is that you use any a part of the surface of the sensor. If you want to do this, don’t worry too much about image quality as this is a high megapixel camera leaving you with a usable 15MP in APS-C mode.

On: Records in either APS-C-equivalent size or Super 35mm-equivalent size.
Auto: Automatically sets the capture range depending on the lens.
Off: Always captures 35mm full-size image sensor pictures.

MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 2

Long Exposure NR

Set if you want the processing engine to apply noise reduction for images captured with a long exposure time. Leave it ON as there is no way of duplicating this process in post-production, except to take a black frame of the same length in the same atmospheric conditions.

High ISO NR

Here you can select the amount of noise reduction applied to images with high ISO settings (when quality is set to jpeg). As Sony has rather aggressive noise reduction, I would change it to Low. (if not, you run the risk of getting paint-like, smeared images at higher ISO values).

Color Space

You can choose between Standard and Adobe (extended color range) RGB. This is only important if you shoot JPEG and not RAW. Adobe RGB would be preferable if you print many images because of the extended color range.

Lens Comp

The Sony A7r III allows you to select whether you would like to apply various lens compensations (shading, chromatic aberration, distortion) even when shooting in RAW. I leave this ON, but you might get a conflict with RAW files and using a lens profile in programs like Lightroom where you’ll see a reverse vignette for instance.

MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 3

Drive Mode

As usual, Single and Continuous shooting modes are available. Single will take one exposure when you press the shutter, continuous will continue taking exposures until the buffer fills up. If you want to take advantage of the buffer, you should set your A7rm3 to continuous. If not, the camera will write every exposure separately to your SD card.

Bracket Settings

You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.

Self-timer during Brkt: Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also, sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released if using the self-timer. (OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
Bracket order: Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.

PX Shift Multi Shoot

The Sony A7rIII has a new function called Pixel shift. This increases the resolution of your images by 4 times. The camera taxes 4 photos and shifts the sensor 1 pixel in between using the SteadyShot function. This works best when there is no movement in your scene, and these 4 images need to be combined in a special app from Sony called Imaging Edge.

Shooting images remotely using Imaging Edge:

Adjust the settings before shooting.

Adjust the shooting settings (such as composition, focus, and exposure) while checking the Live View screen in Remote.
- You can shoot and check a trial image before the actual shooting by setting the number of shots to [1 Photo].
Perform the actual shooting.

Set the shooting interval and perform the actual shooting.
Combine the images.

When you are done shooting, the uncombined RAW images (ARW format) are transferred to the computer. Combined RAW data (ARQ format) is generated on the computer.
Adjust and develop.

You can adjust the RAW data in Edit and develop it into JPEG data, etc

Combining the images using Imaging Edge after shooting with the camera alone:

Shoot with the camera alone using the Pixel Shift Multi Shooting function.
Import the images to the computer and select the images (ARW) in Viewer.
Combine the images.

The images are combined and RAW data (ARQ) is generated.
Adjust and develop.

You can adjust the RAW data in Edit and develop it into JPEG data, etc.

MR: Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

This functionality allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered with the Mode Dial memory positions in advance. It is now also possible to save your camera settings to a memory card and recall them later (or on a different camera). This is done by using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside this menu.

MR: Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

This setting allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings to the product and up to 4 (M1 through M4) to the memory card. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial. You can register various functions for shooting. The items that you can register are displayed on the menu of the camera. Aperture and Shutter speed are always available. You’ll need to select your SD card first using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside the prior menu.

Select Media

Selects which of the two SD cards will be used to store your personal custom MR settings.

MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 4

Reg Cust Shoot Set

You can save a number of settings here to a customized Shoot Set. There are 3 shoot sets available that you can recall at any time. You can import your current settings to one of these three shoot sets. You can also store these on your SD card and move them from camera to camera.

You can save the following settings:

Shoot Mode (Like program Auto)
Aperture
Shutter Speed
Drive Mode
Exposure compensation
ISO (like Auto or a single ISO value)
Metering Mode
Focus Mode
Focus Area
AF On

Reg Cust Shoot Set settings — You can press Register to save these custom shoot presets to your SD card.

MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 5

Focus Mode

Selects the focus method to suit the movement of the subject.

AF-S (Single-shot AF):

The camera locks the focus once focusing is complete. Use this when the subject is motionless.

AF-C (Continuous AF):

The camera continues to focus while the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down. Use this when the subject is in motion. In [Continuous AF] mode, there is no beep when the camera focuses.

DMF (DMF):

You can make fine adjustments manually after performing autofocusing, letting you focus on a subject more quickly than when using the manual focus from the beginning. This is convenient in situations such as macro shooting.

MF (Manual Focus):

Adjusts the focus manually. If you cannot focus on the intended subject using autofocus, use manual focus.

Priority Set in AF-S:

Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF, DMF or Automatic AF and the subject is still.

Options are:

AF: Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
Release: Prioritizes the shutter’s release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.

Priority Set in AF-C:

Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when the continuous AF is activated and the subject is in motion. Balanced works great for any type of photography.

Choose between:

AF: Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
Release: Prioritizes the shutter’s release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
Balanced Emphasis: Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.

Focus area

The Sony A7r III has an advanced autofocus system with 399 phase detection autofocus points and 425 contrast AF points on the sensor. This makes it one of the fastest and most reliable AF systems in the world. You might think it is best to leave it on the wide factory setting (as this uses all AF points), but for certain scenes, it is often better to use a zone or flexible spot to get it to focus on what you want.

Wide: Wide focus area uses all focus points on the sensor. Ideal for action scenes where there is a lot of movement going on in your frame.
Zone: Zone allows you to select one of 9 predefined areas where autofocus will be active. These zones each cover about 25% of the screen, with a slight overlap. You can quickly change the area by pressing the multi-controller button and navigating to any of the other areas.
Center: Focusses on whatever is centered in your images. A fail-proof way of getting the camera to focus on what you want. If you have any problems using the autofocus and are in a situation where you don’t want to miss any shots, revert to Center and just make sure you have your subject centered.
Flexible spot: Flexible spot area selects a place anywhere on the screen where the camera should focus. (similar to Center spot, except not.. in the center) You can set it to small, medium or large. If you want to use this focus area, set it to medium or large, as the camera will struggle to find focus when setting to small (except perhaps for close-up portraits where you’d want to focus on the iris of the eye)
Expand Flexible spot: If the camera can’t focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the flexible spot as a secondary priority area for focusing.
Lock-on AF: When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the camera tracks the subject within the selected autofocus area. This setting is available only when the focus mode is set to Continuous AF. Point the cursor to ‘Lock-on AF’ on the Focus Area setting screen, and then adjust the desired area to start tracking by pressing the multi-selector left/right. You can also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a flexible spot or expand flexible spot. If you’re coming from a DSLR, try to use this setting.

Focus Settings

Focus setting allows you to use the wheel, joystick or touch screen to move your focus point to any of the 693 on sensor phase detection points.

Swt. V/H AF Area

This is called Orientation linked AF points in Canon language. Switch AF point/AF Area to align with your subject in landscape mode (horizontal) if you change the camera orientation to Portrait (vertical) mode.

Off: disable this feature

AF Point Only: If you switch to portrait mode, the A7r III will automatically move the AF point in use up to align with your subject.

AF Point AF Area: If you switch to portrait mode, the A7r III will automatically move the AF point and AF area in use up.

(MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 6)

This is a new Menu from the 2019 version 3 firmware update. You’ll notice that Face/Eye AF Set has been added.

AF illuminator

The AF illuminator is a little red light allowing the camera to focus more easily when the shutter button is pressed halfway. It automatically is switched off when you fully press the shutter. Leave it on except if you are using an underwater housing.

Center Lock-on AF

This is a very powerful autofocus feature. When turned ON, it allows you to track a subject. In the iAuto mode, you can access this feature (when turned ON and the Sony A7r III is set to AF) by pressing the Center button of the multi-controller. You’ll see a square on your screen, then center your desired tracking subject and the camera will continue to track it, even when it exits your frame and reappears.

Face/Eye AF Set

Face/eye Prty in AF

This will turn on continuous face and eye detection. As opposed to the previous firmware update, it’s now not necessary to assign and press a custom button to engage eye autofocus. The camera will do this automatically and autonomously from now on.

Tip: it might however still be a good idea to assign this ON/Off menu item to your old custom button when shooting a variety of scenes (as opposed to only portraits). This means you’ll be able to switch between the camera constantly looking for eyes to lock on too and any other ‘normal’ autofocus mode. It’s also of course still possible to use Eye AF as before, where it will override your selected focus area and the A7 III will focus on the eye as long as your custom button of choice is pressed.

Real time Eye AF works differently with Different focus areas:

WIDE: Eye AF will search & track an eye in the entire frame.
ZONE: Eye AF will search & track an eye in the within the selected Zone.
CENTER: Eye AF will search & track an eye in the center of the frame (Not recommended)
FLEXIBLE SPOT: L,M,S: Eye AF will search & track an eye within the selected Flexible Spot (Large works best for this setting).
If you want to focus on a specific animal’s eye when the displayed face of that animal is very small, or two or more animals are displayed on the screen, set the focus area to Flexible Spot and then focus on the subject so that it is easier for the camera to detect the eye.
EXPAND FLEXIBLE SPOT: Eye AF will search & track an eye in the area within or surrounding the Flexible Spot
LOCK-ON AF: EXPAND FLEXIBLE SPOT: Not compatible with Real Time Eye AF

Subject Detection

Choose between either human or animal subjects for Eye AF. Animal Eye AF works well with cats and dogs for the moment, Sony has promised to further develop this functionality to add other animals too.

Face Dtct Frame Disp

Sets whether or not to display the face detection frame when a human face is detected. Turn On.

(Animal) Eye Display

When On is set, the white eye detection frame appears over the eye. Should be turned on in order to see where the camera is focussing.

AF track sens:

High is useful when shooting fast action scenes. The standard mode works fine in most situations, but you can also try responsive if you need faster tracking capabilities. Locked on keeps the focus on a specific subject when other things are crossing in front of the subject.

AF system:

Here you can select the focus detection system (Phase Detection AF/Contrast AF) when you attach an Amount lens using an LA-EA1/LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor.

Phase Detection AF: Focuses with Phase Detection AF. The focusing speed is very fast.
Contrast AF: Always focuses with Contrast AF. The focusing speed is slower but more precise. Use when you cannot focus with Phase Detection AF.

AF with shutter

Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Leave ON.

AF track sens:

AF system:

Here you can select the focus detection system (Phase Detection AF/Contrast AF) when you attach an Amount lens using an LA-EA1/LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor.

Phase Detection AF: Focuses with Phase Detection AF. The focusing speed is very fast.
Contrast AF: Always focuses with Contrast AF. The focusing speed is slower but more precise. Use when you cannot focus with Phase Detection AF.

AF with shutter

Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Leave ON.

MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 7

Pre-AF

Select if the Sony A7r III will automatically adjust focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.

Eye-Start AF:

This configuration starts AF once the EVF sensor has detected your eye near the viewfinder. I’ve never used it personally, but some people might find this setting interesting as it can prolong battery life.

AF Area Regist.

Another feature inherited from Canon. By registering an AF area/point, you have a quick way to move between points without having the thumb-stick of scroll across the AF field. For example, a bird photographer can set their camera up so they can quickly switch from a spot AF point for precisely focusing on a static subject, to a wide AF pattern for quickly acquiring and tracking a bird in flight.

Del. Reg. AF Area

Deletes the registered AF area in AF Area Regist.

AF Area Auto Clear:

Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically shortly after focus is achieved.

Disp. cont. AF Area

You can set whether or not to display the focus area that is in focus when[Focus Area] is set to Wide or Zone and Focus Mode is set to Continuous AF.

MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 8

Phase Detect Area:

Use only the phase detection points.

AF Micro Adj.:

Allows you to adjust and register autofocused positions for each lens when using an A-mount lens with the Mount Adaptor LA-EA2 or LA-EA4. In general use, you do not need to adjust the autofocused position using this function. Use this function only when adjustments are needed for certain focus areas or focal lengths. Use this function only when adjustments are needed for certain focal lengths.

MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 9

Exposure Comp

(Also available in the Quick Menu, accessed by pressing the FN button):

If you find that your image is overexposed (for instance when you are shooting at large apertures for a shallow depth-of-field in bright daylight), you can tweak the exposure compensation here in a plus or minus 5 (exact EV dependent on next step) range.

Reset EV Comp

Sets whether to maintain the exposure value set using Custom Settings when you turn off the power when the exposure compensation dial position is set to 0.

ISO

You can select at which ISO value you’d like to capture your image or change the Auto ISO range.

I have this range set between 100-3200 as this range is virtually noise-free, and I don’t like the ISO performance above 3200. In a pinch, when you’re getting blurred images due to a too long shutter speed at low ISO, you can experiment with higher ISO settings. It’s better to get a sharp but noisy image than a blurred one….

Iso Auto Min SS.

This is a useful and exciting setting. If you select ISO AUTO you are in P (Program Auto) or A (Aperture Priority) mode; you can set the shutter speed at which the ISO sensitivity starts changing. The difference in shutter speed at which ISO sensitivity starts to change between [Faster], [Fast], [Standard], [Slow], and [Slower] is 1 EV.

You have three possibilities here:

FASTER (Faster)/FAST (Fast): The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds faster than the Standard (normal). This will help you prevent getting blurred images when shooting action or sports. This at the cost of raising the ISO and noise in your images. Remember this is linked to your Auto ISO settings, so it won’t go any higher than your upper limit, even if the camera is capable of doing so.
STD (Standard): The camera automatically sets the shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens.
SLOW (Slow)/SLOWER (Slower): The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds slower than the Standard setting. This enables you to shoot images with less noise. Never to be used if you want to shoot action, but can be useful if you are a landscape or architecture photographer who likes to walk around without a tripod yet takes some time to frame and shoot images carefully.
1/8000 ― 30″: The ISO sensitivity starts to change at the shutter speed you have set.

Metering Mode

Metering mode refers to the way the camera reads the light and sets the exposure.

In multi, it considers the whole frame and sets exposure according to internal algorithms programmed in camera.

In spot or center, the camera only considers what is in that spot or the center (per example, if your subject is completely black, the camera will try to compensate by overexposing the image).

Multi: Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
Center: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-weighted metering).
Spot: Measures only the central area (Spot metering). This mode is suitable for measuring light on a specified part of the entire screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from [Spot: Standard] and [Spot: Large]. The position of the metering circle depends on the setting for [Spot Metering Point].
Entire Screen Avg.: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the position of the subject changes.
Highlight: Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the subject while avoiding overexposure.

Tip: When [Spot] is selected and [Focus Area] is set to either [Flexible Spot] or [Expand Flexible Spot] while [Spot Metering Point] is set to [Focus Point Link], the spot metering point can be coordinated with the focus area.

Face Priority in Multi Metering Mode

A very interesting addition to the metering possibilities. When Metering mode is set to multi, this function allows you to set the priority of the light metering to detected faces for a better exposure. great for portraits.

Self Timer Type

You can choose between shooting a single image with the self-timer or a designated number of images.

Self-timer (single: Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.
Self-timer(Cont): Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.

MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 10

Spot Metering Point

Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus area when Focus Area is set to Flexible Spot or Expand Flexible Spot.

Center: The spot metering position does not coordinate with the focus area, but always meters brightness at the center.
Focus Point Link: The spot metering position coordinates with the focus area.

Exposure step

You can set the setting range for the shutter speed, aperture, and exposure compensation values either .3 or .5 EV steps.

AEL w shutter

Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Select Off to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.

Auto (default setting): Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF.
On: Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off: Does not adjust the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to change focus and exposure separately.

The camera keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in Cont. Shooting or Spd Priority Cont. mode. Operation using the AEL button is prioritized over the AEL w/ shutter settings.

Exposure Std. Adjust

Adjusts this camera’s standard for the correct exposure value for each metering mode. You can set a value from -1 EV to 1 EV in 1/6 EV increments.

MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 11

Flash Mode:

(Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button)

If you have purchased a flash for your A7r III, it’s important to learn about the different Flash Modes. If you’re new to photography, I’d suggest setting it to Auto, where the camera will decide when and how you need the flash.

If you’d like to get more into flash photography, you should read up on the different possibilities and what their effect would be on your images. This is a basic explanation of what the different modes do:

fill flash: A fill flash is useful even in daylight to fill the shadows with light (like a person in the shade).

Slow sync: Tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed along with a flash, and thus is better for night shots. In manual and shutter priority modes, there is no difference in flash power. But when using aperture priority, program, or auto, choosing slow sync tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed than it would ordinarily pick.What the slow sync flash mode does is a first fire the flash for the subject exposure, then allow for a longer shutter speed that will allow for more ambient light to be captured by the sensor.

Rear Sync: Capturing an image involves two shutter actions: one when the capture starts and on when it stops. Rear Sync tells the flash to fire right before the shutter closes. Moving objects will show a streak where they came from and a sharp image where they were at the end of the exposure. This conveys a sense of speed with moving objects. Rear Sync is a creative technique, if you’d like to know more about this type of photography, I’d suggest doing a Google search on ‘Rear Sync Flash Photography.’
Wireless: Select wireless is if want to use the in-camera flash to trigger an external flash like the Sony HVL-43M (with TTL!). Using an external flash is helpful when shooting weddings and dimly-lit subject matter, You can use your main flash to light the subject, and your external flash to light the background.

Notes on using te Sony A7r III with an off-camera flash system like Godox or Flashpoint:

For basic operation, set the camera to ‘ambient’ flash.
Turn OFF Live view display (MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 7).

Flash comp or Flash compensation:

Especially when using Slow Sync or Rear Sync Flash modes, you might have to lower the power of the Flash to get a decently exposed image. (Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button).

Exp comp set

Selects if the Exposure compensation function ( -5 in 0.5EV or 0.3EV steps) also reduces flash power or not. Leave it to Ambient And Flash, unless if you want to use HSS sync with flashes, then it is handy to be able to control exposure and flash output separately.

Wireless Flash:

On previous Sony cameras, Wireless was treated as a Flash Mode. This was not a problem except if you wanted wireless flash with Rear-curtain flash sync, which was Flash Mode. The Sony a7R III separates Wireless Flash from Flash Modes. This enables you to use Wireless Flash in conjunction with Rear-Sync. (Once you enable Wireless Flash in the menu there’s no reason to turn it off)

Red Eye Reduction:

This anti-Red Eye setting quickly fires the flash before your image capture starts, reducing the red-eye effect often seen when using a flash.

(MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 12)

White Balance

You can either set the white balance to Auto, where the camera tries to guess what the neutral grey value is, or use one of the preset white balance settings for different lighting conditions or customize the white balance according to your preference or using a grey card.

Priority Set in AWB

Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when White Balance is set to Auto.

Standard: Shoots with standard auto white balance. The camera automatically adjusts the color tones.
Ambience: Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.
White: Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.

DRO/Auto HDR

DRO:

This stands for Dynamic range optimise and analyses the contrast of your scene in real-time. It produces an image with optimal brightness and recovered shadow detail. You can use this function even while the subject is moving or during the continuous shooting.

Auto HDR:

(not available for RAW captures) this feature Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the overexposed image to create a picture with an extended range from highlight to shadow.

The highlight detail in auto HDR is better than that in DRO and with reduced noise. The shutter is released three times, so using this function for moving subjects is not recommended.

Creative Style

The Sony creative styles can best be explained as being film emulations (the same way as do some other camera manufacturers implements this). There is a range of styles available from vivid color to black and white. If you’re shooting RAW, these styles are embedded, but can always be zeroed after importing them to you RAW editor of choice. Jpegs are saved with this styling applied. It is always useful to try some of these and can be a real boost for your creativity, as you will notice that you make different images in say black-and-white as opposed to color.

Standard: For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
Vivid: The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers, spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
Neutral: The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also suitable for capturing image material to be modified with a computer.
Clear: For shooting images in clear tones with limpid colors in highlight, suitable for capturing radiant light.
Deep: For shooting images with deep and dense colors, suitable for capturing the solid presence of the subject.
Light: For shooting images with bright and simple colors, suitable for capturing a refreshingly light ambiance.
Portrait: For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
Landscape: The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also stand out more. Sunset: For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
Night Scene: The contrast is lowered for reproducing night scenes.
Autumn leaves: For shooting autumn scenes, vividly highlighting the reds and yellows of changing leaves.
Black & White: For shooting images in black and white monotone.
Sepia: For shooting images in sepia monotone.

You can edit these different styles and save your own creative style if you want.

This functionality can be changed:

Contrast: The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on the image.
Saturation: The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is restrained and subdued.
Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value selected, the more the contours are softened.

Picture Effect

Think of this menu as an Instagram app right in your camera, with all kinds of retro filters and effects. These are only available when quality is set to Jpeg (Not in RAW).

Off: Disables the [Picture Effect] function.
Toy Camera: Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
Pop Color: Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
Posterization: Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.
Retro Photo: Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
Soft High-key: Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
Partial Color: Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
High Contrast Mono.: Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
Rich-tone Mono.: Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.

Picture Profile

You can customise the picture settings by adjusting picture profile items such as Gamma and Detail. These settings apply to both RAW files and video, so you’ll need to change them back, or select the appropriate setting when switching between still shooting and video.

When setting this up, connect the camera to a TV or monitor, and adjust them while checking the picture on the screen.

Move to the item index screen by pressing the right side of the control wheel.

Select the item to change using the up/down sides of the control wheel.

Select the desired value using the up/down sides of the control wheel and press the button in the centre.

The default settings PP1 through PP7 for movies have been set in advance in the camera based on various shooting conditions.

PP1: Example setting using a standard Movie gamma.
PP2: Example setting using the standard Sony Still gamma.
PP3: Example setting of natural color tone using the ITU709 gamma.
PP4: Example setting of a color tone faithful to the ITU709 standard.
PP5: Example setting using Cine 1 gamma.
PP6: Example setting using Cine2 gamma.
PP7: Example setting using S-Log2 gamma.

It’s possible to adjust settings and create your own picture profile.

Black Level

Sets the black level. (–15 to +15)

Gamma

Selects a gamma curve. These are the curves available:

Movie: Standard gamma curve for movies
Still: Standard gamma curve for still images
Cine1: Softens the contrast in dark parts and emphasizes gradation in bright parts to produce a relaxed color movie. (equivalent to HG4609G33)
Cine2: Similar to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal. (equivalent to HG4600G30)
Cine3: Intensifies the contrast in light and shade more than [Cine1] and [Cine2] and strengthens gradation in black.
Cine4: Strengthens the contrast in dark parts more than [Cine3]. The contrast in dark parts is lower and the contrast in bright parts is higher than for Movie.
ITU709: Gamma curve that corresponds to ITU-709.ITU709(800%): Gamma curve for confirming scenes on the assumption of shooting using [S-Log2].
S-Log2: Gamma curve for [S-Log2]. This setting is based on the assumption that the picture will be processed after shooting.

Black Gamma

Corrects gamma in low intensity areas.

Range: Selects the correcting range. (Wide / Middle / Narrow)
Level: Sets the correcting level. (-7 (maximum black compression) to +7 (maximum black stretch))

Knee

Sets knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting signals in high intensity areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your camera.

Mode

Selects auto/manual settings.

Auto: The knee point and slope are set automatically.
Manual: The knee point and slope are set manually.

Auto Set

Settings when Auto is selected.

Max Point: Sets the maximum point of the knee point. (90% to 100%)
Sensitivity: Sets the sensitivity. (High / Mid / Low)
Manual Set: Settings when [Manual] is selected.
Point: Sets the knee point. (75% to 105%)Slope: Sets the knee slope. (-5 (gentle) to +5 (steep))

Color Mode

Sets type and level of colors.

Movie: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Movie].
Still: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Still].
Cinema: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Cine1].
Pro: Similar color tones to the standard image quality of Sony professional cameras (when combined with ITU-709 gamma)ITU709
Matrix: Colors corresponding to ITU-709 standard (when combined with ITU-709 gamma)
Black & White: Sets the saturation to zero for shooting in black and white.
S-Gamut: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log2].

Saturation

Sets the color saturation. (-32 to +32)

Color Phase

Sets the color phase. (-7 to +7)

Color Depth

Sets the color depth for each color phase. This function is more effective for chromatic colors and less effective for achromatic colors. The color looks deeper as you increase the setting value towards the positive side, and lighter as you decrease the value towards the negative side. This function is effective even if you set Color Mode to Black & White.

[R] -7 (light red) to +7 (deep red)
[G] -7 (light green) to +7 (deep green)
[B] -7 (light blue) to +7 (deep blue)
[C] -7 (light cyan) to +7 (deep cyan)
[M] -7 (light magenta) to +7 (deep magenta)
[Y] -7 (light yellow) to +7 (deep yellow)

Detail

Add detail.

Level: Sets the [Detail] level. (-7 to +7)

Adjust: The following parameters can be selected manually.

Mode: Selects auto/manual setting. (Auto (automatic optimization) / Manual (The details are set manually.))
V/H Balance: Sets the vertical (V) and horizontal (H) balance of DETAIL. (-2 (off to the vertical (V) side) to +2 (off to the horizontal (H) side))
B/W Balance: Selects the balance of the lower DETAIL (B) and the upper DETAIL (W). (Type1 (off to the lower DETAIL (B) side) to Type5 (off to the upper DETAIL (W) side))
Limit: Sets the limit level of [Detail]. (0 (Low limit level: likely to be limited) to 7 (High limit level: unlikely to be limited))
Crispning: Sets the crispening level. (0 (shallow crispening level) to 7 (deep crispening level))
Hi-Light Detail: Sets the [Detail] level in the high intensity areas. (0 to 4)

Copy

Copies the settings of the picture profile to another picture profile number.

Reset

Resets the picture profile to the default setting. You cannot reset all picture profile settings at once.

(MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 13)

Focus Magnifier

When focussing manually or in DMF mode, you can set the camera to magnify a part of the screen so you can check focus. This sub-menu allows you to select the part of the image that will be magnified during shooting.

Focus Magnif. Time

You can set how long to hold the magnified area during MF assist. 2 sec, 5 seconds or no limit. 2 seconds is how I have it set up.

Initial Focus Mag.

Sets the initial magnification scale when using [Focus Magnifier]. Select a setting that will help you frame your shot.

Full-frame shooting:

x1.0: Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x7.8: Displays a 7.8-times enlarged image.

APS-C/Super 35mm size shooting:

x1.0: Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x5.1: Displays a 5.1-times enlarged image.

AF in Focus Mag.

You can focus on the subject more accurately using auto-focus by magnifying the area where you want to focus. While the magnified image is displayed, you can focus on a smaller area than the flexible spot.

Magnify the image by pressing the center of the control wheel, and then adjust the position using top/bottom/right/left of the control wheel.
Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot.

MF assist

This works in conjunction with the Focus Magnifier found on this page too You might remember that you can select the area to magnify there when using manual focus (MF). MF assist will need to be turned on if you want to use this feature.

Peaking Settings

Peaking Level

Peaking Level is a manual focusing aid which works when you have your camera set to MF or DMF.

You’ll see a type of noise outlining the parts of your image where the focus lies, and you can adjust the sensitivity to high, mid or low.

Which setting is best depends on what lens you use, as with a sharper lens it can be configured to low, while more soft lenses benefit from a medium or high setting to clearly visualize what you’re focusing on.

Peaking Color

You can choose the color of this Peaking between Red, white and yellow. I have it set to red, as this contrasts nicely with most scenes you capture.

(MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 14)

Anti-Flicker Shoot.

Reduces banding effects when shooting with the electronic shutter or EFCS with flash or with artificial light indoors.

Face Registration

Regist. Face Priority

You can decide which face will be first to be focussed on when face detection is turned on.

MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 1

Movie Mode

You can select the exposure mode for movie shooting here.

Program Auto / Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
Aperture Priority / Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority / Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
Manual Exposure / Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.

S&Q Exposure Mode

You can select the exposure mode for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting. You can change the setting and playback speed for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with S&Q Settings later.

Program Auto / Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
Aperture Priority / Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority / Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
Manual Exposure / Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.

File Format (video)

You can choose between XAVC S 4K, XAVC S HD, AVCHD or MP4. AVCHD is a far superior codec than plain MPEG-4. You’ll need a fast UHS Speed Class U3 SD card to record at 100 Mbps or more.

XAVC S 4K: Records 4K movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate. Audio: LPCM
XAVC S HD: Records HD movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate. Audio: LPCM. The file size of movies is limited to approx. 2 GB. If the movie file size reaches approx. 2 GB during recording, a new movie file will be created automatically.
AVCHD: Records HD movies in the AVCHD format. This file format is suitable for high-definition TV. Audio: Dolby Digital
MP4: Records MP4 (AVC) movies. This format is suitable for playback on smartphones or tablets, web uploads, and email attachments. The file size of movies is limited to approx. 4 GB. If the movie file size reaches approx. 4 GB during recording, the recording will stop automatically.

Record Setting (video):

You can choose the quality of recorded video here. Select the image size, frame rate, and image quality for movie recording. The higher the bit-rate, the higher the picture quality. Frame- and bit-rate differ depending on your movie file format.

When File Format is set to XAVC S 4K you have these options:

30p/25p: 30p 60M/25p 60Mbps or 30p 100M/25p 100Mbps.
24p: 24p 60Mbps or 24p 100Mbps if your camera is set to NTSC

When File Format is set to XAVC S HD you have these options:

120p/100p: 120p 60M/100p 60Mbps or 120p 100M/100p 100Mbps.
30p/25p: 60p 50Mbps/50p 50Mbps.
60p/50p: 30p 50Mbps/25p 50Mbps.
24p: 24p 50Mbps when set to NTSC.

When File Format is set to AVCHD you have these options:

60i/50i: 60i 17Mbps(FH)/50i 17Mbps(FH) or 60i 24Mbps(FX)/50i 24Mbps(FX).
60p/50p: 60p 28Mbps(PS)/50p 28Mbps(PS).
24p/25p: 24p 17Mbps(FH)/25p 17Mbps(FH) or 24p 24Mbps(FX)/25p 24Mbps(FX).

When File Format is set to MP4 you have these options:

60p/50p: 1920×1080 60p 28Mbps/1920×1080 50p 28Mbps.
30p/25p: 1280×720 30p 6Mbps/1280×720 25p 6Mbps or 1920×1080 30p 16Mbps/1920×1080 25p 16Mbps.

S&Q settings

You can do slow-motion recording or record quick-motion recording. The sound will not be recorded. In a slow-motion recording, the shutter speed becomes faster and you may not be able to obtain the proper exposure. If this happens, decrease the aperture value or adjust the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.

How to record slow motion movie on the Sony A7r III:

Set the mode dial to (Movie/S&Q Motion).
Select MENU→ (Camera Settings2)→[Movie/S&Q Motion]→ and select the desired setting of slow-motion/quick-motion (S&Q) ( Program Auto, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or Manual Exposure).
Select MENU→ (Camera Settings2)→[ S&Q Settings] and select the desired settings for [ Record Setting] and [ Frame Rate].
Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording. Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

Record Setting: Selects the frame rate of the movie.

Frame Rate: Selects the shooting frame rate.

Playback speed: The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned [ Record Setting] and [Frame Rate].

Proxy Recording

This function allows you to simultaneously record a low bitrate proxy file at the same time as recording the high bitrate original file movie.

MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 2

AF Drive Speed (movie)

You can switch focusing speed when using autofocus in movie mode.

Fast: Sets the AF drive speed to fast. This mode is suitable for shooting active scenes, such as sports.
Normal: Sets the AF drive speed to normal.
Slow: Sets the AF drive speed to slow. With this mode, the focus switches smoothly when the subject to be focused is changed.

AF Track Sens (movie)

You can set the AF sensitivity separately in movie mode.

Responsive: Sets the AF sensitivity to high. This mode is useful when recording movies in which the subject is moving quickly.
Standard: Sets the AF sensitivity to normal.
Locked on: Sets the AF sensitivity to low. You can shoot with a stable focus by ignoring the influence of anything in front of the subject.

Auto Slow Shut. (movie)

Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording dark scenes.

On: Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in dark locations.
Off: Does not use Auto Slow Shut. The recorded movie will be darker than when On is selected, but you can record movies with smoother motion and less object blur.

Audio Recording

You can switch off audio recording in movie mode. When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set Audio Rec Level to a lower sound level. Doing so enables you to record more realistic audio. When you record audio movies with lower volumes, set Audio Rec Level to a higher sound level to make the sound easier to hear. Regardless of the Audio Rec Level settings, the limiter always operates.

Audio Rec Level

You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter.

Audio Level Display

Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen.

Don’t see the audio level display?

Check if Audio Recording]is set to Off.
Check if DISP (Display Setting) is set to No Disp. Info.
During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting, audio is automatically turned OFF.

MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 3

Audio Out Timing

You can set echo cancellation during audio monitoring and prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio during HDMI output.

Live: Outputs audio without delay. Select this setting when the audio deviation is a problem during audio monitoring.
Lip Sync: Outputs audio and video in sync. Select this setting to prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio.

Wind Noise Reduction

This helps reduce noise from the wind during video recording.

Marker Display (movie)

Select if you want guidelines (a grid) in movie mode. The markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder

Marker Settings (movie)

Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies. You can display several markers at the same time.

Center: Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen. [Off]/[On]
Aspect: Sets the aspect marker display. [Off]/[4:3]/[13:9]/[14:9]/[15:9]/[1.66:1]/[1.85:1]/[2.35:1]
Safety Zone: Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV. [Off]/[80%]/[90%]
Guideframe: Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.

Video Light Mode

Sets the illumination setting for the optional HVL-LBPC LED light.

Power Link: The video light turns on/off in sync with the ON/OFF operation of this camera.
REC Link: The video light turns on/off in sync with movie recording start/stop.
REC Link&STBY: The video light turns on when movie recording starts and dims when not recording (STBY).
Auto: The video light automatically turns on when it is dark.

Movie w/ shutter

You can map the movie recording function to the shutter button.

MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 4

Silent Shooting

Select here if you want to use the Electronic or Mechanical shutter. There is also an auto option that switches from mechanical to electronic shutter if a flash is detected.

e-Front Curtain Shut.

This shortens the time lag between shutter releases. When you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large diameter lens attached, the ghosting of a blurred area may occur, depending on the subject or shooting conditions. When a lens made by another manufacturer (including a Minolta/Konica-Minolta lens) is used, set this function to [Off]. If you set this function to [On], the correct exposure will not be set or the image brightness will be uneven.

Release without lens

Makes it possible to capture images even if a lens is not supported by the camera. (Like when using an adapter with vintage lenses)

Release without card

If set to Off, you won’t be able to engage the shutter when there is no SD card in the slot. This is a useful failsafe to prevent you from shooting images without the ability to save them.

SteadyShot

Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot (sensor stabilization) function.For optimal sharpness, turn it off when using a tripod.

SteadyShot Settings

If your lens does not relay focal length information to the A7r III body, you can still use the Ibis stabilization by dialing in the focal length manually.

Auto: Performs the SteadyShot function automatically according to the information obtained from the attached lens.
Manual: Performs the SteadyShot function according to the focal length set using [SteadyS. Focal Len.]. (8mm-1000mm)

MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 5

Zoom

Turn the digital zoom function on or off.

Zoom settings

Set to Optical zoom only (using the optical zoom capabilities of your lens

Two other settings are available which use digital zoom (cropping of the original image):

Digital zoom:

Pictures captured by the image sensor of the camera are enlarged using digital signal processing. As the magnification level increases, signals to be also estimated growth and can reduce the picture quality.

Clear Image Zoom:

Zoomed images are captured close to the original quality when shooting a still picture. The camera first zooms to the maximum optical magnification, then uses Clear Image Zoom technology to enlarge the image an additional 2x, producing clear, sharp images despite the increased zoom ratio. If you don’t have a zoom lens, this might be an option as the camera uses the RAW file to zoom; although still some image quality will be lost.

Zoom ring rotate

Assigns zoom in (T) or zoom out (W) functions to the zoom ring rotation direction. Available only with power zoom lenses that support this function.

MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 6

Disp button

Selects the functionality (what is shown) on the screen when you press the DISP button (on the control wheel). You can choose Graphic Display, all info, no disp info, and histogram.

Finder/Monitor

You can set the behavior of the EVF and screen here. Do you want your screen on all the time, switch between screen and EVF once your eye has been detected near the viewfinder? Or turn the screen off and only use the EVF? It can all be selected here.

Finder Frame Rate

Display the subject’s movements more smoothly by adjusting the frame rate of the viewfinder during still image shooting. This function is convenient when shooting a fast-moving subject.

120fps/100fps: Displays the movements of the subject more smoothly on the viewfinder.
60fps/50fps: Displays the subject at a normal frame rate on the viewfinder.

Zebra setting

The zebra function shows a zebra pattern on the screen while shooting in any area that is in danger of highlight clipping. You can switch this OFF or anywhere in a range between 70 and 100.The Zebra Pattern is a highlight warning indicator that is common in video cameras. It does not control exposure but just warns you that your highlights are blown out. It is not recorded into the resulting image.I have it set halfway at around 75, and it is a very useful indication of correct exposure of the entire scene.

Grid Line (stills)

Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.

Rule of 3rds Grid: Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.
Square Grid: Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is suitable to determine the quality of the composition when shooting landscape, close-up, or duplicated images.
Diag. Square Grid: Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.
Off: Does not display the grid line.

Exposure set guide

The exposure set guide is an on-screen scroller that tells you the relation between your chosen aperture and the appropriate shutter speed for the scene you are shooting. I find this quite handy, but you can turn it off if you don’t.

MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 7

Live view Display

Live view display allows you to see the image you’re going to capture with the settings you have dialed-in like aperture and shutter speed. Some users report easier autofocusing in low light when it’s turned OFF, and you’d need to turn it off when using external flashes too that can’t be used with Sony’s TTL (through the lens) functionality. When u use a flash in a studio situation, you will want to turn this off. Setting it to ON also reduces the EVF refresh rate from 120fps to 60fps.

Cont. Shoot. Length

This will show you how many shots you have left on your SD card on the screen. You can select to always have this info displayed, only during shooting or turn it off.

Auto Review

You can check your captured image on the screen directly after shooting. You can select how long the image will stay on the screen (10, 5 or 2 seconds). I find this very annoying, so I turned it off. If you want to review your image, you can simply press play to do so.

MENU → Purple Camera Icon→ page 8

Custom Key(Shoot.)/Custom Key(PB)/Custom Key(Movie)

You can assign the desired function to the desired key. Some functions are available only when they are assigned to a custom key. For example, I assign [Eye AF] to [AF-ON] for [Custom Key(Shoot.)] because it’s more conveniently placed. You can easily recall [Eye AF] simply by pressing the AF-ON button. Learn how to do this here:

The keys that can be assigned functions are different for [Custom Key(Shoot.)] and [Custom Key(PB)].

You can assign the desired functions to the following keys. You can also assign a shooting function to the focus hold button on the lens. However, some lenses do not have a focus hold button.2 1.

Custom Button 1
Custom Button2
AF/MF Button/AEL Button
Fn/ Button
Control Wheel (Center Button/Down Button/Left Button/Right Button)
Custom Button 3

Function Menu Set.

You can assign the functions to be called up when you press the Fn (Function) button.

Dial Setup

You can switch the functions of the front/rear dial between shutter speed and aperture.

MENU → Purple Camera Icon→ page 9

Dial Ev Comp

You can compensate the exposure using the front or rear dial. You can adjust the exposure in a range of -5.0 EV to 5.0 EV.

MOVIE Button

Sets whether or not to activate the MOVIE (Movie) button.

Always: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button in any mode.
Movie Mode Only: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting mode is set to [Movie/S&Q Motion] mode.

Lock Operation Parts

You can set whether the dials will be locked by pressing and holding the Fn (Function) button. You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again.

Lock: Locks the front and rear dials when you press and hold the Fn button.
Unlock: The front or rear dials are not locked, even if you press and hold the Fn (Function) button.

Audio Signals

Selects whether the A7r III produces a sound or not in silent mode with the electronic shutter.

MENU → Network settings→ page 1

Send To Smartphone

- - - - You can send one or several images directly to your wireless device (phone or tablet) by pressing this button.
      - You can either decide to choose which images you want to transfer on the camera or the wireless device (via the Sony PlayMemories app, available for free in the apple or android store).
      - You’ll have to connect the-the camera via Wifi first (it makes a Wifi access point), using the instruction on the A7r III screen.
      - It works just like connecting to any other access point with your phone or tablet.
      - You should do this as quickly as possible, just to get it out of the way.
      - When your phone has wirelessly connected to the camera once, and you’ve entered the password, it will remember this, and make it a lot faster to connect later.

Send to Computer

You’ll need to connect the computer physically to the camera using the supplied USB cable, and you can push selected pictures to your Sony PlayMemories desktop software (installed from the CD or downloaded from their website). This can even be set up to continue pushing images after the camera has turned off.

FTP Transfer Func.

View On TV

If you have a Wifi-enabled TV, you can see pictures and slideshows directly from your camera through your home wireless network.

Ctrl w/ smartphone

By connecting the camera to a smartphone using Wi-Fi, you can control the camera and shoot images using the smartphone, and you can transfer images shot with the camera to the smartphone.

Connection Info. displays the QR code or SSID used to connect the camera to a smartphone.

Airplane Mode

Disables all wireless functionality, just like airplane mode does on your phone.

MENU → Network settings→ page 2

So the camera apps from the Playmemories store can’t be used on the A7r III You can however remotely control your camera with the Playmemories app for iPhone or Android. It’s also possible to transfer files to your smartphone (JPEG only) and transfer files over LAN using the supplied port.

Another new feature only previously available in the A6500 is Bluetooth connectivity. It is possible to connect your A7r III to your smartphone in order to Geotag your images.

Wi-Fi Settings:

WPS Push

If your access point has the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this product easily by pushing the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button.

Access Point Set.

You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID name of the access point, security system, and password. The password may be preset in some devices. For details, see the access point operating instructions, or consult the access point administrator.

Disp MAC Address

Displays the MAC address of your Sony ILCE-7rm3.

SSID/PW Reset

Your camera shares the connection information for [Send to Smartphone] and [ Connection Info.] with a device that has permission to connect. If you want to change the device that is permitted to connect, reset the connection information.

Bluetooth Settings.

Controls the settings for connecting the camera to a smartphone via a Bluetooth connection. You need to pair the camera and smartphone before using the location information interlocking function. If you want to pair the camera and smartphone in order to use the location information interlocking function, refer to “Loc. Info. Link Set..”

Loc. Info. Link Set

You can use the application PlayMemories Mobile to obtain location information from a smartphone that is connected to your camera using Bluetooth communication. You can record the obtained location information when shooting images.

To use the location information linking function of the camera, you need the PlayMemories Mobile application on your smartphone and transfer an image to your smartphone to test the connection

Procedure:

Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated. (Do not perform the Bluetooth pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen!!! In steps 2 to 7, the pairing operation is performed using the camera and the application PlayMemories Mobile. If you accidentally perform the pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen in step 1, cancel the pairing and then perform the pairing operation by following Steps 2 through 7 using the camera and the application PlayMemories Mobile.)
On the camera, select MENU → (Wireless) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On].
On the camera, select MENU → (Wireless) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing].
Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone and tap “Location Information Linkage.”
Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of PlayMemories Mobile.
Select [OK] when a message is displayed on the monitor of the camera. The pairing of the camera and PlayMemories Mobile is complete.
On the camera, select MENU → (Wireless) → [ Loc. Info. Link Set.] → [Location Info. Link] → [On].

(obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera. Location information obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded when shooting images.

Options in this Menu:

Location Info. Link: Sets whether to obtain the location information by linking with a smartphone.
Auto Time Correct.: Sets whether to automatically correct the date setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.
Auto Area Adjust.: Sets whether to automatically correct the area setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.

Edit Device name

If you wish, you can change the name of the Device Access point) perhaps to make it easier to identify which A7r III is yours in particular situations.

Imp Root Certificate

Import a root certificate from your memory card here.

Reset Network set

Resets all network settings.

If something does not function properly, and you want to start from scratch, can be useful.

MENU – playback options – page 1

Protect

Set your camera to not shoot images without inserting an SD card.

Rotate

Change the orientation of images in-camera.

Delete

Delete one or multiple images stored on your SD cards.

Rating

Rate your images in-camera for easy culling in Lightroom afterward.

Rating Set (Cust Key)

Set a custom key for easy rating.

Specify Printing

Specify Printing is a feature that allows images to be marked for printing later. Registered images are displayed with the DPOF mark. (DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format)

MENU – playback options – page 2

Copy

You can copy images from a memory card in a slot that is selected using [Select PB Media] to a memory card in another slot.

Photo Capture

Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First shoot a movie, then pause the movie during playback to capture decisive moments that tend to be missed when shooting still images, and save them as still images.

Enlarge Image

Select an image and expand a portion of that picture. Useful for checking details and focus.

Enlarge Init. Mag.

Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images.

Enlarge Initial Pos.

Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback. You can select either image center or the focus position.

Slide Show

Select whether you want the camera to repeat slideshows when all pictures are viewed or not, and choose the interval between slides.

MENU – playback options – page 3

Select PB media

Select what SD card slot will be used when you press playback.

View Mode

select how the camera will arrange captured pictures in the viewing browser.

Image Index

Choose whether you want the image browser to display 12 (larger) or 30 (smaller) images per page.

Display Cont. Shooting Group.

You can select to display burst images in groups or display all images during playback.

Display rotation

Select whether you want the camera to rotate images automatically when you rotate the camera or not.

Image Jump Setting

Sets which dial and method to use for jumping between images during playback. You can quickly find protected images or images set with a particular rating.

Select Dial:

Selects the dial to use for jumping between images.

Image Jump Method:

Sets the type of images to be played back with Image Jump.

MENU – Setup – page 1

Monitor Brightness

Manually set the Monitor brightness (recommended leave to zero) or change to a brighter setting for Sunny Weather.

Viewfinder Brightness

Set to Auto, which adapts to the lighting circumstances or manually changes to your preferred setting.

Finder Color Temp

Change the color temperature of the viewfinder (colder-warmer) to you liking. I don’t make any adjustments here.

Gamma Disp. Assist

Movies with S-Log gamma are assumed to be processed after shooting in order to make use of the wide dynamic range. They are therefore displayed in low contrast during shooting and may be difficult to monitor, using [Gamma Disp. Assist], contrast equivalent to that of normal gamma can be reproduced. In addition, [Gamma Disp. Assist] can also be applied when playing back movies on the camera’s monitor/viewfinder.

Volume settings

Modify the playback volume for recorded video or demos.

Delete confirm.

You can set whether [Delete] or [Cancel] is selected as the default setting on the delete confirmation screen.

MENU – Setup – page 2

Display Quality

You can change the display quality to High or Standard. When High is selected, battery consumption will be higher, and your camera will also heat up faster.

Pwr Save Start time

Sets time intervals to automatically switch to power save mode when you are not performing operations to prevent wearing down the battery pack. To return to shooting mode, perform an operation such as pressing the shutter button halfway down. I have it set to 5 minutes, a good balance between usability and battery life.

Auto Pwr OFF Temp.

Sets the temperature of the camera at which the camera turns off automatically during shooting. When it is set to High, you can continue shooting even when the temperature of the camera gets hotter than normal. Do not shoot while holding the camera in your hand as it can cause burns. Use a tripod. This will give you a 9-minute increase in movie recording at high ambient temperatures.

NTSC/PAL Selector

Plays back movies recorded with the product on an NTSC/PAL system TV.

Cleaning Mode

If dust or debris gets inside the camera and adheres to the surface of the image sensor (the part that converts the light to an electric signal), it may appear as dark spots on the image, depending on the shooting environment. If this happens, follow the steps below to clean the image sensor.

Touch Operation

Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor. Touch operations when shooting with the monitor are referred to as “touch panel operations,” and touch operations when shooting with the viewfinder are referred to as “touchpad operations.”

Touch Panel Pad: Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touchpad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
Touch Panel Only: Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.
Touch Pad Only: Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder. Off: Deactivates all touch operations.
Off: Deactivates all touch operations.

MENU – Setup – page 3

Touch Panel/pad

Selects whether to activate touch panel operation when shooting with the monitor, or touch pad operation when shooting with the viewfinder.

Touch Panel+Pad

: Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.

Touch Panel Only

: Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.

Touch Pad Only

: Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.

Demo Mode

For display purposes in stores only.

Touch Pad Settings

You can adjust settings related to touch pad operations during viewfinder shooting.

Operation in V Orien.: Sets whether to enable touch pad operations during vertically oriented viewfinder shooting. You can prevent erroneous operations during vertically oriented shooting caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.

Touch Pos. Mode: Sets whether to move the focusing frame to the position touched on the screen , or move the focusing frame to the desired position based on the direction of dragging and the amount of movement .

Operation Area: Sets the area to be used for touch pad operations. Restricting the operational area can prevent erroneous operations caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.

TC/UB settings

Timecode (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies. This is used for synchronization of video in post-production. The time code can be set between the following range: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29.

TC/UB Disp. Setting: Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.
TC Preset: Sets the time code.
UB Preset: Sets the user bit.
TC Format: Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.)
TC Run: Sets the count up format for the time code.
TC Make: Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
UB Time Rec: Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.

Remote CTRL

You can operate this product and shoot images using the SHUTTER button, 2 SEC button (2-second delay shutter), and START/STOP button (or Movie button (RMT-DSLR2 only)) on the Wireless Remote Commander RMT-DSLR1 (sold separately) and RMT-DSLR2 (sold separately). Refer also to the operating instructions for the Wireless Remote Commander.

HDMI Settings

When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.

Auto: The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.
2160p/1080p: Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.
1080p: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
1080i: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).

MENU – Setup – page 4

4K Output Sel.

Outputs video in 4K resolution to an HDMI-connected TV that supports 4K.

Memory Card HDMI: Simultaneously outputs to the external recording/playback device and records on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(30p): Outputs a 4K movie in 30p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(24p): Outputs a 4K movie in 24p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(25p)* : Outputs a 4K movie in 25p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.

USB connection

Selects what will happen when you connect your camera to your PC or MAC.

Auto: Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be connected. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
Mass Storage: Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.
MTP: Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
PC Remote: Uses “Remote Camera Control” to control this product from the computer, including such functions as shooting and storing images on the computer

USB LUN Setting

Improves compatibility with external devices by limiting the functions of the USB connection.

Older devices that are not able to connect to the camera might work when set to single. Otherwise, use Multi.

USB Power Supply

You can extend battery life by providing a power supply over USB.

PC Remote settings

Sets whether to save still images stored in both the camera and the computer during PC Remote shooting. This setting is useful when you want to check recorded images on the camera without leaving the camera.

Language

Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings, and messages.

MENU – Setup – page 5

Date/Time Setup

The Clock Set screen is displayed automatically when you turn on your A7r III for the first time.

Area Settings

Sets where in the world where you are using your camera.

Copyright info

Writes copyright information onto the still images like your name or business.

Format

When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format the card using the camera for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the memory card, and is unrecoverable.

File Number

Name your files according to some shots or reset it to start from 1.

Set File Name

Use the standard file naming system or a customizable one.

MENU – Setup – page 6

Select REC media

Selects the memory card slot on which to record. [Slot 1] is the default setting. If you do not intend to change the settings and will only use one memory card, use the slot 1. To record the same image to two memory cards at the same time or to sort recorded images onto two memory card slots by the image type (still image/movie), use [Recording Mode].

Recording Mode

You can select the method for recording an image, such as recording the same image simultaneously to two memory cards or recording different types of images to two memory cards. (If you want to record a movie to a memory card in different formats, use [Dual Video REC].)

Standard: Records an image to a memory card in the memory card slot that you select in [Select Rec. Media].
Simult. (stills): Records a still image to both memory cards and records a movie to a memory card in the memory card slot that you select in [Select Rec. Media].
Simult. (video): Records a still image to a memory card in the memory card slot that you select in [Select Rec. Media], and records a movie to both memory cards.
Simult. (stills/video ): Records a still image and a movie to both memory cards.
Sort(JPEG/RAW): Records an image in JPEG format to a memory card in the memory card slot that you select in [Select Rec. Media], and records an image in RAW format to the other memory card.
Sort( stills/video ): Records a still image to a memory card in the memory card slot that you select in [Select Rec. Media], and records a movie to the other memory card.

Select REC folder

Selects where (to what folder) the camera will store newly captured images.

New Folder

Make a new folder for quickly organizing events and locations.

Folder name

Choose whether to have folder names in standard form (DSC) or create a new one by date. Setting folders by date will make organizing your images easier.

Recover Image DB

If you have a storage card error, you can try to rebuild the database to retrieve lost images possibly.

Display media info

You can check how much space is left on your SD card (have pictures in your desired quality and how many minutes of video)

MENU – Setup – page 7

Version

Check what version of the operating system your camera and the lens is running. Sony sporadically releases updates with new features, so it might be worth checking if any new firmware versions are available.

Setting Reset

Fully resets the camera to factory settings.

MENU – My menu setting

Sony A9 star icon page 1 — My menu settings

This is a new functionality not previously seen on any Sony Ax camera. It allows you to build a custom menu. Say you often change Raw file type from compressed to uncompressed, or maybe you don’t want to spend your time scrolling through the entire menu system looking for the SteadyShot settings. Well, now you can basically build your own Menu here with your most often used settings.

Add Item

You’ll see a list of all Menu options here and you can simply select your desired options and add them to your custom built menu page.

Sort Item

This setting basically changes the order of your ‘My Menu’ selected function.

Delete Item

Deletes functions in your ‘My Menu’.

Delete Page

Deletes entire pages of your ‘My Menu’ selection.

Delete All

Deletes all previously added functions of your ‘My Menu’.

Dealing with specific focussing scenarios

When shooting typical moving subjects using the α7rm3 (ILCE-7rm3), the following settings are recommended by default.

Recommended default settings
Focus Mode	AF-C	Focus mode dial
Focus Area *	Flexible Spot: M	[] 4 / 13 (AF1)
Priority Set in AF-C	Balanced Emphasis	[] 4 / 13 (AF1)
AF Track Sens *	3 (Standard)	[] 5 / 13 (AF2)
Swt. V/H AF Area	AF Point Only	[] 4 / 13 (AF1)

* Recommended settings differ depending on the subject.

Focus Mode: AF-C

When set to the AF-C (Continuous AF) mode, the camera continues to focus while the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down.

Focus Area: Flexible Spot M

When set to the Flexible Spot , the camera allows you to move the focusing frame to the desired point on the screen and focus on a small subject in a narrow area. The size of the focusing frame can be selected. The medium size M is recommended for general use.
Other settings
 Wide: Automatically focuses on a subject across the entire screen.
 Zone: After the user selects a focus zone on the monitor, the camera will automatically select the focus points.
 Center: Focuses automatically on the subject in the center of the image.
 Expand Flexible Spot: If the camera cannot focus on a single selected point, it flexibly uses focus points around the spot as a secondary priority area for focusing.

Priority Set in AF-C: Balanced Emphasis

Regarding whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus, shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.

AF Track Sens: 3 (Standard)

When set to 5 (Responsive), the camera focuses responsively on subjects at different distances.

When set to 1 (Locked on), the camera keeps the focus on a specific subject even when other objects pass in front of the subject.

Standard 3 is recommended for general use.

Difference between [1 (Locked on)] when using AF tracking sensitivity and [Lock-on AF]

[1 (Locked on)] is one of the settings in AF Track Sens (AF tracking sensitivity). In this setting, the camera keeps the focus on a specific subject when other objects pass in front of the subject.

On the other hand, the [Lock-on AF] and [Center Lock-on AF] functions on this camera allow the camera to shift the focusing frame in accordance with the subject’s movement.

Although these names are similar, their functions are different. Please be sure to distinguish between them

Swt. V/H AF Area: AF Point only

Switches the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera (horizontal/vertical). The [Focus Area] is fixed.
Other settings
Off: Does not switch the [Focus Area] or the position of the focusing frame based on the orientation of the camera (horizontal/vertical).
AF Point AF Area: Switches both the [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame based on the orientation of the camera (horizontal/vertical).

Recommended autofocus settings chart for each subject

Ball games
Athletics / Track and field
Winter sports
Motorsports
Other sports
Non-sport categories

Ball games
Subject	Focus Mode	Focus Area		Priority Set in AF-C	AF Track Sens	Swt. V/H AF Area
Subject	Focus Mode	1st recommendation	2nd recommendation	Priority Set in AF-C	AF Track Sens	Swt. V/H AF Area
Soccer, Football, Futsal	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	4	AF Point Only
Basketball	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Rugby	AF-C	Expand Flexible Spot	Flexible Spot M	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
American football	AF-C	Expand Flexible Spot	Flexible Spot M	Balanced Emphasis	2	AF Point Only
Handball	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	4	AF Point Only
Tennis	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Volleyball	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only

Athletics / Track and field
Subject	Focus Mode	Focus Area		Priority Set in AF-C	AF Track Sens	Swt. V/H AF Area
Subject	Focus Mode	1st recommendation	2nd recommendation	Priority Set in AF-C	AF Track Sens	Swt. V/H AF Area
Sprints (100 m~), Hurdles	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Javelin, Shot put	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Long jump, Triple jump	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
High jump, Pole vault	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Marathon	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only

Winter sports
Subject	Focus Mode	Focus Area		Priority Set in AF-C	AF Track Sens	Swt. V/H AF Area
Subject	Focus Mode	1st recommendation	2nd recommendation	Priority Set in AF-C	AF Track Sens	Swt. V/H AF Area
Alpine skiing (near a gate, jump)	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Mogul	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Snowboarding (Halfpipe, Slalom)	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Ski jumping (front, side)	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Biathlon	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Short-track speed skating	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Speed skating	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Zone	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Figure skating (Singles, Pairs)	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Zone	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Ice hockey	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	4	AF Point Only
Curling	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	2	AF Point Only
Bobsleigh	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only

Motor sports
Subject	Focus Mode	Focus Area		Priority Set in AF-C	AF Track Sens	Swt. V/H AF Area
Subject	Focus Mode	1st recommendation	2nd recommendation	Priority Set in AF-C	AF Track Sens	Swt. V/H AF Area
Car racing, Karting	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Motorcycling (on-road)	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Motocross	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Wide	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only

Other sports
Subject	Focus Mode	Focus Area		Priority Set in AF-C	AF Track Sens	Swt. V/H AF Area
Subject	Focus Mode	1st recommendation	2nd recommendation	Priority Set in AF-C	AF Track Sens	Swt. V/H AF Area
Swimming	AF-C	Expand Flexible Spot	Flexible Spot M	Balanced Emphasis	1 (Locked on) to 2	AF Point Only
Cycle race	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Archery	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Canoeing	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	2	AF Point Only
Judo, Kendo	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Horseracing	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Equestrian events	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	2	AF Point Only
Speedboat racing	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Sepak takraw	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only

Non-sport categories
Subject	Focus Mode	Focus Area		Priority Set in AF-C	AF Track Sens	Swt. V/H AF Area
Subject	Focus Mode	1st recommendation	2nd recommendation	Priority Set in AF-C	AF Track Sens	Swt. V/H AF Area
Trains and other railed vehicles	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Airplanes, Air shows	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Zone	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Wild birds	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Wild animals	AF-C	Expand Flexible Spot	Flexible Spot M	Balanced Emphasis	2	AF Point Only

Star eater issue solution

All Sony A7 and A9 series cameras have an issue with long exposures that specifically impacts those of us who enjoy starscape photography.

This type of photography, where you attempt to capture the night sky, typically involves exposures longer than 4 seconds where Sony’s in-body RAW cooking adds a type off noise reduction to your image. Bas

As a result, the smallest stars in the sky might turn out less bright or even disappear because your camera believes it to be noise.

The following technique won’t work for bulb exposure (longer than 30 seconds), but will get you better results between 30 seconds and 4 seconds (where the noise reduction automatically kicks in. It’s a bit counter intuitive, but setting your camera to continuous high or low drive mode will ensure that this excessive noise reduction won’t be triggered. The only downside is that , since you’re in continuous drive mode, the camera will only save your images as a 12 bit file (instead of 14 bit when in single). This may impact the dynamic range of your image, and add some noise off course.

Other general settings tips

Back Button focus

I personally don’t like back button focus, but you might. This is disengaging the shutter button from autofocus functionality. Instead this is assigned to a button (most of the time the AF ON button on the back). It’s correctly configured by default, but we do need to adjust the “Shutter Release” button so that it too no longer controls your autofocus system. To do this, jump into the Red Camera Menu and go to Page 6. Adjust “AF w/ shutter” to “Off”.

Minimum shutter speed with auto ISO

A very important tweak can be found in the Exposure Menu ( red camera icon, page 9 of 14). It’s called ISO Auto minimum shutter speed and allows you to have the ability to set the minimum shutter speed you are willing to let your camera shoot at before the Auto ISO feature engages. This can be very handy for street photographers who have to deal with ever changing lighting situations. By setting your ISO AUTO Min. SS to 1/250 second, you are telling your camera that if your shutter speed doesn’t drop below 1/250h of a second, your ISO should stay at base ISO (for maximum quality). If light changes and it becomes darker suddenly, the camera will raise the ISO to maintain that minimum shutter speed.

Not just street photographers but also bird and action photographers (set to 1/1000 or 1/2000 second to freeze motion) can use this feature to make sure that their images are not impacted by loss of sharpness due to movement of your subject. Take a look at the table above for general settings first!

Using grid lines to improve your compositions

Using grid lines is a great way to improve your compositions. You can select Rule of 3rds, Square Grid or Diagonal Square Grid. The first is ideal for landscapes, you can try the latter two if you are a portrait photographer and check if it helps you to both keep things level and get a more dynamic image.

Grid line settings can be found in the purple camera icon menu (Display/Auto Review 1), page 6 of 9. It’s also available for movie mode.

Manual focussing aides

If you often shoot manual lenses, or prefer switching to manual focus, there are two important focusing aides that you should be aware of. These are focus magnification and focus peaking.

Focus magnification is quite straightforward, when MF (or DMF) is selected, your camera will magnify x1 or x7.8 a selectable portion of your image so you can more clearly view where your focus lies. You can move this selection by simply moving the joystick.

Focus Peaking works alongside focus magnification or separately, as you choose. I use both at the same time. As you turn the MF ring on your lens, you’ll see a color ‘noise’ over your image as things become sharp, making it easy to know when you are close to perfect focus. For the best results, set:

peaking display: ON
Peaking Level: Mid
Peaking Color: Red

Both these functions can be found in the camera settings (red camera icon) page 13 of 14.

Formatting and preventing loss of data

Accidentally formatting your SD card in the A7riii will result in a total loss of all data. Nothing will be coverable due to the fact that Sony decided to go for a full format (overwriting with zeros) when formatting. This is why, for important shoots (and certainly when you’re new to the camera) I recommend setting the camera up so that anything that is captured to Card 1 automatically gets copied to Card 2.

You’ll need to go to Rec. Media Settings in thze Setup menu (briefcase) page 6 of 7. You’ll need to set it to Simult. (picture) to do this.

Hybrid Log Gamma

The a7R III can capture Hybrid Log Gamma footage, both for video and stills. This is a broadcast standard designed to display high dynamic range content. Sony cameras have the tendency to slightly underexpose, but HLG Mode can give you perfect Raw exposure by using a method called ETTR (Expose To The Right). It saves you from underexposing unnecessarily (thereby supplying the sensor with as much light as it can tolerate), and reduces the degree to which you’ll need to pull shadows or boost exposure in post. In other words, your resulting image will contain less noise after processing.

Procedure:

Set one of your Picture Profiles to use ‘HLG’ for the gamma setting,
enable Zebra highlight warnings and set the Zebra level to 100+.
Increase your exposure until the moment you first see Zebra warnings.

These settings, where you first see a hint of Zebra warnings, is your optimal Raw file exposure. It will be the brightest possible, but counterintuitively (since you’re seeing the warnings), all highlights you want to capture won’t be clipped.

Using Sony AF Area registration to switch from spot to 9 point group focus (like Nikon)

One of the coolest things that Nikon cameras do is allow you to instantly switch from spot to 9 point group focus with your middle finger on your right hand. I miss that with Sony. I found this trick on how to do the same thing with the A7rm3 with any two focus area settings.

Register a focus area and switch between 2 focus areas using a custom button:

Go to the AF3 Menu and enable ‘AF Area Regist.”. This allows you to register a focus area by long press,g the Fn button in the shooting screen. The registered focus area can be recalled with the custom key.

2. In the normal shooting screen, the Lock-on AF (Expand Flexible spot) is great for moving subjects, but when the movement becomes too erratic, I like to switch to Lock-on AF Wide. This is the one we are going to register as ‘AF Area regist.’.

3. Now long press the FN key until you see on the screen that the camera has ‘registered the focus area’.

4. Now we need to recall this function with the single touch of a custom button. We have to go to Custom operation 1 page 8/9 in order to set up the Custom Key(Shoot.) Menu to do this. We’ll assign this to the ‘Custom Button 3’ but you can of course choose another button.

We have 2 options here: we can hold the custom button to recall that registered focus area or simple press this custom button once to toggle between the two AF areas. The latter works best for me, but you might feel different.

5. Now if you press your preferred custom button, you’ll immediately go to ‘Lock On: AF Wide’. Press this button again and you go back to ‘expand flexible spot.

This method allows us to quickly cycle between any two AF areas using the registered focus area and assigning a custom button the toggle between the two!

October 27, 2017

Sony RX10 IV settings, tips and tricks

Introduction

Welcome to my Sony RX10 IV advanced manual with tips and tricks. This guide starts from your Menu settings and goes through all aspects of this interesting camera. I know it is a lot of information, but you’ll get the hang of it soon, I promise.

Compared to the older RX10 III, the new mark four is mainly faster thanks to a newly developed Bionz X processor. It can shoot at 24 fps with AF and AE and can shoot for up to 249 JPEG images (112 Raw). Its 0.03 sec AF-lock speed is extremely fast. It’s also is the first in the series to include a touchscreen.

A few things have remained the same, like the 24-600mm lens, but it’s the first RX10 camera to include on-sensor phase detection, with 315 AF points covering 65% of the frame (slightly over 80% in each direction). It’s also the first Cyber-shot to include Sony’s “High Density” AF Tracking system, from the a9, and the company says that they have improved Eye AF.

It also gains the option to make one of the customizable buttons act as AF-On, to let you start AF and fire the shutter independently.

Naturally the lens has optical image stabilization built-in, rated at 4.5 stops of shake reduction. A focus range limiter switch has been added to the side of the Mark IV’s lens, with a choice of ‘All’ or 3m-infinity.
Since the Sony RX10 IV has the same menu layout as recently released Sony Alpha cameras, you’ll quickly find your way around if you already own one of those.

I’ll be going over the entire Menu structure in this post, and giving you tips, pointers, and tricks along the way.

Are you looking for an advanced manual with tips and tricks on older models? You can find those posts here:

Sony RX10

Sony RX10 II

Sony RX10 III

Diving into the Sony RX10 IV MENU system

When you switch on your Sony RX10 IV you’ll be asked to enter a date, time and time zone. This setting is necessary, as all images captured will have a timestamp, making it easy to find your favorite pictures.
After this is set up, press the MENU button. You’ll see a range of icons and pages.
We’ll start at page 1 of the camera Icon (camera settings)

MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 1 (Quality and Image Size settings)

Quality:

Image size:

The larger the image size, the more detail will be reproduced when the image is printed on large-format paper. The smaller the image size, the more images can be recorded.

Image size when the aspect ratio is 3:2:

L: 20M 5472×3648 pixels
M: 10M 3888×2592 pixels
S: 5.0M 2736×1824 pixels

Image size when the aspect ratio is 4:3:

L: 18M 4864×3648 pixels
M: 10M 3648×2736 pixels
S: 5.0M 2592×1944 pixels VGA 640×480 pixels

Image size when Aspect Ratio is 16:9

L: 17M 5472×3080 pixels
M: 7.5M 3648×2056 pixels
S: 4.2M 2720×1528 pixels

Image size when Aspect Ratio is 1:1

L: 13M 3648×3648 pixels
M: 6.5M 2544×2544 pixels
S: 3.7M 1920×1920 pixels

Note that when Quality is set to RAW or RAW & JPEG, the image size for RAW images is automatically set to L for optimal quality.

If SD card space is an issue, you can set it to Small.

Aspect ratio:

You can choose 3:2 (which uses the full sensor surface), 4:3, 1:1 or 16:9 (crop but a more broad view). Leave as is at 3:2, you can always crop your pictures later.

Panorama Size:

(when in panorama shooting mode) Size is selectable between standard and wide. Wide means your picture will cover a larger area. Set it to standard, having to scan an even broader area when making panoramas will take some experience with the camera to do efficiently.

Panorama direction

A panorama picture (only available in jpeg) is a composite of several images stitched together. When in this mode, you’ll see an arrow that guides you in what direction and speed you should pan the camera to take the sequential images that will be stitched together. You can choose the path in this menu (either, up, down, left or right).

Long Exposure NR

MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 2 (more Quality and Image Size settings)

High ISO NR

Color Space

MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 3 (Shooting modes and Autofocus Drive settings)

Auto Mode

Switch the auto mode between Intelligent Auto and Superior Auto.

Intelligent Auto:

This mode automatically detects the type of scene you’re shooting and adjusts the scene automatically. You’ll see the icon for the recognized scene appears on the top right hand of the screen.

These scenes are the same ones which can be selected individually in SCENE mode.

The Sony RX10 IV will also use the most appropriate FOCUS AREA, and ISO value (the ISO range cannot be changed in iAuto though).

Drive Mode (single shooting, continuous shooting Lo-Mid-Hi), Self-timer and Self-timer cont (multiple images with the self-timer) can be changed by using the Fn button.

Works for both RAW and JPEG shooting.

Disadvantage: ISO range is fixed to 50-6400 (you can’t change the range).

Superior Auto:

Superior Auto is similar to iAuto, as it also detects scenes automatically, except it uses more complex processing.

This includes composite layering (layering different shots on top of each other for HDR style pictures) and automatically choosing what it thinks is the best image.

Disadvantage: ISO range is (like in iAuto) fixed and only usable for jpeg shooting.

Scene Selection

This is more easily controlled via the right thumb wheel when you’re in SCN mode, but you can also select the presets for different scenes (like sports or portrait) from here.

Drive Mode

Do you want to take a single picture when you press the shutter button or multiple images? You can select this here, as well as self-timer functions and bracketing.

Bracketing is taking a series of pictures, each with different settings, useful for combining your images with various exposures for HDR effects in software afterward, to name just one example.

You can also press the dedicated drive mode button to get to these settings.

Single Shooting: Normal shooting mode.
Cont. Shooting: Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.
Self-timer: Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.
Self-timer(Cont): Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.
Cont. Bracket: Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of brightness.
Single Bracket: Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different degree of brightness.
WB bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings for white balance, color temperature, and color filter.
DRO Bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.

Bracket Settings

You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.

Selftimer during Brkt: Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released if using the self-timer. (OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
Bracket order: Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.

Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 4 (more Shooting Mode and Autofocus Drive settings)

Reg Cust Shoot Set

You can save the following settings:

Shoot Mode (Like program Auto)
Aperture
Shutter Speed
Drive Mode
Exposure compensation
ISO (like Auto or a single ISO value)
Metering Mode
Focus Mode
Focus Area
AF On

MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 5 (Autofocus settings)

Focus area

features a Fast Hybrid AF system that combines the respective advantages of 315 phase–detection AF points covering approximately 65% of the sensor and contrast–detection AF to ultimately enable the camera to lock focus in as little as 0.03 seconds. You might think it is best to leave it on the wide factory setting (as this uses all AF points), but for certain scenes, it is often better to flexible spot to get it to focus on what you want.

Wide: Wide focus area uses all focus points on the sensor. Ideal for action scenes where there is a lot of movement going on in your frame.
Center: Focusses on whatever is centered in your images. A fail-proof way of getting the camera to focus on what you want. If you have any problems using the autofocus and are in a situation where you don’t want to miss any shots, revert to Center and just make sure you have your subject centered.
Flexible spot: Allows you to move the focusing frame to a desired point on the touch screen and focus on an extremely small subject in a narrow area. If you want to use this focus area, set it to medium or large, as the camera will struggle to find focus when setting to small (except perhaps for close-up portraits where you’d want to focus on the iris of the eye)
Expand Flexible spot: If the camera can’t focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the flexible spot as a secondary priority area for focusing.
Lock-on AF: When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the camera tracks the subject within the selected autofocus area. This setting is available only when the focus mode is set to Continuous AF. Point the cursor to ‘Lock-on AF’ on the Focus Area setting screen, and then adjust the desired area to start tracking by pressing the multi-selector left/right. You can also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a flexible spot or expand flexible spot.

Tip: You can move the focus area in Flexible Spot or Expand Flexible Spot by touching the screen.

Swt. V/H AF Area

Off: disable this feature

AF Point Only: If you switch to portrait mode, the RX10 IV will automatically move the AF point in use up to align with your subject.

AF Point AF Area: If you switch to portrait mode, the RX will automatically move the AF point and AF area in use up.

AF illuminator

Center Lock-on AF

This is a very powerful autofocus feature. When turned ON, it allows you to track a subject. In the iAuto mode, you can access this feature (when turned ON and the Sony RX10 IV is set to AF) by pressing the Center button of the multi-controller. You’ll see a square on your screen, then center your desired tracking subject and the camera will continue to track it, even when it exits your frame and reappears.

AF with shutter

Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Leave ON.

Pre-AF

Select if the Sony RX1O IV will automatically adjust focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.

MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 6 (more Autofocus settings)

AF Area Regist.

Del. Reg. AF Area

Deletes the registered AF area in AF Area Regist.

AF Area Auto Clear:

Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically shortly after focus is achieved.

Disp. cont. AF Area

You can set whether or not to display the focus area that is in focus when Focus Area is set to Wide and Focus Mode is set to Continuous AF.

Phase Detect Area:

Use only the phase detection points.

MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 7 (Exposure Settings)

Exposure Comp

(Also available in the Quick Menu, accessed by pressing the FN button):

Reset EV Comp

Sets whether to maintain the exposure value set using Custom Settings when you turn off the power when the exposure compensation dial position is set to 0.

ISO

You can select at which ISO value you’d like to capture your image or change the Auto ISO range.

I have this range set between 100-1600 as this range is virtually noise-free, and I don’t like the ISO performance above 1600. In a pinch, when you’re getting blurred images due to a too long shutter speed at low ISO, you can experiment with higher ISO settings. It’s better to get a sharp but noisy image than a blurred one….

Iso Auto Min SS.

You have three possibilities here:

FASTER (Faster)/FAST (Fast): The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds faster than the Standard (normal). This will help you prevent getting blurred images when shooting action or sports. This at the cost of raising the ISO and noise in your images. Remember this is linked to your Auto ISO settings, so it won’t go any higher than your upper limit, even if the camera is capable of doing so.
STD (Standard): The camera automatically sets the shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens.
SLOW (Slow)/SLOWER (Slower): The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds slower than the Standard setting. This enables you to shoot images with less noise. Never to be used if you want to shoot action, but can be useful if you are a landscape or architecture photographer who likes to walk around without a tripod yet takes some time to frame and shoot images carefully.
1/8000 ― 30″: The ISO sensitivity starts to change at the shutter speed you have set.

Metering Mode

Metering mode refers to the way the camera reads the light and sets the exposure.

In multi, it considers the whole frame and sets exposure according to internal algorithms programmed in camera.

In spot or center, the camera only considers what is in that spot or the center (per example, if your subject is completely black, the camera will try to compensate by overexposing the image).

Multi: Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
Center: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-weighted metering).
Spot: Measures only the central area (Spot metering). This mode is suitable for measuring light on a specified part of the entire screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from [Spot: Standard] and [Spot: Large]. The position of the metering circle depends on the setting for [Spot Metering Point].
Entire Screen Avg.: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the position of the subject changes.
Highlight: Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the subject while avoiding overexposure.

Spot Metering Point

Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus area when Focus Area is set to Flexible Spot or Expand Flexible Spot.

Center: The spot metering position does not coordinate with the focus area, but always meters brightness at the center.
Focus Point Link: The spot metering position coordinates with the focus area.

MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 8 (more Exposure settings)

AEL w shutter

Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Select Off to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.

Auto (default setting): Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF.
On: Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off: Does not adjust the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to change focus and exposure separately.

The camera keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in Cont. Shooting or Spd Priority Cont. mode. Operation using the AEL button is prioritized over the AEL w/ shutter settings.

Exposure Std. Adjust

Adjusts this camera’s standard for the correct exposure value for each metering mode. You can set a value from -1 EV to 1 EV in 1/6 EV increments.

MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 9 (Flash settings)

If you’re interested in flash photography, you’ll need to purchase a hot shoe flash. I would suggest a Godox, as these can both use HSS and TTL, and are quite cheap. (Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button

fill flash: A fill flash is useful even in daylight to fill the shadows with light (like a person in the shade).

Slow sync: Tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed along with a flash, and thus is better for night shots. In manual and shutter priority modes, there is no difference in flash power. But when using aperture priority, program, or auto, choosing slow sync tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed than it would ordinarily pick.What the slow sync flash mode does is a first fire the flash for the subject exposure, then allow for a longer shutter speed that will allow for more ambient light to be captured by the sensor.

Rear Sync: Capturing an image involves two shutter actions: one when the capture starts and on when it stops. Rear Sync tells the flash to fire right before the shutter closes. Moving objects will show a streak where they came from and a sharp image where they were at the end of the exposure. This conveys a sense of speed with moving objects. Rear Sync is a creative technique, if you’d like to know more about this type of photography, I’d suggest doing a Google search on ‘Rear Sync Flash Photography.’
Wireless: Select wireless is if want to use the in-camera flash to trigger an external flash like the Sony HVL-43M (with TTL!). Using an external flash is helpful when shooting weddings and dimly-lit subject matter, You can use your main flash to light the subject, and your external flash to light the background.

Flash comp or Flash compensation:

Exp comp set

Red Eye Reduction:

This anti-Red Eye setting quickly fires the flash before your image capture starts, reducing the red-eye effect often seen when using a flash.

MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 10 (Color, White Ballance and Image Processing settings)

White Balance

Priority Set in AWB

Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when White Balance is set to Auto.

Standard: Shoots with standard auto white balance. The camera automatically adjusts the color tones.
Ambience: Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.
White: Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.

DRO/Auto HDR

DRO:

Auto HDR:

The highlight detail in auto HDR is better than that in DRO and with reduced noise. The shutter is released three times, so using this function for moving subjects is not recommended.

Creative Style

The Sony creative styles can best be explained as being film emulations (the same way as do some other camera manufacturers implements this). There is a range of styles available from vivid colour to black and white. If you’re shooting RAW, these styles are embedded, but can always be zeroed after importing them to you RAW editor of choice. Jpegs are saved with this styling applied. It is always useful to try some of these, and can be a real boost for your creativity, as you will notice that you make different images in say black-and-white as opposed to colour.

Standard: For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
Vivid: The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers, spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
Neutral: The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also suitable for capturing image material to be modified with a computer.
Clear: For shooting images in clear tones with limpid colors in highlight, suitable for capturing radiant light.
Deep: For shooting images with deep and dense colors, suitable for capturing the solid presence of the subject.
Light: For shooting images with bright and simple colors, suitable for capturing a refreshingly light ambience.
Portrait: For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
Landscape: The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also stand out more. Sunset: For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
Night Scene: The contrast is lowered for reproducing night scenes.
Autumn leaves: For shooting autumn scenes, vividly highlighting the reds and yellows of changing leaves.
Black & White: For shooting images in black and white monotone.
Sepia: For shooting images in sepia monotone.

You can edit these different styles and save your own creative style if you want.

This functionality can be changed:

Contrast: The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on the image.
Saturation: The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is restrained and subdued.
Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value selected, the more the contours are softened.

Picture Effect

Think of this menu as an Instagram app right in your camera, with all kinds of retro filters and effects. These are only available when quality is set to Jpeg (Not in RAW).

Off: Disables the [Picture Effect] function.
Toy Camera: Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
Pop Color: Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
Posterization: Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.
Retro Photo: Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
Soft High-key: Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
Partial Color: Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
High Contrast Mono.: Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
Rich-tone Mono.: Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.

Picture Profile

Allows you to change the settings for the color, gradation, etc.

The basic contrast and coloring are defined by the combination of [Gamma] (gamma curve) and [Color Mode] (color characteristics) settings.

Gamma:

- Movie: Standard gamma curve for video.
- Still: Standard gamma curve for still images.
- Cine1: Softens the contrast in darker image areas and emphasizes gradation changes in lighter image areas, producing a subdued tone overall (equivalent to HG4609G33) Gamma curve that obtains a dynamic range of 460% when the exposure is adjusted to 33% video output with 18% reflectance gray. The maximum value of video output is 109%. Images shot with this gamma can be used without grading, but since the images have smooth gradation characteristics, this can be used to grade and finalize the viewed image in the post-production process.
- Cine2: Similar results to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal (equivalent to HG4600G30)
  Gamma curve that obtains a dynamic range of 460% when the exposure is adjusted to 30% video output with 18% reflectance gray. The maximum value of video output is 100%.
- Cine3: Stronger contrast between dark and light image areas and greater emphasis on black gradation changes (compared to [Cine1] and [Cine2])
- Cine4: Stronger contrast than [Cine3] in darker image areas.
- ITU709 ITU709 gamma curve (low-light gain of 4.5).
- ITU709: (800%) Gamma curve for checking scenes recorded using [S-Log2] or [S-Log3].
- S-Log2 [S-Log2] gamma curve. This setting is selected when some grading work will be performed after recording. The exposure is set so that 18% reflectance gray video is output as 32%. Under these conditions, a dynamic range of 1,300% is obtained with 90% reflectance white. The maximum value of video output is 106%.
- S-Log3: [S-Log3] gamma curve with characteristics closer to those of film. This setting is selected when some grading work will be performed after recording. It allows for better reproduction of gradations in shadows and the mid-tone range than S-Log2. The exposure is set so that 18% reflectance gray video is output as 41%. Under these conditions, a dynamic range of 1,300% is obtained with 90% reflectance white. As a characteristic of S-Log3, the dynamic range can be extended above 1,300%. However, Picture Profile is set to a dynamic range of 1,300% in order to maintain a balance with camera performance. Under these conditions, the maximum value of video output is 94%.

Color Mode:

- Movie Color tones for [Movie] gamma curve (standard color reproduction for movies when Picture Profile is not used)
- Still Color tones for [Still] gamma curve (standard color reproduction for still images when Picture Profile is not used)
- Cinema Color tones for [Cine1] and [Cine2] gamma curve
- Pro Color tones similar to standard Sony broadcast camera image quality (used in combination with [ITU709] gamma curve)
- ITU709 Matrix ITU709 color tones (used in combination with [ITU709] gamma curve)
- Black & White Sets the saturation to 0 for recording in black and white
  S-Gamut Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log2].
- S-Gamut3.Cine Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log3].
- This setting is easier to use than [S-Gamut3], because it limits the color space to a more practical range than that of [S-Gamut3]. It is recommended in cases where [S-Gamut3], a wide color space, is not required.
- S-Gammut3 Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log3].
  This setting has a wider color space than that of [S-Gamut3.Cine]. It is suited for converting images to a format with a wide color space like BT.2020.
  Depending on the type of camera, the entire [S-Gamut3] color space may not be supported.

Black Level:

This function adjusts the black level of the image -15 to 15. As an image effect, you can emphasize the color black to create an image that gives a powerful impression, or you can weaken black to give the image a soft impression.

Shifting Black Level in the minus direction emphasizes the black color in the image, while changing the level in the plus direction weakens the black color.

If you want to simulate an old film, or capture winter morning fog, the black level value should be increased. If you decrease the value, gradations in dark areas will be smoothed out, making the areas appear in crisp black. When using multiple fixed cameras to shoot the same subject from different angles, the balance between subject and background often varies. This balance variation may cause the black color in the subject to appear different when cameras are switched. However, this is an optical illusion. If it occurs, you can correct it by adjusting Black Level to make the black color look the same.

When using multiple fixed cameras to shoot the same subject from different angles, the balance between subject and background often varies.

This balance variation may cause the black color in the subject to appear different when cameras are switched. However, this is an optical illusion. If it occurs, you can correct it by adjusting Black Level to make the black color look the same.

Black Gamma:

This function lets you alter the shape of the selected gamma curve and adjust gradations in dark image areas. Range available between Wide, Middle or Narrow. Leven between -7 and 7.

[Range] controls the luminance range that Black Gamma influences. The [Narrow] setting keeps the range close to black, while the [Wide] setting extends the range to gray. [Range] should be set narrower when you want to control the quality of dark areas. If you want to adjust the overall image tone, [Range] should be set wider. At first, it may be a good idea to start from the [Narrow] setting.

Increasing the [Level] value brightens the image, whereas decreasing the value makes the image darker. For example, if you set [Range] to [Narrow] and decrease the [Level] value, you can create an image with dark areas that are similar to the ones seen in films. Unlike Black Level, Black Gamma Level adjusts luminance subtly.

Knee:

This function sets the knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting signals in high-intensity areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your camera.

First, select whether to set the knee point and slope automatically or manually in [Mode], and then adjust each setting.

Knee > Mode: Auto / Manual
Knee > Auto Set > Max Point: 90% to 100%
Knee > Auto Set > Sensitivity: High / Mid / Low
Knee > Manual Set > Point: 75% to 105%
Knee > Manual Set > Slope: –5 to 5

Mode:

Auto:

Automatically adjusts the knee based on what is selected in the following settings (when [Movie] or [ITU709] is selected in [Gamma]).

[Max Point] determines the maximum knee point level (white level). The knee slope is automatically adjusted according to the Max Point setting. The standard is to keep it at 100%. A lower setting will turn white grayish, while a higher setting will discard gradations in high luminance areas.
[Sensitivity] changes the luminance level at which the knee’s automatic adjustment starts. When set to [High], the knee’s automatic adjustment starts at lower input signal levels than normal. When set to [Low], the knee’s automatic adjustment starts at higher input signal levels than normal.
When a parameter other than [Movie] or [ITU709] is selected in [Gamma], the gamma curve will not exceed the White clip point and over-exposure rarely occurs. When [Mode] is set to [Auto] with these settings, the Knee function is disabled. If you want to enable the Knee function, set [Mode] to [Manual].

Manual:

Sticks to settings based on the following selections.

[Point] sets the position of the knee point output level.
[Slope] determines the inclination of the knee slope.
A negative slope setting results in a gentler knee slope angle. This expands the dynamic range, but reduces the ability to produce rich gradations. A positive slope setting makes the knee slope inclination steeper. This shrinks the dynamic range, but bolsters the ability to express gradations. When [Slope] is set to 5, the Knee function is disabled.
Set [Point] and [Slope] in [Manual Set] in combination. If you select a higher setting for [Point] and a gentler setting for [Slope], you can obtain video-like sharp highlight effects. If softer film-like highlight effects are desired, select a lower setting for [Point] and a steeper setting for [Slope]. In practical terms, move [Point] and [Slope] up and down in opposite directions while checking the gradations in high luminance areas until you find the ideal settings.

Saturation

A positive value results in more vivid colors, while a negative value presents faded colors. Saturation must be adjusted in tandem with contrast. Bright and vivid settings produce video-like images, while dark and vivid settings result in film-like images. The combination of bright and light creates pastel tones, whereas dark and light settings create artistic finishes.

Color Phase

As you rotate the color wheel to the left (decreasing the set value) or to the right (increasing the set value), the colors shift along the spectrum from red to yellow, green, cyan, blue, magenta and red. Because this affects all colors, it is difficult to make specific adjustments exactly as intended. Use this function when matching coloring closely between different cameras.

Color Depth

This function adjusts the luminance for each color phase. The luminance changes more drastically when the selected color is richer (higher saturation). It does not change much at all when the color is achromatic.

A higher set value lowers luminance while deepening the color. A lower set value increases luminance, making the color look paler.
This setting does not only enhance the apparent vividness of colors, but also can express deep, dark colors.
Because each of the 6 colors — R (Red), G (Green), B (Blue), C (Cyan), M (Magenta), Y (Yellow) — can be adjusted individually, you can apply this function to just the colors you want to emphasize.

Emphasizing image edges (Detail)

This function adjusts how much detail is applied to the subject’s image edges.

Because settings other than [Level] are quite complex, we recommend you start by adjusting only the [Level] setting first.

Level

This function determines the strength of detail image processing to be applied.

If you apply too much detail, the subject’s original atmosphere may be undermined, as its translucence may be lost or it may be given an unnatural luster. Excessive detail when shooting shiny leaves, for instance, may result in the leaves looking as if they are made of plastic. It is also advisable to apply detail only modestly when shooting paintings.
Because Detail makes image edges wider, the original texture of a subject consisting of very fine lines may be lost if too much detail processing is applied. (Example: thin lace curtains)
Also, be aware that Detail may fatten up the edges of noise particles that appear under a high gain setting, and may make such particles highly noticeable. In such cases, you can adjust the amount of detail processing on the noise particles by using the [Crispening] function.
The image edges become more visible when viewed on large screens. It may be advisable to ease off on Detail if you plan to view the image on large TVs or screens.

MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 11 (more Color, White Ballance, and Image Processing settings)

MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 11

Soft Skin Effect

If you’re using this camera mainly for pics of friends and family, this is an excellent feature, as it will soften and smooth skin tones make you and your beloved ones look their best. (only available when quality is set to Jpeg)

MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 12 (Focus Assist settings)

Focus Magnifier

Focus Magnif. Time

You can set how long to hold the magnified area during MF assist. 2 sec, 5 seconds or no limit. 2 seconds is how I have it set up.

Initial Focus Mag.

Sets the initial magnification scale when using [Focus Magnifier]. Select a setting that will help you frame your shot.

MF assist

Peaking Level

- - - - Peaking Level is a manual focusing aid which works when you have your camera set to MF or DMF.
      - You’ll see a type of noise outlining the parts of your image where the focus lies, and you can adjust the sensitivity to high, mid or low.
      - Which setting is best depends on what lens you use, as with a sharper lens it can be configured to low, while more soft lenses benefit from a medium or high setting to clearly visualize what you’re focusing on.

Peaking Color

You can choose the color of this Peaking between Red, white and yellow. I have it set to red, as this contrasts nicely with most scenes you capture.

MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 13 (more Focus Assist settings)

Focus Ring Rotate

This option lets you choose which direction to rotate the lens ring that is assigned to adjust manual focus, turning either left or right to focus on more distant subjects. You can set this option according to what feels most natural to you.

MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 14 (Face Detection and Shoot Assist Settings)

Smile/Face Detect

This is another powerful feature. It can be set to detect automatically and focus on (registered) faces and enable a function called Smile Shutter. When the latter is enabled, the camera will automatically capture an image when a smile is detected. Did I hear you say Selfie? Yes, it’s the ultimate selfie tool, along with the pivoting screen.

Face Registration

If you register faces in advance, the product can detect the registered face as a priority when [Face Detection] is set to [On (Regist. Faces)]. Shoot the face from the front in a brightly lit place. The face may not be registered correctly if it is obscured by a hat, a mask, sunglasses, etc.

MENU – (Camera Settings1) – [Face Registration] – [New Registration].
Align the guide frame with the face to be registered, and press the shutter button.
When a confirmation message appears, select [Enter].

Auto Object Framing

When enabled, the Sony RX10 mark 4 will automatically crop your captured image to what it deems best. Meaning it will cut the picture for a nicer composition. Only available for Jpegs, though, a nice feature if you don’t want to bother too much with the technical side of photography.

MENU – Purple Camera Icon – page 1 (Movie settings 1)

Movie: Exposure Mode

You can set the exposure mode for movie shooting.

Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.

HFR (High Frame Rate): Exposure Mode

You can select the exposure mode for HFR shooting based on the subject and effect you want.

Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.

File format (for movies)

Selects the movie file format.

XAVC S 4K: Records high-definition movies in XAVC S 4K. This format supports a higher bit rate. Audio: LPCM
AXAVC S HD: (default setting):Records movies in crisper quality than AVCHD with larger amounts of data. Audio: LPCM
AVCHD:The AVCHD format has a high degree of compatibility with storage devices other than computers.

Note that when recording XAVC S format movies, you should use Class 10 or faster SDXC memory cards. At Least 64 GB.

Record Setting

You can choose the quality of recorded video here. You can change the image size, frame rate, and image quality for movie recording. The higher the bitrate, the higher the image quality. If you’re not familiar with this, leave as is.

Menu items details:

When File Format is set to XAVC S 4K:

30p 100M/25p 100M: Records the movies in 3840 × 2160 (30p/25p). Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps
30p 60M/25p 60M: Records the movies in 3840 × 2160 (30p/25p). Bit-rate: Approx. 60 Mbps
24p 100M: Records the movies in 3840 × 2160 (24p). This produces a cinema-like atmosphere. Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps
24p 60M: Records the movies in 3840 × 2160 (24p). This produces a cinema-like atmosphere. Bit-rate: Approx. 60 Mbps

When File Format is set to XAVC S HD:

60p 50M/50p 50M: Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (60p/50p). Bit-rate: Approx. 50 Mbps
30p 50M/25p 50M: Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (30p/25p). Bit-rate: Approx. 50 Mbps
24p 50M: Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (24p). This produces a cinema-like atmosphere. Bit-rate: Approx. 50 Mbps
120p 100M/100p 100M: Records 1920 × 1080 (120p/100p) size movies at a high speed. Movies can be recorded at 120 fps/100 fps. You can create smoother slow-motion images using compatible editing equipment. Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps
120p 60M/100p 60M: Records 1920 × 1080 (120p/100p) size movies at a high speed. Movies can be recorded at 120 fps/100 fps. You can create smoother slow-motion images using compatible editing equipment. Bit-rate: Approx. 60 Mbps

When File Format is set to AVCHD:

60i 24M(FX)*: 50i 24M(FX): Records high image quality movies of 1920 × 1080 (60i/50i). Bit-rate: Approx. 24 Mbps (Max.)
60i 17M(FH): 50i 17M(FH) (default setting): Records standard image quality movies of 1920 × 1080 (60i/50i). Bit-rate: Approx. 17 Mbps (Avg.)
60p 28M(PS)*:

General notes:

Movies recorded with the [60i 24M(FX)]/[50i 24M(FX)] as the [Record Setting] are converted by PlayMemories Home in order to create an AVCHD recording disc. You cannot create a disc in the original image quality. This conversion can take a long time. If you want to keep the original image quality, store your movies on a Blu-ray Disc.

[120p]/[100p] cannot be selected for the following settings.
- [Intelligent Auto]
- [Superior Auto]
- [Scene Selection]

HFR settings

By shooting with a higher frame rate than the recording format, you can record a smooth super-slow-motion movie.

Set the mode dial to High Frame Rate. The HFR setting screen will be displayed.
Select MENU- Camera Settings-HFR Settings and select the desired settings for Record Setting, Frame Rate, Priority Setting, and REC Timing. You can adjust the desired exposure mode by selecting MENU- camera Settings-High Frame Rate. You can set other shooting settings such as focus area, focus mode, and frame rate, and perform zooming on the HFR setting screen.
Press the in the center of the control wheel. The HFR shooting screen will be displayed. To change the settings, press in the center once again to switch to the HFR setting screen.
Press the MOVIE button. The camera will automatically start recording as soon as you finish shooting

Menu item details

HFR Record Setting: Selects the frame rate of the movie from 60p 50M/50p 50M, 30p 50M/25p 50M, and 24p 50M.
HFR Frame Rate: Selects the shooting frame rate from 240fps/250fps, 480fps/500fps, and 960fps/1000fps.
FFR Priority Setting: Select Quality Priority or Shoot Time Priority. If you select Shoot Time Priority, the recordable duration is longer than in Quality Priority mode.
HFR REC Timing: Selects whether to record a set amount of time after pressing the MOVIE button (Start Trigger), or to record for a set amount of time until you press the MOVIE button (End Trigger).

Frame rate

In super-slow-motion movie shooting, the camera shoots at a faster shutter speed than the number of shooting frames per second. For example, when [Frame Rate] is set to [960fps], the shutter speed per frame will be faster than approx. 1/1000 second in order to shoot 960 frames per second. To maintain this shutter speed, sufficient ambient light is necessary during shooting. If the ambient light is insufficient, the ISO sensitivity will become higher, resulting in more noise.

Shortest shooting distance

The image becomes out of focus when the subject is too close, such as during macro shooting. Shoot from the shortest shooting distance (from the front of the lens, approximately 3 cm (0.10 ft.) at the wide-angle end, approximately 72 cm (2.36 ft.) at the telephoto end, and approximately 140 cm (4.59 ft.) at a 35 mm-equivalent focal length of around 250 mm) or further.

Timing of recording

Depending on the [REC Timing] setting, the relationship between when you press the MOVIE button and the recorded section of the movie is as shown below.[Start Trigger]
Movie capturing (shooting) starts when the MOVIE button is pressed. When the MOVIE button is pressed again, or when the recordable duration of time has elapsed, movie capturing ends and the camera starts to record the captured movie to the memory card.

(A): The point when the MOVIE button is pressed
(B): Recorded section
(C): Recording to memory card in progress (You cannot start the next session of shooting.)[End Trigger]/[End Trigger Half]
Buffering (temporarily capturing a movie on the camera) starts once the shooting standby screen is displayed. When the captured data fills the buffering capacity, old data is overwritten sequentially. When you press the MOVIE button, the camera starts to record a movie of the set duration calculated retroactively from that point on the memory card.

With [End Trigger], a movie of the maximum possible duration is recorded. With [End Trigger Half], a movie of half the maximum possible duration is recorded. With [End Trigger Half], the time it takes to record to the memory card is also shorter than with [End Trigger].

End Trigger

End Trigger Half

(A): The point when the MOVIE button is pressed
(B): Recorded section
(C): Recording to memory card in progress (You cannot start the next session of shooting.)
(D): Buffering in progress

To redo shooting

You can cancel recording by selecting [Cancel] on the screen. However, the movie recorded up to the point you cancelled will be saved.

Playback speed

The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned [Frame Rate] and [Record Setting].

Frame Rate	Record Setting
Frame Rate	24p 50M*	30p 50M/25p 50M	60p 50M/50p 50M
240fps/250fps	10 times slower	8 times slower/10 times slower	4 times slower/5 times slower
480fps/500fps	20 times slower	16 times slower/20 times slower	8 times slower/10 times slower
960fps/1000fps	40 times slower	32 times slower/40 times slower	16 times slower/20 times slower

^*Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.

[Priority Setting] and shooting duration

Priority Setting	Frame Rate	Effective pixel number read out from image sensor	Shooting duration
Quality Priority	240fps/250fps	1824×1026	Approx. 4 seconds
	480fps/500fps	1824×616	Approx. 3 seconds
	960fps/1000fps	1244×420	Approx. 3 seconds
Shoot Time Priority	240fps/250fps	1824×616	Approx. 7 seconds
	480fps/500fps	1292×436	Approx. 7 seconds/Approx. 6 seconds
	960fps/1000fps	912×308	Approx. 6 seconds

Playback time

For example, if you shoot for approx. 4 seconds with [Record Setting] set to [24p 50M]*, [Frame Rate]set to [960fps], and [Priority Setting] set to [Shoot Time Priority], the playback speed will be 40 times slower and the playback time will be approx. 160 seconds (approx. 2 minutes and 40 seconds).

Quality Dual Rec

Selects the quality of still images to be shot while recording movies. (Extra Fine, Fine or Standard)

MENU – Purple Camera Icon – page 2 (Movie settings 2)

Img. Size (Dual Rec)

Selects the size of still images to be shot while recording movies.

L: 17M
M: 7.5M
S: 4.2M

Auto Dual Rec

Sets whether or not to automatically shoot still images when shooting movies. Shoots when impressive compositions, including people, are detected. This function may also record versions of the automatically shot images that have been trimmed into optimal compositions. When a trimmed image is recorded, both the image before trimming and the trimmed image will be recorded.

Off: Auto Dual Rec is not performed.
On: Shoot. Frequency Low/On: Shoot. Frequency Standard/On: Shoot. Frequency High: Auto Dual Rec is performed with the specified shooting frequency.

Proxy Setting

Sets whether to simultaneously record low-bit-rate proxy movies when recording XAVC S movies. Since proxy movies are small in file size, they are suitable for transferring to smartphones or uploading to websites. Note that you cannot playback Proxy movies on the camera screen.

Proxy movies are recorded in the XAVC S HD format (1280×720) at 9 Mbps. The frame rate of the proxy movie is the same as that of the original movie.

AF Drive Speed (movie)

You can switch focusing speed when using autofocus in movie mode.

Fast: Sets the AF drive speed to fast. This mode is suitable for shooting active scenes, such as sports.
Normal: Sets the AF drive speed to normal.
Slow: Sets the AF drive speed to slow. With this mode, the focus switches smoothly when the subject to be focused is changed.

AF Track Sens (movie)

You can set the AF sensitivity separately in movie mode.

Responsive: Sets the AF sensitivity to high. This mode is useful when recording movies in which the subject is moving quickly.
Standard: Sets the AF sensitivity to normal.
Locked on: Sets the AF sensitivity to low. You can shoot with a stable focus by ignoring the influence of anything in front of the subject.

Auto Slow Shut. (movie)

Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording dark scenes.

On: Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in dark locations.
Off: Does not use Auto Slow Shut. The recorded movie will be darker than when On is selected, but you can record movies with smoother motion and less object blur.

MENU – Purple Camera Icon – page 3 (Movie settings 3)

Audio Recording

Audio Rec Level

You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter.

Audio Level Display

Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen.

Don’t see the audio level display?

Check if Audio Recording]is set to Off.
Check if DISP (Display Setting) is set to No Disp. Info.
During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting, audio is automatically turned OFF.

Audio Out Timing

You can set echo cancellation during audio monitoring and prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio during HDMI output.

Live: Outputs audio without delay. Select this setting when the audio deviation is a problem during audio monitoring.
Lip Sync: Outputs audio and video in sync. Select this setting to prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio.

Wind Noise Reduction

This helps reduce noise from the wind during video recording.

Steadyshot (Movie)

Sets SteadyShot effect when shooting movies.

Intelligent Active: Provides a more powerful SteadyShot effect than Active.
Active: Provides a more powerful SteadyShot effect.
Standard: Reduces camera shake under stable movie shooting conditions.
Off: Does not use SteadyShot.

MENU – Purple Camera Icon – page 4 (Movie settings 4)

Marker Display (movie)

Select if you want guidelines (a grid) in movie mode. The markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder

Marker Settings (movie)

Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies. You can display several markers at the same time.

Center: Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen. [Off]/[On]
Aspect: Sets the aspect marker display. [Off]/[4:3]/[13:9]/[14:9]/[15:9]/[1.66:1]/[1.85:1]/[2.35:1]
Safety Zone: Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV. [Off]/[80%]/[90%]
Guideframe: Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.

Video Light Mode

Sets the illumination setting for the optional HVL-LBPC LED light.

Power Link: The video light turns on/off in sync with the ON/OFF operation of this camera.
REC Link: The video light turns on/off in sync with movie recording start/stop.
REC Link&STBY: The video light turns on when movie recording starts and dims when not recording (STBY).
Auto: The video light automatically turns on when it is dark.

Movie w/ shutter

You can map the movie recording function to the shutter button.

MENU – Purple Camera Icon – page 5 (Shutter and Steadyshot settings)

Shutter Type (still image)

You can set whether to shoot with a mechanical shutter or an electronic shutter.

Auto: The shutter type is automatically switched based on the shooting conditions and shutter speed.
Mechanical Shut.: Shoot with the mechanical shutter only.
Electronic Shut.: Shoot with the electronic shutter only.

Release without card

If set to Off, you won’t be able to engage the shutter when there is no SD card in the slot. This is a useful failsafe to prevent you from shooting images without the ability to save them.

SteadyShot

Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot function.For optimal sharpness, turn it off when using a tripod.

MENU – Purple Camera Icon – page 6 (Zoom lens settings)

Rng. of Zoom Assist

Selects how much to zoom out with the Zoom Assist function. Small, Medium or Large amounts are available.

Zoom Setting

Optical zoom only: Limits the zoom range to the optical zoom. You can use the Smart Zoom function if you set Image Size to M, S or VGA.
On:ClearImage Zoom: Select this setting to use Clear Image Zoom. Even if the zoom range exceeds the optical zoom, the product magnifies images within the range in which image quality does not deteriorate significantly.
On:Digital Zoom: When the zoom range of the Clear Image Zoom is exceeded, the product magnifies images to the largest scale. However, the image quality will deteriorate.

Zoom Speed

Sets the zoom speed of the camera’s zoom lever.o either normal or fast.

Zoom Ring Rotate

Assigns zoom in (T) or zoom out (W) functions to the rotational directions of the lens ring to which the zoom function has been assigned. For either righthanded or lefthanded people.

Zoom Func. on Ring

Sets the zoom functions when using the lens ring to change zoom scales.

Standard: Zooms in/out smoothly when you operate the zoom by turning the lens ring.
Quick: Zooms in/out to an angle of view corresponding to how far the lens ring has been rotated.
Step: Zooms in/out at certain angle steps when you operate the zoom by turning the lens ring.

MENU – Purple Camera Icon – page 7 (Display screen and Auto Review settings)

Disp button

Selects the functionality (what is shown) on the screen when you press the DISP button (on the control wheel). You can choose Graphic Display, all info, no disp info, and histogram.

Finder/Monitor

Zebra

Grid Line (stills)

Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.

Rule of 3rds Grid: Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.
Square Grid: Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is suitable to determine the quality of the composition when shooting landscape, close-up, or duplicated images.
Diag. Square Grid: Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.
Off: Does not display the grid line.

Exposure set guide

MENU – Purple Camera Icon – page 8 (more screen and Auto Review Settings)

Auto Review

MENU – Purple Camera Icon – page 9 (Customizable bottons and dial settings)

Custom Key(Shoot.)/Custom Key(PB)

You can assign the desired function to the desired key. Some functions are available only when they are assigned to a custom key. For example, if you assign [Eye AF] to [Center Button] for [Custom Key(Shoot.)], you can easily recall [Eye AF] simply by pressing the center of the multi-selector while shooting.

The keys that can be assigned functions are different for [Custom Key(Shoot.)] and [Custom Key(PB)].

You can assign the desired functions to the following keys. You can also assign a shooting function to the focus hold button on the lens. However, some lenses do not have a focus hold button.2 1.

Custom Button 1
Custom Button2
AF/MF Button/AEL Button
Fn/ Button
Control Wheel (Center Button/Down Button/Left Button/Right Button)
Custom Button 3

Function Menu Set.

You can assign the functions to be called up when you press the Fn (Function) button.

Lens Ring setup

You can zoom and focus more intuitively using the two lens rings (front and rear). Assigns the focus function or the zoom function to the front lens ring and rear lens ring.

Movie Button

Sets whether or not to activate the MOVIE (Movie) button. Either always or only when you’re in Movie mode.

Dial Lock

You can set whether the dials will be locked by pressing and holding the Fn (Function) button. You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again.

Lock: Locks the front and rear dials when you press and hold the Fn button.
Unlock: The front or rear dials are not locked, even if you press and hold the Fn (Function) button.

MENU – Purple Camera Icon – page 10 (other custom settings)

Audio Signals

Selects whether the product produces a sound or not, for example when the focus is achieved by pressing the shutter button halfway down.

Write Date (stills)

Sets whether to record a shooting date on the still image.

MENU – Network Settings – page 1

Send To Smartphone

- You can send one or several images directly to your wireless device (phone or tablet) by pressing this button.

- You can either decide to choose which images you want to transfer on the camera or the wireless device (via the Sony PlayMemories app, available for free in the apple or android store).

- You’ll have to connect the-the camera via Wifi first (it makes a Wifi access point), using the instruction on the A6300 screen.

- It works just like connecting to any other access point with your phone or tablet.

- You should do this as quickly as possible, just to get it out of the way.

When your phone has wirelessly connected to the camera once, and you’ve entered the password, it will remember this, and make it a lot faster to connect later.

Send to Computer

View On TV

If you have a Wifi-enabled TV, you can see pictures and slideshows directly from your camera through your home wireless network.

Ctrl w/ smartphone

By connecting the camera to a smartphone using Wi-Fi, you can control the camera and shoot images using the smartphone, and you can transfer images shot with the camera to the smartphone.

Connection Info. displays the QR code or SSID used to connect the camera to a smartphone.

Airplane Mode

Disables all wireless functionality, just like airplane mode does on your phone.

Wi-Fi Settings

So the camera apps from the Playmemories store can’t be used on the RX10 Mark 4. You can however remotely control your camera with the Playmemories app for iPhone or Android.

WPS Push

If your access point has the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this product easily by pushing the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button.

Access Point Set.

Disp MAC Address

Displays the MAC address of your Sony ILCE-7rm3.

SSID/PW Reset

MENU – Network Settings – page 1

Bluetooth Settings.

Another new feature only previously available in the A6500 and A9 is Bluetooth connectivity. It is possible to connect your camerato your smartphone in order to Geotag your images.

Bluetooth Settings controls the settings for connecting the camera to a smartphone via a Bluetooth connection. You need to pair the camera and smartphone before using the location information interlocking function. If you want to pair the camera and smartphone in order to use the location information interlocking function, refer to “Loc. Info. Link Set..”

Loc. Info. Link Set

To use the location information linking function of the camera, you need the PlayMemories Mobile application on your smartphone and transfer an image to your smartphone to test the connection

Procedure:

Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated. (Do not perform the Bluetooth pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen!!! In steps 2 to 7, the pairing operation is performed using the camera and the application PlayMemories Mobile. If you accidentally perform the pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen in step 1, cancel the pairing and then perform the pairing operation by following Steps 2 through 7 using the camera and the application PlayMemories Mobile.)
On the camera, select MENU – (Wireless) – [Bluetooth Settings] – [Bluetooth Function] – [On].
On the camera, select MENU – (Wireless) – [Bluetooth Settings] – [Pairing].
Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone and tap “Location Information Linkage.”
Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of PlayMemories Mobile.
Select [OK] when a message is displayed on the monitor of the camera. The pairing of the camera and PlayMemories Mobile is complete.
On the camera, select MENU – (Wireless) – [ Loc. Info. Link Set.] – [Location Info. Link] – [On].

(obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera. Location information obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded when shooting images.

Options in this Menu:

Location Info. Link: Sets whether to obtain the location information by linking with a smartphone.
Auto Time Correct.: Sets whether to automatically correct the date setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.
Auto Area Adjust.: Sets whether to automatically correct the area setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.

Edit Device name

If you wish, you can change the name of the Device Access point) perhaps to make it easier to identify which RX10 4 is yours in particular situations.

Reset Network set

Resets all network settings.

If something does not function properly, and you want to start from scratch, can be useful.

MENU – playback options – page 1

Delete

Delete one or multiple images stored on your SD card.

View Mode

select how the camera will arrange captured pictures in the viewing browser.

Image Index

Choose whether you want the image browser to display 12 (larger) or 30 (smaller) images per page.

Disp Cont Shoot Grp

Sets whether to display continuously shot images as a group. (you’ll see an image stack on your screen)

Display rotation

Select whether you want the camera to rotate images automatically when you rotate the camera or not.

Slide Show

Select whether you want the camera to repeat slideshows when all pictures are viewed or not, and choose the interval between slides.

MENU – playback options – page 2

Rotate

Change the orientation of images in-camera.

Enlarge Image

Select an image and expand a portion of that picture. Useful for checking details and focus.

Enlarge Init. Mag

Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images. Either standard or with the magnification used on the previous image.

Enlarge Initial Pos

Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback. Choose either the point of focus or the screen center. I go for the point of focus.

Protect

Protect images (selectable or per date) from accidentally being erased.

Motion Interval ADJ

Strange place in the Menu for this option, but you can adjust the interval of the subject’s motion here.

MENU – Setup – page 1

MENU - Setup - page 1

Monitor Brightness

Manually set the Monitor brightness (recommended leave to zero) or change to a brighter setting for Sunny Weather.

Viewfinder Brightness

Set to Auto, which adapts to the lighting circumstances or manually changes to your preferred setting.

Finder Color Temp

Change the color temperature of the viewfinder (colder-warmer) to you liking. I don’t make any adjustments here.

Gamma Disp. Assist

Volume settings

Modify the playback volume for recorded video or demos.

Tile Menu

Selects whether to always display the first screen of the menu when you press the MENU button.

MENU – Setup – page 2

Mode Dial Guide

Turn the description for each shooting mode ON or OFF. Can be handy at first for a novice user to get familiar with what the different shooting modes do.

Delete Confirm

When deleting images on your SD card, you’ll have to confirm every deletion (to make sure you don’t accidentally delete anything). You can turn Off this confirmation here if you wish.

Display Quality

You can change the display quality from standard to high at the expense of shorter battery life.

Pwr Save Start time

NTSC/PAL Selector

Plays back movies recorded with the product on an NTSC/PAL system TV.

Touch Operation

Touch Panel Pad: Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touchpad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
Touch Panel Only: Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.
Touch Pad Only: Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder. Off: Deactivates all touch operations.
Off: Deactivates all touch operations.

MENU – Setup – page 3

Touch Pad Settings

You can adjust settings related to touch pad operations during viewfinder shooting.

Operation in V Orien.: Sets whether to enable touch pad operations during vertically oriented viewfinder shooting. You can prevent erroneous operations during vertically oriented shooting caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.
Touch Pos. Mode: Sets whether to move the focusing frame to the position touched on the screen , or move the focusing frame to the desired position based on the direction of dragging and the amount of movement .
Operation Area: Sets the area to be used for touch pad operations. Restricting the operational area can prevent erroneous operations caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.

Demo Mode

For display purposes in stores.

TC/UB settings

TC/UB Disp. Setting: Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.
TC Preset: Sets the time code.
UB Preset: Sets the user bit.
TC Format: Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.)
TC Run: Sets the count up format for the time code.
TC Make: Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
UB Time Rec: Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.

HDMI Settings

When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.

Auto: The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.
2160p/1080p: Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.
1080p: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
1080i: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).

4K Output Sel.

Outputs video in 4K resolution to an HDMI-connected TV that supports 4K.

Memory Card HDMI: Simultaneously outputs to the external recording/playback device and records on the camera’s memory card.

HDMI Only(30p): Outputs a 4K movie in 30p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.

HDMI Only(24p): Outputs a 4K movie in 24p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.

HDMI Only(25p)* : Outputs a 4K movie in 25p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.

USB connection

Selects what will happen when you connect your camera to your PC or MAC.

Auto: Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be connected. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.

Mass Storage: Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.

MTP: Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.

PC Remote: Uses “Remote Camera Control” to control this product from the computer, including such functions as shooting and storing images on the computer.

MENU – Setup – page 4

USB LUN Setting

Improves compatibility with external devices by limiting the functions of the USB connection.

Older devices that are not able to connect to the camera might work when set to single. Otherwise, use Multi.

USB Power Supply

You can extend battery life by providing a power supply over USB.

PC Remote settings

Language

Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings, and messages.

Date/Time Setup

The Clock Set screen is displayed automatically when you turn on your RX10 IV for the first time.

Area Settings

Sets where in the world where you are using your camera.

MENU – Setup – page 5

Copyright info

Writes copyright information onto the still images like your name or business.

Format

File Number

Name your files according to some shots or reset it to start from 1.

Set File Name

Use the standard file naming system or a customisable one.

New Folder

Make a new folder for quickly organizing events and locations.

MENU – Setup – page 6

Folder name

Choose whether to have folder names in standard form (DSC) or create a new one by date. Setting folders by date will make organizing your images easier.

Recover Image DB

If you have a storage card error, you can try to rebuild the database to retrieve lost images possibly.

Display media info

You can check how much space is left on your SD card (have pictures in your desired quality and how many minutes of video)

Version

Setting Reset

Fully resets the camera to factory settings.

MENU – My Menu setting

This is a new functionality. It allows you to build a custom menu. Say you often change Raw file type from compressed to uncompressed, or maybe you don’t want to spend your time scrolling through the entire menu system looking for the SteadyShot settings. Well, now you can basically build your own Menu here with your most often used settings.

Add Item

You’ll see a list of all Menu options here and you can simply select your desired options and add them to your custom built menu page.

Sort Item

This setting basically changes the order of your ‘My Menu’ selected function.

Delete Item

Deletes functions in your ‘My Menu’.

Delete Page

Deletes entire pages of your ‘My Menu’ selection.

Delete All

Deletes all previously added functions of your ‘My Menu’.

Troubleshooting

If you experience error messages with the Sony RX10 IV, try the following solutions.

1. If a message such as “C/E:□□:□□” appears on the screen, refer to the self-diagnosis display.

1. Remove the battery pack, wait for about one minute, re-insert the battery pack, then turn on the power.

Initialize the settings

More setup tips and settings for specific scenarios

Birds in Flight/ fast action

A high high shutter speed for eliminating/reducing motion blur and minimising effect of camera shake. High burst rate for more chances at success and better tracking.

Mode

Use Aperture priority and selected F4, this to retain the highest possible shutter speed. If needed, you can always very quickly override the F4 setting by turning the control wheel on the lens.

Mind that you can very easily accidentally turn the aperture control wheel on the lens and end up with an aperture you were not expecting.

Drive mode

High speed burst mode (24FPS) is essential to allow you to better track rapidly moving birds.

ISO

Set auto ISO to aminimum 100 and maximum 400. If push comes to shove I can quickly override this as I have programmed the right hand position on the control wheel to change ISO.

There is an option to select the “Auto ISO minimum shutter speed”: Select “Faster” as you want to keep the shutter speed up for BIF.

Focus area

Use “Wide” as I think it is practically impossible to keep a flying bird sufficiently close to the centre of the frame to ensure that the camera focuses on the bird and not something else. I have also found the camera’s ability to discern and follow the bird in this mode to be very, very good.

Metering

Use Large Spot. With Large Spot hopefully I frequently have the subject in the spot to get good exposure. If not I am no worse off than with Multi.

Note that I find that metering with BIF requires manual intervention” in the form of EC quite often. The background (sky) is frequently significantly brighter than the subject so it is prudent to dial in some positive EC. Set this into Custom Memory 1 and this is the setup I normally use when I walk around.

Static Subjects

Tracking and rapid burst mode is not essential and it is important to have as small as possible focus area to avoid the effect of branches/twigs etc that get in the way.

Mode

Aperture priority and F4. Same comments as before.

Drive mode

Medium speed burst mode (10FPS). I consider using burst mode together with AF-C to be very important for ensuring you get good results. Reasons? Birds move: burst mode and AF-C minimises the potential blurry shots. Also: sometimes the camera misses the focus on the first shot. If it is your only shot you have a blurry image. If you use burst mode with AF-S you have several blurry images.

ISO

Auto ISO with minimum 100 and maximum 400 with “Auto ISO minimum shutter speed”= Faster

Focus area

As mentioned I want the smallest possible focus area to ensure I focus on the bird and nothing else. Ergo: I use the smallest possible flexible spot in the middle of the frame. And I have never felt the need to move it.

Metering

I use Standard Spot as I am only interested in the exposure of the subject.

I have programmed this into Custom Memory 2. I have also programmed this into Custom Hold 2 and assigned Custom Hold 2 to the “Focus hold” button on the lens. The reason for this is that I use the BIF setting for walking around and sometimes want to quickly go to the perched bird setting. Seeing as this happens quite often I wanted the easiest to use button to hold: Focus hold is it!

Other buttons

I use one other custom setting that I have programmed to Custom Memory 3: this is for general/landscape use. I have set up a similar configuration as Custom Hold 3 with the AEL button to access this. This is the second most common “hold” I will use so I programmed it to the second most comfortable button to press while using the shutter release.

Because I quite often want to jump between custom configurations I have programmed Memory Recall into the first Fn button location. To switch between configurations I press the Fn button, press enter (to select memory recall), scroll left or right to memory 1, 2 or 3 and press enter.

On the rear control wheel I have:

– Left: AF area

– Down: Burst mode

– Right: ISO

Conclusion

The Sony RX10 IV brought many new software innovations to the RX line. Besides the ability to record in 4K and make High Frame rate movies, you shouldn’t overlook the many new focusing aides inside the Sony RX10 IV like Eye AF and focus peaking. I hope you found my advanced manual for the RX10 IV with tips and tricks useful. If you have any questions, I’d love to hear from you in the comment section below.

October 5, 2017

Sony A9 setup guide with tips and tricks

Introduction

The Sony A9 is their latest full frame mirrorless body and should rival many high-end DSLR’s in terms of speed and image quality. There are a few changes in the menu system when compared to previous Sony models, especially If you come from an A7rm2 or earlier versions. By the way, this camera is not aimed at videographers, and hence S-LOG settings have totally disappeared. Let’s have a look.

Sony A9 Menu System overview

MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 1 (Quality and image size settings page 1)

File Format

Do you edit your pictures on your desktop? If so, set to RAW or RAW jpeg. A RAW file saves all information the Sony A9 pixels register during shooting and will make for better quality images if you want to edit in something like Adobe Lightroom.

RAW file type

You can choose between either compressed or uncompressed RAW. Compressed files are smaller, but there is also a small degradation of quality, especially noticeable in long exposures and scenes with high contrast. If you notice haloing in the sky during post processing for instance, then this is an artifact of that compression.

Jpeg Quality

Choose the amount of compression for the Jpeg files. Either Fine or Extra Fine.

Jpeg Image Size

Choose between small, medium or Large. Select Large if you don’t shoot RAW. This will ensure the optimal image quality in the Jpeg format.

Knowing the pixel size can tell you how large you can print your images without quality degradation. There are techniques nowadays to print larger, but this information might be interesting to some.

Aspect ratio

You can choose 3:2 (which uses the full sensor surface) or 16:9 (crop but a more broad view). Leave as is at 3:2, you can always crop your pictures later.

APS-C/Super 35mm:

This setting tells the Sony A9 what to do when you’ve attached an APS-C lens to this full-frame camera. An APS-C lens won’t cover the full surface of the sensor, or you’ll notice heavy vignetting towards the edges of the frame. When recording movies, this crop is called Super 35mm. The principle here is that you use any a part of the surface of the sensor. If you want to do this, don’t worry too much about image quality as this is a high megapixel camera leaving you with a usable 15MP in APS-C mode.

On: Records in either APS-C-equivalent size or Super 35mm-equivalent size.
Auto: Automatically sets the capture range depending on the lens.
Off: Always captures 35mm full-size image sensor pictures.

MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 2 (Quality and image size settings page 2)

Long Exposure NR

Set if you want the processing engine to apply noise reduction for images captured with a long exposure time. Leave it ON as there is no way of duplicating this process in post production, except to take a black frame of the same length in the same atmospheric conditions.

High ISO NR

Color Space

Lens Comp

The Sony A9 allows you to select whether you would like to apply various lens compensations (shading, chromatic aberration, distortion) even when shooting in RAW. I leave this ON, but you might get a conflict with RAW files and using a lens profile in programs like Lightroom where you’ll see a reverse vignette for instance.

MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 3 (Shoot Mode and Drive settings)

Self Timer Type

You can choose between shooting a single image with the self-timer or a designated number of images.

Self-timer (single: Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.
Self-timer(Cont): Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.

Bracket Settings

You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.

Selftimer during Brkt: Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released if using the self-timer. (OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
Bracket order: Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.

Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

This functionality allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered with the Mode Dial memory positions in advance. It is now also possible to save your Sony A9 settings to a memory card and recall them later (or on a different camera). This is done by using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside this menu.

Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

This setting allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings to the product and up to 4 (M1 through M4) to the memory card. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial. You can register various functions for shooting. The items that you can register are displayed on the menu of the Sony A9. Aperture and Shutter speed are always available. You’ll need to select your SD card first using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside the prior menu.

Select Media

Choose which of the two SD cards will be used to save or recall the M1 to M4 settings.

Reg Cust Shoot Set

You can save the following settings:

Shoot Mode (Like program Auto)
Aperture
Shutter Speed
Drive Mode
Exposure compensation
ISO (like Auto or a single ISO value)
Metering Mode
Focus Mode
Focus Area
AF On

MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 4(Autofocus settings page 1)

Priority Set in AF-S:

Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF, DMF or Automatic AF and the subject is still.

Options are:

AF: Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
Release: Prioritizes the shutter’s release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.

Priority Set in AF-C:

Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when the continuous AF is activated and the subject is in motion. Balanced works great for any type of photography.

Choose between:

AF: Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
Release: Prioritizes the shutter’s release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
Balanced Emphasis: Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.

Focus area

The Sony A9 has an advanced autofocus system with 693 phase detection autofocus points on the sensor. These PDAF points cover 93% of the frame too. This makes it one of the fastest and most reliable AF systems in the world. You might think it is best to leave it on the wide factory setting (as this uses all AF points), but for certain scenes, it is often better to use a zone or flexible spot to get it to focus on what you want.

Wide: Wide focus area uses all focus points on the sensor. Ideal for action scenes where there is a lot of movement going on in your frame.
Zone: Zone allows you to select one of 9 predefined areas where autofocus will be active. These zones each cover about 25% of the screen, with a slight overlap. You can quickly change the area by pressing the multi-controller button and navigating to any of the other areas.
Center: Focusses on whatever is centered in your images. A fail-proof way of getting the Sony A9 to focus on what you want. If you have any problems using the autofocus and are in a situation where you don’t want to miss any shots, revert to Center and just make sure you have your subject centered.
Flexible spot: Flexible spot area selects a place anywhere on the screen where the camera should focus. (similar to Center spot, except not.. in the center) You can set it to small, medium or large. If you want to use this focus area, set it to medium or large, as the Sony A9 will struggle to find focus when setting to small (except perhaps for close-up portraits where you’d want to focus on the iris of the eye)
Expand Flexible spot: If the camera can’t focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the flexible spot as a secondary priority area for focusing.
Lock-on AF: When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the Sony A9 tracks the subject within the selected autofocus area. This setting is available only when the focus mode is set to Continuous AF. Point the cursor to ‘Lock-on AF’ on the Focus Area setting screen, and then adjust the desired area to start tracking by pressing the multi-selector left/right. You can also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a flexible spot or expand flexible spot. If you’re coming from a DSLR, try to use this setting. This has been upgraded in version 5 firmware.

Focus Settings

Focus setting allows you to use the wheel, joystick or touch screen to move your focus point to any of the 693 on sensor phase detection points.

Focus Are Limit

It’s now possible to limit the choice of focus areas you have to cycle through to find the one you want. For instance, many photographers tend to use the Expand Flexible Spot in preference to the Small, Medium and Large Flexible Spots and the Center Area. You can now easily select and deselect these here.

Switch V/H AF Area

Off: disable this feature

AF Point Only: If you switch to portrait mode, the A9 will automatically move the AF point in use up to align with your subject.

AF Point AF Area: If you switch to portrait mode, the A9 will automatically move the AF point and AF area in use up.

MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 5 (Autofocus settings page 2)

AF illuminator

The AF illuminator is a little red light allowing the Sony A9 to focus more easily when the shutter button is pressed halfway. It automatically is switched off when you fully press the shutter. Leave it on except if you are using an underwater housing.

Face/Eye AF Set.

You can set the real time Eye Autofocus functionality here.

Face Priority in AF

Tip: it might however still be a good idea to assign this ON/Off menu item to your old custom button when shooting a variety of scenes (as opposed to only portraits). This means you’ll be able to switch between the camera constantly looking for eyes to lock on too and any other ‘normal’ autofocus mode. It’s also of course still possible to use Eye AF as before, where it will override your selected focus area and the A9 will focus on the eye as long as your custom button of choice is pressed.

Real time Eye AF works differently with Different focus areas:

WIDE: Eye AF will search & track an eye in the entire frame.
ZONE: Eye AF will search & track an eye in the within the selected Zone.
CENTER: Eye AF will search & track an eye in the center of the frame (Not recommended)
FLEXIBLE SPOT: L,M,S: Eye AF will search & track an eye within the selected Flexible Spot (Large works best for this setting).
If you want to focus on a specific animal’s eye when the displayed face of that animal is very small, or two or more animals are displayed on the screen, set the focus area to Flexible Spot and then focus on the subject so that it is easier for the camera to detect the eye.
EXPAND FLEXIBLE SPOT: Eye AF will search & track an eye in the area within or surrounding the Flexible Spot.
LOCK-ON AF: EXPAND FLEXIBLE SPOT: Not compatible with Real Time Eye AF.

Right/Left Eye Select

Select which eye the real time Eye AF feature will focus on. Either left, right or let the camera automatically decide which eye is most visible.

Face Detect. Frame Disp.

Sets whether or not to display the face detection frame when a human face is detected. Turn On.

AF tracking sens.

High is useful when shooting fast action scenery. The standard mode works fine in most situations, but you can also try responsive if you need faster tracking capabilities. Locked on keeps the focus on a specific subject when other things are crossing in front of the subject.

Aperture drive in AF

Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize the auto-focusing tracking performance or to prioritize silence. Sony designed this primary to give AF-C in continues drive at sports shootings with apertures beyond f11 when the old FW stopped down to the set aperture and the PDAF was not usable and the CDAF took over. Only currently works with the Sony 400mm GM lens.

Standard: Uses the standard aperture drive system.

Focus Priority: Changes the aperture drive system to prioritise auto-focusing performance. During continuous shooting using the electronic shutter, the Focus Priority]setting allows you to continuously adjust the focus with an F-value greater than F11.

Silent Priority :Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize silence so that the sound from the aperture drive is quieter than in Standard.

AF with shutter

Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Leave ON.

Pre-AF

Select if the Sony A9 will automatically adjust focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.

MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 6 (Autofocus settings page 3)

Eye-Start AF:

AF Area Regist.

Another feature inherited from Canon. By registering an AF area/point, you have a quick way to move between points without having the thumb-stick of scroll across the AF field. For example, a bird photographer can set his Sony A9 up so they can quickly switch from a spot AF point for precisely focusing on a static subject, to a wide AF pattern for quickly acquiring and tracking a bird in flight.

Del. Reg. AF Area

Deletes the registered AF area in AF Area Regist.

AF Area Auto Clear:

Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically shortly after focus is achieved.

Disp. cont. AF Area

You can set whether or not to display the focus area that is in focus when[Focus Area] is set to Wide or Zone and Focus Mode is set to Continuous AF.

Circ. of Focus Point

This is a firmware version 5 feature that when turned ON allows the photographer to move a spot or Zone AF point over the edge of the frame and have it reappear on the other side of the screen.

MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 6 (Autofocus settings page 4)

AF Micro Adj.

Allows you to adjust the auto-focusing position and register an adjusted value for each lens when using A-mount lenses with an LA-EA2 or LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor.

MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 8 (Exposure settings page 1)

Exposure Comp

(Also available in the Quick Menu, accessed by pressing the FN button):

Reset EV Comp

Sets whether to maintain the exposure value set using Custom Settings when you turn off the power when the exposure compensation dial position is set to 0.

ISO Setting

You can select at which ISO value you’d like to capture your image or change the Auto ISO range.

I have this range set between 100-6400 as this range is virtually noise free, and I don’t like the ISO performance above 6400. In a pinch, when you’re getting blurred images due to a too long shutter speed at low ISO, you can experiment with higher ISO settings. It’s better to get a sharp but noisy image than a blurred one….

Metering Mode

Metering mode refers to the way the Sony A9 reads the light and sets the exposure.

In multi, it considers the whole frame and sets exposure according to internal algorithms programmed in camera.

In spot or center, the camera only considers what is in that spot or the center (per example, if your subject is completely black, the Sony A9 will try to compensate by overexposing the image).

Multi: Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
Center: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-weighted metering).
Spot: Measures only the central area (Spot metering). This mode is suitable for measuring light on a specified part of the entire screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from Spot: Standard and Spot: Large. The position of the metering circle depends the setting for [Spot Metering Point].
Entire Screen Avg.: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the position of the subject changes.
Highlight: Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the subject while avoiding overexposure.

Tip: When Spot is selected and Focus Area is set to either Flexible Spot or Expand Flexible Spot while Spot Metering Point is set to [ocus Point Link, the spot metering point can be coordinated with the focus area.

Face priority in Multi

When turned on, this setting will give priority to detected faces in regards to the light metering of the camera. Turn On for perfectly exposed faces in your image. This will override the other selected metering mode.

Spot Metering Point

Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus area when Focus Area is set to Flexible Spot or Expand Flexible Spot.

Center: The spot metering position does not coordinate with the focus area, but always meters brightness at the center.
Focus Point Link: The spot metering position coordinates with the focus area.

MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 9 (Exposure settings page 2)

Exposure step

You can set the setting range for the shutter speed, aperture, and exposure compensation values either .3 or .5 EV steps.

AEL w shutter

Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Select Off to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.

Auto (default setting): Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF.
On: Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off: Does not adjust the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to change focus and exposure separately.

The Sony A9 keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in Cont. Shooting or Spd Priority Cont. mode. Operation using the AEL button is prioritized over the AEL w/ shutter settings.

Exposure Std. Adjust

Adjusts this camera’s standard for the correct exposure value for each metering mode. You can set a value from -1 EV to 1 EV in 1/6 EV increments.

MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 10 (Flash settings)

Flash Mode:

(Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button)

If you have purchased a flash for your A9, it’s important to learn about the different Flash Modes. If you’re new to photography, I’d suggest setting it to Auto, where the camera will decide when and how you need the flash.

fill flash: A fill flash is useful even in daylight to fill the shadows with light (like a person in the shade).

Slow sync: Tells theSony A9 to use a longer shutter speed along with a flash, and thus is better for night shots. In manual and shutter priority modes, there is no difference in flash power. But when using aperture priority, program, or auto, choosing slow sync tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed than it would ordinarily pick.What the slow sync flash mode does is a first fire the flash for the subject exposure, then allow for a longer shutter speed that will allow for more ambient light to be captured by the sensor.

Rear Sync: Capturing an image involves two shutter actions: one when the capture starts and on when it stops. Rear Sync tells the flash to fire right before the shutter closes. Moving objects will show a streak where they came from and a sharp image where they were at the end of the exposure. This conveys a sense of speed with moving objects. Rear Sync is a creative technique, if you’d like to know more about this type of photography, I’d suggest doing a Google search on ‘Rear Sync Flash Photography.’
Wireless: Select wireless is if want to use the in-camera flash to trigger an external flash like the Sony HVL-43M (with TTL!). Using an external flash is helpful when shooting weddings and dimly-lit subject matter, You can use your main flash to light the subject, and your external flash to light the background.

Notes on using te Sony A9 with an off-camera flash system like Godox or Flashpoint:

For basic operation, set the Sony A9 to ‘ambient’ flash.
Turn OFF Live view display (MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 7).

Flash comp or Flash compensation:

Exp comp set

Wireless Flash

In case you’re wondering, this only works with Sony flashes that have wireless capabilities for controlling other units. If you’re using Godox flashes, you should simply set the Flash Mode to Fill Flash.

If you’re indeed using Sony flash, there are two methods for wireless flash shooting:

light-signal flash shooting that uses the light of the flash attached to the camera as a signal light
radio-signal flash shooting that uses wireless communication.

To perform radio-signal flash shooting, use a compatible flash or the Wireless Radio Commander.

Red Eye Reduction

This anti-Red Eye setting quickly fires the flash before your image capture starts, reducing the red-eye effect often seen when using a flash.

MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 11 (Color, White balance and Image processing settings)

White Balance

You can either set the white balance to Auto, where the Sony A9 tries to guess what the neutral grey value is, or use one of the preset white balance settings for different lighting conditions or customize the white balance according to your preference or using a grey card.

Priority Set in AWB

Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when White Balance is set to Auto.

Standard: Shoots with standard auto white balance. The Sony A9 automatically adjusts the color tones.
Ambience: Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.
White: Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.

DRO/Auto HDR

DRO:

Auto HDR:

The highlight detail in auto HDR is better than that in DRO and with reduced noise. The shutter is released three times, so using this function for moving subjects is not recommended.

Creative Style

The Sony creative styles can best be explained as being film emulations (the same way as do some other camera manufacturers implements this). There is a range of styles available from vivid colour to black and white. If you’re shooting RAW, these styles are embedded, but can always be zeroed after importing them to you RAW editor of choice. Jpegs are saved with this styling applied. It is always useful to try some of these, and can be a real boost for your creativity, as you will notice that you make different images in say black-and-white as opposed to colour.

Standard: For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
Vivid: The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers, spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
Neutral: The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also suitable for capturing image material to be modified with a computer.
Clear: For shooting images in clear tones with limpid colors in highlight, suitable for capturing radiant light.
Deep: For shooting images with deep and dense colors, suitable for capturing the solid presence of the subject.
Light: For shooting images with bright and simple colors, suitable for capturing a refreshingly light ambience.
Portrait: For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
Landscape: The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also stand out more. Sunset: For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
Night Scene: The contrast is lowered for reproducing night scenes.
Autumn leaves: For shooting autumn scenes, vividly highlighting the reds and yellows of changing leaves.
Black & White: For shooting images in black and white monotone.
Sepia: For shooting images in sepia monotone.

You can edit these different styles and save your own creative style if you want.

This functionality can be changed:

Contrast: The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on the image.
Saturation: The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is restrained and subdued.
Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value selected, the more the contours are softened.

Picture Effect

Think of this menu as an Instagram app right in your Sony A9, with all kinds of retro filters and effects. These are only available when quality is set to Jpeg (Not in RAW).

Off: Disables the [Picture Effect] function.
Toy Camera: Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
Pop Color: Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
Posterization: Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.
Retro Photo: Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
Soft High-key: Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
Partial Color: Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
High Contrast Mono.: Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
Rich-tone Mono.: Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.

Shutter AWB lock

When in continuous shooting mode, the camera will lock the auto white balance with the first picture taken. All sequential shots after that (while holding the shutter button down) will be recorded with the same white balance.

MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 12 (Focus Assist settings)

Focus Magnifier

Focus Magnif Time

You can set how long to hold the magnified area during MF assist. 2 sec, 5 seconds or no limit. 2 seconds is how I have it set up.

Initial Focus Mag.

Sets the initial magnification scale when using [Focus Magnifier]. Select a setting that will help you frame your shot.

Full-frame shooting:

x1.0: Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x7.8: Displays a 7.8-times enlarged image.

APS-C/Super 35mm size shooting:

x1.0: Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x5.1: Displays a 5.1-times enlarged image.

AF in Focus Mag.

Magnify the image by pressing the center of the control wheel, and then adjust the position using top/bottom/right/left of the control wheel.
Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot.

MF assist

Peaking Setting

Peaking is a manual focusing aid which works when you have your Sony A9 set to MF or DMF.

You’ll see a type of noise outlining the parts of your image where the focus lies, and you can adjust the sensitivity to high, mid or low.

MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 13 (Shooting Assist settings)

Face Registration

Regist. Face Priority

You can decide which face will be first to be focussed on when face detection is turned on.

MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 1

Movie/S&Q Exposure Mode

You can select the exposure mode for movie shooting or slow-motion/quick-motion shooting. You can change the setting and playback speed for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with S&Q Settings later.

Program Auto / Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
Aperture Priority / Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority / Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
Manual Exposure / Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.

File Format (video)

You can choose between XAVC S 4K, XAVC S HD, AVCHD or MP4. AVCHD is a far superior codec than plain MPEG-4. You’ll need a fast UHS Speed Class U3 SD card to record at 100 Mbps or more.

XAVC S 4K: Records 4K movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate. Audio: LPCM
XAVC S HD: Records HD movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate. Audio: LPCM. The file size of movies is limited to approx. 2 GB. If the movie file size reaches approx. 2 GB during recording, a new movie file will be created automatically.
AVCHD: Records HD movies in the AVCHD format. This file format is suitable for high-definition TV. Audio: Dolby Digital

Record Setting (video):

When File Format is set to XAVC S 4K you have these options:

30p/25p: 30p 60M/25p 60Mbps or 30p 100M/25p 100Mbps.
24p: 24p 60Mbps or 24p 100Mbps if your Sony A9 is set to NTSC

When File Format is set to XAVC S HD you have these options:

120p/100p: 120p 60M/100p 60Mbps or 120p 100M/100p 100Mbps.
30p/25p: 60p 50Mbps/50p 50Mbps.
60p/50p: 30p 50Mbps/25p 50Mbps.
24p: 24p 50Mbps when set to NTSC.

When File Format is set to AVCHD you have these options:

60i/50i: 60i 17Mbps(FH)/50i 17Mbps(FH) or 60i 24Mbps(FX)/50i 24Mbps(FX).
60p/50p: 60p 28Mbps(PS)/50p 28Mbps(PS).
24p/25p: 24p 17Mbps(FH)/25p 17Mbps(FH) or 24p 24Mbps(FX)/25p 24Mbps(FX).

S&Q settings

How to record slow motion movie on the Sony A9:

Set the mode dial to (Movie/S&Q Motion).
Select MENU→ (Camera Settings 2)→[Movie/S&Q Motion]→ and select the desired setting of slow-motion/quick-motion (S&Q) ( Program Auto, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or Manual Exposure).
Select MENU→ (Camera Settings 2)→[ S&Q Settings] and select the desired settings for [ Record Setting] and [ Frame Rate].
Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording. Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

Record Setting: Selects the frame rate of the movie.

Frame Rate: Selects the shooting frame rate.

Playback speed: The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned [ Record Setting] and [Frame Rate].

Proxy Recording

Proxy video recording d, enables low bit rate and low resolution files to be recorded simultaneously, even when recording in 4K. The proxy files are recorded in XAVC S HD (1280×720) at 9 Mbps, with the respective frame rate staying the same across both files.

Although the proxy video files cannot be played back on the camera, this is a useful workflow feature that can speed up the post production process.

MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 2 (Movie Settings Page 2)

AF Drive Speed (movie)

You can switch focusing speed when using autofocus in movie mode.

Fast: Sets the AF drive speed to fast. This mode is suitable for shooting active scenes, such as sports.
Normal: Sets the AF drive speed to normal.
Slow: Sets the AF drive speed to slow. With this mode, the focus switches smoothly when the subject to be focused is changed.

AF Track Sens (movie)

You can set the AF sensitivity separately in movie mode.

Responsive: Sets the AF sensitivity to high. This mode is useful when recording movies in which the subject is moving quickly.
Standard: Sets the AF sensitivity to normal.
Locked on: Sets the AF sensitivity to low. You can shoot with a stable focus by ignoring the influence of anything in front of the subject.

Auto Slow Shut. (movie)

Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording dark scenes.

On: Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in dark locations.
Off: Does not use Auto Slow Shut. The recorded movie will be darker than when On is selected, but you can record movies with smoother motion and less object blur.

Initial Focus Mag.

Sets the initial magnification scale when using the Focus Magnifier.

Full-frame shooting:

x1.0: Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x7.8: Displays a 7.8-times enlarged image.

APS-C/Super 35mm size shooting:

x1.0: Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x5.1: Displays a 5.1-times enlarged image.

Audio Recording

Audio Rec Level

You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter.

MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 3 (Movie Settings Page 3)

Audio Level Display

Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen.

Don’t see the audio level display?

Check if Audio Recording]is set to Off.
Check if DISP (Display Setting) is set to No Disp. Info.
During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting, audio is automatically turned OFF.

Audio Out Timing

You can set echo cancellation during audio monitoring and prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio during HDMI output.

Live: Outputs audio without delay. Select this setting when the audio deviation is a problem during audio monitoring.
Lip Sync: Outputs audio and video in sync. Select this setting to prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio.

Wind Noise Reduction

This helps reduce noise from the wind during video recording.

Marker Display (movie)

Select if you want guidelines (a grid) in movie mode. The markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder

Marker Settings (movie)

Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies. You can display several markers at the same time.

Center: Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen. [Off]/[On]
Aspect: Sets the aspect marker display. [Off]/[4:3]/[13:9]/[14:9]/[15:9]/[1.66:1]/[1.85:1]/[2.35:1]
Safety Zone: Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV. [Off]/[80%]/[90%]
Guideframe: Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.

Video Light Mode

Sets the illumination setting for the optional HVL-LBPC LED light.

Power Link: The video light turns on/off in sync with the ON/OFF operation of this camera.
REC Link: The video light turns on/off in sync with movie recording start/stop.
REC Link&STBY: The video light turns on when movie recording starts and dims when not recording (STBY).
Auto: The video light automatically turns on when it is dark.

MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 4 (Movie Settings page 4)

Movie w/ shutter

Start recording movies when to shutter is pressed instead of the movie button.

MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 5 (Shutter and SteadyShot settings)

Movie w/ shutter

It’s possible to map the movie record function to the shutter function here

Shutter Type

Select here if you want to use the Electronic or Mechanical shutter. There is also an auto option, that switches from mechanical to electronic shutter if a flash is detected.

e-Front Curtain Shut.

Release without lens

Makes it possible to capture images even if a lens is not supported by the Sony A9. (Like when using an adapter with vintage lenses)

Release without card

If set to Off, you won’t be able to engage the shutter when there is no SD card in the slot. This is a useful failsafe to prevent you from shooting images without the ability to save them.

SteadyShot

Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot (sensor stabilization) function.For optimal sharpness, turn it off when using a tripod.

SteadyShot Settings

If your lens does not relay focal length information to the A9 body, you can still use the Ibis stabilization by dialing in the focal length manually.

Auto: Performs the SteadyShot function automatically according to the information obtained from the attached lens.
Manual: Performs the SteadyShot function according to the focal length set using [SteadyS. Focal Len.]. (8mm-1000mm)

MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 6 (Zoom settings)

Zoom

Turn the digital zoom function on or off.

Zoom settings

Set to Optical zoom only (using the optical zoom capabilities of your lens

Two other settings are available which use digital zoom (cropping of the original image):

Digital zoom:

Clear Image Zoom:

The camera will save this image as a jpeg and not a RAW file. With most Sony cameras, I’m not a big fan of clear image zoom, as the loss in quality and potential loss in post processing leeway (it’s not RAW after all) is significant. But because the A9 jpeg engine is soo good (it’s a camera connected for sports and journalism where there is less time to edit pictures) I would not hesitate using it with the ILCE-9.

Zoom ring rotate

Assigns zoom in (T) or zoom out (W) functions to the zoom ring rotation direction. Available only with power zoom lenses that support this function.

MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 7 (Display and Auto review Settings page 1)

Disp button

Selects the functionality (what is shown) on the screen when you press the DISP button (on the control wheel). You can choose Graphic Display, all info, no disp info, and histogram.

Finder/Monitor

Finder Frame Rate

Display the subject’s movements more smoothly by adjusting the frame rate of the viewfinder during still image shooting. This function is convenient when shooting a fast-moving subject.

120fps/100fps: Displays the movements of the subject more smoothly on the viewfinder.
60fps/50fps: Displays the subject at a normal frame rate on the viewfinder.

Zebra

Grid Line (stills)

Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.

Rule of 3rds Grid: Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.
Square Grid: Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is suitable to determine the quality of the composition when shooting landscape, close-up, or duplicated images.
Diag. Square Grid: Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.
Off: Does not display the grid line.

Exposure set guide

MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 8 (Display and Auto review Settings page 2)

Live view Display

Shoot. Start Disp.

Sets whether to let the screen black out when shooting the first image during blackout-free shooting.

Shoot. Timing Disp.

Sets if and what kind of visual markers you’ll see when shooting in silent mode.

On: Type1: makes a solid square in the center AF point light up when the shutter is engaged.
On: Type2: makes the outlines of a square center AF point light up when the shutter is engaged.
On: Type3: you’ll see the brackets in far corners light up when the shutter is engaged.
On: Type4: Blue squares will light up in the center when the shutter is engaged.
Off: turns this effect off.

Cont. Shoot. Lenght

This will show you how many shots you have left on your SD card on screen. You can select to always have this info displayed, only during shooting or turn it off.

Auto Review

MENU → Purple Camera Icon→ page 9 (Custom operation Settings page 1)

Custom Key(Shoot.)/Custom Key(PB)

You can assign the desired function to the desired key. Some functions are available only when they are assigned to a custom key.

The keys that can be assigned functions are different for Custom Key Shoot.]and Custom Key PB.

You can assign the desired functions to the following keys. You can also assign a shooting function to the focus hold button on the lens. However, some lenses do not have a focus hold button.2 1.

Custom Button 1
Custom Button2
AF/MF Button/AEL Button
Fn/ Button
Control Wheel (Center Button/Down Button/Left Button/Right Button)
Custom Button 3

For example, I assign [Eye AF] to [AF-ON] for [Custom Key(Shoot.)] because it’s more conveniently placed. You can easily recall [Eye AF] simply by pressing the AF-ON button. Despite the firmware 5 realtime Eye AF update, this is still useful in some cases.

Learn how to do this here:

The keys that can be assigned functions are different for [Custom Key(Shoot.)] and [Custom Key(PB)].

You can assign the desired functions to the following keys. You can also assign a shooting function to the focus hold button on the lens. However, some lenses do not have a focus hold button.2 1.

Custom Button 1
Custom Button2
AF/MF Button/AEL Button
Fn/ Button
Control Wheel (Center Button/Down Button/Left Button/Right Button)
Custom Button 3

Function Menu Set.

You can assign the functions to be called up when you press the Fn (Function) button.

My Dial Settings

You can switch the functions of the front/rear dial between shutter speed and aperture.

Dial Setup

You can switch the functions of the control dial and the control wheel.

MOVIE Button

Sets whether or not to activate the MOVIE (Movie) button.

Always: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button in any mode.
Movie Mode Only: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting mode is set to [Movie/S&Q Motion] mode.

MENU → Purple Camera Icon→ page 10 (Custom Operation page 2)

Av/Tv Rotate

Sets the direction of rotation for the front dial, rear dial, or control wheel when changing the aperture value or shutter speed. Normal or reverse.

Dial EV Comp

You can compensate the exposure using the front or rear dial. You can adjust the exposure in a range of -5.0 EV to 5.0 EV.

Function Ring (Lens)

Change the assigned function of the lens ring.

Func. of Touch Oper.

Select the functionality of the touch screen. There are two choices:

Touch Shutter: When you shoot using the monitor, the camera automatically focuses on the point you touch and shoots a still image.
Touch Focus: You can select a subject on which to focus using touch operations in the still image and movie recording modes.

MOVIE Button

Sets whether or not to activate the Movie button.

Always: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button in any mode.

Movie Mode Only: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting mode is set to “Movie/S&Q Motion” mode.

Lock Operation Parts

You can set whether the dials and wheels will be locked by pressing and holding the Fn (Function) button. You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again.

Lock: Locks the front and rear dials when you press and hold the Fn button.
Unlock: The front or rear dials are not locked, even if you press and hold the Fn (Function) button.

Audio Signals

Selects whether the product produces a sound or not, for example when the focus is achieved by pressing the shutter button halfway down.

MENU → Purple Camera Icon→ page 11 (Custom Operation page 3)

Audio Signals

Selects whether the A9 produces a sound or not in silent mode with the electronic shutter.

MENU → Network settings→ page 1 (Network settings page 1)

Send To Smartphone

- - - - You can send one or several images directly to your wireless device (phone or tablet) by pressing this button.
      - You can either decide to choose which images you want to transfer on the Sony A9 or the wireless device (via the Sony PlayMemories app, available for free in the apple or android store).
      - You’ll have to connect the-the camera via Wifi first (it makes a Wifi access point), using the instruction on the A9 screen.
      - It works just like connecting to any other access point with your phone or tablet.
      - You should do this as quickly as possible, just to get it out of the way.
      - When your phone has wirelessly connected to the camera once, and you’ve entered the password, it will remember this, and make it a lot faster to connect later.

Send to Computer

FTP Transfer Func.

You can set up image transferring using an FTP server or transfer images to theFTP server. Basic knowledge of FTP servers is required.

View On TV

If you have a Wifi-enabled TV, you can see pictures and slideshows directly from your camera through your home wireless network.

Ctrl w/ smartphone

By connecting the Sony A9 to a smartphone using Wi-Fi, you can control the camera and shoot images using the smartphone, and you can transfer images shot with the camera to the smartphone.

Connection Info. displays the QR code or SSID used to connect the Sony A9 to a smartphone.

PC Remote (Wired LAN)

YYou can remotely control the camera with a high degree of freedom suited to professional sites via the PC app “Remote Camera Tool”. You can also remotely control an Ethernet connected camera or multiple cameras from this application. In addition, remote control is possible even during FTP transfer, which achieves even higher shooting efficiency.

MENU → Network settings→ page 2 (Network settings page 2)

Airplane Mode

Disables all wireless functionality, just like airplane mode does on your phone.

Wi-Fi Settings:

WPS Push

If your access point has the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this product easily by pushing the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button.

Access Point Set.

Disp MAC Address

Displays the MAC address of your Sony ILCE-A9.

SSID/PW Reset

Your Sony A9 shares the connection information for [Send to Smartphone] and [ Connection Info.] with a device that has permission to connect. If you want to change the device that is permitted to connect, reset the connection information.

Bluetooth Settings.

Controls the settings for connecting the Sony A9 to a smartphone via a Bluetooth connection. You need to pair the camera and smartphone before using the location information interlocking function. If you want to pair the camera and smartphone in order to use the location information interlocking function, refer to “Loc. Info. Link Set..”

Location Info. Link Set

You can use the application PlayMemories Mobile to obtain location information from a smartphone that is connected with your camera using Bluetooth communication. You can record the obtained location information when shooting images.

To use the location information linking function of the Sony A9, you need the PlayMemories Mobile application on your smartphone and transfer an image to your smartphone to test the connection

Procedure:

Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated. (Do not perform the Bluetooth pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen!!! In steps 2 to 7, the pairing operation is performed using the camera and the application PlayMemories Mobile. If you accidentally perform the pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen in step 1, cancel the pairing and then perform the pairing operation by following Steps 2 through 7 using the Sony A9 and the application PlayMemories Mobile.)
On the camera, select MENU → (Wireless) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On].
On the camera, select MENU → (Wireless) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing].
Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone and tap “Location Information Linkage.”
Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of PlayMemories Mobile.
Select [OK] when a message is displayed on the monitor of the camera. Pairing of the camera and PlayMemories Mobile is complete.
On the camera, select MENU → (Wireless) → [ Loc. Info. Link Set.] → [Location Info. Link] → [On].

(obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera. Location information obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded when shooting images.

Options in this Menu:

Location Info. Link: Sets whether to obtain the location information by linking with a smartphone.
Auto Time Correct.: Sets whether to automatically correct the date setting of the Sony A9 using information from a linked smartphone.
Auto Area Adjust.: Sets whether to automatically correct the area setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.

Wired LAN setting

You can set your IP Adress to either Auto or manual.

Edit Device name

If you wish, you can change the name of the Device Access point) perhaps to make it easier to identify which A9 is yours in particular situations.

Imp Root Certificate

Import a root certificate from your memory card here.

MENU → Network settings→ page 3 (Network settings page 3)

Imp Root Certificate

Import a root certificate from your memory card here.

Reset Network set

Resets all network settings.

If something does not function properly, and you want to start from scratch, can be useful.

MENU – playback options – page 1 (Playback 1)

Protect

Set your camera to not shoot images without inserting an SD card.

Rotate

Change the orientation of images in-camera.

Delete

Delete one or multiple images stored on your SD cards.

Rating

Rate your images in-camera for easy culling in Lightroom afterward.

Rating Set (Cust Key)

Set a custom key for easy rating.

Specify Printing

Specify Printing is a feature that allows images to be marked for printing later. Registered images are displayed with the DPOF mark. (DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format)

MENU – playback options – page 2 (Playback 2)

Copy

Copy an image or several images from one SD card slot to another.

Photo Capture

Enlarge Image

Select an image and expand a portion of that picture. Useful for checking details and focus.

Enlarge Initial Mag.

Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images.

Enlarge Initial Position

Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback. You can select either image center or the focus position.

Slide Show

Select whether you want the Sony A9 to repeat slideshows when all pictures are viewed or not, and choose the interval between slides.

Rotate

Change the orientation of images in-camera.

Enlarge Image

Select an image and expand a portion of that picture. Useful for checking details and focus.

Enlarge Init. Mag.

Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images.

Enlarge Initial Pos.

Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback. You can select either image center or the focus position.

Protect

Protect images (selectable or per date) from accidentally being erased.

MENU – playback options – page 3 (Playback 3)

Select PB media

Select what SD card slot will be used when you press playback.

View Mode

select how the camera will arrange captured pictures in the viewing browser.

Image Index

Choose whether you want the image browser to display 12 (larger) or 30 (smaller) images per page.

Display Cont. Shooting Group.

You can select to display burst images in groups or display all images during playback.

Display rotation

Select whether you want the camera to rotate images automatically when you rotate the camera or not.

Image Jump Setting

Sets which dial and method to use for jumping between images during playback. You can quickly find protected images or images set with a particular rating.

Select Dial:

Selects the dial to use for jumping between images.

Image Jump Method:

Sets the type of images to be played back with Image Jump.

MENU – Setup – page 1 (Setup menu Page 1)

Monitor Brightness

Manually set the Monitor brightness (recommended leave to zero) or change to a brighter setting for Sunny Weather.

Viewfinder Brightness

Set to Auto, which adapts to the lighting circumstances or manually changes to your preferred setting.

Finder Color Temp

Change the color temperature of the viewfinder (colder-warmer) to you liking. I don’t make any adjustments here.

Volume settings

Modify the playback volume for recorded video or demos.

Delete confirm.

You can set whether Delete or Cancel is selected as the default setting on the delete confirmation screen.

Pwr Save Start time

MENU – Setup – page 2 (Setup Menu page 2)

Auto Pwr OFF Temp.

Sets the temperature of the camera at which the Sony A9 turns off automatically during shooting. When it is set to High, you can continue shooting even when the temperature of the camera gets hotter than normal. Do not shoot while holding the camera in your hand as it can cause burns. Use a tripod. This will give you a 9-minute increase in movie recording at high ambient temperatures.

NTSC/PAL Selector

Plays back movies recorded with the product on an NTSC/PAL system TV.

Cleaning Mode

If dust or debris gets inside the Sony A9 and adheres to the surface of the image sensor (the part that converts the light to an electric signal), it may appear as dark spots on the image, depending on the shooting environment. If this happens, follow the steps below to clean the image sensor.

Touch Operation

Touch Panel Pad: Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touchpad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
Touch Panel Only: Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.
Touch Pad Only: Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder. Off: Deactivates all touch operations.
Off: Deactivates all touch operations.

Demo Mode

The Demo Mode function displays the movies recorded on the memory card automatically (demonstration) when the Sony A9 has not been used for a certain time. Normally select Off.

Touch Panel/pad

Selects whether to activate touch panel operation when shooting with the monitor, or touch pad operation when shooting with the viewfinder.

Touch Panel+Pad: Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
Touch Panel Only: Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.
Touch Pad Only: Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.

Touch Pad Settings

Sets the area to be used for touchpad operations when shooting with the viewfinder. You can prevent unintentional operations caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.

Whole Screen: Uses the entire monitor as the touchpad.
Right 1/2 Area: Uses only the right half of the monitor as the touchpad.
Right 1/4 Area: Uses only the right quarter of the monitor as the touchpad.

MENU – Setup – page 3 (Setup Menu page 3)

Demo Mode

The Demo Mode function displays the movies recorded on the memory card automatically (demonstration) when the Sony A6400 has not been operated for a certain time. Normally select Off.

TC/UB settings

Timecode (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies. This is used for synchronization of video in post production. The time code can be set between the following range: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29.

TC/UB Disp. Setting: Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.
TC Preset: Sets the time code.
UB Preset: Sets the user bit.
TC Format: Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.)
TC Run: Sets the count up format for the time code.
TC Make: Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
UB Time Rec: Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.

Remote CTRL

HDMI Settings

When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.

Auto: The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.
2160p/1080p: Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.
1080p: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
1080i: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).

4K Output Sel.

Outputs still image in 4K resolution to an HDMI-connected TV that supports 4K.

Memory Card HDMI: Simultaneously outputs to the external recording/playback device and records on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(30p): Outputs a 4K movie in 30p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the Sony A9 memory card.
HDMI Only(24p): Outputs a 4K movie in 24p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(25p)* : Outputs a 4K movie in 25p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.

USB connection

Selects what will happen when you connect your Sony A9 to your PC or MAC.

Auto: Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be connected. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
Mass Storage: Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.
MTP: Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
PC Remote: Uses “Remote Camera Control” to control this product from the computer, including such functions as shooting and storing images on the computer

MENU – Setup – page 4 (Setup Menu page 4)

USB LUN Setting

Improves compatibility with external devices by limiting the functions of the USB connection.

Older devices that are not able to connect to the Sony A9 might work when set to single. Otherwise, use Multi.

USB Power Supply

You can extend battery life by providing a power supply over USB.

PC Remote settings

Sets whether to save still images stored in both the Sony A9 and the computer during PC Remote shooting. This setting is useful when you want to check recorded images on the Sony A9 without leaving the camera.

Language

Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings, and messages.

Date/Time Setup

The Clock Set screen is displayed automatically when you turn on your A9 for the first time.

Area Setting

Sets where in the world where you are using your Sony A9.

MENU – Setup – page 5 (Setup Menu page 5)

IPTC

You can write IPTC information when recording still images. Create and edit IPTC information using the dedicated software and write the information to a memory card beforehand.

IPTC information consists of digital image metadata attributes, as standardized by the International Press Telecommunications Council.

Copyright info

Writes copyright information onto the still images like your name or business.

Write Serial Number

Writes the camera’s serial number to the Exif data when shooting still images.

Format

When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format the card using the Sony A9 for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the memory card, and is unrecoverable.

File Number

Name your files according to some shots or reset it to start from 1.

Set File Name

Use the standard file naming system or a customizable one.

MENU – Setup – page 6 (Setup Menu page 6)

Rec. Media Settings

Selects the memory card slot on which to record. Slot 1 is the default setting. If you do not intend to change the settings and will only use one memory card, use the slot 1. To record the same image to two memory cards at the same time or to sort recorded images onto two memory card slots by the image type (still image/movie), use Recording Mode.

Select REC folder

Selects where (to what folder) the camera will store newly captured images.

New Folder

Make a new folder for quickly organizing events and locations.

Folder name

Choose whether to have folder names in standard form (DSC) or create a new one by date. Setting folders by date will make organizing your images easier.

Recover Image DB

If you have a storage card error, you can try to rebuild the database to retrieve lost images possibly.

Display media info

You can check how much space is left on your SD card (have pictures in your desired quality and how many minutes of video)

MENU – Setup – page 7 (Setup Menu page 7)

Version

Check what version of the operating system your Sony A9 and the lens is running. Sony sporadically releases updates with new features, so it might be worth checking if any new firmware versions are available.

Setting Reset

Fully resets the Sony A9 to factory settings.

MENU – My menu setting

Add Item

You’ll see a list of all Menu options here and you can simply select your desired options and add them to your custom built menu page.

Sort Item

This setting basically changes the order of your ‘My Menu’ selected function.

Delete Item

Deletes functions in your ‘My Menu’.

Delete Page

Deletes entire pages of your ‘My Menu’ selection.

Delete All

Deletes all previously added functions of your ‘My Menu’.

Dealing with specific focussing scenarios

When shooting typical moving subjects using the α9 (ILCE-9), the following settings are recommended by default.

Recommended default settings
Focus Mode	AF-C	Focus mode dial
Focus Area *	Flexible Spot: M	[] 4 / 13 (AF1)
Priority Set in AF-C	Balanced Emphasis	[] 4 / 13 (AF1)
AF Track Sens *	3 (Standard)	[] 5 / 13 (AF2)
Swt. V/H AF Area	AF Point Only	[] 4 / 13 (AF1)

* Recommended settings differ depending on the subject.

Focus Mode: AF-C

When set to the AF-C (Continuous AF) mode, the Sony A9 continues to focus while the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down.

Focus Area: Flexible Spot M

When set to the Flexible Spot , the camera allows you to move the focusing frame to the desired point on the screen and focus on a small subject in a narrow area. The size of the focusing frame can be selected. The medium size M is recommended for general use.
Other settings
 Wide: Automatically focuses on a subject across the entire screen.
 Zone: After the user selects a focus zone on the monitor, the Sony A9 will automatically select the focus points.
 Center: Focuses automatically on the subject in the center of the image.
 Expand Flexible Spot: If the Sony A9 cannot focus on a single selected point, it flexibly uses focus points around the spot as a secondary priority area for focusing.

Priority Set in AF-C: Balanced Emphasis

Regarding whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus, shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.

AF Track Sens: 3 (Standard)

When set to 5 (Responsive), the camera focuses responsively on subjects at different distances.

When set to 1 (Locked on), the Sony A9 keeps the focus on a specific subject even when other objects pass in front of the subject.

Standard 3 is recommended for general use.

Difference between [1 (Locked on)] when using AF tracking sensitivity and Lock-on AF.

[1 (Locked on)] is one of the settings in AF Track Sens (AF tracking sensitivity). In this setting, the camera keeps the focus on a specific subject when other objects pass in front of the subject.

On the other hand, the [Lock-on AF] and [Center Lock-on AF] functions on this camera allow the camera to shift the focusing frame in accordance with the subject’s movement.

Although these names are similar, their functions are different. Please be sure to distinguish between them

Swt. V/H AF Area: AF Point only

Switches the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera (horizontal/vertical). The [Focus Area] is fixed.
Other settings
Off: Does not switch the [Focus Area] or the position of the focusing frame based on the orientation of the Sony A9 (horizontal/vertical).
AF Point AF Area: Switches both the [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame based on the orientation of the camera (horizontal/vertical).

Recommended autofocus settings chart for each subject

Ball games
Athletics / Track and field
Winter sports
Motor sports
Other sports
Non-sport categories

Ball games
Subject	Focus Mode	Focus Area		Priority Set in AF-C	AF Track Sens	Swt. V/H AF Area
Subject	Focus Mode	1st recommendation	2nd recommendation	Priority Set in AF-C	AF Track Sens	Swt. V/H AF Area
Soccer, Football, Futsal	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	4	AF Point Only
Basketball	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Rugby	AF-C	Expand Flexible Spot	Flexible Spot M	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
American football	AF-C	Expand Flexible Spot	Flexible Spot M	Balanced Emphasis	2	AF Point Only
Handball	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	4	AF Point Only
Tennis	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Volleyball	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only

Athletics / Track and field
Subject	Focus Mode	Focus Area		Priority Set in AF-C	AF Track Sens	Swt. V/H AF Area
Subject	Focus Mode	1st recommendation	2nd recommendation	Priority Set in AF-C	AF Track Sens	Swt. V/H AF Area
Sprints (100 m~), Hurdles	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Javelin, Shot put	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Long jump, Triple jump	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
High jump, Pole vault	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Marathon	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only

Winter sports
Subject	Focus Mode	Focus Area		Priority Set in AF-C	AF Track Sens	Swt. V/H AF Area
Subject	Focus Mode	1st recommendation	2nd recommendation	Priority Set in AF-C	AF Track Sens	Swt. V/H AF Area
Alpine skiing (near a gate, jump)	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Mogul	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Snowboarding (Halfpipe, Slalom)	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Ski jumping (front, side)	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Biathlon	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Short-track speed skating	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Speed skating	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Zone	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Figure skating (Singles, Pairs)	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Zone	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Ice hockey	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	4	AF Point Only
Curling	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	2	AF Point Only
Bobsleigh	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only

Motor sports
Subject	Focus Mode	Focus Area		Priority Set in AF-C	AF Track Sens	Swt. V/H AF Area
Subject	Focus Mode	1st recommendation	2nd recommendation	Priority Set in AF-C	AF Track Sens	Swt. V/H AF Area
Car racing, Karting	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Motorcycling (on-road)	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Motocross	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Wide	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only

Other sports
Subject	Focus Mode	Focus Area		Priority Set in AF-C	AF Track Sens	Swt. V/H AF Area
Subject	Focus Mode	1st recommendation	2nd recommendation	Priority Set in AF-C	AF Track Sens	Swt. V/H AF Area
Swimming	AF-C	Expand Flexible Spot	Flexible Spot M	Balanced Emphasis	1 (Locked on) to 2	AF Point Only
Cycle race	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Archery	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Canoeing	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	2	AF Point Only
Judo, Kendo	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Horseracing	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Equestrian events	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	2	AF Point Only
Speedboat racing	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Sepak takraw	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only

Non-sport categories
Subject	Focus Mode	Focus Area		Priority Set in AF-C	AF Track Sens	Swt. V/H AF Area
Subject	Focus Mode	1st recommendation	2nd recommendation	Priority Set in AF-C	AF Track Sens	Swt. V/H AF Area
Trains and other railed vehicles	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Airplanes, Air shows	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Zone	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Wild birds	AF-C	Flexible Spot M	Expand Flexible Spot	Balanced Emphasis	3 (Standard)	AF Point Only
Wild animals	AF-C	Expand Flexible Spot	Flexible Spot M	Balanced Emphasis	2	AF Point Only

Frequently asked questions

I’ll be answering some frequently asked questions on the A9 here. I’ll be adding some over time depending on questions I receive.

What is AF registration?

AF Registration allows you to basically save a certain focus parameter and assign that to a button (only one focus point can be saved). For example, I usually shoot on flexible spot, but with AF Reg, I currently have it assigned to wide auto focus. So I can basically go from whatever flexible spot I’m on to wide with one click and no menu.

Does the A9 have BULB mode?

Yes of course, just not with the electronic shutter. To access Bulb Mode, press C3 and select mechanical shutter. Bulb Mode won’t work on anything but single shooting mode and self-timer, so make sure you’re not set to continuous medium, low or high. Go to manual mode M with the shooting mode selector dial on the left, and scroll with the scroll wheel all the way to the left until you hit bulb.

Star eater issue solution

All Sony A7 and A9 series cameras have an issue with long exposures that specifically impacts those of us who enjoy starscape photography.

As a result, the smallest stars in the sky might turn out less bright or even disappear because your Sony A9 believes it to be noise.

The following technique won’t work for bulb exposure (longer than 30 seconds), but will get you better results between 30 seconds and 4 seconds (where the noise reduction automatically kicks in. It’s a bit counter intuitive, but setting your Sony A9 to continuous high or low drive mode will ensure that this excessive noise reduction won’t be triggered. The only downside is that , since you’re in continuous drive mode, the camera will only save your images as a 12 bit file (instead of 14 bit when in single). This may impact the dynamic range of your image, and add some noise off course.

Sony A9 Flash delay problems

A lot of photographers have complained about longer than normal flash delays with the Sony A9. There are a few settings you can try that will reduce this delay.

Switch to Af-s mode, hold down the focus button and you can fire off shots as fast as you can press the button.
Electronic first shutter must be set to ON. (with the danger of banding though)
Red-eye reduction must be turned OFF.
If the subject is not moving, focus lock seems to slightly reduce the delay as well.
Use native lenses, no problems have been reported with FE lenses.

Using Sony A9 AF Area registration to switch from spot to 9 point group focus (like Nikon)

Register a focus area and switch between 2 focus areas using a custom button:

Go to the AF3 Menu and enable ‘AF Area Regist.”. This allows you to register a focus area by long press,g the Fn button in the shooting screen. The registered focus area can be recalled with the custom key.

3. Now long press the FN key until you see on the screen that the camera has ‘registered the focus area’.

5. Now if you press your preferred custom button, you’ll immediately go to ‘Lock On: AF Wide’. Press this button again and you go back to ‘expand flexible spot.

This method allows us to quickly cycle between any two AF areas using the registered focus area and assigning a custom button the toggle between the two!

April 20, 2017

Category: tips and tricks

Fujifilm X-H1 manual with settings, tips and trips

Fujifilm Fujifilm X-H1 manual with settings, tips and trips

Introduction

IBIS

Sensor and processor

Video

Image Quality

Image Quality Setting page 1 of 3 (I.Q. icon)

Image Size

3 : 2 aspect ratio

16 : 9 aspect ratio

1 : 1 aspect ratio

Image Quality

RAW recording

Film Simulation

Grain Effect

Dynamic Range

D Range Priority

White Balance

Fine-Tuning White Balance

Custom White Balance

Color Temperature

Setting page 2 of 3 (I.Q. icon)

Highlight Tone

Shadow Tone

Color

Sharpness

Noise Reduction

Long Exposure NR

Lens Modulation Optimize

Color Space

Pixel Mapping

Select Custom Setting

Edit/Save Custom Setting

Autofocus and Manual Focus Settings

AF/MF Setting page 1 of 3

Focus Area

AF Mode

AF-C Custom Settings

Focus Tracking Options

Store AF Mode by Orientation

AF Point Display

Number of AF Points

Pre-AF

AF Illuminator

AF/MF Setting page 2 of 3

Face/Eye Detection Setting

AF+MF

AF+MF Focus Zoom

MF Assist

Focus Check

Interlock Spot AE &c Focus Area

Instant AF Setting

Depth-Of-Field Scale

Release/Focus Priority

AF/MF Setting page 3 of 3

Touch Screen Mode

Shooting Touch Controls

Playback Touch Controls

Shooting Settings

Shooting Setting Page 1 of 2

Drive Setting

BKT SETTING

Self-Timer

Interval Timer Shooting

Shutter Type

Flicker Reduction

ISO Auto Setting

IS Mode

Mount Adapter Setting

Choosing a Focal Length

Distortion Correction

Color Shading Correction

Shooting Setting Page 2 of 2

Multi Exposure

Wireless Communication

Flash Settings

Flash Setting Page 1 of 1

Flash Function Setting

3 : 2 aspect ratio

16 : 9 aspect ratio

1 : 1 aspect ratio